Ge Fanuc 90 70 PLC Manual

Looking for more information?
Visit us on the web at http://www.artisan-scientific.com for more information:

• Price Quotations • Drivers· Technical Specifications. Manuals and Documentation
Artisan Scientific is You~ Source for: Quality New and Certified-Used/Pre:-awned ECJuiflment
• Tens of Thousands of In-Stock Items • Fast Shipping and DelIve1y • Equipment Demos
• Hundreds of Manufacturers Supported • Leasing / Monthly Rentals • Consignment
Service Center Repairs InstraView Remote Inspection

Experienced Engineers and Technicians on staff in our Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with our
State-of-the-art Full-Service In-House Service Center Facility Innovative InstraView-website at http://www.instraview.com
We bUy used equipment! We also offer credit for Buy-Backs and Trade-Ins
Sell your excess. underutilized. and idle used equipment. Contact one of our Customer Service Representatives todayl
Talk to a live person: 88EM38-S0URCE fB88-887-68721 I Contact us by email: sales@artisan-scientific.com I Visit our website: http://www.artisan-scientific.com
Î
GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products
t
Series 90 -70
Programmable Controller
Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F November 1999

GFL–002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that

hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that
could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be
associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or
damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is

not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to
understanding and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three

CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO VersaMax
CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Logicmaster Series Five VersaPro
CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VuMaster
Field Control Motion Mate Series One Workmaster
GEnet PowerTRAC Series Six
Copyright 1991 - 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Preface
t
The Series 90 -70 Programmable Logic Controller and its associated modules have been
tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15, Subpart J. The
FCC requires the following note to be published.
NOTE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to ra-
dio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a
Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when op-
erated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense will
be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
The Canadian Department of Communications requires the following note to be published.
NOTE
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emis-
sions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
The following statements are required to appear for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D,

DIV. 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY

IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT

UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS.
4. ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES SHOULD BE POPULATED WITH A

BLANK SLOT INTERRUPT JUMPER, IC697ACC722, OR EQUIVALENT WHEN
THERE ARE MODULES INSTALLED TO ITS RIGHT WHICH MAY INTERRUPT
THE CPU.
GFK-0600F Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 iii
Preface
How to Find a Data Sheet in This Manual
To find the location of a data sheet in this manual:
(A). If you know the product name look for it in the

Table of Contents. Its page number (at bottom of page)
is listed (for example, page 5-1 is the first page of the
VME Integrator Rack data sheet).
(B). Use the Index to search for a data sheet by either

product category and name, product catalog number
(IC.........), or by data sheet number (GFK-....).
For more information on finding data sheets in this

manual, go to the next page.
iv Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 GFK-0600F
Preface
This manual includes all currently available hardware data sheets for the Series 90-70
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) under a single GE Fanuc publication number:
GFK-0600F. On a module-by-module, and a unit-by-unit basis, this manual provides a
complete hardware description of the Series 90-70 PLC product line.
➪ How Data Sheets are Arranged in this Manual

The data sheets in this manual are arranged in categories by type. They can easily be found
by looking in the Table of Contents or the Index.
➪ Look in the Table of Contents

You can find a data sheet by looking in the Table of Contents under the heading (General
Information, PLC CPUs, etc.) for the product type; each data sheet is then listed by product
name (type of module), catalog number (IC. . .), and number (GFK) of the data sheet.
Following is an example Table of Contents entry.
Product Type ➪ PLC CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Specific Data Sheet ➪ 12 MHz, 32 Kbyte, Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
data sheet GFK-0159J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
The page numbers for the data sheets, as listed in the Table of Contents, are sequential in
this manual and are located at the bottom of each data sheet page. Note that each data
sheet is numbered according to its location in the manual. The first data sheet starts with
1-1, the 12th data sheet starts with 12-1, etc.). The page numbers for individual data sheets
remain intact at the top of the data sheet (that is, 1 through 4, 1 through 8, etc.).
➪ Look in the Index

You can also find a particular data sheet in the index. The index lists data sheets by product
type and name, catalog number (IC697XXXYYY), data sheet number (GFK-XXXX), and the
page number in this manual. Following are example index entries for the CPU listed above
CPUs
12 MHz 32 Kbyte IC697CPU731, 12-1
GFK-0159, CPU 12 MHz 32 Kbyte, 12-1
IC697CPU731, CPU 12 MHz 32 Kbyte, 12-1
Content of Data Sheets

A data sheet is a user-oriented document, packaged with each Series 90-70 PLC module,
which contains information specific to the module it accompanies. The format of the
data sheet is standardized and includes the following sections (if applicable):
h Features
h Functions
h General Description
h Installation
h Field Wiring
h Calibration and Data Format
h Specifications
h Ordering Information
GFK-0600F Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 v
Preface
A data sheet only provides information for hardware installation of the module in the Series
90-70 system. Operation and programming of the modules is discussed in other Series 90-70
documents (see Related Publications). The audience for these documents is assumed to
include electricians, technicians, engineers and those who are familiar with digital electronics
and industrial control equipment.
Revisions to This Document

This version of the Series 90-70 Data Sheet manual has been revised to include all current
versions of applicable Series 90-70 data sheets. It contains new data sheets and revisions that
have been made to data sheets that were in the previous version of this manual
(GEK-0600E). A data sheet (GFK-0867) - GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General
Specifications, which is at the front of the manual, lists and describes the standards to which
GE Fanuc products comply.
For those installations having more stringent installation requirements where compliance to
standards or directives from the Federal Communications Commission, the Canadian
Department of Communications, or the European Union is necessary - refer to GFK-1179,
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards.
References have been made on applicable data sheets to state that programming and/or
configuration can be done either by MS-DOSr (Logicmaster 90-70), or Windowsr
(Control) software products. A note has been added, where applicable, after module
specifications regarding availability of Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature
Testing option.
New and Revised Data Sheets

The following data sheets are new or have been revised since the previous version of
this manual was printed.
Data Sheet Catalog Page
Number Title of Data Sheet Number Number
GFT-102H ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System) . . . . . . . . . . Allproducts . . . . . . . . . 1-1

GFK-0867F GE Fanuc ProductAgencyApprovals,Standards,
GeneralSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Productslisted . . . . . . . 2-1
GFK-0079K Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount . . . . . . . . . . IC697CHS750/790/7914-1
.
GFK-0684G VME Integrator Racks, 17-Slot Front and
Rear Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CHS782/783. . . . 5-1
GFK-0637G Rack FanAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697ACC721/724/744
. 6-1
GFK-1120D 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM925 . . . . . . . 18-1
GFK-1429F 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbyte
(Slow) Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX772 . . . . . . . . 19-1
GFK-1431F 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX782 . . . . . . . . 20-1
GFK-1433E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte
(Medium) Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX928 . . . . . . . . 21-1
GFK-1435E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Fast Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX935 . . . . . . . . 22-1
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.
vi Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 GFK-0600F
GFK-1437C 96 MHz, 32-Bit, FP, 512 Kbyte Memory CPU . . . . . . . IC697CGR772 . . . . . . . 23-1
for CPU redundancy Applications
GFK-1439C 96 MHz, 32-Bit, FP, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory CPU . . . . . IC697CGR935 . . . . . . . 24-1
for CPU redundancy Applications
GFK-1215B 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
for Triple Modular Redundancy Systems . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM790 . . . . . . . 27-1
GFK-1167C 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM790 . . . . . . . 31-1
GFK-1002E FIP Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697BEM742/744. . . . 62-1
GFK-1309E Ethernet Interface (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CMM742 . . . . . . 71-1
GFK-0834D RedundancyCommunicationsModule . . . . . . . . . . . IC697RCM711 . . . . . . . 72-1
GFK-1663E RS-485 Port Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC690ACC903 . . . . . . . 78-1
Removed Data Sheets

The following data sheets which were in the previous version of this manual were
removed due to the following: (1) product discontinued, (2) product has been replaced
by a new version of the product, (3) a new data sheet created, or (4) information in the
data sheet has been added to the applicable user’s manual. Note that even though a
data sheet is no longer in this manual, it may still be ordered. Consult your local GE
Fanuc PLC distributor or GE Fanuc sales office for details.
Data Sheet Catalog
Number Title of Data Sheet Number
GFK-0802C 32 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM914

replaced by IC697CPM915, described in GFK-1119
GFK-0857B 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM924
replaced by IC697CPM925, described in GFK-1120
GFK-0550E RS-422/RS-485toRS-432Converter(IC690ACC900) . . . . . . IC690ACC900
GFK-0600F Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 vii
Preface
Related Publications:
D GFK-0255 - Series 90t Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual
D GFK-0256 - MegaBasict Programming Language ReferenceManual
D GFK-0262 - Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual
D GFK-0263 - Logicmastert 90-70 Programming Software User’s Manual
D GFK-0265 - Series 90t-70 Reference Manual for Logicmastert USers
D GFK-0398 - Series 90t-70 GeniusR Bus Controller User’s Manual
D GFK-0401 - Workmaster IIR PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation
D GFK-0413 - GEnett System Manager Software User’s Manual
D GFK-0448 - User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party VME Modules
D GFK-0487 - Series 90t PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
D GFK-0499 -CIMPLICITYR 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
D GFK-0529 - Series 90t SNP Communications User’s Manual
D GFK-0579 - Series 90t-70 Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
D GFK-0582 - Series 90t PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual
D GFK-0585 - Series 90t PLC SNP Communications Driver User’s Manual
D GFK-0641 - CIMPLICITYR 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
D GFK-0644 - Series 90t-70 I/O Link Interface Module User’s Manual
D GFK-0685 - Series 90t Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User’s Manual
D GFK-0727 - Series 90t-70 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide
D GFK-0730 - Series 90t-70 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide
D GFK-0731 - Series 90t-70 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual
D GFK-0787 - GeniusR Modular RedundancyUser’s Manual
D GFK-0827 - Series 90t-70 Hot Standby CPU RedundancyUser’s Guide
D GFK-0854 - Series 90t Sequential Function Chart Programming LanguageUser’s Manual
D GFK-0870 - Host Communications Toolkit for C/C++ Applications User’s Manual
D GFK-1004 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90t-70 PLC User’s Manual
D GFK-1026 - Host Communications Drivers for MicrosoftR Windowst User’s Manual
D GFK-1029 - Logicmastert 90-70 Ethernet TCP/IP User’s Manual
D GFK-1062 - Series 90t-70 High Speed Counter User’s Manual
D GFK-1179 - Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards
D GFK-1192 - Series 90-70 System Manual for Control Software Users
D GFK-1295 - Control User‘s Manual
D GFK-1527 - Series 90-70 Enhanced Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User‘s Guide
D GFK-1541 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Guide
We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After
you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the
Reader ’s Comment Card located on the next page.
Henry A. Konat
Technical Writer
viii Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual – November 1999 GFK-0600F
Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration)
datasheet GFT-102H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
datasheet GFK-0867F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet (Part No: 44A724534-001)
datasheet GFK-0638A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
PLC Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791 (Standard Racks - Front and Rear
Mount)
datasheet GFK-0079K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount (IC697CHS782/783)
datasheet GFK-0684G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721/724/744)
datasheet GFK-0637E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724)
datasheet GFK-1047F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748)
datasheet GFK-1061D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR710/712)
datasheet GFK-1388A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC (IC697PWR711/713)
datasheet GFK-1448B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Power Supply Adapter Module (IC697PWR720)
datasheet GFK-0626D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
PLC CPUs ............................................................. 12-1

12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
datasheet GFK-0159J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU771)
datasheet GFK-0349F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU772)
datasheet GFK-0588E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU781)
datasheet GFK-0766D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
(IC697CPU782)
datasheet GFK-0767D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
(IC697CPM915)
datasheet GFK-1119B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
(IC697CPM925)
datasheet GFK-1120D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
GFK-0600F Table of Contents ix

Contents
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory

Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX772)
datasheet GFK-1429F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
datasheet GFK-1431F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
datasheet GFK-1433E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
datasheet GFK-1435E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications (IC697CGR772)
datasheet GFK-1437C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
datasheet GFK-1439C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPU788)
datasheet GFK-0806D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
datasheet GFK-0807D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
(IC697CPM790)
datasheet GFK-1215B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot Stand-
by CPU Applications (IC697CPU780)
datasheet GFK-0837C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE784)
datasheet GFK-1035C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE924)
datasheet GFK-1036B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit 1 Mbyte Memory, State
Logic (IC697CSE925)
datasheet GFK-1167C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1
Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1

CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM713/715/717/719)
datasheet GFK-0160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM731/732/733/735)
datasheet GFK-0531E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1
Coprocessor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1

Programmable Coprocessor Module (IC697PCM711)
datasheet GFK-0164G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1
x t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual–November 1999 GFK-0600F
Contents
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) (IC697ADC701)

datasheet GFK-0521E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL252)
datasheet GFK-0756D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
datasheet GFK-0757C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
datasheet GFK-0784C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1
datasheet GFK-0084J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL240)
datasheet GFK-0375E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
datasheet GFK-0718C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-1
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL241)
datasheet GFK-0376G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-1
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL652)
datasheet GFK-0378F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-1
datasheet GFK-0379F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-1
datasheet GFK-0380G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-1
datasheet GFK-0719D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-1
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL651)
datasheet GFK-0377D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-1
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic (IC697MDL671)
datasheet GFK-0880C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-1
Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1

120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL350)
datasheet GFK-0081H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module (IC697MDL340)
datasheet GFK-0082H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module (IC697MDL341)
datasheet GFK-0382J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-1
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL753)
datasheet GFK-0383F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-1
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL752)
datasheet GFK-0381E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-1
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL750)
datasheet GFK-0085G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-1
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module (IC697MDL740)
datasheet GFK-0086G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Relay Output, 16 Point Module (IC697MDL940)
datasheet GFK-0384E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-1
GFK-0600F Table of Contents xi

Contents
Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1

Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels Base Converter Module -
IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module - IC697ALG440
Voltage Expander Module - IC697ALG441
datasheet GFK-0385F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module (IC697ALG320)
datasheet GFK-0388G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-1
Special Applications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-1

High Speed Counter (IC697HSC700)
datasheet GFK-1057D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-1
State Logic Processor Module (SLP) (AD697SLP711)
datasheet GFK-0734C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-1
Bus Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-1

Bus Controller Module (IC697BEM731/734)
datasheet GFK-0165G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-1
FIP Bus Controller (IC697BEM742/744)
datasheet GFK-1002E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-1
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713)
datasheet GFK-0161H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-1
Bus Receiver Module (IC697BEM711)
datasheet GFK-0162F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-1
Remote I/O Scanner (IC697BEM733/735)
datasheet GFK-0539C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-1
I/O Link Interface Module (IC697BEM721)
datasheet GFK-0645C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-1
I/O Interface Module for the IC600 PLC (IC697BEM761)
datasheet GFK-0096F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67-1
Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-1

Ethernet Controller (IC697CMM741)
datasheet GFK-0532K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-1
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) (IC697CMM742)
datasheet GFK-1309E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69-1
Serial Communications Module for State Logic CPU (IC697CMM712)
datasheet GFK-1039B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) (IC697CMM711)
datasheet GFK-0370F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71-1
Redundancy Communications Module (IC697RCM711)
datasheet GFK-0834D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72-1
Programmer Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73-1

Work Station Interface (XT, AT) (IC640WMI910/310)
datasheet GFK-0166F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73-1
Work Station Interface (PC/2) (ICIC640WMI920/320)
datasheet GFK-0281D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-1
xii t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual–November 1999 GFK-0600F
Contents
Accessories ............................................................ 75-1

Cables - I/O
datasheet GEK-83517E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-1
Cable - Power Supply Extension (IC697CBL700/713)
datasheet GFK-0153G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76-1
Cables - PCM to Programmer (IC690CBL701/702/705)
datasheet GFK-0359F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77-1
RS-485 Port Isolator (IC697ACC903)
datasheet GFK-1663A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78-1
Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901)
datasheet GFK-0682C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-1
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper (IC697ACC722)
datasheet GFK-0589A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-1
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly (IC697ACC736)
datasheet GFK-1187A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-1
VME Option Kit (IC697ACC715)
datasheet GFK-0552C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-1
GFK-0600F Table of Contents xiii

9
2
General Information
Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration
GFT-102H
April 1998
General Information
ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration)
datasheet GFT-102H
1
States, resulting in our suppliers and customers gaining
Quality System - ISO 9000 Registration registration status as well. Our supplier involvement is
GE Fanuc Automation was one of the first particularly significant since it will promote a common
manufacturing companies in the United States to be understanding of quality and continuous improvement
registered to ISO 9001 Quality Standards. ISO 9001 is throughout the process/product chain. GE Fanuc will
the most comprehensive in a series of standards in the accept ISO 9000 registration in lieu of a quality system
ISO 9000 Series which assures customers of a sound audit. We have also modified our Supplier Quality System
quality system in Marketing, Design, Manufacturing, survey to include ISO 9000 series criteria.
and Service. The ISO 9000 Series includes a guidance document ISO
ISO 9000 is a series of quality standards which define 9004, and ISO 9001, 9002, and 9003 which address
how you can establish, document and maintain an contractual requirements for quality systems and are
effective quality system which demonstrates to your used for external quality assurance assessment. ISO
customers your ability to supply them high quality 9001 is the most comprehensive standard and it is
products. The standards provide a framework for defined as: ”Quality Systems - Model for Quality
implementing a working quality management system. Assurance in Design/Development, Production,
Installation, and Servicing”. This most comprehensive
and stringent standard assesses the producer’s ability
The International Organization for Standardization to design as well as manufacture and test good product.
(ISO) has published ISO Quality System standards (ISO
9000 Series) using submissions from its member GE Fanuc completed the registration process successfully
countries. These standards have been so widely in June, 1991, being one of the first automation companies
accepted that most industrialized countries have in this country to do so. In order to assure international
replaced their national standards with ISO 9000 series. acceptance of the registration, GE Fanuc is jointly
The equivalents for ISO 9001 in the United States and registered by UL (USA) and BSI (UK). On-going
United Kingdom are ANSI/ASQC Q9000-9004 and surveillance visits by the above agencies will continue
BS5750 part 1-4, respectively. annually at a minimum to assure compliance to the
standards.
GE Fanuc has embraced the concept of ISO quality system
management and registration. Ultimately the adoption of The ISO 9001 registration numbers for GE Fanuc are:
ISO 9000 standards will spread throughout the United A2003 for UL and FM 13400 for BSI.
If there are any questions or inquiries about ISO, please call (804) 978-5000 and ask for the ISO Program Manager
or the Business Quality Engineer.
Or write to either of the above at:

GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
P.O. Box 8106
Charlottesville, VA 22906
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual 1-1
GFK-0600F
1
2 General Information
GFK-0867F GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
August 1998 Geniusr I/O Products, Series 90t-30, Series 90t-70, & VersaMax PLC Products
Field Controlt Distributed I/O & Control Products
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
datasheet GFK-0867F
The products supplied by GE Fanuc are global products which are designed and manufactured with ISO9001
quality assurance for application in industrial environments throughout the world. They should be installed and
used in conformance with product specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals, standards and
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
general specifications:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AGENCY APPROVALS OVERVIEW 1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Comments
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
QualityAssuranceinDesign/Development,
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ISO9001 Certification4 by Underwriters Laboratories and BSI
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Production, Installation, & Servicing QualityAssurance
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Safety for Industrial Control Equipment UL508 Certification by UnderwritersLaboratories
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ C-UL5 , CSA22.2, or Certificationby Underwriters Laboratories [C-UL5]
142-M1987 or Canadian Standards Association for selected
Series 90, Genius, VersaMax, and Field Control
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ modules
UL1604 Certification by UnderwritersLaboratory for
Versa Max, Field Control, and selected Series 90 and-
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
with C-UL5
Genius modules
Safety for Hazardous Locations FM3611 Certification by Factory Mutual for selected
Á
Class I, Div II, A, B, C, D Genius and Series 90-70 modules
CSA22.2, 213-M1987 Certification by Canadian Standards Association
for selected Genius modules
Safety for Hazardous Locations CENELEC Certification by DEMKO through Underwriters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Class I, Zone 2, A, B, C, D prEN50021 Laboratory for selected Series 90-30 and Field Control
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
modules, and VersaMaxproducts
UL2279 Certification by UnderwritersLaboratory for Versa-
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ IEC 79-15 Max products, and selected Series 90-30 and Field
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Control modules
European EMC and Low VoltageDirectives CE Mark Certification by Competent Body for EMC
Directive for selected modules
Á
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
.
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 STANDARDS OVERVIEW2, 4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Conditions
5
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ENVIRONMENTAL
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
Vibration IEC68-2-6 1G @57-150Hz, 0.012in p-p @10-57Hz
Á
Shock IEC68-2-27 15G, 11ms
Á
Operating Temperature3 0_C to 60_C: Series 90 [inlet], Genius [ambient], VersaMax [am-
bient]
0_C to 55_C: Field Control [ambient]
Á
Storage Temperature –40 _C to +85_C
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Humidity
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Enclosure Protection
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁIEC529 Steel cabinet per IP54:
protection from dust & splashing water
Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual 2-1

GFK-0600F
GFK-0867F GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
August 1998
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
STANDARDS OVERVIEW2, 4 Conditions
Á
EMC EMISSIONS
Á
Radiated,Conducted CISPR 11/EN 55011 “Industrial Scientific & Medical Equipment”
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
(Group 1, Class A)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CISPR 22/EN 55022 “Information Technology Equipment” (Class A)
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
47 CFR 15 referred to as FCC part 15, “Radio Devices” (Class A)
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
EMC IMMUNITY [applies to CE Marked modules]
Á
ElectrostaticDischarge EN 61000-4-2* 8KVAir, 4KV Contact
Á
RFSusceptibility EN 61000-4-3* 10Vrms /m,80Mhz to 1000Mhz, 80% AM
ENV 50140/ENV VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
50204
Fast Transient Burst EN 61000-4-4* 2KV: power supplies, 1KV:I/O,communication
Á
Surge Withstand
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ANSI/IEEE C37.90a DampedOscillatory Wave: 2.5KV:
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ power supplies, I/O [12V-240V]
IEC255-4 DampedOscillatory Wave: Class II,
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
power supplies, I/O [12V-240V]
EN 61000-4-5* Field Control and VersaMax: 2 kV cm(P/S); 1 kV cm (I/O)
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
Á
Conducted RF EN 61000-4-6* 10Vrms, 0.15 to 80Mhz, 80%AM: comm. modules w/ cables >30m
VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
ISOLATION
Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Dielectric Withstand UL508, UL840, 1.5KV for modules rated from 51v to 250v
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ IEC664
Á
POWER SUPPLY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input Dips, Variations EN 61000-4-11* During Operation: Dips to 30% and 100%, Variation for AC
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Ç 10%, Variation for DC Ç 20%
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
* EN 61000-4-x series of tests are technically equivalent to the IEC 1000-4-x and IEC 801-x series.
Note 1: Module specific approvals are listed on the GE Fanuc Electronic Bulletin Board Service [BBS].
The BBS can be reached at 804-978-5458 with the following modem settings: 14400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, no stop
bits. After accessing the BBS, select the BBS File area (PLC:AGENCY STATUS) and the file (AGENSTDS.XLS).
Note 2: Refer to module specific data sheets & installation guidelines in the following publications:
GFK-0600, Series 90-70 PLC Data Sheets Manual; GFK-0262, Series 90-70 PLC Installation Manual;
GFK-0356, Series 90-30 PLC Installation Manual; GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Specifications Manual;
GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System User’s Manual; GEK-90486-2, Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual;
GFK-0825, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - Genius Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual;
GFK-0826, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - I/O Module’s User’s Manual;
GFK-1179, InstallationRequirements for Conformance to Standards; GFK-1503, VersaMax System PLC Reference Manual;
GFK-1504, VersaMax System I/O and Option Modules; GFK-1535, VersaMax System Network Communications User’s Manual.
Note 3: Selected modules may be derated.
Note 4: Applies to GE Fanuc products designed and built in Charlottesville.
Note 5: Modules comply with applicable CSA Standards as evaluated by UL. The C-UL mark is accepted throughout Canada.
Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Series 90, VersaMax, and Field Control are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
General Information
2-2 t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Part No: 44A724534-001
GFK-0638A Programmable Control Products:
May 1993 Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet (Part No: 44A724534-001)
datasheet GFK-0638A
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Material Safety Data Sheet U.S. Department of Labor
May be used to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard. (Non–Mandator y Form)
29 CFR 1910.1200. Standard must be Form Approved
consulted for specific requirements. OMB No. 1218–0072
IDENTITY (As Used on Label and List) Note: Blank spaces are not permitted. If any item is not applicable, or no information is available, the
Lithium Battery BR–2/3A space must be marked to indicate that.
Section I
Manufacturer ’s Name Emergency Telephone Number
Matsushita Micro Battery Ind. Co. Ltd. Not Applicable
Address (Number, Street, City, State, and ZIP Code) Telephone Number for Information
One Matsushita–cho Moriguchi, Osaka 201–348–7499 T. Kuwamura
Date Prepared
570 JAPAN 7–15–87
Signature of Preparer (optional)
Telephone # 06-991-1141 (Japan)
Section II – Hazardous Ingredients/Identity Information
Other Limits
Hazardous Components (Specific Chemical Identity: Common Name(s)) OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV Recommended % (optional)
Lithium Metal = < 0.5 Grams Lithium

Weight of lithium per cell = 0.44g
(Approx. percent of total weight = 3.3 wt. %)
Section III – Physical/Chemical Characteristics

Boiling Point N/A Specific Gravity (H2O = 1)
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.) N/A Melting Point 180 _C

Vapor Density (AIR = 1) N/A Evaporation Rate (Butyl Acetate = 1) N/A
Solubility in Water N/A Operating Temperature Range: –40_ to +85_ C/ –40_ to +185_F
Appearance and Odor N/A Storage Temperature Range: –40 _ to +85_C/ –40_ to +185 _F
Section IV – Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
Flash Point (Method Used) Flammable Limits LEL UEL
N/A N/A N/A N/A
Extinguishing Media
Dry chemical or dry sand
Special Fire Fighting Procedures
N/A
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards

Fire and explosion is present only when battery is abused.
THIS IS A REPRODUCTION OF THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PROVIDED BY THE BATTERY VENDOR.
t
GFK-0600F
GFK-0638A Programmable Control Products:
May 1993 Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet
Section V – Reactivity Data

Stability Unstable Conditions to Avoid
N/A
Stable
Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)

N/A
Hazardous Decomposition or Byproducts
N/A
Hazardous May Occur Conditions to Avoid
Polymenzation N/A
Will Not Occur
Section VI – Health Hazard Data

Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation? Skin? Ingestion?
Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)

N/A
Carcinogenicity: NTP? IARC Monographs? OSHA Regulated?
N/A
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure
N/A
Medical Conditions
Generally Aggravated by Exposure N/A
Emergency and First Aid Procedure
Eyes/Skin: Wash out the eyes/skin with water promptly. Inhalation: Rest, expose person to fresh air, use oxygen
if available. Ingestion: Not toxic per tests with laboratory animals (rats). Note to Physician: Not toxic to the
body, however it is best to wash out the solution with water promptly in an emergency.
Section VII – Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
Steps to Be Taken in Case Material is Released or Spilled
If the battery is accidently broken and organic electrolyte (gama–butyrolactone and LiBF4 as a solute) leaks out, wipe
it up with a cloth, and dispose of it in a plastic bag and put into a steel can. No outgasses during normal operation
or at normal temperature because we use: Solvent: gama–butyrolactone, 204_C boiling point, not toxic.
Solute: LiBF4, neutral acid, not toxic.
Waste Disposal Method
It is recommended to discharge the battery to the end, to use up the metal lithium inside the battery, and to
bury the discharged battery in soil.
Precautions to Be Taken in Handling and Storing
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazard: In the abnormal case, example: Charge to higher than 5 volts at high
amperage, the top may pop up.
Section VIII – Control Measures
Respiratory Protection (Specify Type)
N/A
Ventilation Local Exhaust Special
N/A N/A
Mechanical (General) Other
N/A N/A
Protective Gloves Eye Protection
N/A N/A
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment
N/A
Work/Hygienic Practices
N/A
THIS IS A REPRODUCTION OF THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PROVIDED BY THE BATTERY VENDOR.
3-2 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC Racks
4
Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount
GFK-0079K Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
November 1999 Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
PLC Racks
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791 (Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount)
datasheet GFK-0079K
Features CPU and I/O configurations. Each rack has provision

for one power supply at the leftmost module position;
H Accepts all IC697 PLC module types and either nine additional slot locations (nine-slot
rack) or five additional slot locations (five-slot rack).
H Rear mount racks mount in a 10I (254 mm) deep
enclosure (fans normally not required) Overall rack dimensions are 11.15IH x 19IW x 7.5ID
(283mm x 483mm x 190mm) for the Nine-Slot Rack
H Front mount rack mounts in a standard 19I (480
and 11.15IH x 13IW x 7.5ID (283mm x 320mm x
190mm) for the Five-Slot Rack. Slots are 1.6I wide
mm) rack (fans normally not required)
H Accepts plug-in AC or DC IC697 power supply except the power supply slot which is 2.4I wide.
H Provision for two rack operation from single pow- Two racks can be interconnected to share a single
er supply power supply for applications having extendedI/O
NOTE: For Power Supply compatibility see page 5. requirements. A Power Supply Extension Cable kit
(IC697CBL700) is available for such applications.
Functions Each rack provides slot sensing for rack-type I/O mod-
ules designed for the IC697 PLC. No jumpers or DIP
The Standard Nine-Slot Racks and the Five-Slot Rack switches on the I/O modules are required for module
for the IC697 programmable controller are used for all addressing.
a44732
ÎÎ ÎÎ
01
9
ÎÎ
8
4 SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT SLOT

2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC Racks
Rack Outline Drawings
a42139
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS

WITH OPTIONAL VME J2
BACKPLANE KIT
* * 6.00 19.00 12.60 * * * 6.00
1.00 (483) (320)
(152.4) (152.4)
(25.4) 9.14 .45 18.11 11.71
(11) (460) (297)
(232) 17.04 10.64
7.25 * *
Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î Î
(433) (264)
(184)
REMOVABLE
.75
ÏÏ ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
I/O
(19)
TERMINAL
ÏÏ ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
BLOCK
POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11.50
CONNECTOR SUPPLY (292)
FOR GROUND GROUND
POWER 6.75 STUD STUD
(172) 11.15
SUPPLY (283)
ÏÏ ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
.25 DIA.
(TYPICAL)
ÎÎÏÏ ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
SPACER
(QTY.4)
ÎÎÏÏÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ

2.24
(57)
SIDE VIEW HINGED

DOOR FRONT VIEW
CABLE
I/O TERMINAL ENTRANCE * ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
RESTRAINING FROM AT EACH END OF THE RACK. * * * 6.00
STRAP * * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL (152.4)
BOTTOM
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
= DIMENSIONS FOR 5 SLOT RACK * * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE ).
Figure 1. Outline Drawing for Standard Rear (Panel) Mount Rack

a45171
WITH OPTIONAL VME J2 DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS

BACKPLANE KIT
1.00 * * 6.00 19.00 12.60
(152.4) * * * 6.00
(25.4) (483) (320)
9.14 .45 18.34 11.94 (152.4)
(232) (11) (466) (303)
7.25 17.04 10.64
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
* *
(184) (433) (270)
REMOVABLE
ÏÏ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I/O
1.48
TERMINAL
(38)
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BLOCK
11.50 2.25
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
CONNECTOR (292) (57) GND GND
7.50
FOR STUD STUD
(191)
ÏÏ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÎÎ
POWER 11.15
3.00
SUPPLY (283)
(76)
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ .265 x .437
ÎÎÏÏ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
SPACER 2.25 (TYPICAL)
(QTY.4) (57)
ÎÎÏÏÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
1.48
(38)
SIDE VIEW HINGED
.33 (8.38) FRONT VIEW
DOOR
CABLE * ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
I/O TERMINAL ENTRANCE AT EACH END OF THE RACK. * * * 6.00
RESTRAINING FROM * * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL
STRAP (152.4)
BOTTOM CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
* * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
= DIMENSIONS FOR 5 SLOT RACK
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE).
Figure 2. Outline Drawing for Standard Front (Rack) Mount Rack
4-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 3
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750 GFK-0079K

Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790 November 1999
Rack Mounting Note
The rack must be mounted in the orientation as The power supply slot is unique - only the
shown in Figures 1 and 2. Sufficient space must be power supply can be installed in the left-
left around the rack as shown to allow air flow for most rack position.
module cooling. The mounting requirements (either
front or rear mount) must be determined according to Power Supply Extension Cable
the application and the proper rack ordered. Mount-
ing flanges are an integral part of rack side panels and For many applications, one power supply can provide
are installed at the factory. the power requirements of two racks. Such dual-rack
operation from a single power supply can be imple-
A Rack Fan Assembly is available for mounting on the mented if only 5 volt power of 5.2 amperes or less is
Nine-Slot Racks when required for installations where required in the second rack.
heat buildup could be a problem. The Rack Fan Assem-
bly is available in three versions: A 3-foot (1 meter) Power Supply Extension Cable is
available (see the Ordering Information on the last
H IC697ACC721 for 120 VAC power source page of this data sheet) which provides the necessary
H IC697ACC724 for 240 VAC power source interconnection. In addition to +5 volt power, the
extension cable includes power sequencing signals
H IC697ACC744 for 24 VDC power source necessary for proper system operation.
Refer to GFK-0637C, or later for detailed information The Power Supply Extension cable attaches to a 9-pin
about the Rack Fan Assembly. D type connector located on the backplane. Access to
the connector is via a hole in the left side of the rack as
I/O Connector shown in the outline drawing. Adequate clearance
(approximately 6 inches 152.4mm) ) must be provided
These racks accommodate rack-type IC697 high-den- on the left side of the rack for access to the connector.
sity I/O modules, which use a detachable field wiring
terminal board. Each I/O module will accept up to The Power Supply Extension cable must be secured
forty AWG #14 (2.10mm2) wires. The wire bundle is before power is applied. It must not be disconnected
routed out the bottom of the terminal board cavity during system operation.
where a cleat is provided for a tie wrap to secure the
bundle to the terminal board housing. Slot Addressing
The IC697 PLC system allows user configuration of
Mechanical Keying I/O point references for modules in a rack without the
IC697 I/O modules are mechanically interlocked by need for board address DIP switches or jumpers. The
means of a key to prevent inadvertent interchange of address structure is described in the applicable Pro-
one module type for another (for example, AC type grammable Controller Installation Manual. Configuration
for DC type). A key unique to each module type is is done with the MS-DOSr or Windowsr program-
included with the module. ming software configurator function. For more in-
formation on configuration, see the applicable Pro-
When the module is inserted into the rack, the key gramming Software User’s Manual.
automatically latches onto the center rail of the rack,
where it remains when the module is extracted. Only
the correct module type can then be inserted into that Rack Number
rack slot.
Multiple racks in a system must be assigned a rack
If it is necessary to change the module location in the number from 0 to 7; the CPU rack is always Rack 0.
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail The PLC determines the number of each rack in the
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- system from four binary-encoded jumpers on the
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. rack’s backplane. These jumpers are located on the
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the backplane directly behind the power supply, which
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. must be removed to gain access to the jumpers.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC Racks
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
To set the rack number, move the jumpers corre- System Noise Immunity
sponding to 1, 2, 4, and 8 bits to either the 0 or 1 posi-
tion. The sum of the digits in the 1 position equals the Three easy steps must be taken to properly ground
desired rack number. For example, rack number 2 the IC697 programmable controller system to reduce
would have the 1, 4 and 8 bit jumpers in the 0 position the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
and the 2 bit jumper in the 1 position as shown below.
1. Make sure that the power supply mounting
screws, especially the bottom two, are properly
secured.
a42823
2. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of
the rack using AWG #12 (3.33 mm2) wire. Use of a
ring terminal and star washer is recommended.
ÎÎ 01
ÎÎ
3. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
8
to a good earth ground.
ÎÎ 4
2
RACK NUMBER =2
Module Retention
1 IC697 I/O modules have molded latches that automat-
ically snap onto the upper and lower rails of the rack
when the module is fully inserted. Optionally, M2.5x8
screws may be used to secure the modules to the rack
for high vibration applications.
Figure 3. Rack Number Jumpers
Warning
Safety Ground
The ground lug on either side of the rack must be con- Do not remove (or insert) modules when
nected to earth ground with not less than an AWG either the programmable controller power
#12 (3.33mm2) wire. The ground lugs are #8-32. supply or any externally-connected power
sources are on. Hazardous voltages may
exist. Personal injury, damage to the mod-
Warning ule or improper operation of the device or
process being controlled may result.
If the ground lug is not connected to earth To remove an IC697 module, first remove the field
ground, the rack is not grounded. The half of the terminal board (if it is an I/O module), then
rack must be grounded to minimize elec- grasp the top and bottom of the module to depress
trical shock hazard which may result in the latch releases while pulling the module out. For
severe personal injury. more detailed information on removing I/O terminal
boards, refer to the applicable Programmable Controller
Shield Ground User’s manual or individual data sheets for I/O mod-
ules.
The bottom rail of the rack is used for module shield
If M2.5x8 screws have been used to secure modules to
grounding. Some IC697 I/O modules have a ground
the rack, remove the screws before removing the
clip that contacts the conductive bottom rail when the
modules.
module is fully inserted. Shield connections in the
user connectors are routed to this ground clip via con- A blank faceplate is available to cover unused slots in
ductors on the module. the rack. See the Ordering Information on page 5.
4-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 5
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750 GFK-0079K

Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790 November 1999
Table 1. Specifications for Standard Racks, IC697CHS750/790/791 [
Number of Slots 5 or 9, plus power supply slot
Maximum 5 Volt Current 20 amps (100 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
11 amps (55 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
18 amps (90 watt 24 VDC power supply)
Current Required from I/O Bus 0.5 amps
I/O References User configurable without the use of module jumpers or DIP switches.
Rack Identification Four jumpers behind rack power supply
Dimensions Height Width Depth
Nine Slot Rack 11.15” 19.00” 7.5”
283mm 483mm 190mm
Five Slot Rack 11.15” 12.6” 7.5”
283mm 320mm 190mm
All modules for the IC697 I/O system extend 1.7” (43mm) beyond the front of the rack.
VME System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.

Table 2. Ordering Information
Description Catalog Number

Rack , Five-Slot, rear mount IC697CHS750
Rack, Nine-Slot, rear mount IC697CHS790
Rack , Nine-Slot, front mount IC697CHS791
Power Supply Cable Kit (includes cable and faceplate for vacant power supply slot) IC697CBL700
Blank Faceplate Slot Filler (quantity 6) IC697ACC720
Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC (optional) IC697ACC721
Rack FanAssembly, 240 VAC (optional) IC697ACC724
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC (optional) IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, Low Temperature Testing option, or Severe Vibration option please consult the factory for
price and availability. Racks for use in Severe Vibration environments include heavy duty side mount plates.
Power Supply Compatibility With Rack Versions

The IC697 standalonepowersupplies can only be mounted on the IC697 racks having the catalog numbers listed
below.
H IC697CHS790D (Nine-Slot, rear mount) and IC697CHS750C (Five-Slot, rear mount)
The catalog numbers for the standalone power supplies affected by this restriction are:
H IC697PWR721 (24 VDC, 90W Power Supply with Power Supply Adapter)
H IC697PWR722 (24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module)
H IC697PWR731 (125 VDC, 60W Power Supply with Power Supply Adapter)
H IC697PWR732 (125 VDC, 60W Power Supply Module)
All plug-in IC697 power supplies can be installed in any version of the IC697 racks.
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC Racks
5
IC697CHS782/783
GFK-0684G VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount (IC697CHS782/783)
datasheet GFK-0684G
Features Functions
H Accepts 3rd Party VME modules which require 0.8”
spacing. The VME Integrator Rack for the IC697 Program-
H Accepts all IC697 PLC module types. mable Logic Controller can be used for 3rd party
H Rear mount rack mounts in a 10” (254 mm) deep VME modules and all IC697 CPU and I/O configura-
enclosure. tions, except redundancy applications. This rack has a
H Front mount rack mounts in a standard 19” (483 17-slot backplane and is designed to provide easy
mm) rack. integration of 3rd party VME modules into an IC697
PLC system. Integration of 3rd Party VME modules
H Accepts plug-in AC/DC and DC IC697 power sup-
must be in accordance with guidelines which are de-
plies, or can use external supply (Power Supply
scribed in the User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party
Adaptor module required).
VME Modules.
H Provision for two rack operation from single pow-
er supply.
Backplane connectors are spaced on 0.8 inch centers
H Provision for power supply for high-current con- to accommodate 3rd party VME modules. IC697
figurations. modules each use two of these slots. Standard IC697
H Optional accessory kit available for adding J2 back- racks have slots spaced on 1.6 inch centers for IC697 mod-
plane or making ribbon cable connections to J2 ules. VME modules that require 0.8 inch spacing for
backplanes. installation in a rack may not fit in the standard IC697
H Optional fan assembly (for high-power modules). racks(IC697CHS750/790/791).
a44958
ÎÎ 01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
0V
8
4
2
1
-12V
ÎÎ ÎÎ
+5V +12V
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC Racks
November 1999
Each rack configuration will accept one power supply positions. The exact jumper configuration depends on
in the leftmost module position, and either: the requirements of each 3rd Party VME module.
1. seventeen (17) 3rd Party VME modules (with no Two racks can be interconnected to share a single power
IC697 modules installed), supply for applications having extended I/O require-
ments. A Power Supply Extension Cable kit
2. nine (9) IC697 modules, or
(IC697CBL700) is available for such applications. There
3. a combination of IC697 and 3rd Party VME modules. are also four power cube screw connections (+ 5V, +12V,
-12V, 0V) on the backplane. These connections are not
The power supply capacity may limit the number of
intended for direct connection to a 3rd Party power supply.
modules in a rack. No more than three VME modules can
be used in a rack with IC697 modules. Each rack provides slot sensing for rack-type I/O mod-
ules. No jumpers or DIP switches on the I/O modules
The flexibility of these racks to allow both 3rd party are required for addressing of these modules. Overall
VME and IC697 modules is accomplished through the rack dimensions are 11.15” H x 19” W x 7.25” D
use of jumpers on the backplane to configure slots. The (283mm x 483mm x 184mm). Slots are 0.8” wide ex-
VME Integrator rack is factory configured to accept cept the power supply slot which is 2.4” wide. The fol-
standard IC697 modules. Integration of 3rd party VME lowing figures show mounting dimensions for the rear
modules is done by moving these jumpers to different mount (Figure 1) and the front mount (Figure 2) racks.
a44989
WITH OPTIONAL VME DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS

J2 BACKPLANE KIT
19.00
1.00
(25.4)
**(152.4)
6.00
(483) ***(152.4)
6.00
9.14 .45 18.11

(232) (11) (460)
7.25 17.04
* .75 *
ÎÎ Î
(184) (433)
ÎÎ Î
(19)
CONNECTOR 6.75
FOR (172)
GROUND
POWER
3.00 STUD 11.15
SUPPLY
(76) .25 DIA. (283)
Î Î
SPACER GROUND (TYPICAL)
1.50
(QTY.4) STUD
(38)
2.24
(57)
SIDE VIEW
IC697 MODULES
.34 (8.64) FRONT VIEW
EXTEND 1.7 IN. (43MM) ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
BEYOND FRONT OF RACK,
* AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
6.00
VME MODULES MAY FIT FLUSH ** IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL ***(152.4)
WITH FRONT OF RACK. CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
*** ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE.
Figure 1. VME Integrator Rack Dimensions for Rack (Rear) Mount
Rack Mounting tailed information on the fan assembly). The mount-

ing requirements (either front or rear mount) must be
The rack must be mounted in the orientation shown determined according to the application and the
above. Sufficient space must be left around the rack proper rack ordered. Mounting flanges are an inte-
as shown in Figure 1 to allow air flow for module gral part of rack side panels and are installed at the
cooling. A Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721 or factory.
IC697ACC724) is available for installations requiring
forced air cooling (see data sheet GFK-0637 for de-
5-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 3
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount GFK-0684G

November 1999
These racks accommodate two module types. First, the terminal board cavity where a cleat is provided for
rack-type IC697 high-density I/O modules, which use a tie wrap to secure the bundle to the terminal board
a detachable field wiring terminal board. Each I/O housing. The second type of modules are VME mod-
module will accept up to forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 ) ules which may have varying methods of connecting
wires. The wire bundle is routed out the bottom of to field devices.
a45219
WITH OPTIONAL VME DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS

J2 BACKPLANE KIT
1.00 * * 6.00 19.00 * * * 6.00
(25.4) (152.4) (483)
9.14 .45 18.34 (152.4)
(232) (11) (466)
7.25 17.04
* *
(184) (433)
1.48
(38)
2.25
CONNECTOR (57)
FOR 7.50 GROUND
POWER (191) STUD
3.00 11.15
SUPPLY
(76) (283)
GROUND .265 x .437
2.25 STUD (TYPICAL)
SPACER
(QTY.4) (57)
1.48
(38)
SIDE VIEW .33 (8.38) FRONT VIEW
* ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
IC697 MODULES AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
EXTEND 1.7 IN. (43MM) * * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL * * * 6.00
BEYOND FRONT OF RACK, (152.4)
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
VME MODULES MAY FIT FLUSH
WITH FRONT OF RACK. * * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE.
Figure 2. VME Integrator Rack Dimensions for Panel (Front) Mount
Configuring the VME Integrator Rack

A series of jumper positions are located on the back- H select a rack ID for multiple rack systems (IC697
plane near each slot. These jumpers provide for flexi- feature).
bility in the types of modules to be installed, either H configure SYSFAIL signal to be enabled or disabled
VME modules in single slots (0.8 inch spacing be- (per slot).
tween centers) or IC697 modules, which require two
slots (1.6 inch spacing between centers). IC697 mod- H configure LWORD signal in slot 1 to be inactive.
ule slots are indicated by a number and an arrow: also
these slots are marked 1A through 9A. H configure IRQ1/ - IRQ4/ signals for VME slots 12PL
to 19PL.
Table 1 on page 5 shows the relationship of the slot
numbers to the jumper numbers. The functions and H configure Bus Grant signals for VME slots 12PL to
signals which are configurable by these jumpers are: 19PL.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC Racks
November 1999
The following figure is an example of the location of these jumpers on the backplane. The jumpers shown are
referenced in the text following the figure.
a44988
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
1
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
0V
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
2 Î
ÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
8
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
JP43 JP38
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î
4
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
2 JP44
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
JP57 JP56
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
1
ÎÎ
–12V
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î
SP1
JP5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
JP40
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
JP42
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
JP39 JP41 JP8
+12V 1A 1B
ÎÎ
1PL 12PL 2PL
Figure 3. Example of Jumper Locations on Backplane
5-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 5
Default Jumper Configurations

The following table describes the jumper configuration for each of the configurable VME rack signals. The default
configuration for each of these signals is shown following the table. Table 2 on the next page lists all of the jumpers and
their associated slots.
Table 1. Jumper Descriptions
Signal Name or Function See Applicable Jumpers Description
Rack ID Select – JP1 to JP4 Selects rack ID number 0 –7, see text for settings (default rack ID = 0)
SYSFAIL/ A See Table 2 for jumper Enabled or disabled for each slot (default = enabled).
numbers.
LWORD/ B JP44 Slot 1 only, set to active or inactive (default=inactive).
IRQ1/ to IRQ4/ (Interrupt C See Table 2 for jumper Select for IC697 module slots 1PL to 9PL. If VME module in slot uses
lines) numbers these signals, install jumpers (default = no jumpers).
Bus Grant 0 – 3/ and IACK/ D See Table 2 for jumper If VME modules are installed that pass daisy chain signals, jumpers must
numbers be removed in VME slots 12PL to 19P (default = jumpers).
A configuration selection consists of a jumper plug which is placed over two adjacent pins. In some cases (such as LWORD jumper), this
pin is placed over 2 of 3 in-line pins. Other selections require the jumper plugs to be present or not be present. Factory default jumper
positions are shown below with shaded areas representing a jumper that is present. The configuration example shown below is for slot
12PL. The physical arrangement for the other connectors is the same, only the jumper numbers (JPxx) are different.
Series 90™-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual, GFK-0600F 5-5

6 PLC Racks
November 1999
The following table is a list of the slots and jumpers ical order as they appear on the backplane (that is, left
associated with each slot. Multiple jumpers listed in a to right or top to bottom).
column under a signal are shown in the same numer-
Table 2. Jumper Location and Function
Bus Grant 0→3 IACK Sysfail IRQ1/ to IRQ4/

SlotNumber Jumpers Jumper Jumper Jumper
1VME-12PL(1B) JP60,59,58,62 JP57 JP61 -
2VME-13PL(2B) JP53,54,55,51 JP56 JP52 -
3VME-14PL(3B) JP66,65,64,68 JP63 JP67 -
4VME-15PL(4B) JP72,71,70,74 JP69 JP73 -
5VME-16PL(5B) JP78,77,76,80 JP75 JP79 -
6VME-17PL(6B) JP84,83,82,86 JP81 JP85 -
7VME-18PL(7B) JP90,89,88,92 JP87 JP91 -
8VME-19PL(8B) JP96,95,94,98 JP93 JP97 -
1GEF-1PL(1A) - - JP43 JP39,40,41,42

2GEF-2PL(2A) - - JP38 JP8,7,6,5
3GEF-3PL(3A) - - JP99 JP12,11,10,9
4GEF-4PL(4A) - - JP45 JP16,15,14,13
5GEF-5PL(5A) - - JP46 JP20,19,18,17
6GEF-6PL(6A) - - JP47 JP24,23,22,21
7GEF-7PL(7A) - - JP48 JP28,27,26,25
8GEF-8PL(8A) - - JP49 JP32,31,30,29
9GEF-9PL(9A) - - JP50 JP36,35,34,33
Standard Configuration Jumper Positions

There are three basic configurations of modules that Refer to Figure 2 which is an example of jumper posi-
can be accommodated by the VME Integrator rack: (1) tions and numbers per slot.
Standard (IC697 modules only), (2) IC697 controller
and IC697 modules and/or 3rd party VME modules, H JP1 through JP4 (rack ID jumpers) jumpered to the
or (3) 3rd party VME modules only. Refer to Table 2 proper position for Rack ID, where applicable.
for jumper numbers and their functions. H JP43 remains in its default position (as shipped
from factory). This allows the SYSFAIL signal to be
activated by the IC697 CPU.
(1) Standard Configuration
H JP44 remains in its default position. This jumpers
This configuration consists of an IC697 CPU or Bus the LWORD signal in slot 1 to be inactive allowing
Receiver in slot 1PL and IC697 modules in the remain- only 16-bit wide data transfers.
ing applicable slots (2PL to 9PL). H All other jumpers remain in their factory set de-
fault positions.
Note
(2) IC697/VME Configuration
Do not install IC697 modules in VME slots
12PL to 19PL. This configuration consists of an IC697 CPU or Bus Re-
ceiver module in slot 1P and a combination of IC697
modules and 3rd party VME modules in the remaining
slots. IC697 modules can be placed in slots 2PL to 9PL
5-6 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 7

November 1999
only. 3rd party VME modules can use the VME slots VME Jumper Positions
12PL to 19PL and slots 2PL to 9PL. Note that all slots
have a jumper that allows you to disable the SYFAIL/ H To configure slot 1 for a 3rd party controller, five
signal to that slot by removing the appropriate jumper. jumpers must be moved. There are four jumpers
behind the power supply (JP1 to JP4) that must be
moved to positions JP39 to JP42 and jumper JP44
Note must be moved from its default position to the
Integration of 3rd Party modules must be right.
in accordance with guidelines described in H If VME modules are installed in the IC697 module
the User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party slots (2PL to 9PL) and they use the IRQ1/ - IRQ4/
VME Modules. signals, then you must install four jumpers in the
positions that are located to the immediate left of
IC697/VME Jumper Positions the IC697 module slots in use.
H JP 1 through JP4 (rack ID jumpers) jumpered to H If the VME modules are installed in VME slots
the proper position for Rack ID. (12PL to 19PL), and the board passes the Bus
Grant and IACK signals, you must remove five
H JP43 remains in its default position (as shipped jumpers for each slot being used. Leave these jump-
from factory). This allows the SYSFAIL signal to be ers in if the board does not pass the Bus Grant and IACK
activated by the IC697 CPU (SYSFAIL required by daisy chain signals. These jumpers are the top four
IC697 I/O modules). to the immediate right of the slot being used and
H JP44 remains in its default position. This jumpers the lower (of two jumpers) to the immediate left of
the LWORD signal in slot 1 to inactive (for IC697 the slot being used.
modules) allowing only 16-bit wide data transfers.
H VME modules can be installed in either the IC697 Power Supply Extension Cable
module slots (2PL to 9PL) or in the VME slots
For many applications, one power supply is sufficient
(12PL to 19PL).
for the power requirements of two racks. This two-
H If VME modules are installed in the IC697 module rack operation from a single power supply can be
slots (2PL to 9PL) that use the signals IRQ1/ - implemented if only +5 volt power (±12 volts not
IRQ4/, then you must install up to four jumpers, supplied through Power Supply Extension cable) of
as appropriate, in positions that are located to the 5.2 amperes or less is required in the second rack.
immediate left of the IC697 slots in use.
A 3-foot Power Supply Extension cable is available
H If the VME modules are installed in VME slots (see Ordering Information on the last page of this
(12PL to 19PL), and the board passes the Bus data sheet) which provides the necessary interconnec-
Grant and IACK signals, you must remove five tion. In addition to + 5 volt power, the extension
jumpers for each slot being used. Leave these jump- cable includes power sequencing signals necessary for
ers in if the board does not pass the Bus Grant and IACK proper system operation.
daisy chain signals. These jumpers are the top four
The Power Supply Extension cable attaches to a 9-pin
to the immediate right of the slot being used and
D type connector located on the backplane. Access to
the lower (of two jumpers) to the immediate left of
the connector is through a hole in the left side of the
the slot being used.
rack as shown in the outline drawing (Figures 1 and
2). Adequate clearance (approximately 6 inches)
must be provided on the left side of the rack for ac-
(3) VME Configuration cess to the connector.
This configuration consists of a 3rd party Controller in This connector can also be used to provide power to a
slot 1PL and 3rd party VME modules in the remain- user installed 3rd party J2 backplane. An option kit
ing slots (2PL to 9PL and 12PL to 19PL). Note that (IC697ACC715) is available for installing a J2 back-
each slot has a jumper that allows the SYSFAIL/signal plane or making ribbon cable connections. Maximum
to be disabled to that slot since all VME modules may power that can be supplied to the J2 backplane is 5
not require access to that signal. VDC at 5.2 amps.
t
GFK-0600F
8 PLC Racks
November 1999
The Power Supply Extension cable must be secured These jumpers are located on the backplane directly
before power is applied. It must not be disconnected behind the power supply, which must be removed to
during system operation. gain access to the jumpers.
To set the rack number, move the jumpers corre-
Slot Addressing sponding to 1, 2, 4, and 8 bits to either the 0 or 1 posi-
tion. The sum of the digits in the 1 position equals the
The IC697 PLC system allows user configuration of desired rack number. For example, rack number 5
I/O point references for modules in a rack without the would have the 1 and 4 bit jumpers in the 1 position
need for board address DIP switches or jumpers. The and the 2 and 8 bit jumpers in the 0 position.
address structure is described below. Configuration is
done with the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming Shield Ground
software configurator function. For more informa-
tion on configuration, see the Programming Software The bottom rail of the rack is used for module shield
User’s Manual. grounding. Some IC697 I/O modules have a ground
clip that contacts the conductive bottom rail when the
module is fully inserted. Shield connections in the
Note user connectors are routed to this ground clip through
conductors on the module.
In order to configure slots 12PL to 19PL,
you must have release 4.01 or later of MS-
DOS programming software. Safety Ground
The ground lug on either side of the rack must be con-
Rack Number nected to earth ground with not less than an AWG
#12 (3.33 mm2) wire. The ground lugs are #8-32.
Multiple racks in a system must be assigned a rack
number from 0 to 7; the CPU rack is always Rack 0.
The PLC determines the number of each rack in the
Warning
system from four binary-encoded configurable jump-
ers on the rack’s backplane. If the ground lug is not connected to earth
ground, the rack is not grounded. The
a42823
rack must be grounded to minimize elec-
trical shock hazard which may result in
severe personal injury.
System Noise Immunity
ÎÎ 01 Three easy steps must be taken to properly ground
ÎÎ 8 the IC697 PLC system to reduce the possibility of er-
ÎÎ
rors due to electrical noise.
ÎÎ
4 1. Make sure that the power supply mounting
RACK NUMBER = 2
screws, especially the bottom two, are properly
2 secured.
2. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
1
the rack using AWG #12 (3.33 mm2) wire. Use of a
ring terminal and star washer is recommended.
3. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
Figure 4. Rack Number Jumpers to a good earth ground.
5-8 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 9

November 1999
Module Retention Rack Fan Assembly

IC697 I/O modules have molded latches that automati- An optional Rack Fan Assembly is available in three ver-
cally snap onto the upper and lower rails of the rack sions for installation on the bottom of the rack for addi-
when the module is fully inserted. 3rd party VME tional cooling if forced air cooling is required when a
modules do not have these latches. Optionally, M2.5x8 number of high-power VME modules are installed in
screws may be used to secure the modules to the rack the rack and heat build-up could be a problem. The
for high vibration applications. Rack Fan Assemblies are:
H IC697ACC721 for 120 VAC power source
To remove an IC697 module, first remove the field half
of the terminal board (if it is an I/O module), then grasp H IC697ACC724 for 240 VAC power source
the top and bottom of the module to depress the latch H IC697ACC744 for 24 VDC power source
releases while pulling the module out. For more de- The fans have a low noise level and are assembled us-
tailed information on removing I/O terminal boards, ing ball bearings for extended life.
refer to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation It is recommended that the fans be wired to the same
Manual or individual data sheets for I/O modules. source of power as the IC697 PLC. This will ensure that
the fans are running when the PLC is active.
Warning AC Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721/724): The three
fans are wired in parallel using a cable assembly (supplied
Do not remove (or insert) modules when either with the fan assembly) that plugs into the three fan wiring
the IC697 power supply or any externally-con- connectors. When the cable assembly is installed, the fan
nected power sources are on. Hazardous voltages on the left (looking at front of rack) will have a three foot
may exist. Personal injury, damage to the module lead with stripped ends for connecting to the applicable
or unpredictable operation of the device or pro- 120 or 240 VAC power source.
cess being controlled may result. 24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC744): The three
If M2.5x8 screws have been used to secure modules to fans each have a pair of 12” (310 mm), 24 AWG leads.
the rack, remove the screws before removing the mod- Connect these leads in parallel, with all Red leads
ules. A blank faceplate is available to cover two consec- connected to +24 VDC, and all Black leads connected to
utive unused slots in the rack. 24 VDC Common. Use wire ties to fasten leads down.
The following illustration shows the position of the fan
assembly mounted on a rack. Note that it is mounted
on the bottom of the rack with air flow from the bottom
towards the top of the rack. For detailed specifications
and installation instructions, refer to GFK-0637, which is
the data sheet for the Rack Fan Assembly.
t
GFK-0600F
10 PLC Racks
November 1999
a45460
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 5. Typical Fan Assembly Mounted on VME Integrator Rack (AC Type Fan Assembly Shown)
Table 3. VME Integrator Rack Specifications [
Numberof Slots: 17 on 0.8” centers plus power supply slot
Maximum 5 Volt Current (from standard IC697 20 amps (100 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
powersupplies): 11 amps (55 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
Maximumcurrent (user supplied (not IC697) Power 3.3 amps (+ 5 VDC)

Supply, slot J1 only) 1.1 amps (± 12 VDC)
I/O References: User configurable with IC641 programming software configurator software
RackIdentification: Four jumpers (JP1 - JP4) behind rack power supply
VME/IC697SlotConfiguration: Configure jumpers on backplane (refer to text)
Dimensions: Height Width Depth (Note that all IC697

11.15” 19.00” 7.5” modules extend 1.7” (43 mm)
283mm 483mm 190mm beyond front of rack.)
VME System designed to support VME standard C.1
5-10 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 11

VME Integrator Rack - 17 slots, rear mount IC697CHS782

VME Integrator Rack - 17 slots, front mount IC697CHS783
Power Supply Cable Kit (includes cable and faceplate for empty power supply slot) IC697CBL700
Option Kit for J2 backplane installation (backplane not included) IC697ACC715
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 120 VAC IC697ACC721
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 240 VAC IC697ACC724
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 24 VDC IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
Series 90™-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual, GFK-0600F 5-5

1
PLC Racks
6
IC697ACC721/724/744
GFK-0637E Rack Fan Assembly
October 1999
Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721/724/744)
datasheet GFK-0637E
Features The rack fan assembly comes as a kit which includes a

D Provides additional rack cooling fan assembly, eight screws and two optional mounting
D Three fans per assembly brackets. The two optional mounting brackets are
D Easy installation required when mounting the fan assembly on earlier
D 120 VAC, 240 VAC, or 24 VDC models versions of racks. New rack assemblies can be identified
D Used with IC697 standard nine-slot racks and by metal grilles on top and bottom of the rack. Earlier
17-slot VME Integrator racks. versionsof IC697 racks do not have metal grilles.
D Includes optional mounting brackets for earlier Rack and Fan Assembly Compatibility
versions of IC697 racks The current version of the Rack Fan Assembly
Functions (IC697ACC721B, 724B, and 744) is compatible with
IC697 racks having the following catalog numbers:
The Rack Fan Assembly is an easily installed accessory
for use with IC697 standard nine-slot racks and VME D IC697CHS782A or later versions
Integrator 17-slot racks. The fan assembly consists of D IC697CHS783A or later versions
three fans. This fan assembly provides additional rack D IC697CHS790D or later versions
cooling for installations where heat buildup could be a D IC697CHS791D or later versions
problem. The fans have a low noise level and use ball Note
bearings for extended life.
This version of the Rack Fan Assembly is compatible with
It is recommended that the fans be wired to the same racks built to conform to shock and high vibration specifi-
source of power as the IC697 PLC. This will ensure that cations. These high vibration racks have an SV suffix add-
the fans are running when the PLC is active. ed to the existing rack suffix. For example,
AC Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721/724): The three IC697CHS790ESV denotes that the rack is a high vibration
fans are wired in parallel using a cable assembly (supplied rack. All rack mounting dimensions and instructions in
with the fan assembly) that plugs into the three fan wiring this data sheet also apply to high vibration racks.
connectors (see Figure 1). When the cable assembly is The previous version of the fan assembly
installed, the fan on the left (looking at front of rack) will (IC697ACC721A and 724A) is compatible with the
have a three foot lead with stripped ends for connecting following IC697 racks.
to the applicable 120 or 240 VAC power source.
D IC697CHS782A, B only
24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC744): The three D IC697CHS783A, B only
fans each have a pair of 12” (310 mm), 24 AWG leads (see D IC697CHS790D only
Figure 6). Connect these leads in parallel, with all Red D IC697CHS791D only
leads connected to +24 VDC, and all Black leads
connected to 24 VDC Common. Use wire ties to fasten
leads down.
a45456A Wiring Connector (3)
Figure 1. AC Rack Fan Assemblies IC697ACC721/724

t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC Racks
October 1999
The following illustration shows the position of the fan mounted on the bottom of the rack with air flow from
assembly when it is mounted on a rack. Note that it is the bottom towards the top of the rack.
a45457
LOGICPOWER OK OK OK OK
TPK.A.42979 RUN PGMR ACTIVE USER 1 CH 1 OK
4–17–89
ENABLED BUS ACTIVE USER 2
POWER CENTRAL BUS PROGRAMMABLE BUS CONTROLLER INPUT INPUT INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
SUPPLY PROCESSOR TRANSMITTER COPROCESOOR 1 CHANNEL 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC, 05A 120VAC, 05A
UNIT
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Figure 2. Typical Fan Assembly Mounting (AC Type Fan Assembly Shown)
Installing the Fan Assembly

To install the fan assembly, use the following assembly is easy; the only tool you need to attach the fan
instructions (refer to Figure 3). Installation of the fan assembly to the rack is a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
a45458
7.25
2.82 2.70
1.45
2.09
Figure 3. Fan Assembly Dimensions for Mounting
6-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 3
Rack Fan Assembly GFK-0637E

October 1999
Mounting Fan Assembly on Racks Mounting Fan Assembly on Earlier Versions of

Racks (with Optional Bracket)
1. Position the fan assembly on the bottom of the 1. Slide the flange on the two optional brackets
rack and slide the flange on the rear of the fan under the lip of the front and rear rails on the rack.
assembly (flange without slots) under the lip of the The bracket tabs must face towards the rack side
rear rail on the rack. plates. Slide the brackets out towards the rack side
2. While doing this, align the two holes in each end plates.
of the fan assembly with the holes in the rack side 2. Secure the brackets by aligning the two bracket
plates. holes with the two edge slots in each side plate.
3. Install two screws at each end and secure the
3. Install two screws in each end and secure the fan
bracket by tightening the screws to 10–12 in.-lbs.
assembly by tightening the screws to 10–12 in.-lbs.
4. Attach the fan assembly to the optional brackets
4. There are two additional screws that must be with four screws; two at each end of the fan
installed in the front rail. Install these screws and assembly. Secure by tightening the screws to
tighten to 10–12 in.-lbs. 10–12 in.-lbs.
a45459
Figure 4. Mounting Details for Fan Assembly (AC Type Shown) and Optional Mounting Bracket
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC Racks
October 1999
Changing the Filter

Each fan has a polyurethane filter which can be To replace a retainer, align the retainer with the filter
removed, and cleaned or replaced as needed. assembly and snap the retainer back in place. Details of
Removing a filter is easy, simply lift the tabs located on the filter assembly are shown in the following figure.
all four sides of the plastic retainer. Remove the filter
and either clean it or replace it with a new filter.
a44872
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
GUARD
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FILTER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ RETAINER
Figure 5. Filter Guard Assembly (AC Type Fan Shown)
Wiring 24 VDC Fans

On the 24 VDC Fan Assembly, IC697ACC744, each fan all the Red leads to +24 VDC, and all the Black leads to
has a pair of 24 gauge, 12” (310 mm) long leads. Connect 24 VDC common.
a44872A
Î Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Figure 6. Wire Lead Detail for Fans in the IC697ACC744 24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly
6-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks 5
Rack Fan Assembly GFK-0637E

October 1999
Table 1. Specifications for IC697ACC721/724/744 [
Operating Voltage: 120 VAC,50/60Hz(IC697ACC721)

240 VAC,50/60Hz(IC697ACC724)
24 VDC (IC697ACC724)
Input Power (each fan): 15 to 17 watts at 120 VAC
16 to 17 watts at 240 VAC
6.7 watts at 24 VDC
Line Amps (each fan): 0.18 to 0.20 amps at 120 VAC
0.09 to .010 amps at 240 VAC
0.28 amps at 24 VDC
Locked Rotor Amps (each fan): 0.24 to 0.26 amps at 120 VAC
0.12 to 0.14 amps at 240 VAC
0.70 amps at 24 VDC
OperatingTemperature: –28 _ to +70_C (–18.4_ to +158_F)
Nominal Air Flow (without filter): @120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hz: 108 CFM (each fan)
Nominal Air Flow (with filter): @120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hz: 71 CFM (each fan)
Weight of Fan Assembly: 5.94 pounds (2.69 kg)
MTBF for each fan: @ 40_C (104_F) >80,000 Hours (manufacturers specification)
@ 60_C (140_F) >50,000 Hours (manufacturers specification)
FilterAssembly
Retainer and Guard: UL94V-0 Plastic
Filter Type: Polyurethane Foam, 30 PPI (Pores Per Inch)

Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC IC697ACC721
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC IC697ACC744
Replacement Filter Element, Comair Rotron 554146 (5 pack)
The Rack Fan Assembly comes as a kit which includes a fan assembly, two optional mounting
brackets, and eight screws.
t
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
7 IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724
GFK-1047F 24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
August 1997
Power Supplies
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724)
datasheet GFK-1047F
Features unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplane-

mounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
D Operation from 24 VDC provides +5 volt, +12 volt and -12 volt power, and logic
D Three output voltages, 90 watts total level sequencing signals to the backplane.
+5 VDC output up to 18 amps
+12 VDC output up to 1.5 amps
-12 VDC output up to 1 amp This power supply can be used either in a single rack
application, or can also be used to provide power to a
D Slide-in rack mount construction
second rack if the total load is within the supply rating.
D Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection
Interconnection to the second rack is through a pre-
provided on 5 volt bus
wired cable (IC697CBL700).
D Two rack operation from a single power supply
The power supply output will ride through a 10 msec
Functions total loss of input power at full load. Protection is pro-
The 90 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted vided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
a47033
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
LOGIC POWER
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
ÎÎÎ
WARNING
Even if the power supply is
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
switched off, hazardous volt-
ages from user field wiring may
ON
ÎÎÎ
still be present on the I/O termi-
ÎÎÎÎÎ
nal boards as well as on the pow-
OFF
POWER SUPPLY er supply terminal board.
ÎÎÎ
Care should be taken when han-
dling the power supply and I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
modules as well as any wiring
connected to them in order to
ÎÎÎ
prevent personal injury.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
WARNING
ÎÎÎ
INPUT 24 VDC EXPLOSION HAZARD –
WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCA-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
6.5A
TIONS, TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE REPLACING OR
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
WIRING MODULES.
ÎÎ
OUTPUT +5V AT 18A
PROGRAMMABLE ALIMENTACION ELECTRICA
+12V AT 1.5A
CONTROLLER ATENCION
ÎÎ
–12V AT 1A
Incluso si la alimentacion electri-
90 WATTS TOTAL ca esta desconectada, voltajes
ÎÎÎ
peligrosos provenientes del ca-
WARNING: bleado externo pueden estar
DO NOT DISCONNECT
ÎÎ
WHILE CIRCUIT IS presentes en los terminales de
ALIVE UNLESS AREA entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
IS KNOWN TO BE los terminales de la tarjeta im-
ÎÎ
NONHAZARDOUS
presa de la fuente de poder.
Debe prestarse atencion en el
ÎÎÎ
Replace with same manejo de la fuente de poder, en
type and rating el manejo de los modulos de en-
ÎÎ
10A/250V trada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
de cualquier cable conectado a
ÎÎ
INPUT la fuente o a los modulos para
+
evitar dan~os personales.
ÎÎ
ADVERTENCIA
24 VDC
– RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
ÎÎ
CUANDO ESTA EN ZONAS
Torque 12 in-lb PELIGROSAS, DESCONEC-
(1.3 N-m) TAR LA POTENCIA ANTES DE
ÎÎ
75 _C Copper REEMPLAZAR O INSTALAR
Conductors LOS MODULOS.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Power Supplies
August 1997
Dual Rack Operation

Operation of the Power Supply
A single power supply can provide power for two
This Power Supply Module operates from a 24 VDC racks under the following conditions:
nominal line. The power supply can accept an input D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
voltage range of from 18 to 32 VDC. and the total power required by both racks is with-
in the capability of the supply.
Overvoltage Protection D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
5.2 amperes.
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
the 5 V bus exceeds 6.7 volts. External overvoltage on as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable.
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable carries
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open. the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequencing
Replace this fuse with a 10 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse. signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which connects
directly to the backplane through an opening in the
Overcurrent Protection rack frame. Note that the cable carries power and pow-
er sequencing signals only. Inter-rack communication
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent and bus interface modules must be provided separately.
limit for each of the three outputs (26 amps for +5 See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
volts, 4 amps for +12 volts, and 2 amps for –12 olts Manual for application information.
(all maximum)). If the maximum current rating is ex-
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a42134
ceeded, the output voltage will drop.
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
It will remain in that state until the load is either re-
Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
INDICATED END POWER
moved or reduced. A current overload (including a IS SUPPLYING SUPPLY
POWER
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open. FIRST
RACK
Temperature Derating
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
For operation at ambient temperatures that exceed
50_C (122_F), maximum output power must be der-
ated as shown in the derating curve.
Î ÎÎ Î
Î
FACE
PLATE
Î
Î Î
Î Î
Î Î
Î Î
Î Î
Î
a45647 SECOND
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
RACK
90
80
70
60
TOTAL
OUTPUT 50
POWER NORMAL OPERATING RANGE Figure 8. Dual Rack Configuration
40 WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
30 Timing Diagram
20
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the
10
dc input power to the dc outputs and to the two system
signals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYS-
10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C RESET. The 5VSTBY output may be used for user battery
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C) backup schemes as shown.
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
Figure 7. Output Power Derating Curve soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The sys-
7-2 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 3
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module GFK-1047F

August 1997
tem is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least er from internal energy storage elements, and therefore
200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during does not require inrush energy from the power source.
this time, outputs are forced off).
If input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will remain
Mounting
within specifications for at least 10 ms. The system is The Power Supply is a plug-in module which is secured
then given an additional 5 milliseconds to complete an to the rack with four M 2.5 screws (included). Be certain
orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all processing. that these screws are tightened both to secure the pow-
a47035 er supply to the rack, and to assure proper power sup-
INPUT POWER ON OFF ON OFF
ply-to-rack grounding.
| 1 CYCLE } 1 CYCLE
Power Supply Door

DC
The power supply door can be opened by grasping the
upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or a
4.9V
4.5V fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use
OUTPUT
POWER care when opening the door since pulling from the bot-
tom can cause the hinge or the door to break.
ACFAIL
Input Voltage and Grounding
The power input terminal board provides two terminals for
10 ms
SYSRESET MIN connecting 24 VDC power and an additional terminal for
200 ms 5ms MIN
system and noise ground. Power input connections should
MIN 50µs MIN be made with copper AWG #16 (1.33 mm2) through AWG
5VSTBY 2 1 2
#12 (3.31 mm2) wire rated for 75_C (167_F).
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but
2 5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A the wires into any given terminal should be the same
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE.
type and size.
Figure 9. Timing Diagram for 24 VDC Power Supply It is recommended that the GND terminal on the power
supply be connected to the GND terminal on the rack and
Note to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire rated for
75_C (167_F) and a ring terminal to ensure adequate
Input power interruptions that exceed the power
grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each wire on
supply ride through time (10 milliseconds mini-
the GND lug is recommended.
mum) will result in a complete power down/power
a47034
up cycle of ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
Î
IC697
RACK STUD
Inrush (8–32)
When input voltage is initially applied, internal energy #12 (3.3 mm2)
GROUND
Î
storage elements will draw a surge current from the 24 WIRE
VDC input power source which can be in the range of
Î
Replace with same
100 amps depending on the installation and power EARTH type and rating
ÎÎÎÎ Î
GROUND 1A/250V
source impedance characteristics. Standard best prac-
ÎÎÎÎ Î
tices should be used for installations where minimizing INPUT
inrush current is a consideration. Typical best practices
ÎÎÎÎ
+
INCOMING 24 VDC
include providing local energy storage which can be –
either system batteries or capacitors at each power sup- Torque 12 in-lb

(1.3 N-m)
ply input, and minimizing resistance from the storage 75 _C Copper

Conductors
elements to prevent significant voltage drop during the
initial energy transfer.
ÎÎÎ
Note that this inrush only occurs during the initial ap-
plication of input voltage to the power supply. Turning
the power switch On and OFF does not disconnect pow-
ÎÎÎ
Figure 10. Input Wiring and Ground Connections
t
GFK-0600F
4 Power Supplies
August 1997
Warning System Noise Immunity

Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
programmable controller system to reduce the possibil-
Because the power ON/OFF switch does not ity of errors due to electrical noise.
disconnect power from the internal storage
elements, it is possible for the input termi- 1. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
nals to discharge to user wiring when power connected to the GND terminal on either side of the
is reapplied. To prevent this condition, turn rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. Use of a ring
the power supply switch on after the removal of terminal and starwasher is recommended.
user input power to discharge all stored ener- 2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected to
gy through the supply. a good earth ground.
Table 1. Specifications For IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724 [
Nominal Rated Voltage: 24 VDC

Input Voltage Range: 18 to 32 VDC
Input Power: 160 watts maximum @ full load
Input Inrush Energy: 22 joules maximum
Output Power: 90 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
Output Voltage: +5 VDC: 4.90 to 5.25 volts (5.07 volts nominal)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
-12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
Protective Limits -
Overvoltage Limit: +5 VDC Output: 5.7 to 6.7 volts
Overcurrent Limit: +5 VDC output: 26 amps, maximum
+12 VDC output: 4 amps, maximum
-12 VDC output: 2 amps, maximum
Ride Through Time: 10 milliseconds minimum @20 VDC
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.

Power Supply, 24 Volts DC, 90 Watts IC697PWR724
CE697PWR724
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate IC697CBL700
for vacant power supply slot in second rack).
Note: For Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
7-4 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 5
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module GFK-1047F

August 1997
The following markings are required to appear in the Manual and data sheet for Class I Div 2 Hazardous
applicable Programmable Controller Installation Locations.
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO 3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO

CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2 NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
t
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
8
IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748
GFK-1061D 48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748)
datasheet GFK-1061D
Features unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplane-

mounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
D Operation from 48 VDC provides +5 volt, +12 volt and –12 volt power, and
D Three output voltages, 90 watts total logic level sequencing signals to the backplane.
+5 VDC output up to 18 amps
+12 VDC output up to 1.5 amps
–12 VDC output up to 1 amp This power supply can be used either in a single rack
application, or can also be used to provide power to a
D Slide-in rack mount construction
D Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection
provided on 5 volt bus
wired cable (IC697CBL700).
The power supply output will ride through a 10 msec
This 90 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted vided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
a47033
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ POWER SUPPLY
ÎÎ
LOGIC POWER
WARNING
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ON
ÎÎ
OFF
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
WARNING
INPUT 48 VDC EXPLOSION HAZARD –
ÎÎ
3.5A WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCA-
TIONS, TURN OFF POWER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BEFORE REPLACING OR
WIRING MODULES.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
OUTPUT +5V AT 18A
+12V AT 1.5A
ÎÎÎ
CONTROLLER ATENCION
–12V AT 1A
ÎÎ
90 WATTS TOTAL ca esta desconectada, voltajes
peligrosos provenientes del ca-
WARNING: bleado externo pueden estar
ÎÎ
DO NOT DISCONNECT presentes en los terminales de
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
ÎÎ
IS KNOWN TO BE los terminales de la tarjeta im-
NONHAZARDOUS
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
type and rating el manejo de los modulos de en-
5A/250V trada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
+
ADVERTENCIA
48 VDC
RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
ÎÎ
–
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
2 Power Supplies
August 1997
Operation of the Power Supply Dual Rack Operation

This Power Supply Module operates from a 48 VDC A single power supply can provide power for two
nominal line. The power supply can accept an input racks under the following conditions:
voltage range of from 35 to 60 VDC. D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
and the total power required by both racks is with-
in the capability of the supply.
Overvoltage Protection
D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage 5.2 amperes.
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
the 5 V bus exceeds 6.7 volts. External overvoltage on as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable.
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply
listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable carries
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open.
the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequencing
Replace this fuse with a 5 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse.
signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which connects
directly to the backplane through an opening in the
Overcurrent Protection rack frame. Note that the cable carries power and pow-
er sequencing signals only. Inter-rack communication
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent and bus interface modules must be provided separately.
limit for each of the three outputs (26 amps for +5V, 4 See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
amps for +12 V, and 2 amps for –12 V (all maxi- Manual for application information.
mum)). If the maximum current rating is exceeded,
the output voltage will drop.
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î
1
Î Î
2
Î3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a42134
INSTALL CABLE
It will remain in that state until the load is either re- SO THAT THE
INDICATED END POWER
moved or reduced. A current overload (including a IS SUPPLYING SUPPLY
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open. POWER
FIRST
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RACK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Temperature Derating TWO
RACK
POWER
For operation at ambient temperatures that exceed CABLE
50_C (122_F), maximum output power must be der-

ated as shown in the derating curve.
Î Î
FACE
Î Î Î Î Î Î
PLATE
a45647
SECOND
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
90 RACK
80
70
60
TOTAL
OUTPUT 50
POWER NORMAL OPERATING RANGE Figure 2. Dual Rack Configuration
40 WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
30 Timing Diagram
20
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the
10
dc input power to the dc outputs and to the two system
signals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYS-
10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C RESET. The 5VSTBY output can be used for user battery
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C) backup schemes as shown.
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
Figure 1. Output Power Derating Curve soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The sys-
8-2 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 3
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module GFK-1061D

August 1997
tem is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least the power switch On and OFF does not disconnect pow-
200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during er from internal energy storage elements, and therefore
this time, outputs are forced off). does not require inrush energy from the power source.
If input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will remain
within specifications for at least 10 milliseconds. The Mounting
system is then given an additional 5 milliseconds to com- The Power Supply is a plug-in module which is secured
plete an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all to the rack with four M 2.5 screws (included). Be certain
processing. that these screws are tightened both to secure the pow-
a47035 er supply to the rack, and to assure proper power sup-
ply-to-rack grounding.
| 1 CYCLE } 1 CYCLE
DC
Power Supply Door
The power supply door can be opened by grasping the
upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or a
4.5V
OUTPUT 4.9V fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use
POWER care when opening the door since pulling from the bot-
tom can cause the hinge or the door to break.
ACFAIL
Input Voltage and Grounding
10 ms The power input terminal board provides two terminals for
SYSRESET MIN connecting 48 VDC power and an additional terminal for
200 ms 5ms MIN
50µs MIN
system and noise ground. Power input connections should
MIN
5VSTBY 2 1 2 be made with copper AWG #16 (1.33 mm2) through AWG
#12 (3.31 mm2) wire rated for 75_C (167_F).
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC
2
Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but
5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE. the wires into any given terminal should be the same
type and size.
Figure 3. Timing Diagram for 48 VDC Power Supply
It is recommended that the GND terminal on the power
Note supply be connected to the GND terminal on the rack and
to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire rated for
Input power interruptions that exceed the power 75_C (167_F) and a ring terminal to ensure adequate
supply ride through time (10 milliseconds mini- grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each wire on
mum) will result in a complete power down/power the GND lug is recommended.
up cycle of ACFAIL and SYSRESET. a47049
Inrush
When input voltage is initially applied, internal energy #12 (3.3 mm2)
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32) Î
storage elements will draw a surge current from the 48 GROUND
WIRE
VDC input power source which can be in the range of
Î
100 amps depending on the installation and power EARTH
Replace with same
type and rating
ÎÎÎÎ Î
source impedance characteristics. Standard best prac- GROUND 5A/250V
tices should be used for installations where minimizing
ÎÎÎÎ Î
INPUT
inrush current is a consideration. Typical best practices
ÎÎÎÎ Î
+
include providing local energy storage which can be INCOMING 48 VDC
ÎÎÎÎ
–
either system batteries or capacitors at each power sup-
Torque 12 in-lb
ply input, and minimizing resistance from the storage (1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
elements to prevent significant voltage drop during the Conductors
initial energy transfer.

ÎÎÎ
Note that this inrush only occurs during the initial ap-
plication of input voltage to the power supply. Turning ÎÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
4 Power Supplies
August 1997
Figure 4. Input Wiring and Ground Connections System Noise Immunity

Warning programmable controller system to reduce the possibil-
ity of errors due to electrical noise.
Because the power ON/OFF switch does not
disconnect power from the internal storage 4. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
elements, it is possible for the input termi- connected to the GND terminal on either side of the
nals to discharge to user wiring when power rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. Use of a ring
is reapplied. To prevent this condition, turn terminal and starwasher is recommended.
the power supply switch on after the removal
of user input power to discharge all stored 5. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected to
energy through the supply. a good earth ground.
Table 1. Specifications For IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724 [
Nominal Rated Voltage: 48 VDC

Input Voltage Range: 35 to 60 VDC
Input Power: 160 watts maximum @ full load
Input Inrush Energy: 28 joules maximum at 60 VDC Input
Output Power: 90 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
–12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
Minimum Load: 1.0 A on +5 VDC
Protective Limits -
Overcurrent Limit: +5 VDC output: 26 amps, maximum
+12 VDC output: 4 amps, maximum
–12 VDC output: 2 amps, maximum
Ride Through Time: 10 milliseconds minimum

Power Supply, 48 Volts DC, 90 Watts IC697PWR748
CE697PWR748
for vacant power supply slot in second rack).
8-4 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 5
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module GFK-1061D

August 1997
The following markings are required to appear in the Manual and data sheet for Class I Div 2 Hazardous
applicable Programmable Controller Installation Locations.
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO 3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO

CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2 NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
t
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
9
IC697PWR710/712
GFK-1388A 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR710/712)
datasheet GFK-1388A
– This data sheet (GFK-1388) describes version H (IC697PWR710H/712H), or later versions of this power supply.
– For a description of version G (IC697PWR710G/712G), and earlier versions – see data sheet GFK-0083L.
Features into a 48-pin backplane-mounted connector in the

leftmost slot in the rack. It provides +5 volt power
H Operation from 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC and logic level sequencing signals to the backplane.
H Five volt DC output up to 11 amps
H Slide-in rack mount construction This power supply may be used either in a single rack
H Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection pro- application, or may also be used to provide power to a
vided on 5 volt bus second rack if the total load is within the supply rat-
H Two rack operation from a single power supply ing. Interconnection to the second rack is through an
H Power factor corrected on AC inputs available prewired cable (see the ordering instructions
H Jumper for overvoltage protection devices on the last page of this data sheet).
The power supply output will ride through a one-cycle
This Power Supply Module for the programmable vided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
controller is a rack-mounted unit that plugs directly
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
a47110
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
LOGIC POWER POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ON still be present on the I/O termi-
nal boards as well as on the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OFF power supply terminal board.
POWER SUPPLY
Care should be taken when
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
handling the power supply and
I/O modules as well as any wir-
ing connected to them in order
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
to prevent personal injury.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE WARNING
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
EXPLOSION HAZARD –
INPUT 120/240VAC WHEN IN HAZARDOUS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
0.8A/0.4A LOCATIONS, TURN OFF
50/60HZ POWER BEFORE REPLAC-
ING OR WIRING MODULES.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
125 VDC
0.8A
ALIMENTACIONELECTRICA
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OUTPUT +5V AT 11A
PROGRAMMABLE ATENCION
CONTROLLER 55 WATTS TOTAL Incluso si la alimentacion elec-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
trica esta desconectada, vol-
WARNING:
tajes peligrosos provenientes
del cableado externo pueden
DO NOT DISCONNECT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
WHILE CIRCUIT IS estar presentes en los termi-
ALIVE UNLESS AREA nales de entrada/salida (I/O),
IS KNOWN TO BE asi como en los terminales de
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
NONHAZARDOUS
la tarjeta impresa de la fuente
de poder.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Replace with same manejo de la fuente de poder,
type and rating en el manejo de los modulos de
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
1A/250V entrada/salida (I/O), y en el
manejode cualquier cable con-
ectado a la fuente o a los mo-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
INPUT
dulos para evitar dan~os per-
L1 + sonales.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ADVERTENCIA
120/240VAC 125 VDC
–
N
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
(1.3 N-m) TAR LA POTENCIA ANTES
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
75_C Copper DE REEMPLAZAR O INSTA-
Conductors LAR LOS MODULOS.
Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual 9-1

GFK-0600F
2 Power Supplies
August 1997
Operation of the Power Supply connects directly to the backplane through an open-
ing in the rack frame.
This Power Supply Module can operate from either a Note that the cable carries power and power sequenc-
120 VAC or 240 VAC nominal line. For these two ing signals only. Inter-rack communication and bus
ranges, the power supply can accept an input voltage interface modules must be provided separately. See
range of from 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. Active pow- the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
er factor correction circuits in this supply maintain a Manual for application information.
unity power factor which eliminates the need for
oversized circuit breakers and wiring.
This power supply will also operate with a 125 VDC
nominal line. It will accept a DC input voltage range
of 100 to 150 VDC.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î a42134
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
INDICATED POWER
Overvoltage Protection END
SUPPLY
IS SUPPLYING
POWER FIRST
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage RACK
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if
TWO
the 5 volt bus exceeds 6.2 volts. External overvoltage on RACK
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to POWER
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CABLE
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open.
Replace this fuse with a 1 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse.
Î Î
FACE
Î Î Î Î Î Î
PLATE
Overcurrent Protection
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
SECOND
RACK
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent
limit at 12 amperes, typical. If the maximum current
rating is exceeded, the output voltage will drop.
It will remain in that state until the load is either re-
moved or reduced. A current overload (including a
Figure 1. Dual Rack Configuration
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open.
Dual Rack Operation Timing Diagram

A single power supply can provide power for two The timing diagram below shows the relationship of
racks under the following conditions: the AC input power to the 5 volt DC output and to the
two system signals generated by the power supply:
H Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack, ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
and the total power required by both racks is with-
in the capability of the supply. On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The
H The current drawn by the second rack is less than system is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at
5.2 amperes. least 200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available.
H The two racks must be mounted in close proximity (During this time, outputs are forced off).
as limited by the 3-foot connecting cable.
If AC input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is remain within specifications for at least one cycle.
listed in the ordering instructions. This cable carries The system is then given an additional 5 ms to com-
the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequenc- plete an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all
ing signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which processing.
9-2 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 3
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module GFK-1388A

August 1997
Field Wiring Connections

a44050
The power input terminal board has four terminals.
The top two (L1 and N) are for 120/240 VAC or 125
VDC input power connections; the third and fourth
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î
< 1 CYCLE > 1 CYCLE
terminals are for ground and overvoltage protection
AC
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ device connections, respectively. Power input con-
Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
nections should be made with copper AWG #16 (1.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F). Each terminal
Î ÎÎ Î can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into
Î ÎÎ Î
OUTPUT 4.9V 4.9V
POWER any given terminal should be the same type and size.
Î ÎÎ Î
26.5ms
MIN
It is recommended that the ground terminal on the
Î
Î ÎÎ
ACFAIL
Î power supply be connected to the GND terminal on
ÎÎ Î
the rack and to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F) to ensure adequate
Î ÎÎ Î
21 ms
SYSRESET MIN
grounding.
5 ms MIN
200 ms
MIN 50 µs MIN
ÎÎ
a47111
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32)
Figure 2. Timing Diagram for Versions D and Later WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
#12 (3.3 mm2) WHILE CIRCUIT IS
GROUND ALIVE UNLESS AREA
WIRE IS KNOWN TO BE
Î
NONHAZARDOUS
Note Replace with same
ÎÎ
Î
EARTH type and rating
GROUND 1A/250V
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Input power interruptions which exceed the
INPUT
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
power supply ride through time (21
L1 +
milliseconds minimum) will result in a
ÎÎÎÎ
INCOMING 120/240V AC 125 VDC
–
complete power down/power up cycle of N
Torque 12 in-lb
ACFAIL and SYSRESET. (1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
ÎÎÎ
Conductors
ÎÎÎ
CONNECT JUMPER STRAP
BETWEEN TERMINALS 3
and 4 FOR OVERVOLTAGE
Mounting
ÎÎÎ
PROTECTION DEVICES.
The Power Supply is a plug-in module that is installed Figure 3. Terminal Board Connections for
in the leftmost slot of any standard IC697 rack or VME IC697PWR710/712, Versions H and Later
Integrator ’s rack.
Overvoltage Protection Devices
Power Supply Door The overvoltage protection devices (see Figure 4) for this
power supply are connected internally to terminal 4
The power supply door can easily be opened by (bottom terminal) on the input terminal board. This pin is
grasping the upper left corner of the door with your normally connected to frame ground (terminal 3) with
right thumb or a fingernail and gently pulling the the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the facto-
door towards you. Use care when opening the door ry. If overvoltage protection is not required or is sup-
since pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or plied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving
the door to break. terminal 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.
t
GFK-0600F
4 Power Supplies
August 1997
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage System Noise Immunity
protection must be disabled during the test by removing
the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protec- Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
tion after testing by reinstalling the strap. programmable controller system to reduce the possi-
a47106 bility of errors due to electrical noise.
1 1. A ground terminal on the power supply must be
the rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire.
2 2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
to a good earth ground.
Frame
3 Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Devices to Frame Ground
4
Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board
Figure 4. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper
Table 3. Specifications for IC697PWR710/712 (Versions H and Later) [
Nominal Rated Voltage: 120/240VAC or 125 VDC

Input VoltageRange:
AC 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
DC 100 to 150 VDC,
Input Power: 90 watts maximum at full load
Input Half Cycle Peak Inrush: 3 amps (typical)
Power Factor > .95
Output Power: 56 watts maximum
Protective Limits -
OvervoltageLimit: 6.2 volts (typical), electronicovervoltageprotection
Overcurrent Limit: 12 amps (typical), electroniccurrent limit
Ride Through Time: 21 milliseconds minimum (from loss of AC input)
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867C, or later for product standards and general specifications.

Power Supply - 120/240 Volts AC or 125 Volts DC, 55 Watts (H, or later version) IC697PWR710/712
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate for vacant power supply slot in second rack) IC697CBL700/713
9-4 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 5
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module GFK-1388A
August 1997
Special Installation Instructions

for Floating Neutral (IT) Examples of Non–Floating Neutral
Systems System
When this power supply is installed in a system where L1 L L1

the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective Earth
Ground, these special installation instructions must
N N/PE L2
be followed to prevent damage to the power supply.
PE PE
Definition of Floating Neutral

Systems These systems do not require these special
installation instructions.
As described in this data sheet a Floating Neutral
System is a system of power distribution wiring where
Neutral and Protective Earth Ground are not tied
together by a negligible impedance. In Europe this is
referred to as an IT system (see IEC950). In a Use These Special Installation
Floating Neutral System, voltages measured from Instructions for Floating Neutral
input terminals to protective earth ground may exceed
264 Volts AC maximum input voltage as specified in
Systems
the power supply specifications in this data sheet. 1. The input power terminals should be wired
according to the instructions in this data sheet.
Example of Floating Neutral System
2. The factory-installed jumper between terminals 3
and 4 of the power supply module must be
L1
removed.
3. Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs,
N MUST be installed between the following
terminals:
PE
From L1 to earth ground
This system must be installed using the special From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
installation instructions on this page. The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the
Systems in which one leg of the power distribution system is protected from power line transients that
wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N-PE)MAX.
legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral
Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems. floating 50V above earth ground, the transient
protection should be rated at:
240V + 100V +50V = 390V
Series 90™–70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual, GFK-0600F 9-5

6 Power Supplies
August 1997
The following statements are required to appear for 2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations. SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2 3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY. AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
9-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
10
IC697PWR711/713
GFK-1448B Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC (IC697PWR711/713)
datasheet GFK-1448B
–This data sheet describes version H (IC697PWR711H/713H), or later versions of this power supply.
–F or a description of version G (IC697PWR711G/713G), and earlier versions – see data sheet GFK-0392G.
Features Functions
D Operation from 120 VAC, 240 VAC, or 125 VDC The 100 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted
D Three output voltages, 100 watts total unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplane-
+5 VDC output up to 20 amps mounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
+12 VDC output up to 2 amps provides +5 volt, +12 volt and -12 volt power, and logic
-12 VDC output up to 1 amp
level sequencing signals to the backplane.
D Slide-in rack mount construction This power supply may be used either in a single rack
D Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection application, or may also be used to provide power to a
D Power Factor correction for AC operation wired cable (see the ordering instructions on the last
D Jumper for overvoltage protection devices page of this data sheet).
a47113
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
LOGIC POWER
WARNING
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ON
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OFF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
WARNING
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
INPUT 120/240VAC EXPLOSION HAZARD –
1.4A/0.7A WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCA-
50/60HZ TIONS, TURN OFF POWER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
BEFORE REPLACING OR
125 VDC
WIRING MODULES.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
1.4A
OUTPUT +5V AT 20A

ÎÎ
+12 AT 2A
ATENCION
CONTROLLER –12 AT 1A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
100 WATTS TOTAL
ca esta desconectada, voltajes
WARNING: peligrosos provenientes del ca-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
DO NOT DISCONNECT bleado externo pueden estar
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA presentes en los terminales de
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
IS KNOWN TO BE entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
NONHAZARDOUS
los terminales de la tarjeta im-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
type and rating
el manejo de los modulos de en-
2A/250V
trada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
+
L1
ADVERTENCIA
120/240V AC 125 VDC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
–
N
PELIGROSAS, DESCONEC-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Torque 12 in-lb
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
2 Power Supplies
August 1997
derating must be applied. Refer to the following fig-

The power supply output will ride through at least one ure to determine the normal operating range for spe-
input line cycle with a total loss of input power at full cific applications. Normal operating range is shown
load. Protection is provided for overcurrent and over- by the shaded area of the graph for 60_C (140_F)
voltage fault conditions. installations. Operation in the non-shaded region for
specific applications must be limited to <1 hour. Re-
Operation of the Power Supply ducing the maximum operating temperature to 55_C
(131_F) will increase the normal operating range as
This Power Supply module can operate from either indicated on the graph.
120 VAC or 240 VAC nominal inputs. It will also oper-
ate from a nominal 125 VDC source. The specified Active power factor correction circuits in this supply
range of operation is from 90 VAC to 264 VAC, and maintain a near unity power factor for AC inputs,
from 100 VDC to 150 VDC. which eliminates the need for oversized circuit break-
For continuous operation (greater than one hour) at ers and wiring. This circuitry also limits the half cycle
low line voltages and high temperatures, some power peak inrush currents to a low value.
LIMITED OPERATING RANGE
(< 1 HOUR )
100
50_C
95 55_C 60_C
90
85
MAXIMUM
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
TOTAL
OUTPUT FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION (>1 HOUR)
POWER IN MINIMUM SIZE ENCLOSURE
(WATTS) WITH NO FORCED AIR CIRCULATION.
VIN
95 105
90 100 110 120 130 264
INPUT VOLTAGE (VRMS OR VDC)
Figure 1. Power Derating for Low Line Voltages
Overvoltage Protection Overcurrent Protection

An electronic shutdown circuit protects against volt- An electronic current limit is provided on each of the
ages exceeding 6.2 volts. A back-up voltage clamp is three outputs. An overload on any output will cause
provided to protect against sustained overvoltage the voltage to collapse and may cause the other out-
conditions due to either external influences or internal put voltages to collapse.
faults. Overvoltage due to internal faults may cause
the fuse to open. For short term overvoltage condi- Normal operation will resume after removal of the
tions, normal operation will resume when the cause is overload. Some component cooling time may be re-
removed. quired before normal operation resumes.
10-2 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 3
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC GFK-1448B

August 1997
Dual Rack Operation SET. The 5VSTBY output may be used for user battery
backup schemes as shown.
A single power supply can provide power for two On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
racks under the following conditions: soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The sys-
D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack, tem is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least
and the total power required by both racks is with- 200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during
in the capability of the supply. this time, outputs are forced off).
If AC input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will re-
D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
main within specifications for at least one cycle. The sys-
5.2 amperes.
tem is then given an additional 5 milliseconds to complete
D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all proces-
as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable. sing.
a42132
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable car- | 1 CYCLE } 1 CYCLE
Î ÎÎÎ
ries the +5 volts power bus as well as the power se-
quencing signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector AC
which connects directly to the backplane through an
opening in the rack frame. Note that the cable carries
power and power sequencing signals only. Inter-rack 4.9V 4.9V
OUTPUT
communication and bus interface modules must be pro- POWER
26.5ms
vided separately. See the applicable Programmable Con- MIN
troller Installation Manual. for application information.
ACFAIL
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î
1
Î Î
2
Î 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a42134 21 ms
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
INSTALL CABLE SYSRESET MIN
SO THAT THE
INDICATED END POWER 200 ms 5ms MIN
IS SUPPLYING SUPPLY MIN 50µs MIN
POWER 5VSTBY 2 1 2
FIRST
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RACK
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2 5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A
TWO
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE.
RACK
POWER
CABLE
Figure 3. Timing Diagram
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
FACE Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Note
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
PLATE
SECOND
Î Î Î Î
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RACK Input power interruptions which exceed the
power supply holdup time (21 milliseconds
Î minimum) will result in a complete power

down/power up cycle of ACFAIL and SYS-
RESET.
Figure 2. Dual Rack Configuration Mounting

This Power Supply is a plug-in module that is installed
Timing Diagram in the leftmost slot of any standard IC697 rack or VME
Integrator ’s rack. For additional installation informa-
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the ac tion, refer to GFK-1179, Installation Guidelines for Confor-
input power to the dc outputs and to the two system sig- mance to Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
nals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYSRE- software.
t
GFK-0600F
4 Power Supplies
August 1997
Power Supply Door Overvoltage Protection Devices

The power supply door can easily be opened by grasping The overvoltage protection devices (see Figure 5) for this
the upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or power supply are connected internally to terminal 4
a fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use (bottom terminal) on the input terminal board. This pin is
care when opening the door since pulling from the bottom normally connected to frame ground (terminal 3) with
can cause the hinge or the door to break. the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the facto-
ry. If overvoltage protection is not required or is sup-
Field Wiring Connections plied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving
terminal 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.
The power input terminal board has four terminals.
The top two (L1 and N) are for 120/240 VAC or 125 If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage
VDC input power connections; the third and fourth protection must be disabled during the test by removing
terminals are for ground and overvoltage protection the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protec-
device connections, respectively. Power input con- tion after testing by reinstalling the strap.
nections should be made with copper AWG #16 (1.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F). Each terminal
can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into a47106
any given terminal should be the same type and size.
1
It is recommended that the ground terminal on the
power supply be connected to the GND terminal on
the rack and to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3 2
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F) to ensure adequate
grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each
Frame
wire on the ground terminal is recommended.
3 Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Devices to Frame Ground
4
Screw Terminals
a47111 on Terminal Board
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32) Î WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
#12 (3.3 mm2)
GROUND
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
Figure 5. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper
WIRE IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
ÎÎ Replace with same
Î
EARTH type and rating
GROUND 2A/250V
System Noise Immunity
ÎÎÎÎ Î INPUT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
H
INCOMING
L1
120/240V AC
+
125 VDC
ÎÎÎÎ
N
N – programmable controller system to reduce the possi-
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m) bility of errors due to electrical noise (see Figure 5).
G 75 _C Copper
ÎÎÎ
Conductors
CONNECT JUMPER STRAP

1. The Ground terminal on the power supply must
ÎÎÎ
BETWEEN TERMINALS 3
and 4 FOR OVERVOLTAGE
be connected to the GND terminal on either side
PROTECTION DEVICES.
of the rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. The
ÎÎÎ Ground terminal should be also be connected to

incoming safety ground.
Figure 4. Terminal Board Connections for 2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
IC697PWR711/713, Versions H and Later to a good earth ground.
10-4 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 5

August 1997
Table 1. Specifications FOR IC697PWR711/713

(Version H and Later) [
Nominal Rated Voltage: 120/240 VAC, or 125 VDC

Input Voltage Range:
AC Input 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
DC Input 100 to 150 VDC
Input Power: 135 watts (typical), 160 watts (maximum)
Input Half Cycle Peak Inrush 3 amps (typical)
Power Factor > .93
Output Power: [[ 100 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
-12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
Protective Limits -
Overcurrent Limit: +5 VDC output: 21A (typical)
+12 VDC output: 3.5A (typical)
-12 VDC output: 1.6A (typical)
Holdup Time: 21 milliseconds minimum (from loss of AC input)
Environmental -
Operating Temperature: 0_C to 60_C (32_ to 140_F) operating [[
–40_C to +85_C (-40_ to +185_F) storage
[[ Derate for continuous low input voltage, (see Figure 1)

Power Supply,120/240Volts AC, or 125 Volts DC 100 Watts IC697PWR711/713
(with jumper for overvoltage protection devices – version H, or later version)
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate for empty power supply IC697CBL700
slot in second rack).
t
GFK-0600F
6 Power Supplies
August 1997
Special Installation Instructions for Examples of Non-Floating Neutral System

Floating Neutral (IT) Systems L1 L1
L
When this power supply is installed in a system
where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective L2
N N/PE
Earth Ground, these special installation instructions
must be followed to prevent damage to the power PE PE
supply.
These systems do not require these special installation

Definition of Floating Neutral Systems instructions.
As described in this data sheet a Floating Neutral System
is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral
and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a Use These Special Installation Instructions
negligible impedance. In Europe this is referred to as an for Floating Neutral Systems
IT system (see IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System,
voltages measured from input terminals to protective 1. The input power terminals should be wired
earth ground may exceed 264 Volts AC maximum input according to the instructions in this data sheet.
voltage as specified in the power supply specifications in
this data sheet. 2. The factory installed jumper between terminals 3
and 4 of the power supply module must be
removed.
Example of Floating Neutral System
3. Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs,
L1 MUST be installed between the following
terminals:
N
h From L1 to earth ground
PE
h From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the
system is protected from power line transients that
This system must be installed using the special exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N–PE)MAX.
installation instructions on this page.
For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral
Systems in which one leg of the power distribution floating 50V above earth ground, the transient
wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two protection should be rated at:
legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to
Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems. 240V + 100V +50V = 390V
10-6 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 7

August 1997
The following statements are required to appear for 2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations. SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2 3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY. AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
t
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
11
IC697PWR720
GFK-0626D Power Supply Adapter Module
August 1997
Power Supply Adapter Module (IC697PWR720)
datasheet GFK-0626D
Features
H
a44940
Interfaces an external power supply to an IC697 rack
H Single-slot module
ÎÎ Î
H Plugs into power supply slot in rack
ÎÎ Î
H Î
Î
NC 1PL–1
Easy connection to power supply
Î
0V 1PL–2
0V 1PL–3
Î
PWR 720
Functions 0V 1PL–4
Î
WARNING
0V 1PL–5
EVEN IF THE POWER SUPPLY
Î
This Power Supply Adapter Module (PSA) for the 5V 1PL–6 IS SWITCHED OFF, HAZARDOUS
Î
IC697 I/O system is a single-slot module that plugs into 5V 1PL–7
VOLTAGES FROM USER FIELD
WIRING MAY STILL BE PRESENT

the power supply slot, which is the leftmost slot in an
Î
5V 1PL–8 ON THE I/O TERMINAL BOARDS
IC697 rack. The PSA module must be connected to an
Î
AS WELL AS THE POWER
5V 1PL–9
external power supply through a cable. The external SUPPLY TERMINAL BOARD.
Î
CKT TERM
power supply can be an IC697 power supply module NAME NO CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN
Î
(see GFK-0717), or other external power supply. HANDLING THE POWER SUPPLY
Î
AND I/O MODULES AS WELL AS
CKT TERM
The +5, +12, and –12 VDC outputs, as well as the 5V NAME NO ANY WIRING CONNECTED TO
Î
remote sense, which are generated by an external NC 1PL–10
THEM IN ORDER TO PREVENT
power supply are connected to the IC697 rack
Î
PERSONAL INJURY.
12V 1PL–11
backplane through the PSA. The maximum currents
Î
12V 1PL–12
that can be supplied to the backplane through the PSA
Î
5VS 1PL–13 WARNING
are: 18 amps on the +5 volt output, 2 amps on the +12
DO NOT REMOVE OR INSERT
Î
volt output, and 1 amp on the –12 volt output. 0VS 1PL–14
MODULES WITH POWER APPLIED.
Î
TTL 1PL–15
PERSONAL INJURY, SYSTEM
The PSA monitors the +5 volt output and the ttl JP1 1PL–16 MALFUNCTION AND/OR DAMAGE
Î
compatible Input Power OK signal (TTL) from the JP0 1PL–17
TO THE EQUIPMENT MAY OCCUR.
Î
external power supply. The Input Power OK signal
NC 1PL–18
(TTL) indicates that the external power supply input
voltage is adequate to maintain hold-up time for an
orderly system shutdown. The PSA also develops two
backplane signals, ACFAIL* and SYSRESET*, which are
Î MODULE IC697PWR720
LABEL44A726758–504R01
for the power-up/power-down sequence.
The external power supply must provide adequate

hold-up time (5.05 milliseconds minimum, per It is recommended that the external power supply have
ANSI/IEEESTD1014-1987) as well as an Input Power a +5V Remote Sense. When the Remote Sense is
OK signal (TTL) to ensure an orderly system shutdown connected to the PSA terminal board (positive remote
when power is removed. sense to +5VS and negative to 0VS) the +5 volts at the
backplane will be regulated to the level set by the power
supply.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Power Supplies
GFK-0626D Power Supply Adapter Module
August 1997
The LED indicator on the PSA is ON when the +5 volt Mounting

output is in regulation at the backplane and the TTL
signal from the power supply indicates that the power The Power Supply Adapter is a single-slot module that
supply input voltage is adequate to maintain hold-up plugs into the power supply slot, which is the leftmost
time for an orderly system shutdown. This TTL signal slot of an IC697 rack. It connects to the external power
can be positive or negative logic. Two terminals on the supply module through a cable that has one end
PSA terminal board (JP1 and JP0) are available for connected to the power supply. The free end of the
selecting the logic state. If positive logic (Input Power cable should have spring spade or ring lugs which must
OK if TTL = high), no jumper is required; if negative be connected to designated terminals on a terminal
logic (Input Power OK if TTL = low), a jumper is board on the Power Supply Adapter. This terminal
required between terminals JP1 and JP0. board is accessed by opening the hinged door on the
Power Supply Adapter module.
Operation of the Power Supply Adapter
This Power Supply Adapter Module operates from +5 Power Supply Adapter Module Door
VDC power which it receives from the +5 VDC power
bus on the IC697 rack backplane.
The Power Supply Adapter door can easily be opened
by grasping the upper left corner of the door with your
right thumb or a fingernail and gently pulling the door
Dual Rack Operation towards you. Use care when opening the door since
A single external power supply can provide power for pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or the door
two racks. In this application, the PSA must be installed to break.
in the first rack. For detailed information on this
application, refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual.
a44936
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
LOGICPOWER OK OK OK OK
RUN PGMRACTIVE USER 1 CH 1 OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ENABLED BUSACTIVE USER 2
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
POWERSUPPLY POWERSUPPLY CPU
Î
BUS PROGRAMMABLE Bus INPUT INPUT INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
ADAPTER TRANSMITTER COPROCESSOR CONTROLLER 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC, 05A 120VAC,.05A
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
Figure 1. Location of Power Supply Adapter Module in an IC697 PLC Installation
11-2 t
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies 3
Power Supply Adapter Module GFK-0626D

August 1997
Table 1. Specifications for IC697PWR720 [
Power Supply Voltage to Rack Backplane: +5.02 to +5.12 VDC (5.07 volts nominal)
+11.58 to +12.42 VDC (+12 volts nominal)
–11.4 to –12.6 VDC (–12 volts nominal)
Power Supply Current to Rack +5 VDC at 18A
Backplane: (maximum with PSA only) +12 VDC at 2A
–12 VDC at 1A
Current Required from 5 V Bus 50 mA (.250W)
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation requirements for Conformance to Standards.

Power Supply Adapter module IC697PWR720
for vacant power supply slot in second rack)
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
12 IC697CPU731
GFK-0159J 12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit
August 1997
PLC CPUs
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
datasheet GFK-0159J
Features
D Single slot CPU. a44717g
D 512 inputs and outputs (any mix).
ÎÎ ÎÎ
D Up to 8K analog I/O.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
D
ÎÎ
0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
OK
D
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
12 MHz, 80C186 microprocessor. RUN
D
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Supports IC660/IC661) and IC697 I/O products
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based soft-
ware products running on Windowsr 95 or Win-
ÎÎ
dows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î CPU 731
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
SNP port. CENTRAL
PROCESSING
D 32 Kbyte battery-backed CMOS memory (fixed
MODULE OK
ÎÎÎÎÎ
UNIT RUN
size). OUTPUTS
ÎÎ
ENABLED
D Configurable data and program memory. ON = OK, ENABLED
D Battery-backed calendar clock.

ÎÎ RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
D
ENABLED
Three position operation mode switch.
ÎÎ
RUN WITH
D Password controlled access. OUTPUTS
ÎÎ
DISABLED
D Three status LEDs. STOP
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or jump-

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
BATTERY
ers to set). CONNECTIONS
ÎÎ
D Reference information inside front door. INSTALL NEW
ÎÎ
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Functions BATTERY. USE
ÎÎ
IC697ACC701
ÎÎ
The CPU 731 is a single slot PLC CPU which resides in MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎ
an IC697CHS PLC rack. The CPU 731 is programmed
12MHZ CENTRAL
and configured by MS-DOS or Windows based pro-
ÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT
gramming software to perform real time control of ma-

chines, processes and material handling systems. The
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CPU 731 communicates with I/O and smart option SERIAL PORT
RS–422
ÎÎ
modules over the rack mounted backplane COMPATIBLE
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME

C.1 Standard format.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface
ÎÎ
modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller
Î ÎÎ
MODULE
for IC660/661 I/O products, Communications modules, IC697CPU731
LABEL
I/O Link Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete 44A726758–101
and analog I/O modules.

Module operation may be controlled by the three posi-
tion switch or remotely by an attached programmer and
programming software. CPU status is indicated by
three green LEDs on the front of the module.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
August 1997
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
a42786g
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)

PARALLEL
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
D Turn on power.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
G
P
S
C B
P T
B
C
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
U M or
N
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

B
C
The CPU is now ready to be programmed After the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ONE program has been verified the toggle switch may be
METER
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM) moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
RACK 1
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î memory protection status, and the state of the program.
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
B P
Î
R C
M M
ÎÎ
a42751g
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î

IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
NOTE
G TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
B B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
R C (MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
M or
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
N
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎ
C
OPEN
REPLACEMENT CPU 731
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ONE IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM) BATTERY
MODULE OK
METER RACK 7 CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Î
RUN
OUTPUTS
CURRENTLY ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Î
P B INSTALLED ON = OK, ENABLED
S R
M CONNECTOR
Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

Î Î
ÎÎ
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK) RUN WITH
Î
OUTPUTS
LEGEND CPU – SELECTED CPU MODEL DISABLED
BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
Î
BTM – BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713 STOP
GBC/NBC – BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73*
Î
PCM – PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711 BATTERY
PS – POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 CONNECTIONS
Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
Î
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
Î
IC697ACC701
Installation
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
Î
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
Î
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Î
detailed information about installation, startup, and SERIAL PORT
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
Î
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
Î USE THIS MODULE
Î
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Î
MODULE
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards, IC697CPU731
LABEL
shipped with the PLC programming software, for 44A726758–101
additional guidelines.
CPU 731
D Be sure that power to the PLC is turned off before
installing the CPU 731 module
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors
on the module (see Figure 2). Figure 2. CPU 731- Location of Major Features
12-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit GFK-0159J

August 1997
Programmer Connection, Parallel Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP

For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
connect the programmer to the top port connector on TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
programming functions. Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
Serial Port network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3. PLC and the programmer running Windows software
This port provides a serial connection to a Standard to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
Serial COM port, or to a Work Station Interface board information on the programmer connection via
installed in the programming computer. For more in- Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
formation on serial communications, see references 1, Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
2, and 3. Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
SERIAL a43591g
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
Configuration
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
C B
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
P G
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
ÎÎÎÎÎ
S P T C B
U M M C
or MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
N
B
C
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to config-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ONE
METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
during operation. The actual configuration must be
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
RACK 1
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi-
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
B ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func-
R
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
M tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î IC66*
I/O BLOCK
Batteries
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î RACK 7
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
R
M
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be-
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
fore removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
Connection to Programmer battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
August 1997
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
removing a module from its slot in a rack. with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
from the backplane connector.
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
the back of the cover. from the rack.
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU731 [
Battery Shelf Life 10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)

Memory Retention 6 months nominal without applied power
Current required from 5V Bus 1.0 Amp
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy ± 3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock ± .01% maximum
Serial Port RS422/485 compatible, programmer serial attachment
Table 2. References
Reference Title
1 Programming Software User ’s Manual
2 Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3 Programmable Controller Installation Manual

Central processing Unit, 12 MHz, 32 Kbyte, Fixed IC697CPU731
Lithium Battery IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
12-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
13
IC697CPU771
GFK-0349F 12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit
August1997
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU771)
datasheet GFK-0349F
Features Program and data memory is available by the attach-

ment of an expansion memory board with up to 512
D Single slot CPU Kbytes of battery-backed CMOS RAM.
D 2K inputs and outputs (any mix)
D Up to 8K analog I/O
a44714
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function
D 12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697PLC
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
OK
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based software

ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
RUN
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over

ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port.
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
memory in the same slot
CENTRAL CPU 771
D Configurable data and program memory
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
PROCESSING MODULE OK
UNIT RUN
ÎÎ
Î
D Battery-backed calendar clock OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î
D Three position operation mode switch
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
ÎÎ
D Password controlled access ENABLED
D Three Status LEDs

ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
D Software Configuration (No DIP switches or
ÎÎ
Î
jumpers) STOP
ÎÎ
Î
D Reference information inside front door. BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
Functions ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
The CPU 771 is a single slot PLC CPU which is pro-
ÎÎ
Î
grammed and configured by MS-DOS or Windows MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎ
Î
based programming software to perform real time con- 12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
trol of machines, processes and material handling sys-
tems.
ÎÎ
Î
The CPU 771 CPU communicates with I/O and smart
option modules over the rack-mounted backplane ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE

C.1 Standard format. ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN in-
ÎÎ
Î
terface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Î
MODULE
IC697CPU771
Controller for IC660/661 I/O and Communications LABEL
modules, in addition to all of the IC697 family of dis- 44A726758–106
crete and analog I/O modules (see the applicable Pro-

grammable Controller Installation Manual for more in-
formation on supported modules).
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
August1997
Operation of this module may be controlled by the manual, shipped with your PLC programming
three position switch on the module or remotely by an software, describes how to properly install the
attached programmer and programming software. equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
CPU status is indicated by three green LEDs on the supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
front of the module. please refer to the Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g
programming software, for additional guidelines.
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
G
P C B B
S P T C
ring to the applicable Programmer Controller Instal-
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
U M
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
or
N lation Manual (See reference 5).
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
D Make sure rack power is off.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ONE D Install expansion memory.
METER
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
D Connect the battery to either of the battery con-
nectors on the module.
ÎÎÎÎ Î B
Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
P
Î D Put toggle switch in Stop position.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
R C
M M
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See figure 1)
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ D Turn on power.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î

IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the
RACK 6
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
NOTE top LED stays on and the middle and bottom LEDs
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
G
are off. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
B B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
M After the program has been verified the toggle switch
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
or GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
N
B may be moved to the appropriate operation mode
Î
ÎÎ
C
position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch and the state of the program.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
METER RACK 7
Expansion Memory
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
P B
S R
M The CPU 771 must have a CMOS expansion memory
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
board. The CMOS expansion memory board provides
CMOS RAM memory of 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes.

Î
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK) The battery which supports this memory is located on
LEGEND CPU – SELECTED CPU MODEL
BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711 the main CPU board housing. (See figure 2)
BTM – BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
GBC/NBC
PCM
–
–
IC66* BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73*
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on
PS – POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 the CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
programmer (See reference 1).
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration
Installation Programmer Connection, Parallel

It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in Figure
detailed information about installation, startup, and 1. Consult Reference 1 for a description of program-
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation ming functions.
13-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit GFK-0349F

August1997
This port provides a serial connection to a Work Station

a42711
Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
computer, or other serial device, through the
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ connection can be made with available cables or you
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î may build cables to fit the needs of your application.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ a43591g
ÎÎ
OPEN
Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL
REPLACEMENT CPU 771 RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY
Î ÎÎ Î
MODULE OK
CONNECTOR
RUN P C B P G
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS S P T C B
CURRENTLY ENABLED U M M C
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED ON = OK, ENABLED or
BATTERY N
RUN WITH B
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CONNECTOR OUTPUTS C
ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RUN WITH ONE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
DISABLED RACK 1
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
STOP
ÎÎ
Î
B
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
BATTERY R
M
CONNECTIONS
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
IC66*
BATTERY BEFORE
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BATTERY. USE
EXPANSION
IC697ACC701
ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RACK 7
BOARD NOTE
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM713 MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION
IC697MEM715 12MHZ CENTRAL B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM717 R (MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT M
IC697MEM719 GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î SERIAL PORT ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ
Î Connection to Programmer
ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
IC697CPU771 Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
LABEL
44A726758–106 network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
CPU 771
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
Figure 2. CPU 771 - Location of Major Features
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Serial Port Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3. Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
August1997
Configuration If during power-up diagnostics a low battery is de-

tected the Module OK LED (top) will not stay on.
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with Specific indication of a low battery state is detailed in
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. Reference 2.
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module Removing a Module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically The instructions below should be followed when re-
during operation. The actual configuration must be moving a module from its slot in a rack.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func- D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
tion for configured fault response. the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
Batteries D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
in figure 2. This battery maintains program and data rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
memory when power is removed and operates the from the backplane connector.
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be- D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
fore removing the old battery. from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
1 ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual

Battery
Shelflife 10 years at 20_C (68_F)
Memory retention 6 months nominal without applied power.
Current Required from 5V Bus 1.1 Amps with Expansion Memory (all sizes) 1.2 Amps
Time of Day Clock accuracy " 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy " .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422compatible Serial connection to programmer

CPU, 12 Mhz, Expandable IC697CPU771
64 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory IC697MEM713
13-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
14
IC697CPU772
GFK-0588E 12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point
August 1997 Central Processing Unit
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU772)
datasheet GFK-0588E
Features Programmable Controller Installation Manual for more

information on supported modules).
D Supports floating point calculations.
D Single slot CPU.
D 2K inputs and outputs (any mix).
a44793g
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OK
D 12 MHz, 80C186 microprocessor.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RUN
ENABLED
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O.
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based soft- ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ware products running on Windowsr 95 or Win-
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
dows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
CENTRAL CPU 772
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
SNP port. PROCESSING MODULE OK
UNIT RUN
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
expansion memory in the same slot. ON = OK, ENABLED
D Configurable data and program memory.

ÎÎ
Î RUN WITH
ÎÎ
Î Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
D Three position operation mode switch.
ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
D Password controlled access.

STOP
D Three status LEDs. ÎÎ

Î
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
ÎÎ
Î
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
jumpers to set).
ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
D Reference information inside front door.

IC697ACC701
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions 12MHZ CENTRAL
ÎÎ
Î
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
The CPU 772 is a single slot PLC CPU which allows
floating point calculations. The CPU 772 is programmed
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT
and configured by MS-DOS or WIndows based pro- RS–422
ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
gramming software to perform real time control of ma-
ÎÎ
Î
chines, processes and material handling systems. The
USE THIS MODULE
CPU 772 communicates with I/O and smart option
ÎÎ
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ
modules over the rack mounted backplane
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME MODULE
IC697CPU772
C.1 Standard format. LABEL
44A726758–123R01
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN interface

modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller
for IC660/IC661 I/O products, Communications mod-
ules, I/O Link Interface, and all of the IC697 family of
discrete and analog I/O modules (see the applicable
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-0588E 12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Program and data memory for the CPU 772 is available and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
by attachment of an expansion memory board with detailed information about installation, startup, and
either 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes of battery-backed proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
CMOS RAM. manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position switch or remotely by an attached pro-
grammer and programming software. CPU status is
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
indicated by three green LEDs on the front of the
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
module.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ring to the applicable programmable controller
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
hardware installation manual.
G
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
P C B B
S P T
U M
C D Be sure that power to the PLC is turned off before
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
or
N
installing the CPU 772 module
B
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
C
the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ONE
METER
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector en-
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
RACK 1 suring that the mating screws remain aligned with
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
their respective standoff.
B P
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
R C
M M
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î IC66*
I/O BLOCK
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connec-
tors on the module.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ RACK 6 D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
NOTE
G TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B
Î Î
B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
D Turn on power.
M
or GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
N
B The module should power up and blink the top LED.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
C
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM) top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
RACK 7
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
P
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
B
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if
Î Î
S R
M connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed re-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
gardless of key position). After the program has been
I/O TERMINATOR verified the toggle switch may be moved to the ap-
(LAST RACK)
propriate operation mode position. The LEDs indicate
BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711 the position of the toggle switch, memory protection
GBC/NBC – IC66* BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73* status, and the state of the program.
PCM – PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
PS – POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Expansion Memory
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram The CPU 772 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
memory board which provides CMOS RAM memory
of 64K, 128K, 256K or 512 Kbytes. The battery which
Installation supports this memory is located on the main CPU board
(see Figure 2). Installation of a CMOS expansion
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or memory board on the CPU will require initialization of
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe the CPU with the programmer (see Reference 2).
14-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit GFK-0588E

August 1997
a44794g
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
ÎÎ Î
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
This port provides a serial connection to a Standard
Serial COM port, or to a Work Station Interface board
ÎÎÎÎÎ installed in the programming computer.
ÎÎÎ
OPEN
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ SERIAL a43591g
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
REPLACEMENT CPU 772
BATTERY RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
MODULE OK
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CONNECTOR
RUN
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
P C B P G
Î
CURRENTLY ENABLED
INSTALLED S P T C B
ON = OK, ENABLED U M M C
Î
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH or
OUTPUTS N
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ENABLED B
C
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED ONE
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
STOP
RACK 1
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
R
INSTALL NEW M
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Î
BATTERY. USE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
IC697ACC701 IC66*
I/O BLOCK
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
EXPANSION
MODULE FUNCTION
MEMORY
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
BOARD 12MHZ CENTRAL RACK 7
PROCESSING UNIT
Î
IC697MEM713 WITH FLOATING POINT NOTE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
MATH COPROCESSOR TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION
IC697MEM715
B
Î
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC697MEM717 R (MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
SERIAL PORT
M GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC697MEM719
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Î Î
Î
MODULE
IC697CPU772
LABEL
44A726758–123R01
Connection to Programmer
CPU 772 Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
Figure 2. CPU 772 - Location of Major Features 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
Programmer Connection, Parallel you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the programmer running Windows software to the
programmer is connected to the top port connector on Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
programming functions. Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-0588E 12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Configuration fore removing the old battery. If during power-up

The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. battery state is detailed in Reference 3.
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
during operation. The actual configuration must be
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func- D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
1 for a description of configuration functions. the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
Batteries with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data from the backplane connector.
memory when power is removed and operates the D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be- from the rack.
Current required from 5V Bus 1.2 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy ± 3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock ± .01% maximum
Serial Port RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
Table 2. References
Reference Title

CPU 772, 16 MHz, Expandable, Floating Point IC697CPU772
64 Kbyte, CMOS Expansion Memory IC697MEM713
14-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
15
IC697CPU781
GFK-0766D 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU781)
datasheet GFK-0766D
Features a45156
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Single slot CPU.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
D Up to 8K analog I/O. OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
RUN
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function. ENABLED
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B
A
ÎÎÎÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
T
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O products. T
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

E
CPU 781
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software CENTRAL
R
Y
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
TOP
ÎÎ
Î
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows PROCESSOR OFF
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
UNIT ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
port.
Î
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed

FRONT
Î
MODULE OK
expansion memory in the same slot.
Î
RUN
OUTPUTS
D Configurable data and program memory. ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Three position operation mode switch.
Î Î ÎÎ
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î
PROTECTED
D
RUN WITH
Password controlled access.
Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
D
Keyswitch memory protection RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
D
Four status LEDs. STOP
BATTERY
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or CONNECTORS
jumpers to set). INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE

UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Functions
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
The CPU 781 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
DOS or Windows based programming software to RS-485
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
perform real time control of machines, processes and COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
material handling systems. USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
The CPU 781 communicates with I/O and smart op-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPU781
tion modules over the rack mounted backplane LABEL
ÎÎÎÎÎ
44A726758-128R01
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications mod-
ules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog Program and data memory for the CPU 781 is available
I/O modules (see the applicable Programmable Control- by the attachment of an expansion memory board with
ler Installation Manual for more information on sup- either 128, 256 or 512 KBytes of battery-backed CMOS
ported modules). RAM, or 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes of Non-volatile flash.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
August 1997
Operation of this module may be controlled by the detailed information about installation, startup, and
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
attached programmer and programming software. manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
Program and configuration data can be locked describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
through software passwords or manually by the PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
protected position, program and configuration data can Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel shipped with the PLC programming software, for
only (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status additional guidelines.
of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the Installation should not be attempted without refer-
front of the module. ring to the applicable hardware installation manual.
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g
D Align the captive screws on the memory board

ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
with the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
P C B G
S P T B
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
U M C
or
N
ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
with their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the stand-
ONE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ offs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
B P
R C
M M
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ D Turn on power.
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING The module should power up and blink the top LED.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B G CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
R
M
B
C (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
or
N
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM). the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

B
C are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be pro-
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ONE IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
METER RACK 7 grammed. After the program has been verified the
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
toggle switch may be moved to the appropriate op-
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
P
S
B
R eration mode position. The LEDs indicate the posi-
M
tion of the toggle switch, memory protection status,
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
LEGEND
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CPU - ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
SELECTED CPU MODEL
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
and the state of the program.
BRM -
BTM -
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
Expansion Memory
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PCM -
PS -
POWER SUPPLY, The CPU 781 must have a CMOS expansion memory
PWR710/711/724/748
board. Expansion memory boards are available with
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes, 512 KBytes, and 256 KBytes
with 256 KBytes of non-volatile Flash memory. The
battery which supports the CMOS RAM memory is
Installation located on the main CPU board. (See Figure 2).
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or Installation of an expansion memory board on the
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide programmer (See Reference 2).
15-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit GFK-0766D

August 1997
Programmer Connection, Parallel

The programmer connects to the top port on the bus
transmitter (IC697BEM713) system interface module
a45157
MEMORY for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only),
ÎÎ
PROTECT
KEY see Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
SWITCH programming functions.
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Serial Port
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
B
A This port provides a serial connection to an IC647
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
T
T communications interface board installed in the pro-
OPEN
ÎÎ
Î
E
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
REPLACEMENT R CPU 781 gramming computer.
BATTERY Y TOP
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR OFF The serial connection can also be made from the
Standard Serial COM port on the CPU to the serial port
Î ÎÎ
Î
CURRENTLY ON
INSTALLED REMOTE PROGRAMMER on the programming computer, or other serial device,
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
MEMORY PROTECT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
KEY POSITION
through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
Î ÎÎ
Î
FRONT
Î
MODULE OK (IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter
Î ÎÎ
Î
(IC690ACC901). This connection can be made with
Î
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
available cables or you may build cables to fit the needs
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY
PROTECT of your particular application. For more information on
Î ÎÎ
Î
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY serial communications, see Reference 3.
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH SERIAL a43591g
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED P C B P G
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
STOP S P T C B
EXPANSION U M M C
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY or
BOARD CONNECTORS
G
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM731 B
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697MEM732 INSTALL NEW C
IC697MEM733
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC697MEM735 UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE ONE
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697ACC701 METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION RACK 1
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
Î ÎÎ
Î
B
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
R
M
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66*
RS-485
COMPATIBLE I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 7
MODULE NOTE
ÎÎ
Î
IC697CPU781 TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCON-
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
LABEL B NECTING CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST
44A726758-128R01 R BRM IS 50 FEET (15 METERS) MAXIMUM.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
M ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
CPU 781
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 2. CPU 781 - Location of Major Features Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
August 1997
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface Batteries
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network memory when power is removed and operates the
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface. calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be-
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the fore removing the old battery. If during power-up
programmer running Windows software to the diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295. Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
Configuration the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with the back of the cover.
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
during operation. The actual configuration must be from the backplane connector.
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi- D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func- from the rack.

Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy ±3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock ±.01% maximum
Table 2. References
Reference Title
15-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit GFK-0766D

August 1997

CPU 781, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Memory IC697CPU781
128 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory IC697MEM731
256 Kbyte with 256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash Memory, 32-Bit IC697MEM732
CMOS Expansion Memory
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
16 IC697CPU782
GFK-0767D 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU782)
datasheet GFK-0767D
Features a45154
D Supportsfloating point calculations

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Single slot CPU.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
D
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
12K inputs and outputs (any mix). OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
RUN
D Up to 8K analog I/O. ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function. A
ÎÎÎÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
T
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor.
T
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

E
R CPU 782
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts. CENTRAL Y
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
TOP
ÎÎ
Î
PROCESSOR OFF
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software prod-
UNIT ON
ucts running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î
MEMORY PROTECT
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. KEY POSITION
FRONT
Î
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion MODULE OK
Î
RUN
memory in the same slot. OUTPUTS
ENABLED
D Configurable data and program memory. MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î
D Three position operation mode switch.
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
Î
OUTPUTS
D Password controlled access. ENABLED
RUN WITH
D Keyswitch memory protection

OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
D Four status LEDs. BATTERY
CONNECTORS
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to
INSTALL NEW
set). BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD

BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions
16MHz 32 BIT
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The SERIAL PORT
RS-485
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CPU782 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS COMPATIBLE
or Windows based programming software to perform
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
real time control of machines, processes and material
MODULE
handling systems. IC697CPU782
LABEL
ÎÎÎÎÎ
44A726758-129R01
The CPU 782 communicates with I/O and smart op-
tion modules over the rack mounted backplane
terface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Program and data memory for the CPU 782 is available
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications mod- by the attachment of an expansion memory board with
ules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog either 128, 256 or 512 KBytes of battery-backed CMOS
I/Omodules. RAM, or 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes of Non-volatile flash.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-0767D 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Operation of this module may be controlled by the proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
attached programmer and programming software. describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
Program and configuration data can be locked PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
through software passwords or manually by the such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
protected position, program and configuration data cn shipped with the PLC programming software, for
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel additional guidelines.
only(i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status Installation should not be attempted without refer-
of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the ring to the applicable hardware installation manual.
front of the module.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g D Align the captive screws on the memory board
with the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector

ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
P C B G
S P T B ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
U M C
or with their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the stand-
N
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
offs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ D Connect the battery to either of the battery con-

ONE
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
METER
RACK 1
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
B P
Î Î
R C
M M
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
D Turn on power.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RACK 6
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ The module should power up and blink the top LED.
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
R
M
B
C (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
or AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
are off.
N
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

B
C The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
METER RACK 7 After the program has been verified the toggle switch
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ may be moved to the appropriate operation mode
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
P B
S R position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
M
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the
program.
ÎÎ
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND CPU - SELECTED CPU MODULE
BRM -
BTM -
Expansion Memory
PCM - PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
PS - POWER SUPPLY, The CPU 781 must have a CMOS expansion memory
PWR710/711/724/748
board. Expansion memory boards are available with
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes, 512 KBytes, and 256 KBytes
with 256 KBytes non-volatile flash memory. The bat-
Installation tery which supports the CMOS RAM memory is lo-
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or cated on the main CPU board. (See Figure 2).
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe Installation of an expansion memory board on the
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
detailed information about installation, startup, and programmer (See Reference 2).
16-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit GFK-0767D

August 1997

a45155
MEMORY The programmer connects to the top port on the bus
ÎÎ
PROTECT
KEY
transmitter (IC697BEM713) system interface module
SWITCH for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only),
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î see Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
programming functions.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Serial Port
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
B
A The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
T
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
T
OPEN E
CPU 782 This port provides a serial connection to an IC647
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
REPLACEMENT
ÎÎ
R
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
Y TOP
communications interface board installed in the pro-
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OFF
gramming computer.
Î ÎÎ
Î
CURRENTLY ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
INSTALLED
MEMORY PROTECT The serial connection can also be made from the
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
Î
KEY POSITION
CONNECTOR
FRONT
Standard Serial COM port on the CPU to the serial port
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
MODULE OK on the programming computer, or other serial device,
RUN
through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
(IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE (IC690ACC901). This connection can be made with
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMER
ONLY available cables or you may build cables to fit the needs
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED of your particular application. For more information on
RUN WITH
serial communications, see Reference 3.
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH SERIAL a43591g
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
DISABLED RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
EXPANSION STOP
MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
BOARD CONNECTORS P C B P G
IC697MEM731 S P T C B
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM732 U M M C
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
INSTALL NEW
IC697MEM733 or
BATTERY BEFORE
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM735 UNPLUGGING OLD G
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY. USE B
IC697ACC701 C
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION
Î ÎÎ
Î
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL ONE
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎÎ
WITH FLOATING POINT
RACK 1
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
MATH COPROCESSOR
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
SERIAL PORT R
Î ÎÎ
Î
M
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
IC66*
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
I/O BLOCK
MODULE
Î
IC697CPU781
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
LABEL
44A726758-129R01 RACK 7
NOTE
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
CPU 782 B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
R (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
M AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
Figure 2. CPU 782 - Location of Major Features ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î

t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-0767D 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP Batteries

Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface. LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Removing a Module
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295. The following instructions should be followed when
Configuration D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
during operation. The actual configuration must be rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi- from the backplane connector.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func-
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
1 for a description of configuration functions. from the rack.

Batter
Shelf Life 10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Table 2. References
Reference Title
16-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit GFK-0767D

August 1997

CPU 782, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point IC697CPU782
256 Kbyte with 256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash Memory, 32-bit IC697MEM732
CMOS Expansion Memory
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
17
IC697CPM915
GFK-1119B 32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
August 1997 1 Mbyte Memory
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory (IC697CPM915)
datasheet GFK-1119B
Features ules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/Omodules.
D Single slot CPU
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
a47065
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
same slot
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
Supports floating point calculations
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
12K inputs and outputs (any mix)
OK
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Up to 8K analog I/O RUN
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ENABLED
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
B
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
32 MHz, 80486DX microprocessor MEM PROTECT A
T
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ
T
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O) E
R CPM 915
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
CENTRAL Y TOP
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows PROCESSOR OFF

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
UNIT
ON
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
port.
ÎÎ
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
D
KEY POSITION
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Configurable data and program memory
ÎÎ
FRONT
D MODULE OK
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Battery-backed calendar clock
ÎÎ
RUN
D OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Three position operation mode switch
ÎÎ
ENABLED
MEMORY
D PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Password controlled access REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ONLY
Î Î Î
Remote programmer keyswitch ON = OK, ENABLED,
memory protection PROTECTED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎ
D Four status LEDs OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ENABLED
D Software configuration (No DIP switches

Î Î Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
DISABLED
or jumpers) STOP
D Reference information inside front door

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
D In-system upgradable firmware

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
Functions IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
32 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
The CPM 915 Central Processing Unit (CPU) is a PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
single slot programmable controller CPU which al- COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
lows floating point calculations. The CPM915 is pro-

grammed and configured by MS-DOS or WIndows
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RS-485
based programming software to perform real time COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
control of machines, processes and material handling
ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
systems. It communicates with I/O and smart option
ÎÎ
MODULE
modules over the rack mounted backplane IC697CPM915
ÎÎÎÎÎ
LABEL
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME 44A726758-146R01

t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-1119B 32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
August 1997
compatible computer to the serial port of the module
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g
and running the Loader software included with the
ÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ
firmware floppy disk.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
P C B G
S P T B
U M C
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
or
N Operation, Protection, and Module Status
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
ONE
METER
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an at-
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
tached programmer and programming software. Pro-
gram and configuration data can be locked through
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
B
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î P software passwords or manually by the memory protect
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
R C
M M
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
ÎÎ
program and configuration data can only be changed by
IC66*
I/O BLOCK a programmer connected parallel only (to the Bus Trans-
mitter module). The status of a CPU is indicated by the
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ RACK 6 four green LEDs on the front of the module.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
NOTE
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
R B
M C (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL Installation
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
or
N (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
C
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE
METER RACK 7 and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
detailed information about installation, startup, and
P B proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
S R
M
ÎÎ describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK) PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
LEGEND CPU - SELECTED CPU MODEL such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
PCM - PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711 shipped with the PLC programming software, for
PS - POWER SUPPLY,
PWR710/711/724/748 additional guidelines.
Figure 1. Typical Programmable Controller System D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable programmable controller
Configuration hardware installation manual.
User Memory D Connect the battery to either of the battery con-
nectors on the module (see Figure 2).
Program and data memory for the CPM 915 is pro- D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
vided by a memory board with 1M byte of battery- D Put the keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF posi-
backed CMOS RAM. This memory board is an inte- tion.
gral part of the CPM 915 module and does not need to D Make sure that rack power is off.
be ordered separately. D Install the CPM 915 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
Flash Memory D Turn on power.

The module should power up and the top LED should
This module uses flash memory for storage of the op- blink. When the diagnostics have completed success-
erating system firmware (Note that this module does not fully, the top LED stays on and the second and third
support storage of user program in the flash memory). This LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is
allows updates of the firmware without disassem- in the OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be pro-
bling the module or replacing EPROMs. The operat- grammed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be pro-
ing system firmware is updated by connecting a PC grammed regardless of key position).
17-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1119B
August 1997
After the program has been verified the toggle switch Programmer Connection, Parallel
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode posi-
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS based programmer
tion. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
only) the programmer is connected to the top port on
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown
program.
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
MEMORY
a47066 programming functions.
ÎÎ
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH Serial Port
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Work Station Interface board installed in the program-
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
B
A
ming computer.
T
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
OPEN
T The serial connection can also be made from the serial
E
CPM 915 port on the CPU to the serial port on the program-
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
REPLACEMENT
Î Î
R
BATTERY Y TOP
CONNECTOR ming computer, or other serial device, through the
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OFF
Î ÎÎ
Î
CURRENTLY ON
INSTALLED REMOTE PROGRAMMER RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
MEMORY PROTECT
Î ÎÎ
Î
connection can be made with available cables or you
Î
BATTERY KEY POSITION
CONNECTOR
FRONT
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
MODULE OK
RUN application. See reference 3 for more information on
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED serial communications.
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL a43591g
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
P C B P G
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
OUTPUTS C B
S P T
ENABLED U M M C
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
or
OUTPUTS
DISABLED N
Î ÎÎ
Î
B
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1 MBYTE STOP C
MEMORY BOARD
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
ONE
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
INSTALL NEW METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
BATTERY BEFORE
RACK 1
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
MODULE FUNCTION R
Î ÎÎ
Î
M
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
ÎÎÎÎ
FLOATING POINT MATH
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE IC66*
Î ÎÎ
Î
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE RACK 7
Î ÎÎ
Î
NOTE
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
MODULE R 50 FEET (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS
M
Î
IC697CPM915 MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
LABEL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
44A726758–146R01
CPM 915
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to

Figure 2. CPM 915 - Location of Major Features Programmer
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-1119B 32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
August 1997
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP Batteries

Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet memory when power is removed and operates the
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be-
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your fore removing the old battery. Specific indication of a
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network low battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
programmer running Windows software to the Removing a Module
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet The instructions below should be followed when re-
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the moving a module from its slot in a rack.
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295. D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Configuration the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
during operation. The actual configuration must be D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi- it from the rack.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func-
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference
Table 1. References
Reference Title
1 Programming Software User’s Manual
17-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1119B
August 1997
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPM915 [

Battery
Shelf life 10 years at 20° C (68° F)
Current required from 5V bus 2.8 Amps nominal
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible Programmer Serial Attachment

Central Processing Unit IC697CPM915
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
18
IC697CPM925
GFK-1120D 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
November 1999 1 Mbyte Memory
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory (IC697CPM925)
datasheet GFK-1120D
Features a45673
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Single slot CPU
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
same slot
D Supports floating point calculations
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
OK
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RUN
D 12K inputs and outputs (any mix) ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ B
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
A
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
T
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function T
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
E
D 64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor CENTRAL
R CPM 925
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
Y TOP
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O PROCESSOR OFF
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
UNIT
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software ON
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows

REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
MEMORY PROTECT

KEY POSITION
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
FRONT
port MODULE OK
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
RUN
Configurable data and program memory OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ENABLED
D Battery-backed calendar clock MEMORY
PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D
REMOTE
Three position operation mode switch PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D Password controlled access ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎ
Remote programmer keyswitch OUTPUTS
ENABLED
memory protection
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
D
OUTPUTS
Four status LEDs
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
DISABLED
STOP
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY
or jumpers) CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D Reference information inside front door INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D
UNPLUGGING OLD
In-system upgradable firmware BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
FLOATING POINT MATH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
The CPM 925 is a single slot programmable controller UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The SERIAL PORT
CPM 925 CPU is programmed and configured by
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
to perform real time control of machines, processes IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
and material handling systems. It communicates with MODULE
ÎÎ
IC697CPM925
ÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted LABEL
44A726758-147R01
backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way
of the VME C.1 Standard format.
ules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/Omodules.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-1120D 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
November 1999
Operation, Protection, and Module Status

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g
ÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Operation of this module can be controlled by the
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
P C B G
S P T
U M
B
C
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
or attached programmer and programming software.
N
Program and configuration data can be locked through
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
software passwords or manually by the memory protect
ONE
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER
RACK 1
program and configuration data can only be changed by
a programmer connected parallel only (to the Bus
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
B
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î P Transmitter module). The status of a CPU is indicated
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
R C
M M
by the four green LEDs on the front of the module.
ÎÎ IC66*
I/O BLOCK
The CPM 925 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40_C
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ RACK 6
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
NOTE
should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
the CPU.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
R B (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
M C
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
or
N
B
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM). Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
C IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM) the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE
METER RACK 7 Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
B
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
S R
M Installation
ÎÎ It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND CPU - SELECTED CPU MODEL
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711 and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 detailed information about installation, startup, and
PS - POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
Figure 1. Typical Programmable Controller System describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
Configuration PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
User Memory such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Program and data memory for the CPM 925 is provided shipped with the PLC programming software, for
by a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed additional guidelines.
CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of
the CPM 925 module and is included with the module.. D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installa-
tion Manual.
Flash Memory
This module uses flash memory for storage of the op- tors on the module (see Figure 2).
erating system firmware (this module does not support D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
storage of user program in the flash memory). This allows
updates of the firmware without disassembling the
D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi-
tion.
module or replacing EPROMs. The operating system
firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible D Make sure that rack power is off.
computer to the module’s serial port and running the D Install the CPM 925 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Loader software included with the firmware floppy Figure 1).
disk. D Turn on power.
18-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1120D
November 1999
MEMORY
a45674 third LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the
PROTECT keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ÎÎ
KEY
SWITCH ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
can be programmed regardless of key position). After
the program has been verified the toggle switch can be
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î B
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
A
T
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
T
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
E
CPM 925
R
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
Y TOP
OFF
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
ÎÎ
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
ON
CURRENTLY Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
BATTERY Figure 1. See Reference 1 for a description of
Î ÎÎ
Î
KEY POSITION
Î
CONNECTOR
FRONT programming functions.
Î ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
MODULE OK
RUN SERIAL a45301
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ENABLED RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER P C B P G
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ONLY S P T C B
ON = OK, ENABLED, U M M C
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECTED OR
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
RUN WITH N
B
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS C
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ENABLED
RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
*
DISABLED
Î ÎÎ
Î
1 MBYTE STOP ONE IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
MEMORY BOARD BATTERY
METER RACK 1
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎB
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
R
BATTERY BEFORE M
UNPLUGGING OLD
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC66*
MODULE FUNCTION
BLOCK
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
FLOATING POINT MATH
Î ÎÎ
Î
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM NOTE
RACK 7
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
ÎÎÎÎ
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET-
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
SERIAL PORT B MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
R
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485 GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
M
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
COMPATIBLE * FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
MODULE RACK.
IC697CPM925
LABEL TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
44A726758–147R01
CPM 925 Programmer
Serial Port
Figure 2. CPM 925 - Location of Major Features RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU (see Figure 3).
Interface board installed in the programming computer.
blink. When the diagnostics have completed The serial connection can also be made from the serial
successfully, the top LED stays on and the second and port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-1120D 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
November 1999
computer, or other serial device, through the Batteries

RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
connection can be made with available cables or you in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular memory when power is removed and operates the
application. See reference 3 for more information on calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
serial communications. before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type Removing a Module
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network The instructions below should be followed when
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface. removing a module from its slot in a rack.
programmer running Windows software to the D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Ethernet Interface. the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP, the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2) the back of the cover.
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration from the backplane connector.
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. it from the rack.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to
configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual
module and rack configuration at power-up and
periodically during operation. The actual
configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU
alarm processor function for configured fault
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
configuration functions.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
18-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1120D
November 1999

Battery
Shelf life 10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Operating Temperature 0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 40_C (32_F to 104_F); without forced air
Serial Port

Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC IC697ACC721
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult
the factory for price and availability.
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
19
IC697CPX772
GFK-1429F 96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
November 1999 Central Processing Unit
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
datasheet GFK-1429F
Features a45720
D Single slot CPU with three serial ports

D Provides 512 Kbyte of battery-backed RAM ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
D
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
OK P1 CPX 772
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
RUN P2
D
TOP
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later EN P3 OFF
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Supports floating point calculations MEM PROTECT ON
D B
2K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
A MEMORY PROTECT
T
analogI/O KEY POSITION
T
Î Î
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function E
R
FRONT
OK P1
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor CENTRAL Y RUN P2
D PROCESSOR EN P3
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O UNIT
D Programmed by MS-DOSr software products, or
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Windowsr based software products running on PROTECTED

RUN WITH
Windowsr 95 or Windows NT,r over Ethernet
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
TCP/IP, or through an SNP port
Î ÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH
D
OUTPUTS
Configurable data and program memory DISABLED
D
STOP
Battery-backed calendar clock BATTERY
D
CONNEC-
Three position operation mode switch TORS
D Password controlled access
INSTALL NEW
D
BATTERY BEFORE
Remote programmer keyswitch UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE-
memory protection IC697ACC701
D
Seven status LEDs MODULE FUNCTION

PROCESSING UNIT
or jumpers)
D Reference information inside front door SERIAL PORT 1
D
RS-232
In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
The CPX772 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
FACTORY TEST
Windows based programming software to perform
SERIAL PORT 3
handling systems. It communicates with I/O and RS-485
smart option modules over the rack-mounted COMPATIBLE
backplane using the VME C.1 Standard format.

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ USE THIS MODULE
Î ÎÎÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
Supported option modules include LAN Interface MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697CPX772
LABEL
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric 44A726758–151R01
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link
Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to

PARALLEL a45677 the module’s serial port and running the software in-
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER cluded with the firmware upgrade kit.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
C B
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ G
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
S P T B
U M C
or
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
N
B
C Operation of this module can be controlled by the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE attached programmer and programming software.
METER
Program and configuration data can be locked
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
through software passwords or manually by the
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
B P
R C memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M M
protected position, program and configuration data can
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
IC66*
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
I/O BLOCK only (to the Bus Transmitter module). CPU status is
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ indicated by the seven green LEDs on the front of the
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6
NOTE
module.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
R B
M C
or
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL Operating Temperature
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
B
C For continuous operation above 50 degrees C, such as
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM) in a minimum size enclosure with no air flow, derat-
ONE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ing is necessary for the 100W AC/DCPower Supply
Î
METER RACK 7
(PWR711), and the 90W DC Power Supplies
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î (PWR724/PWR748), as shown in the chart below.
P B
S R
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M
PWR724
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

Î
PWR748 PWR711
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK) 90W 100W
LEGEND CPU - SELECTED CPU MODEL 75W 90W
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713 60W 80W
PCM - PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711 60W
PS - POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
50W
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example 40W
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
30W
User RAM Memory 20W
The CPX772 has a built-in memory board with 512K 10W
of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for user data

(program, configuration, and register data) storage. 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C )
User Flash Memory
The CPX772 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash
memory for user data (program, configuration, regis-
Installation
ter data) storage. Use of this flash memory is op- It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
tional. or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory detailed information about installation, startup, and
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
the operating system firmware. This allows firmware manual, shipped with your PLC programming
to be updated without disassembling the module or software, describes how to properly install the
replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is equipment.
19-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory GFK-1429F

Central Processing Unit November 1999
If the PLC installation must comply with supported MEMORY

a45721
PROTECT
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
ÎÎ
KEY
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to SWITCH
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software, for additional guidelines.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
CPX 772
STATUS TOP
Installation should not be attempted without referring
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDS OFF
to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON
Manual. RUN/STOP B
A
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
SWITCH MEMORY PROTECT
T
KEY POSITION
T
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
OPEN E FRONT
tors on the module (see Figure 2). REPLACEMENT R OK P1
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D
BATTERY
ÎÎ
Y
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position. CONNECTOR
RUN
EN
P2
P3
D
Î ÎÎ
Î
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi- MEM PROTECT
CURRENTLY
tion. ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED PROTECTED
D Make sure that rack power is off. BATTERY RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
Î
OUTPUTS
D Install the CPX 772 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see ENABLED

RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
Figure 1). SERIAL PORT 1 OUTPUTS
DISABLED
RS-232
D
Î ÎÎ
Î
Turn on power. STOP
BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
The module should power up and the top left (OK) SERIAL PORT 2
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have BATTERY BEFORE
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The MODULE FUNCTION
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROCESSING UNIT
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
Î ÎÎ
Î
FACTORY TEST
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the ONLY SERIAL PORT 1
Î ÎÎ
Î
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). RS-232
512 KBYTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT 2
After the program has been verified the toggle switch MEMORY BOARD
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position; RUN WITH OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
ÎÎÎÎ
FACTORY TEST
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
ÎÎÎÎ
memory protection status, status of serial port activity, SERIAL PORT 3
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPX772
LABEL
44A726758–151R01
the programmer is connected to the top port on the CPX 772
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
User‘s Manual for a description of programming
functions. Figure 2. CPX 772 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
SERIAL a45301 H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. It has a
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 0
ÎÎÎÎ PROGRAMMER 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
appearance (although larger) to modular jacks com-
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
P C B P G
S P T C B monly used for telephones and modems.
U M M C
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OR
N
Table 1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B
C
Pin Signal
* Number Name Description
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ONE IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
METER RACK 1 1* CTS Clear To Send
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
2 TXD Transmit Data
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
B
R 3 0V Signal Ground
M
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
4 0V Signal Ground
5 RXD Receive Data
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
IC66*
BLOCK
6 RTS Request to Send
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ * Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING of the module.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
B MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
R
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
M
*
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
D-connector.
Î
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
RACK. Table 2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Pin Signal
Number Name Description
Programmer 1* Shield Cable Shield
2 NC No Connection
Programmer Connection, Serial Ports 3 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial 5 +5VDC Logic Power **
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the 6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a 7 SG Signal Ground
programming computer or other serial devices.
8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send
Starting with Firmware Release 8.00, support for 9 RT Resistor Termination
program Load/Store operations and Datagrams was 10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was 11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in 12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important 13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
Product Information sheet that ships with the module. 14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send
Protocols Supported *Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
Protocol Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 ** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
SNP (Slave) Yes Yes Yes
Break-Free SNP (Slave) Yes Yes No D Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible,
SNPX No No No but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female D-
connector. Pin-out information can be found in the
RTU No No No IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
19-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory GFK-1429F

Three of the LED indicators on the front of the CPX PLC and the programmer running Windows software
772 provide the status of serial port activity on the to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
CPU without having a terminal connected. The information on the programmer connection via
LEDs are labeled as P1, P2, and P3 to correspond to Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
the applicable port. Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
The connection from a CPU serial port to the serial
port on a programming computer or other serial
device requires a serial cable and, for Ports 2 and 3, a Configuration
converter. This connection can be made with the
IC690ACC901 cable kit (includes cable and The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
miniconverter) or you may build cables to fit the MS-DOS or Windows based programming software,
needs of your particular application. See the IC697 although the MS-DOS software does not support all
PLC Installation Manual for more information on serial features, such as Bulk Memory Area (BMA), which
communications, cables, and converters. requires the Windows software version 2.2 or later.
See the IPI shipped with this module for
programming software feature support details. There
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet configuration at power-up and periodically during
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the operation. The actual configuration must be the same
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet as the programmed configuration. Deviations are
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting reported to the CPU alarm processor function for
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP configured fault response. Refer to the applicable
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Programming Software User‘s Manual for a description
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the of configuration functions.
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Battery D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of

A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data the back of the cover.
memory when power is removed and operates the D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable from the backplane connector.
Programmable Controller Reference Manual. D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Removing a Module
The instructions listed below should be followed
when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Table 3. Specifications for IC697CPX772 [

Battery: Shelf life 5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Battery: Memory retention 6 months nominal without applied power.
Operating Temperature 0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F)
Serial Ports Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
VME Compatibility System designed to support the VME standard C.1
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.

Central Processing Unit IC697CPX772
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbyte Memory
Note: For Conformal Coat option please consult the factory for price and availability.
19-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
20
IC697CPX782
GFK-1431F 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
PLC CPUs
datasheet GFK-1431F
Features a45722

D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
same slot
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
D
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
OK P1 CPX 782
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
RUN P2
D
TOP
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later EN P3 OFF
D
Î
D B
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
A MEMORY PROTECT
T
analogI/O KEY POSITION
T
Î Î
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function E
R
FRONT
OK P1
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor CENTRAL Y RUN P2
D PROCESSOR EN P3
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O UNIT
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Windowsr based software products running on PROTECTED

RUN WITH
Windowsr 95 or Windows NT,r over Ethernet
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
TCP/IP, or through an SNP port
Î ÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH
D
OUTPUTS
Configurable data and program memory DISABLED
D
STOP
Battery-backed calendar clock BATTERY
D
CONNEC-
INSTALL NEW
D
BATTERY BEFORE
Remote programmer keyswitch UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE-
memory protection IC697ACC701
D
Seven status LEDs MODULE FUNCTION

PROCESSING UNIT
or jumpers)
D Reference information inside front door SERIAL PORT 1
D
RS-232
In-system upgradable firmware
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Three Series Ninety Protocol (SNP Slave) ports
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Functions RS-485
COMPATIBLE
The CPX 782 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
FACTORY TEST

real time control of machines, processes, and material
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT 3
COMPATIBLE
smart option modules over a rack-mounted backplane
Î
USE THIS MODULE
using the VME C.1 Standard format.
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
MODULE
Supported option modules include LAN Interface
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697CPX782
LABEL
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric 44A726758–152R01

analog I/O modules.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is

PARALLEL a45677 updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER the module’s serial port and running the software in-
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
P C B G
cluded with the firmware upgrade kit.
S P T B
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
U M C
or Operation, Protection, and Module Status
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
N
B
C Operation of this module can be controlled by the
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE
attached programmer and programming software.
METER
Program and configuration data can be locked
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
B P
R C memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M M
protected position, program and configuration data can
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

IC66* only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
I/O BLOCK
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6
NOTE front of the module.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
B G
R B
Operating Temperature
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
M C (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
or BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM). For continuous operation in a minimum size enclo-

N
B
C sure with no air flow, derating is necessary for the
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ONE
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM) 100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711), and the 90W
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER RACK 7 DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) as shown in
the chart below.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
P B
S R
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M PWR724
PWR748 PWR711

Î
90W 100W
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK) 75W 90W
60W 80W
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 60W
PS - POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 50W
40W WITH NO FORCED AIR
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example 30W
CIRCULATION
20W
User RAM Memory 10W
The CPX782 has a built-in memory board with 1

Mbyte of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
user data (program, configuration, and register data)
storage.
Installation
User Flash Memory
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
The CPX782 has 256K of built-in flash memory for
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
user data (program, configuration, and register data)
storage. Use of this flash memory is optional.
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory manual, shipped with your PLC programming
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing software, describes how to properly install the
the operating system firmware . This allows firmware equipment.
to be updated without disassembling the module or
20-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1431F

If the PLC installation must comply with supported MEMORY

a45723
PROTECT
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
ÎÎ
KEY
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to SWITCH
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
CPX 782
STATUS TOP
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDS OFF
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON
Manual. RUN/STOP B
A
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
T
KEY POSITION
T
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
OPEN E FRONT
tors on the module (see Figure 2). REPLACEMENT R OK P1
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D
BATTERY
ÎÎ
Y
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position. CONNECTOR
RUN
EN
P2
P3
D
Î ÎÎ
Î
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi- MEM PROTECT
CURRENTLY
tion. ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED PROTECTED
D Make sure that rack power is off. BATTERY RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
Î
OUTPUTS
D Install the CPX 782 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see ENABLED

RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
Figure 1). SERIAL PORT 1 OUTPUTS
DISABLED
RS-232
D
Î ÎÎ
Î
Turn on power. STOP
BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
The module should power up and the top left (OK) SERIAL PORT 2
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have BATTERY BEFORE
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The MODULE FUNCTION
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROCESSING UNIT
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
Î ÎÎ
Î
FACTORY TEST
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the ONLY SERIAL PORT 1
Î ÎÎ
Î
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). RS-232
1 MBYTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT 2
After the program has been verified the toggle switch MEMORY BOARD
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
ÎÎÎÎ
FACTORY TEST
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPX782
LABEL
44A726758–152R01
the programmer is connected to the top port on the CPX 782
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
functions. Figure 2. CPX 782 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
P C B P G
U M M C
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OR
N
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
B
C
Pin Signal
*
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
2 TXD Transmit Data
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
B
R
M
3 0V Signal Ground
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
4 0V Signal Ground
Î
IC66* 5 RXD Receive Data
BLOCK
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
of the module.
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ

R
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
M
* FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
Î
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724 D-connector.
RACK.
Pin Signal
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Number Name Description
2 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
5 +5VDC Logic Power **
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a
programming computer or other serial devices. 7 SG Signal Ground
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
Product Information sheet that ships with the module.
14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send
SNP (Slave) Yes Yes Yes maximum) for powering external options.
SNPX No No No but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female, D-
connector. Pin-out information can be found in
RTU No No No the IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
20-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory GFK-1431F

t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs

from the rack.
Removing a Module

Standards.

Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
20-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
21
IC697CPX928
GFK-1433E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
2429.88/PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
datasheet GFK-1433E
Features a45724

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Provides 6 Mbytes of battery-backed memory in
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
the same slot OK P1 CPX 928
D Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
RUN P2 TOP
D Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later EN P3 OFF
D
Î
B
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D
Î ÎÎÎÎ
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
A
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K T
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
analogI/O
T
Î Î
FRONT
D
E
0.4 microseconds per boolean function R OK P1
Î Î Î
CENTRAL
D 96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor PROCESSOR
Y RUN
EN
P2
P3
D Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O UNIT MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Windowsr based software products running on

PROTECTED
RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet
Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
Î ÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH
TCP/IP or through an SNP port OUTPUTS
D Configurable data and program memory DISABLED
STOP
D Battery-backed calendar clock BATTERY
CONNEC-
D Three position operation mode switch TORS
D
INSTALL NEW
Password controlled access BATTERY BEFORE
D
UNPLUGGING OLD
Remote programmer keyswitch
BATTERY. USE-
IC697ACC701
memory protection
D
MODULE FUNCTION
Seven status LEDs 96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
D
Software configuration (No DIP switches PROCESSING UNIT
or jumpers)
D
SERIAL PORT 1
Reference information inside front door RS-232

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Functions
Î ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT 3

COMPATIBLE
smart option modules over the rack-mounted
Î
USE THIS MODULE
backplane using the VME C.1 Standard format. IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697CPX928
Supported option modules include LAN Interface LABEL
44A726758–153R01
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
analog I/O modules.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
without disassembling the module or replacing

EPROMs. The operating system firmware is updated
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PARALLEL a45677
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER by connecting a PC compatible computer to the mod-
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ule’s serial port and running the software included
P C B G
with the firmware upgrade kit.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
S P T B
U M C
or
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
N
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
C
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ONE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER
RACK 1
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Program and configuration data can be locked
B P
R C
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M M

memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
IC66*
I/O BLOCK protected position, program and configuration data can
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6 only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
NOTE
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
M C

B
C Operating Temperature
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ONE
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER RACK 7 The CPX 928 requires forced air cooling for proper
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
P
ÎÎÎ
Î
B
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î (122_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
Î ÎÎ Î
S R
M

Î
the CPU.
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721, IC697ACC724, and
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711 IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
PS - POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example Installation

User RAM Memory or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
The CPX928 has a built-in memory board with 6 safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Mbytes of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for detailed information about installation, startup, and
user data (program, configuration, and register data) proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
storage. manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
User Flash Memory equipment.
The CPX928 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash If the PLC installation must comply with supported
memory for user data (program, configuraton, and standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
register data) storage. Use of this flash memory is to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
optional. Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
This CPU uses flash memory for storing the operating
system firmware. This allows firmware to be updated
21-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory GFK-1433E

D Installation should not be attempted without refer- MEMORY

a45727
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installa- PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
tion Manual. SWITCH
tors on the module (see Figure 2).
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position. STATUS
CPX 928
D
TOP
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi- LEDS OFF
tion.
D
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON
Make sure that rack power is off. RUN/STOP B
A
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D
Î Î Î
Install the CPX 928 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see T
T
KEY POSITION
Figure 1).
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
OPEN E FRONT
D Turn on power.
REPLACEMENT R OK P1
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
ÎÎ
Y RUN P2
CONNECTOR
EN P3
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEM PROTECT
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have CURRENTLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED PROTECTED
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and BATTERY RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
Î
OUTPUTS
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The ENABLED
RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if SERIAL PORT 1 OUTPUTS
DISABLED
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now RS-232
Î ÎÎ
Î
STOP
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). SERIAL PORT 2
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Î ÎÎ
Î
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven PROCESSING UNIT
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, FACTORY TEST
ONLY
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-232

6 MBYTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT 2
Programmer Connection, Parallel MEMORY BOARD
RS-485
COMPATIBLE

Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
FACTORY TEST
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software SERIAL PORT 3
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
functions.
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPX928
LABEL
44A726758–153R01
CPX 928
Figure 2. CPX 928 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
P C B P G
U M M C
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OR
N Table 1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
ÎÎÎÎ
B
C
Pin Signal
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
2 TXD Transmit Data
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
B
M
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
4 0V Signal Ground
5 RXD Receive Data
Î
IC66*
BLOCK
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
R
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
M
* FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
Î
D-connector.
RACK.
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702) Table 2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals

Pin Signal
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Number Name Description
Programmer
1* Shield Cable Shield
2 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
5 +5VDC Logic Power **
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a 6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
programming computer or other serial devices. 7 SG Signal Ground
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was
11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
Product Information sheet that ships with the module. 13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
SNP (Slave) Yes Yes Yes maximum) for powering external options.
connector. Pin-out information can be found in
RTU No No No the IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
21-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory GFK-1433E

See the IPI shipped with this module for program-
ming software feature support details. There are no
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system.
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet The CPU verifies the actual module and rack configu-
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet ration at power-up and periodically during operation.
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the The actual configuration must be the same as the pro-
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet grammed configuration. Deviations are reported to
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP response. Refer to the applicable Programming Soft-
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet ware User‘s Manual for a description of configuration
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the functions.
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs

from the rack.
Removing a Module

Standards.

21-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
22
IC697CPX935
GFK-1435E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
PLC CPUs
datasheet GFK-1435E
Features a45734

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
same slot OK P1 CPX 935
D Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
RUN P2 TOP
D Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later EN P3 OFF
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
B
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K A
T
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
analogI/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
T
FRONT
D
E
0.4 microseconds per boolean function R OK P1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
CENTRAL
D 96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor PROCESSOR
Y RUN P2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
D
EN P3
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O UNIT MEM PROTECT
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Windowsr based software products running on

PROTECTED
RUN WITH
Î
Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet
Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
Î
TCP/IP or through an SNP port RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
D Configurable data and program memory DISABLED
Î
STOP
D Battery-backed calendar clock BATTERY
Î
D
CONNEC-
D
Î
INSTALL NEW
Password controlled access BATTERY BEFORE
D Remote programmer keyswitch

UNPLUGGING OLD
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
memory protection
Î
D
MODULE FUNCTION
Seven status LEDs
D
Î
Software configuration (No DIP switches PROCESSING UNIT
or jumpers)
D
Î
SERIAL PORT 1
Reference information inside front door RS-232
Î
Functions ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î SERIAL PORT 2
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î
Î
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or FACTORY TEST

real time control of machines, processes, and material
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT 3

COMPATIBLE
Î
smart option modules over a rack mounted backplane
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
using the VME C.1 Standard format. IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697CPX935
Supported option modules include LAN Interface LABEL
44A726758–154R01
analog I/O modules.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
to be updated without disassembling the module or

replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PARALLEL a45677
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
the module’s serial port and running the software in-
P C B G
cluded with the firmware upgrade kit.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
S P T B
U M C
or
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
N
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
C
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ONE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER
RACK 1
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Program and configuration data can be locked
B P
R C
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
M M

memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
IC66*
I/O BLOCK protected position, program and configuration data can
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6 only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
NOTE
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
M C

B
C Operating Temperature
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ONE
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
METER RACK 7 The CPX 935 requires forced air cooling for proper
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
P
ÎÎÎ
Î
B
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î (122_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
Î ÎÎ Î
S R
M

Î
the CPU.
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721, IC697ACC724, and
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711 IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
PS - POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748 Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example Installation

User RAM Memory or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
The CPX935 has a built-in memory board with 1 safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Mbyte of battery-backed Fast CMOS RAM memory detailed information about installation, startup, and
for user data (program, configuration, and register proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
data) storage. manual, shipped with your PLC programming
User Flash Memory equipment.
The CPX935 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash If the PLC installation must comply with supported
memory for user data (program, configuration, and standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
register data) storage. Use of this flash memory is to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
optional. Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing
the operating system firmware. This allows firmware
22-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory GFK-1435E

D Installation should not be attempted without refer- MEMORY

a45727
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installa- PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
tion Manual. SWITCH
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position. STATUS
CPX 935
D
TOP
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi- LEDS OFF
tion.
D
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ON
Make sure that rack power is off. RUN/STOP B
A
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D
Î Î Î
Install the CPX 935 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see T
T
KEY POSITION
Figure 1).
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
OPEN E FRONT
D Turn on power.
REPLACEMENT R OK P1
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
ÎÎ
Y RUN P2
CONNECTOR
EN P3
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
Î ÎÎ
Î
MEM PROTECT
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have CURRENTLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED PROTECTED
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and BATTERY RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
Î
OUTPUTS
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The ENABLED
RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if SERIAL PORT 1 OUTPUTS
DISABLED
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now RS-232
Î ÎÎ
Î
STOP
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). SERIAL PORT 2
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Î ÎÎ
Î
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven PROCESSING UNIT
Î ÎÎ
Î
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, FACTORY TEST
ONLY
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-232

1 MBYTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT 2
Programmer Connection, Parallel MEMORY BOARD
RS-485
COMPATIBLE

Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
FACTORY TEST
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software SERIAL PORT 3
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
functions.
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPX935
LABEL
44A726758–154R01
CPX 935
Figure 2. CPX 935 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
P C B P G
U M M C
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OR Table 10-1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
N
ÎÎÎÎ
B
C
Pin Signal
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
2 TXD Transmit Data
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
B
M
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
4 0V Signal Ground
5 RXD Receive Data
Î
IC66*
BLOCK
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
R
MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
M
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
D-connector.
Î
RACK.
Table 10-2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Pin Signal
2 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial 5 +5VDC Logic Power **
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the 6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a 7 SG Signal Ground
programming computer or other serial devices. 8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in 12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important 13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
Product Information sheet that ships with the module. 14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
Protocol Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
SNP (Slave) Yes Yes Yes
connector. Pin-out information can be found in the
RTU No No No IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
22-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory GFK-1435E

Three of the LED indicators on the front of the PLC and the programmer running Windows software
CPX935 provide the status of serial port activity on to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
the CPU without having a terminal connected. The information on the programmer connection via
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
memory when power is removed and operates the the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery the back of the cover.
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
Programmable Controller Reference Manual. with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
Removing a Module
The instructions listed below should be followed D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
when removing a module from its slot in a rack. from the rack.

Standards.

22-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
23
IC697CGR772
November 1999 Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
PLC CPUs
datasheet
Features D Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundan-

cy Communications Module
D Requiredfor CPU redundancy applications
D Supports floating point calculations a45728
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Single slot CPU
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
2048 inputs and 2048 outputs
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Up to 8K analog I/O OK P1 CGR 772
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î

RUN P2 TOP
D 96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor EN P3 OFF
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
MEM PROTECT ON
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts B
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
D
Î Î
A
Programmed by MS-DOSr (IC641) or Windowsr based
MEMORY PROTECT
T KEY POSITION
T
Î Î Î
software products E FRONT
R
D
OK P1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed fast CMOS RAM CENTRAL Y RUN P2
PROCESSOR EN P3
UNIT
D
MEM PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ON = OK, ENABLED,
D
PROTECTED
Battery-backed calendar clock RUN WITH
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
D Three position operation mode switch ENABLED
RUN WITH
D Password controlled access OUTPUTS

DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
D
CONNEC-
Seven status LEDs TORS
D
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set) INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
D UNPLUGGING OLD
Reference information inside front door BATTERY. USE
D Three Series 90 Protocol (SNP) ports

IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
Redundancy Features 96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
In addition to the above features, the CGR772 supports

the redundancy features listed below.
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
D Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs
D Synchronization of CPUs SERIAL PORT 2
D
Redundant backupcommunications RS-485
COMPATIBLE
D
5.9 ms scan extension(nominal)
D One scan switching (in most cases)
FACTORY TEST
D Configurablebackup data size

D On-lineprogramming
SERIAL PORT 3
D On-line repair RS-485

COMPATIBLE
D
Î
No single point of failure (except for IC66* I/O Blocks and USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
bus stubs). MODULE
D Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs

IC697CGR772
LABEL
D Program control switching

44A726758–155R01
D Symptom status bits and fault tables

D Memory parity and checksums
D CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
R MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
Functions The CGR772 communicates with I/O and smart option

(specialty) modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME C.1 Stan-
The CGR 772 is a single slot programmable controller CPU
dard format.
which allows floating point calculations and is required for
CPU redundancy applications. The CGR772 is pro- Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN inter-
grammed and configured by MS-DOS or Windows pro- face modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Control-
gramming software to perform real time control of ma- ler for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, and all
chines, processes and material handling systems. of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O modules.
PRIMARY UNIT SECONDARY UNIT
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
U M M C U
or or
N N
B B
C C
31 30
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
B B B P S I I I I I I I I
L L L
O O
S C O O O O O O O O
O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
PS Power Supply IC697PWR710/711/724/748

CPU Central Processor Unit IC697CGR772
BTM Bus Transmitter Module IC697BEM713
RCM Redundancy Communications Module IC697RCM711
GBC or NBC IC66* Bus Controller IC697BEM731/734
BLOCK IC66* I/O Block IC66*XXXYYY
SCANNER Remote I/O Scanner IC697BEM733/735
Figure 1. Typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
User Memory Operation, Protection, and Module Status

Program and data memory for the CGR772 is provided Operation of this module may be controlled by the
by a memory board with 512 KBytes of battery-backed three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an at-
CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of tached programmer and programming software. Pro-
the CGR772 and is included with the module. This gram and configuration data can be locked through
memory board provides error checking through a CPU software passwords or manually by the memory pro-
checksum routine with detected parity errors being re- tect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
ported to the CPU as they occur. program and configuration data can only be changed
by a programmer connected through parallel commu-
nications (that is, via the Bus Transmitter module). The
status of the CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs
on the front of the module.
23-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3

Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications November 1999
CPU Redundancy Systems

The CGR772 is used as the controller in a CPU Redun- a45729
MEMORY
dancy system. Two redundancy control methods can be
ÎÎ
PROTECT
configured using the CGR772. The GHS method KEY
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
SWITCH
(IC660/661 Hot Standby) uses multiple single bus
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
IC660/661I/O networks with one redundant controller
CGR 772
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
in each synchronized PLC. The GDB method
STATUS TOP
(IC660/661Dual Bus) uses multiple dual bus IC660/661
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
LEDS OFF
I/O networks with two redundant controllers in each
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ON
synchronized PLC. The location of the CGR772 mod- RUN/STOP B
A
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
ÎÎ
SWITCH
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ules in a typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system T
T
KEY POSITION
OPEN FRONT
is shown in Figure 1.
ÎÎÎ
E
ÎÎÎ
REPLACEMENT R OK P1
BATTERY Y
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
RUN P2
ÎÎ
Installation CONNECTOR
EN P3
ÎÎÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PROTECTED
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe BATTERY RUN WITH
CONNECTOR OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ENABLED
RUN WITH
detailed information about installation, startup, and SERIAL PORT 1
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
RS-232 (PIN 1 AT DISABLED
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation TOP)
ÎÎÎÎ
STOP
manual, shipped with your PLC programming BATTERY
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎ
software, describes how to properly install the SERIAL PORT 2
equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY. USE
please refer to the Installation Requirements for PIN 1 IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
ÎÎÎÎ
programming software, for additional guidelines. PROCESSING UNIT
ÎÎÎÎ
Installation should not be attempted without referring FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 1
ONLY
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-232
Manual and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual.

ÎÎÎÎ
512 KBYTES
MEMORY BOARD SERIAL PORT 2
ÎÎÎÎ
nectors on the module. RS-485
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎ
D
ÎÎÎÎ
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position. FACTORY TEST
D
ÎÎÎÎ
Make sure rack power is off.
D
ÎÎÎÎ
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1) SERIAL PORT 3 SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
D Turn on power. The module should power up and
RS-485
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
COMPATIBLE
the top left (OK) LED should blink. When the diag-
Î ÎÎÎÎ
PIN 1 USE THIS MODULE
nostics have completed successfully, the top left LED IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ
MODULE
stays on and the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs IC697CGR772
are off. The fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PRO- LABEL
44A726758–155R01
TECT) is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF position.
The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if con- CGR 772
nected parallel, the CPU can be programmed re-
gardless of key position). After the program has been
verified the toggle switch can be moved to the ap-
propriate operation mode position; RUN WITH
OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN WITH OUTPUTS DIS-
ABLED, or STOP. The LEDs indicate the position of Figure 2. CGR 772 - Location of Major Features
the toggle switch, memory protection status, status
of serial port activity, and the state of the program.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
Programmer Connection, Parallel Interface The programmer connection (shown below) is typically
made from CPU serial Port 3 to the serial port on the
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus programming computer, through an RS-422/RS-485 to
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) system interface RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-422 to RS-232
module for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
only) as shown in Figure 1
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
Connection to Serial Ports the needs of your particular application. See the IC697
Programmable Controller Serial Communications Manual for
The CGR772 has three on-board serial ports which more information on serial communications.
can be configured to behave as three independent
communications ports. These three ports are accessed Note
by connections on the front of the module for serial
interface to the programming computer, or other When configuring a CPU Redundancy system the pro-
serial serial devices. grammer must be connected to the CPU in the Primary
unit to configure the Primary PLC and then moved to the
Ports 1 through 3 support SNP Slave protocol only. Ports 1 CPU in the Secondary PLC to configure the Secondary
and 2 do not support program Load and Store or PLC.
Datagrams. For details, see the Important Product For more detailed information on configuration of Hot
Information sheet that ships with the module. Standby CPU Redundancy systems and
communications between PLCs in the system, refer to
Protocols Supported the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide.
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3

SNP Yes Yes Yes
SNPX No No No
RTU Not Not Not
supported supported supported
SERIAL
SECONDARY UNIT PRIMARY UNIT PROGRAMMER
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
U M M C U
or or
N N
B B
C C
30 31
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O
S C O O O O O O O O
O O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
Figure 3. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration with Serial Connection to Programmer
23-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5

CPU Serial Ports H Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible
Support for Port 1, Port 2, and Port 3 was provided but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female D-
for the CGR772 in its initial release in October 1998 connector. Pin assignments are found in the IC697
(equipped with firmware release 7.85). PLC Installation Manual.
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. Port 1 Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
has a 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector. This connector
is similar in appearance (although larger) to modu-
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
lar jacks commonly used for telephones and mo-
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
dems.
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Table 10-3. Port 1 RS-232 Signals Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
Pin Signal your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
Number Name Description network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
1* CTS Clear To Send
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
2 TXD Transmit Data
to the Ethernet Interface.
3 0V Signal Ground
4 0V Signal Ground For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
5 RXD Receive Data refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
6 RTS Request to Send User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front of the manual, GFK-1295.
module.
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female Configuration
D-connector.
Table 10-4. Port 2 RS-485 Signals This CPU and its I/O system are configured with MS-
DOS or Windows based programming software. There
Pin Signal are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
Number Name Description system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
1* Shield Cable Shield configuration at power-up and periodically during op-
2 NC No Connection eration. The actual configuration must be the same as
the programmed configuration. Deviations are re-
3 NC No Connection
ported to the CPU alarm processor function for config-
4 NC No Connection
ured fault response. Consult Reference 1 (in Table 2.) for
5 +5VDC Logic Power ** a description of configuration functions.
7 SG Signal Ground
8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send Batteries
9 RT Resistor Termination
10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data memory when power is removed and operates the cal-
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
endar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before re-
moving the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics
a low battery is detected, the Module OK LED (top) will
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send not stay on. See the section on System Status References
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from the front in Chapter 2 of the IC697 PLC Reference Manual for
of the module. more details about detecting a low battery condition.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Operation in High Ambient Temperatures Removing a Module

The CGR772 requires either forced air cooling or
The following instructions should be followed when re-
limiting of system power for operating in ambient
moving a CGR772 module from its slot in a rack. If a
temperatures greater than 50_C (122_F). A fan
fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should be located
FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from the
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU replaced. If
the IC697 rack. Refer to the IC697 Programmable a failure is detected in the backup unit, you can simply
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information. remove power from the CPU rack and replace the mod-
ule.
For continuous operation above 50_C in a minimum
size enclosure without forced air cooling, it is neces- D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
sary to limit system power. De-rating data for the the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711) and the 90W the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) is shown in the back of the cover.
the chart below. D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
PWR724 with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
PWR748 PWR711
90W 100W
75W 90W
60W 80W
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
60W
50W
CIRCULATION
30W
20W
10W
10 20 30 40 50 55 60
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CGR772 [

Battery
Port 1: RS-232 compatible Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to InstallationRequirements for Conformance to
Standards.
23-6 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 7

Table 2. References
Reference Title
4 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User ’s Guide

Central Processing Unit IC697CGR772
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbytes CMOS RAM Memory
for CPU Redundancy applications
RedundancyCommunicationsModule IC697RCM711
Bus TransmitterModule IC697BEM713
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC IC697ACC744
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
24
IC697CGR935
GFK-1439C 96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
datasheet GFK-1439C
Features D Symptom status bits and fault tables
D Requiredfor CPU redundancy applications
D Supports floating point calculation D CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
D Single slot CPU D Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundan-
D 12K inputs and 12K outputs (any mix) cy Communications Module
a45734
D 96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
OK P1 CGR 935
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr based software RUN P2 TOP
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
OFF
products EN P3
D MEM PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
O
Supports 1 Mbyte of battery-backed fast CMOS RAM B N
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
A MEMORY PROTECT
Î
T
Î Î Î
KEY POSITION
T
D Configurable data and program memory E FRONT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
R O P1
D CENTRAL Y K
RU P2
Î
PROCESSOR N
E P3
D Three position operation mode switch UNIT

N
MEM PRO-
Î
ON =TECT
Î
OK, EN-
D Password controlled access ABLED,
RUN WITH
PRO-
D
Î Î
TECTEDOUTPUTS
Keyswitch memory protection ENABLED
RUN
Î
D Seven status LEDs
WITH
OUTPUTS
STOP
Î
D
DISABLED
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set) BATTERY
CONNEC-
D
Î
TORS
Reference information inside front door INSTALL NEW
D
Î
BATTERY BE-
Three Series Ninety Protocol (SNP Slave) communications FORE
UNPLUGGING
ports
Î
OLD BATTERY.
USE
MODULE FUNCTION
IC697ACC701
Î
Redundancy Features PROCESSING UNIT
In addition to the above features, the CGR935 supports

Î SERIAL PORT 1
Î
RS-232

D Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs
Î
SERIAL PORT
Î
2
D
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Synchronization of CPUs
Î
D Redundant backupcommunications FACTORY TEST
D
Î
4.7 ms scan extension
D
Î
One scan switching (in most cases) SERIAL PORT
D
3
RS-485
Î
Configurablebackup data size COMPATIBLE
D On-lineprogramming
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
D MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
On-line repair IC697CGR935
D
LABEL
No single point of failure (expect for IC66* I/O Blocks and 44A726758–158R0
1
bus stubs)
D Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
Functions The CGR935 communicates with I/O and smart op-

tion (specialty) modules over the rack mounted back-
plane (IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME
The CGR935 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations and is
required for CPU redundancy applications. The Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN in-
CGR935 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS or terface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Windows programming software to perform real time Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications
control of machines, processes and material handling modules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
systems. analog I/O modules.
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
U M M C U
or or
N N
B B
C C
31 30
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O O
S C O O O O O O O O
O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
PS Power Supply IC697PWR710/711/724/748

CPU Central Processor Unit IC697CGR935
Figure 1. Typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
User Memory Operation, Protection, and Module Status

Program and data memory for the CGR935 is pro- Operation of this module may be controlled by the
vided by a memory board with 1 MByte of battery- three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
backed Fast CMOS RAM. This memory board is an attached programmer and programming software.
integral part of the CGR935 and is included with the Program and configuration data can be locked
module. This memory board provides error checking through software passwords or manually by the
through a CPU checksum routine with detected par- memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
ity errors being reported to the CPU as they occur. protected position, program and configuration data
Starting with firmware release 7.85 (October, 1998), can only be changed by a programmer connected
increased program memory size was made available. through parallel communications (that is, via the Bus
See the Important Product Information (IPI) sheet, Transmitter module). The status of the CPU is indi-
GFK-1440, that ships with the module for details. cated by the seven green LEDs on the front of the
module.
24-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory GFK-1439C

CPU Redundancy Systems the toggle switch, memory protection status, status
The CGR935 is used as the controller in a CPU Redun- of serial port activity, and the state of the program.
dancy system. Two redundancy control methods can be a45735
MEMORY
configured using the CGR 935. The GHS method PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
(IC660/661 Hot Standby) uses multiple single bus SWITCH
IC660/661 I/O networks with one redundant controller
in each synchronized PLC. The GDB method uses mul-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
CGR 935
tiple I/O networks with either single or dual busses in STATUS TOP
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
each synchronized PLC with the capability of either LEDS OFF
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
unit being activated with bumpless switch. The location ON
RUN/STOP B REMOTE PROGRAMMER
of the CGR935 modules in a typical Hot Standby CPU
ÎÎÎ
A
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
T KEY POSITION
Redundancy system is shown in Figure 1. T
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OPEN E FRONT
REPLACEMENT
Installation R OK P1
ÎÎÎ
BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Y RUN P2
CONNECTOR
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, EN P3
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for

ÎÎÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
CURRENTLY ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎÎ
INSTALLED
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide BATTERY
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎ
detailed information about installation, startup, and CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎ
RUN WITH
SERIAL PORT 1 OUTPUTS
manual, shipped with your PLC programming soft- RS-232 (PIN 1 DISABLED
ÎÎÎÎ
AT TOP) STOP
ware, describes how to properly install the equip- BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎ
ment. If the PLC installation must comply with sup- CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
ported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485 INSTALL NEW
please refer to the Installation Requirements for Confor- BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎ
UNPLUGGING OLD
mance to Standards, shipped with the PLC program- BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎ
PIN 1
ming software, for additional guidelines. MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎ
Do not attempt installation without referring to the PROCESSING UNIT
ÎÎÎÎ
applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual FACTORY TEST
and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual. SERIAL PORT 1
ÎÎÎÎ
ONLY
RS-232

nectors on the module. 1 MBYTE (FAST)
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
MEMORY BOARD SERIAL PORT 2
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protect OFF position. RS-485
ÎÎÎÎ
COMPATIBLE

D
ÎÎÎÎ
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1) FACTORY TEST
D
ÎÎÎÎ
Turn on power. The module should power up and
the top left (OK) LED should blink. When the diag-
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT 3
nostics have completed successfully, the top left RS-485
SERIAL PORT 3
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
LED stays on and the second (RUN) and third (EN) COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎ
LEDs are off. The fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM
Î
USE THIS MODULE
PIN 1 IN SLOT 1 ONLY
PROTECT) is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
Î ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CGR935
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed LABEL
(if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed 44A726758–158R01
regardless of key position). After the program has

CGR 935
been verified, the toggle switch can be moved to the
appropriate operation mode position; RUN WITH
OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN WITH OUTPUTS DIS-
ABLED, or STOP. The LEDs indicate the position of Figure 2. CGR 935 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
Programmer Connection, Parallel Interface The programmer connection (shown below) is typically
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus made from CPU serial Port 3 to the serial port on the
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) for a parallel inter- programming computer, through an RS-422/RS-485 to
face (MS-DOS programmer only) as shown in Figure 1. RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-422 to RS-232
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
Connection to Serial Ports made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
The CGR935 has three on-board serial ports which can the needs of your particular application. See the IC697
be configured to behave as three independent Programmable Controller Serial Communications Manual for
communications ports. These three ports are accessed more information on serial communications.
by connections on the front of the module for serial
interface to the programming computer, or other serial Note
devices.
When configuring a CPU Redundancy system, the pro-
Ports 1 through 3 support SNP Slave protocol only. Ports 1 grammer must be connected to the CPU in the Primary
and 2 do not support program Load and Store or unit to configure the Primary PLC and then moved to
Datagrams. For details, see the Important Product the CPU in the Secondary PLC to configure the Sec-
Information sheet that ships with the module. ondary PLC.
For more detailed information on configuration of Hot
Protocols Supported Standby CPU Redundancy systems and
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 communications between PLCs in the system, refer to
the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide.
SNP Yes Yes Yes
SNPX No No No
RTU Not Not Not
supported supported supported
SERIAL
SECONDARY UNIT PRIMARY UNIT PROGRAMMER
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
U M M C U
or or
N N
B B
C C
30 31
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O
S C O O O O O O O O
O O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
24-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5

CPU Serial Ports ** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
Support for Port 1 and Port 2 was added in firmware maximum) for powering external options.
release 7.85 (October, 1998). Prior releases only H Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female D-
supported Port 3.
connector. Pin assignments are found in the IC697
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. Port 1 PLC Installation Manual.
has a 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector. This connector
is similar in appearance (although larger) to modu- Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
lar jacks commonly used for telephones and mo-
dems. Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
Table 10-5. Port 1 RS-232 Signals TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Pin Signal Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
Number Name Description your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
1* CTS Clear To Send network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
2 TXD Transmit Data Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
3 0V Signal Ground PLC and the programmer running Windows software
4 0V Signal Ground
to the Ethernet Interface.
5 RXD Receive Data For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
6 RTS Request to Send refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
manual, GFK-1295.
of the module.
D-connector.
Configuration
Table 10-6. Port 2 RS-485 Signals The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with MS-
DOS or Windows based programming software. There
Pin Signal are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
Number Name Description system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during op-
1* Shield Cable Shield eration. The actual configuration must be the same as
2 NC No Connection the programmed configuration. Deviations are re-
3 NC No Connection ported to the CPU alarm processor function for config-
4 NC No Connection ured fault response. Consult Reference 1 (Table 2.) for a
5 +5VDC Logic Power ** description of configuration functions.
7 SG Signal Ground
Batteries
9 RT Resistor Termination A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data memory when power is removed and operates the cal-
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data endar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before re-
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data moving the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics
a low battery is detected the Module OK LED (top) will
not stay on. See the section ”System Status References”
in Chapter 2 of the IC697 PLC Reference Manual for
more details about detecting a low battery condition.
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Operation in High Ambient Temperatures Removing a Module

The CGR935 requires either forced air cooling or
The following instructions should be followed when re-
limiting of system power for operating in ambient
moving a CGR935 module from its slot in a rack. If a
temperatures greater than 50_C (122_F). A fan
fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should be located
FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from the
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU replaced. If
the IC697 rack. Refer to the IC697 Programmable a failure is detected in the backup unit, you can simply
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information. remove power from the CPU rack and replace the mod-
For continuous operation above 50_C in a minimum ule.
size enclosure without forced air cooling, it is neces-
sary to limit system power. De-rating data for the
100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711), and the 90W
DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) is shown in
the chart below.
PWR724 D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
PWR748 PWR711 with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
90W 100W
75W 90W from the backplane connector.
60W 80W
60W
from the rack.
50W
CIRCULATION
30W
20W
10W
10 20 30 40 50 55 60
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CGR935 [

Battery
Serial Ports Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices.
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated) Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
Standards.
24-6 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 7

Table 2. References
Reference Title

Central Processing Unit IC697CGR935
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast CMOS RAM Memory
for CPU Redundancy applications
Rack Fan Assemblt, 24 VDC IC697ACC744
t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
25
IC697CPU788
GFK-0806D 16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
August 1997 for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
datasheet GFK-0806D
Features For detailed information on TMR systems, see Refer-
ence 4, the IC660/661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Tri-
D Single slot CPU. ple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
D Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
a45233
expansion memory in the same slot. (Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes available for user’s ap-
plication program and data).
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
D Up to 352 discrete inputs and outputs (any mix,
simplex mode only); 112 voted discrete inputs, 80
voted discrete outputs.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
OK
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RUN
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted B
analog inputs
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
A
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
T
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function. T
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
E
CPU 788
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor. CENTRAL
R
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
Y TOP
D Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in sim- PROCESSOR OFF
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
plex mode only) UNIT
ON
D Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software REMOTE PROGRAMMER

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
FRONT
MODULE OK
port.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
RUN
D Configurable data and program memory. OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ENABLED
D Battery-backed calendar clock. MEMORY

PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D
REMOTE
Three position operation mode switch. PROGRAMMER
ONLY
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Password controlled access. ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
D Remote programmer keyswitch memory
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
protection. ENABLED
Î Î Î
D
RUN WITH
Four status LEDs. OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D
Î Î Î
DISABLED
Software configuration (No DIP switches STOP
or jumpers).
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
Functions BATTERY. USE

IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
PROCESSING UNIT
CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-DOS
or Windows based programming software for use in
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RS-485
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O COMPATIBLE
and smart option modules over the rack mounted back-
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
plane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
VME C.1 Standard format. IC697CPU788
LABEL
44A726758-133R01
The CPU 788 must be used in conjunction with a set of
C program blocks which provide Triple Modular Redun-
dancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It will
not operate unless these program blocks are included in
the loaded application program.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Inter- I/O products, Communications modules, I/O Link Inter-
face modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumer- face, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
ic Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Triple Genius Busses
Load
Triple Input Sensors
Figure 1. Typical GMR System Configuration
User Memory manual, shipped with your PLC programming

Program and data memory for the CPU 788 is avail- equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
able by attaching an expansion memory board with supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
512 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS RAM. Up to please refer to the Installation Requirements for
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
for the user application program and data. programming software, for additional guidelines.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status ring to the applicable programmable controller hard-
ware installation manual.
attached programmer and programming software. D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
Program and configuration data can be locked the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
through software passwords or manually by the D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the ensuring the mating screws remain aligned with
protected position, program and configuration data can their respective standoff.
only (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly tighten each.
of a CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
front of the module. D Connect the battery to either of the battery connec-
tors on the module.
Installation D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for D Make sure rack power is off.
detailed information about installation, startup, and D Install in slot 1 of rack 0.
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation D Turn on power.
25-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit GFK-0806D

for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems August 1997
The module should power up and blink the top LED. MEMORY
a45234
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs SWITCH
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
grammed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be pro-
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
grammed regardless of key position). After the pro-
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
gram has been verified the toggle switch may be B
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
A
moved to the appropriate operation mode position. T
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, T
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
OPEN E
memory protection status, and the state of the pro- REPLACEMENT R CPU 788
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
BATTERY Y TOP
gram. CONNECTOR OFF
CURRENTLY
ÎÎ ON
Î ÎÎ
Î
Expansion Memory BATTERY

MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
Î Î
ÎÎ
CONNECTOR
FRONT
The CPU 788 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
Î Î
MODULE OK
ÎÎ
RUN
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
provides CMOS RAM memory of 512 Kbytes. Up to MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECT
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
for the user application program and data. The bat- ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
tery which supports this memory is located on the main PROTECTED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
CPU board housing. OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
RUN WITH
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the pro- EXPANSION STOP
Î ÎÎ
Î
grammer (See Reference 2). MEMORY BATTERY
BOARD CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM735
INSTALL NEW
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the IC697ACC701
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
ÎÎÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT
1 for a description of programming functions.
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
IC697CPU788
LABEL
44A726758–133R01
CPU 788
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
a47100
PLC A PLC B PLC C
C C C
P P P
U U U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter
Multidrop cable is catalog number

IC690CBL714 (1 cable). Two cables
are needed for 3 CPUs.
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Programmer
Serial Port the system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible

Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Work Station Interface board installed in the program- Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
ming computer. network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
The serial connection can also be made from the serial module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
port on the CPU to the serial port on the program- Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
ming computer, or other serial device, through the 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
Ethernet Interface.
application. For more information on serial commu-
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
nications, see reference 3.
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
For more detailed information on configuration of User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
TMR systems and communications between PLCs in manual, GFK-1295.
25-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5

Configuration Removing a Module

The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with The instructions below should be followed when re-
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. moving a module from its slot in a rack.
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
during operation. The actual configuration must be the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi- the back of the cover.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func- D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
1 for a description of configuration functions. rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
Battery D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 IC660/IC661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Battery
Current required from 5V bus 1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory board)
Serial Port

Central Processor Unit, CPU 788 IC697CPU788
16 MHz, 32 Bit, Expandable for IC660/IC661 Triple
Modular Redundancy Systems
25-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
26
IC697CPU789
datasheet GFK-0807D
Features For detailed information on TMR systems, see Refer-

ence 4, the IC660/661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Tri-
D Single slot CPU. ple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
D Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
expansion memory in the same slot. (Up to a45235
ÎÎ
approximately 200 Kbytes available for user’s ap-
plication program and data)
D Up to 12K discrete inputs and outputs (any mix,
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î
simplex mode only); 2048 voted discrete inputs,
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ Î Î
2048 voted discrete outputs
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
OK
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and RUN
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ENABLED
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
B
analog inputs MEM PROTECT A
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
T
Î
ÎÎÎ
D
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
0.4 microseconds per boolean function T
E
D CPU 789
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor CENTRAL
R
D Y TOP
Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in sim-
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
PROCESSOR OFF
plex mode only) UNIT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER

MEMORY PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
KEY POSITION
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP FRONT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
port MODULE OK
D
RUN
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
D
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MEMORY
PROTECT
D Three position operation mode switch REMOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
PROGRAMMER

ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
D
Î
PROTECTED
ÎÎ
Remote programmer keyswitch memory RUN WITH
protection OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ENABLED
D Four status LEDs RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
OUTPUTS
D Software configuration (No DIP switches DISABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
STOP
or jumpers) BATTERY
D Reference information inside front door. CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î INSTALL NEW
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY BEFORE
Functions UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-DOS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
PROCESSING UNIT
or Windows based programming software for use in

Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
SERIAL PORT
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O RS-485
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
and smart option modules over the rack mounted back-
ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
plane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ
VME C.1 Standard format. MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
IC697CPU789
LABEL
The CPU 789 must be used in conjunction with a set of 44A726758-134R01
C program blocks which provide Triple Modular Redun-

dancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It will
not operate unless these program blocks are included in
the loaded application program.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface,
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Load
User Memory manual, shipped with your PLC programming

Program and data memory for the CPU 789 is avail- equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
able by attaching an expansion memory board with supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
512 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS RAM. Up to please refer to the Installation Requirements for
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
for the user application program and data. programming software, for additional guidelines.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status ring to the applicable programmable controller hard-
ware installation manual.
attached programmer and IC641 software. Program D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
and configuration data can be locked through soft- the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
ware passwords or manually by the memory protect D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position, ensuring the mating screws remain aligned with
program and configuration data can only be changed their respective standoff.
by a programmer connected parallel only (that is, via
the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a CPU is
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly tighten each.
indicated by the four green LEDs on the front of the
module. D Connect the battery to either of the battery connec-
tors on the module.
Installation D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for D Make sure rack power is off.
detailed information about installation, startup, and D Install in slot 1 of rack 0.
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation D Turn on power.
26-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3

The module should power up and blink the top LED. MEMORY
a45236
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs SWITCH
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
grammed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be pro-
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
grammed regardless of key position). After the pro-
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
gram has been verified the toggle switch may be B
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
A
moved to the appropriate operation mode position. T
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, T
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
OPEN E
memory protection status, and the state of the pro- REPLACEMENT R CPU 789
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
BATTERY Y TOP
gram. CONNECTOR OFF
CURRENTLY
ÎÎ ON
Î ÎÎ
Î
Expansion Memory BATTERY

MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
Î Î
ÎÎ
CONNECTOR
FRONT
Î Î
MODULE OK
ÎÎ
RUN
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
provides CMOS RAM memory of 512 Kbytes. Up to MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECT
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
for the user application program and data. The bat- ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
tery which supports this memory is located on the main PROTECTED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
CPU board housing. OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
RUN WITH
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the pro- EXPANSION STOP
Î ÎÎ
Î
grammer (See Reference 2). MEMORY BATTERY
BOARD CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM735
INSTALL NEW
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the IC697ACC701
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
ÎÎÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
IC697CPU789
LABEL
44A726758–134R01
CPU 789
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
a47100
PLC A PLC B PLC C
C C C
P P P
U U U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter

Serial Port the system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible

Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Work Station Interface board installed in the program- Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
ming computer. network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
port on the CPU to the serial port on the program- Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
ming computer, or other serial device, through the 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
Ethernet Interface.
application. For more information on serial commu-
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
nications, see reference 3.
For more detailed information on configuration of User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
TMR systems and communications between PLCs in manual, GFK-1295.
26-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5


The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with The instructions below should be followed when re-
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. moving a module from its slot in a rack.
ure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
during operation. The actual configuration must be the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the same as the programmed configuration. Devi- the back of the cover.
ations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func- D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
1 for a description of configuration functions. rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
Battery D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 IC66* Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Battery
Current required from 5V bus 1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory board)
Serial Port

Central Processor Unit, CPU 789 IC697CPU789
16 MHz, 32 Bit, Expandable for IC660/IC661 Triple
Modular Redundancy Systems
26-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
27
IC697CPM790
GFK-1215B 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
November 1999 1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPM790)
datasheet GFK-1215B
Features a47080
D Single slot CPU

ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
same slot (up to 512 Kbytes available for use by
ladder diagram application program)
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
OK
D Supports floating point calculations RUN
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
D Up to 12K discrete inputs and outputs (any mix - ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
simplex mode only); 2048 voted discrete inputs, 2048 B
A
voted discrete outputs MEM PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
T
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
T
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and E
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
CPM 790
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
R
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted CENTRAL Y TOP
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
analog inputs PROCESSOR OFF
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function UNIT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ON
D 64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor

REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
D
KEY POSITION
Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in sim- FRONT
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
plex mode only)
ÎÎ
MODULE OK
D Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software RUN

Î Î Î
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MEMORY
PROTECT
port. REMOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
PROGRAMMER
D Configurable data and program memory ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D PROTECTED
ÎÎ
Battery-backed calendar clock RUN WITH
D Three position operation mode switch OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ENABLED
D Password controlled access RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
OUTPUTS
D Remote programmer keyswitch memory DISABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
STOP
protection
D
BATTERY
Four status LEDs
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
INSTALL NEW
Î
or jumpers) BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Reference information inside front door BATTERY. USE
Î
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions 64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
FLOATING POINT MATH
The CPM 790 is a single slot programmable controller
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
UPGRADEABLE FIRMWARE.
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The CPM
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
SERIAL PORT
790 is programmed and configured with MS-DOS or RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Windows based programming software for use in
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O

ÎÎ
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
IC697CPM790
and smart option modules over the rack mounted LABEL
44A726758-149R01
backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of
the VME C.1 Standard format.
The CPM 790 must be used in conjunction with a
Standalone C program which provides Triple Modular
Redundancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It
will not operate unless this program is included in the
loaded application program.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
For detailed information on TMR systems, see Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
Reference 4, the IC66* Modular Redundancy Flexible products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface,
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual. and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Load

User Memory only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
Program and data memory for the CPM 790 is provided
CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the front
by a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed
of the module.
CMOS RAM. 512 Kbytes of this memory is available for the
user’s application program and data. This memory board is
an integral part of the CPM 790 module and is included
Operating Temperature
with the module. The CPM 790 requires forced air cooling for proper
Flash Memory (104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
This module uses flash memory for storage of the should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
operating system firmware (this module does not sup- the CPU.
port storage of user program in the flash memory). This Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
allows updates of the firmware without disassem- IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
bling the module or replacing EPROMs. The oper- the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
ating system firmware is updated by connecting a Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
PC compatible computer to the module’s serial port
and running the Loader software included with the Installation
firmware floppy disk. It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
Operation, Protection, and Module Status and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Operation of this module can be controlled by the detailed information about installation, startup, and
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
attached programmer and programming software. manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
Program and configuration data can be locked describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
through software passwords or manually by the PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
protected position, program and configuration data can Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
27-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, GFK-1215B

1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems November 1999
shipped with the PLC programming software, for MEMORY

a47081
PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
D Installation should not be attempted without refer- SWITCH
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
tion Manual.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF posi-
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
B
Î ÎÎ
Î
A
ÎÎÎÎ
tion. T
D Make sure that rack power is off.
T
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
OPEN E
CPM 790
D Install the CPM 790 module in slot 1 of rack 0.
REPLACEMENT R
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎ Î
Y TOP
D Turn on power. CONNECTOR OFF

ÎÎ
CURRENTLY ON
Î ÎÎ
Î
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î
INSTALLED
blink. When the diagnostics have completed BATTERY
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
Î
successfully, the top LED stays on and the second and FRONT
MODULE OK
third LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
RUN
keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ENABLED
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECT
can be programmed regardless of key position). After REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
ONLY
the program has been verified the toggle switch can be ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, ENABLED
memory protection status, and the state of the program.

Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
1 MBYTE STOP
Î ÎÎ
Î
Programmer Connection, Parallel MEMORY BOARD BATTERY
CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Î
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the INSTALL NEW
Î ÎÎ
Î
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎ
FLOATING POINT MATH
Î ÎÎ
Î
UPGRADEABLE FIRMWARE
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
Î ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPM790
LABEL
44A726758–149R01
CPM 790
Figure 2. CPM 790 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
a47100
PLC A PLC B PLC C
C C C
P P P
U U U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter

Serial Port system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple

Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU (see Figure 3).
Interface board installed in the programming computer. Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
computer, or other serial device, through the 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
connection can be made with available cables or you After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular programmer running Windows software to the
application. See reference 3 for more information on Ethernet Interface.
serial communications. For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
For more detailed information on configuration of TMR User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
systems and communications between PLCs in the manual, GFK-1295.
27-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, GFK-1215B

1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems November 1999
Configuration
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software. Removing a Module
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to The instructions below should be followed when
configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual removing a module from its slot in a rack.
module and rack configuration at power-up and
periodically during operation. The actual D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
configuration must be the same as the programmed the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
alarm processor function for configured fault the back of the cover.
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
Battery
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown it from the rack.
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected, the MODULE
OK LED (top LED) will not stay on. Specific
indication of a low battery state is detailed in
Reference 2.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 IC660/IC661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs
Battery
Serial Port

For IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please
consult the factory for price and availability.
27-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
28 IC697CPU780
GFK-0837C 16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit
August 1997 for Hot Standby CPU Applications
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot Standby CPU Applications
(IC697CPU780)
datasheet GFK-0837C
Features D CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
D Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundan-
D Requiredfor Hot Standby CPU applications cy Communications Module
D Supports floating point calculation
a47003
D
ÎÎ
Single slot CPU
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
Î
D
Î Î
Up to 8K analog I/O
D
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
0.4 microseconds per boolean function OK
RUN
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ENABLED
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î Î
B
MEM PROTECT A
D Programmed by MS-DOSr (IC641) based software products T
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
T
E CPU 780
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î Î
R
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
TOP
CENTRAL Y OFF
memory in the same slot PROCESSOR
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Configurable data and program memory UNIT ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
MEMORY PROTECT
D Battery-backed calendar clock KEY POSITION
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
FRONT
D Three position operation mode switch MODULE OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
RUN
D Password controlled access OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ENABLED
D Keyswitch memory protection MEMORY PROTECT

REMOTE
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
PROGRAMMER
Four status LEDs ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ON = OK, ENABLED
D
Î ÎÎ
PROTECTED
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set) RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
OUTPUTS
ÎÎ
D Reference information inside front door. ENABLED
RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
Redundancy Features
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
STOP
BATTERY
In addition to the above features, the CPU 780 supports
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
INSTALL NEW
D
BATTERY BEFORE
Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
BATTERY. USE
D Synchronization of CPUs IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
D Redundant backupcommunications 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
PROCESSING UNIT
D 20 ms scan extension(nominal)
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
FOR HOT STANDBY
D
CPU APPLICATIONS
One scan switching (in most cases)
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
SERIAL PORT
Configurablebackup data size
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
RS-485
D
COMPATIBLE
On-lineprogramming
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
On-line repair IN SLOT 1 ONLY
D
MODULE
No single point of failure IC697CPU 780
ÎÎÎÎÎ
LABEL
D Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs 44A726758-130R03

D Symptom status bits and fault tables
r MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-0837C 16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
August 1997 Standby CPU Applications
Functions vide error checking through a CPU checksum routine

with detected parity errors being reported to the CPU
The CPU 780 is a single slot programmable controller as they occur.
CPU which allows floating point calculations and is re-
quired for Hot Standby CPU applications. The CPU 780
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an at-
is programmed and configured by IC641 programming
tached programmer and IC641 software. Program and
software to perform real time control of machines, pro-
configuration data can be locked through software
cesses and material handling systems.
passwords or manually by the memory protect key-
The CPU 780 communicates with I/O and smart option switch. When the key is in the protected position, pro-
modules over the rack mounted backplane gram and configuration data can only be changed by a
(IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME C.1 Stan- programmer connected through parallel communica-
dard format. tions (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN inter- of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
face modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Con- front of the module.
troller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, The CPU 780 is used as the CPU in a Hot Standby CPU Re-
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O dundancy system. Two CPUs are required in a Hot Stand-
modules. by CPU redundancy system; one in the Primary PLC and
Program and data memory for the CPU 780 is available one in the Secondary PLC. Each of the CPUs must be con-
by the attachment of an expansion memory board with figured separately, with one configured as the Primary
either 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes or 512 Kbytes of battery- unit and one configured as the Secondary unit. The loca-
backed CMOS RAM, or 256 Kbytes with 256 Kbytes of tion of the CPU 780 modules in a typical Hot Standby CPU
non-volatile flash memory. These memory boards pro- Redundancy system is shown in Figure 1.
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
U M M C U
or or
N N
B B
C C
31 30
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O O
S C O O O O O O O O
O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
PS Power Supply IC697PWRXXX

CPU Central Processor Unit IC697CPU780
Figure 1. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
28-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot GFK-0837C
Standby CPU Applications August 1997
Installation with 256K of non-volatile flash memory, or 512 Kbytes.

These memory boards provide error checking through
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or a CPU checksum routine. Memory parity errors are re-
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe ported to the CPU when they occur. The battery which
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide supports this memory is located on the main CPU
detailed information about installation, startup, and board. (See Figure 2).
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software, MEMORY
ÎÎ
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the PROTECT
KEY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SWITCH
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
shipped with the PLC programming software, for CPU
STATUS
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
LEDS
B
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Installation should not be attempted without referring to CPU MODE A
SWITCH T
T
the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
E CPU 780
OPEN
and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual. R TOP
ÎÎÎÎ
REPLACEMENT
Î
Y OFF
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors. BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
CONNECTOR ON
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with CURRENTLY

REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
Î ÎÎ
Î
KEY POSITION
the standoffs already installed on the CPU. INSTALLED
FRONT
BATTERY
Î ÎÎ
Î
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector CONNECTOR MODULE OK
RUN
Î ÎÎ
ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned with
Î
OUTPUTS
their respective standoff. ENABLED
Î ÎÎ
MEMORY PROTECT
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs REMOTE

PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
ONLY
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten. ON = OK, ENABLED
PROTECTED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
tors on the module. ENABLED
Î
RUN WITH
D OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Put toggle switch in the STOP position. DISABLED
D STOP
Î ÎÎ
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position. EXPANSION BATTERY
MEMORY
D CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Make sure rack power is off. BOARD
D
IC697MEM731 INSTALL NEW
Î ÎÎ
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1) IC697MEM732 BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
D IC697MEM733 BATTERY. USE
Î ÎÎ
Turn on power. IC697MEM735 IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
Î ÎÎ
The module should power up and blink the top LED. 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the PROCESSING UNIT
Î ÎÎ
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off. FOR HOT STANDBY
ÎÎÎ
CPU APPLICATIONS
RS-485
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF posi- COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
SERIAL PORT
tion. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. After the RS-485
ÎÎÎ
COMPATIBLE
program has been verified the toggle switch may be
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î ÎÎÎ
moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The IN SLOT 1 ONLY
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, memory MODULE
ÎÎ
IC697CPU 780
protection status, and the state of the program. LABEL
44A726758-130R03
Expansion Memory
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board
provides CMOS RAM memory of 128K, 256K, 256K Figure 2. CPU 780 - Location of Major Features
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the pro- Figures 2 and 3. This port provides a serial connection
grammer (See Reference 2). to the programming computer.
Programmer Connection, Parallel The serial connection is made from the Standard Serial
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus COM port on the CPU to the serial port on the
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) system interface programming computer, or other serial device, through
module for a parallel interface (as shown in Figure 1). the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900)
Consult Reference 2 for a description of programming or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901).
functions. This connection can be made with available cables or
you may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
Serial Port application. For more information on serial
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an communications, see Reference 3.
SERIAL

ÎÎÎÎ PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
M M C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U M M C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
U
or or
N N
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B B
C C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
31 30
other IC66* devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O O
S C O O O O O O O O
O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
R
Note
When configuring a Hot Standby CPU Redun-
dancy system the programmer must be connected
to the CPU in the Primary unit to configure the Pri-
mary PLC and then moved to the CPU in the Sec-
ondary PLC to configure the Secondary PLC.
28-4 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 5
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot GFK-0837C
Standby CPU Applications August 1997

The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with MS- The following instructions should be followed when re-
DOS based programming software. There are no DIP moving a CPU 780 module from its slot in a rack. If a
switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
at power-up and periodically during operation. The ac- be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
tual configuration must be the same as the programmed to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU the rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU re-
alarm processor function for configured fault response. placed. If a failure is detected in the backup unit, you
Consult Reference 1 for a description of configuration can simply remove power from the CPU rack and re-
functions. place the module.
Batteries the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
memory when power is removed and operates the cal- D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
endar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before re- with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
moving the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
a low battery is detected the Module OK LED (top) will from the backplane connector.
not stay on. Specific indication of a low battery state is D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
detailed in Reference 2. from the rack.

Table 2. References
Reference Title
t
GFK-0600F
6 PLC CPUs

CPU 780, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandable, Floating Point IC697CPU780
for Hot Standby CPU Redundancy applications
256 Kbyte, with 256 KBytes non-volatile flash memory, 32-Bit CMOS IC697MEM732
ExpansionMemory
28-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
29
IC697CSE784
GFK-1035C 16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE784)
datasheet GFK-1035C
Features (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME

D Supports State Logic control programming
a45154
D Single slot CPU
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Up to 8K analog I/O
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
OK
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
RUN
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O products ENABLED
D Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) soft-

ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
B
A
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
MEM PROTECT
ÎÎ
Î
T
ware products T
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
E
D Provides 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion STATE LOGIC
R CSE 784
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Y
Î ÎÎÎÎ
TOP
Î
memory in the same slot CPU OFF
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Configurable data and program memory ON
D REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
D Three position operation mode switch
FRONT
D
Î
MODULE OK
Password controlled access
Î
RUN

OUTPUTS
ENABLED
D
MEMORY
Four status LEDs PROTECT
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D
Î Î ÎÎ
REMOTE
Software configuration (No DIP switches or PROGRAMMER
ONLY
jumpers to set) ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
D Reference information inside front door RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
Î Î ÎÎ
RUN WITH
Functions OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
The CSE 784 is a single slot programmable controller BATTERY
CONNECTORS
CPU which provides State Logic control programming
and floating point calculations. The CSE 784 may be INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and C
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
to perform real-time control of machines, processes, and IC697ACC701
material handling systems. The AD641 software prod-

MODULE FUNCTION
ucts are used to program the CSE 784 in State Logic; the PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
IC641 (MS-DOS) software products are used to program MATH COPROCESSOR
in Relay Ladder Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS)
SERIAL PORT
software is used to perform all configuration functions RS-485
COMPATIBLE
for the CSE 784.
USE THIS MODULE
Î
Program and data memory for the State Logic CSE 784 IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎ
is provided by a memory board with 512 Kbytes of bat- MODULE
IC697CSE784
tery-backed CMOS RAM. This memory board is an in- LABEL
44A726758-144R01
tegral part of the CSE 784 module and does not need to
be ordered separately.
The CSE 784 communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane

t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-1035C 16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN inter- MEMORY

a45155
face modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Con- PROTECT
ÎÎ
KEY
troller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, SWITCH
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an at-
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
tached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
B
A
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
software. Program and configuration data can be T
T
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OPEN
Î Î
ÎÎ
locked through software passwords or manually by the REPLACEMENT
E
R CSE 784
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the pro- BATTERY
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Y
Î
TOP
CONNECTOR OFF
tected position, program and configuration data cannot
be changed. The status of the CPU is indicated by the
Î ÎÎ
Î
CURRENTLY ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED
Î
four green LEDs on the front of the module. BATTERY
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
CONNECTOR
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
FRONT
MODULE OK
Installation
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
RUN
OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
MEMORY
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or PROTECT
Î ÎÎ
Î
REMOTE
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe PROGRAMMER
ONLY
Î ÎÎ
Î
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
Î
OUTPUTS
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation ENABLED
Î ÎÎ
Î
RUN WITH
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software, OUTPUTS
Î ÎÎ
Î
DISABLED
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the STOP
Î ÎÎ
Î
512 KBYTE
PLC installation must comply with supported standards, MEMORY BOARD
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards, BATTERY BEFORE
Î ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
shipped with the PLC programming software, for BATTERY. USE
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
Î ÎÎ
Î
Installation should not be attempted without referring 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
ÎÎÎÎ
to the applicable hardware installation manual. WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
Î ÎÎ
Î
tors on the module. SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position. COMPATIBLE
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.

Î Î ÎÎ
Î USE THIS MODULE
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
D Make sure rack power is off. MODULE
Î
IC697CSE784

LABEL
44A726758-144R01
D Turn on power.
CSE 784
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF Figure 1. CSE 784 - Location of Major Features
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. The State Logic operating system is provided on a
After the program has been verified the toggle switch floppy disk with the CSE 784. The IC641 (MS-DOS)
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode posi- programming software is used to load the operating
tion. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle system into the CSE 784 CPU module. For informa-
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the tion on loading the operating system, see the State
program. Logic Control System User’s Manual.
29-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit GFK-1035C
August 1997
Serial Port Configuration

The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 2. IC641 (MS-DOS) programming software. There are
The serial connection is made from the Standard Serial no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the sys-
COM port on the CPU to the serial port on the tem. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
programming computer, or other serial device, through configuration at power-up and periodically during
the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) operation. The actual configuration must be the same
or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). as the programmed configuration. Deviations are re-
ported to the CPU alarm processor function for con-
This serial connection can be made with available cables figured fault response. Consult Reference 1 for a de-
or you may build cables to fit the needs of your scription of configuration functions.
particular application. For more information on serial
communications, see Reference 3.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ SERIAL a43591g
Batteries
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
C B
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎP G
ÎÎÎÎ in Figure 1. This battery maintains program and data
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
S P T C B
U M M C memory when power is removed and operates the
or
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
N
B
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
C
ONE LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
R
M Removing a Module
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ The following instructions should be followed when
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
RACK 7
NOTE the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
R
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
M AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL the back of the cover.
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
Connection to Programmer it from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-1035C 16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CSE784 [

Table 2. References
Reference Title
4 State Logic Control System User ’s Manual

CSE 784, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, State Logic IC697CSE784
29-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
30
IC697CSE924
GFK-1036B 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE924)
datasheet GFK-1036B
Features a45416

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Single slot CPU. OK
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
12K inputs and outputs (any mix). RUN
ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
B
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function. MEM PROTECT A
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
T
D 64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor. T
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
E
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts. STATE LOGIC
R
Y
CSE 924
TOP
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
D
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) software CPU OFF
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
products. ON
D Provides 512 Kbytes of battery-backed memory in the

REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MEMORY PROTECT
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
KEY POSITION
same slot.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
FRONT
ÎÎ
D Configurable data and program memory. MODULE OK
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D
RUN
ÎÎ
Battery-backed calendar clock. OUTPUTS
ENABLED
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Three position operation mode switch. MEMORY
PROTECT
D REMOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Password controlled access. PROGRAMMER
D
ONLY
Remote programmer keyswitch memory protection
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎ
PROTECTED
D Four status LEDs. RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
set). OUTPUTS
DISABLED
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Reference information inside front door. STOP
D
BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
In-system upgradable firmware. CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
INSTALL NEW
Functions BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
The CSE 924 is a single slot programmable controller
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
MODULE FUNCTION
CPU which provides State Logic control programming 64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
and floating point calculations. The CSE 924 may be FLOATING POINT MATH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
C to perform real-time control of machines, processes,
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
SERIAL PORT
and material handling systems. RS-485
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ
The AD641 software products are used to program
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
the CSE 924 in State Logic; the IC641 (MS-DOS) soft-
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
MODULE
ware products are used to program in Relay Ladder IC697CSE924
LABEL
Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also 44A726758-143R01
used to perform all configuration functions for the

CSE 924.
The CSE 924 communicates with I/O and smart op-

t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
GFK-1036B 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit
August 1997
MEMORY
a45417 I/OLink Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete
PROTECT and analog I/O modules.
ÎÎ
KEY
SWITCH
Program and data memory for the CSE 924 is provided by
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ a memory board with 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
CSE 924 module and does not need to be ordered
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
separately.
B
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
A
T Operation of this module may be controlled by the
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
T
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OPEN E three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
REPLACEMENT R CSE 924
attached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
BATTERY Y TOP
CONNECTOR OFF
software. Program and configuration data can be locked
CURRENTLY
ÎÎ ON through software passwords or manually by the memory
Î ÎÎ
Î
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
INSTALLED
BATTERY
MEMORY PROTECT protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected
Î ÎÎ
Î
KEY POSITION
Î
CONNECTOR
FRONT
position, program and configuration data cannot be
changed. The status of a CPU is indicated by the four
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
MODULE OK
RUN
green LEDs on the front of the module.
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
Î
ENABLED
MEMORY
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECT The CSE 924 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40 _C
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎ
Î
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED, (104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECTED
Î
RUN WITH be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
Î
ENABLED
RUN WITH
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721 and IC697ACC724) can be
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
ordered for direct mounting on the IC697 rack. Refer to
Î ÎÎ
Î
512 KBYTE STOP
MEMORY BOARD BATTERY
the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
for detailed information.
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Installation
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎ
FLOATING POINT MATH end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
Î ÎÎ
Î
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
IC697CSE924
LABEL such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
44A726758–138R01 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
CSE 924

ring to the applicable Programmable Controller
Figure 1. CSE 924 - Location of Major Features Installation Manual.
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN nectors on the module (see Figure 1).
Interface modules, Programmable Coprocessor, D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF
IC660/IC661I/O products, Communications modules, position.
30-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit GFK-1036B
August 1997
D Make sure that rack power is off. Serial Port

D Install the CSE 924 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 2). The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
D Turn on power. RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 1.
blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully, The serial connection is made from the serial port on the
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or
off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF other serial device, through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
After the program has been verified the toggle switch made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode the needs of your particular application. See reference 3
position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle for more information on serial communications.
program.
Configuration
The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also used to load the
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with IC641
State Logic operating system into the CSE 924 CPU
module. The operating system is provided on a floppy (MS-DOS) programming software. There are no DIP
switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The
disk with the CSE 924. For information on loading the
CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration at
operating system, see the State Logic Control System
User’s Manual. power-up and periodically during operation. The actual
configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
SERIAL a45301
processor function for configured fault response. Consult
Reference 1 for a description of configuration functions.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ Batteries
P C B P G
S P T C B
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
U M M C
or
Î
N
B
C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ *
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
METER RACK 1 removing the old battery. Specific indication of a low
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
R
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
M
Removing a Module
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ IC66*
I/O BLOCK The instructions below should be followed when
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B 50 FEET(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS
R
M
MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ * FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724 D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
RACK. with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial Connection to D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
Programmer it from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
GFK-1036B 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit
August 1997
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 State Logic Control System User’s Manual

Battery
Serial Port

Central Processing Unit IC697CSE924
CSE 924, 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, State Logic
30-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
31
IC697CSE925
GFK-1167C 64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit
November 1999 1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit 1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic (IC697CSE925)
datasheet GFK-1167C
Features a45242
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Single slot CPU.
OK
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RUN
D Up to 8K analog I/O. ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function. B
A
MEM PROTECT
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor. T
T
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts. E
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
R CSE 925
D Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) software STATE LOGIC Y TOP
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
CPU OFF
products.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the same ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
slot. MEMORY PROTECT
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
KEY POSITION
D Configurable data and program memory.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
FRONT
ÎÎ
D Battery-backed calendar clock. MODULE OK
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN
D
ÎÎ
Three position operation mode switch. OUTPUTS
ENABLED
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Password controlled access. MEMORY
PROTECT
D Remote programmer keyswitch memory protection REMOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
PROGRAMMER
D Four status LEDs.

ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎ
D
PROTECTED
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
OUTPUTS
set). ENABLED
D
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
RUN WITH
Reference information inside front door. OUTPUTS
D In-system upgradable firmware. DISABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
STOP
BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
Functions CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
The CSE 925 is a single slot programmable controller UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
BATTERY. USE
CPU which provides State Logic control programming IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
and floating point calculations. The CSE 925 can be MODULE FUNCTION
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
FLOATING POINT MATH
C to perform real-time control of machines, processes, COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
and material handling systems.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
SERIAL PORT
The AD641 software products are used to program RS-485
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
COMPATIBLE
the CSE 925 in State Logic; the IC641 (MS-DOS) soft-
ware products are used to program in Relay Ladder
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CSE925
used to perform all configuration functions for the LABEL
44A726758-148R01
CSE 925.
The CSE 925 communicates with I/O and smart op-

t
GFK-0600F
2 PLC CPUs
MEMORY
a45243 and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
PROTECT modules.
ÎÎ
KEY
SWITCH
User Memory
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Program and data memory for the CSE 925 is provided by
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed CMOS
RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the CSE
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î B 925 module and does not need to be ordered separately.
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
A
T
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
T
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OPEN E
REPLACEMENT R CSE 925
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
BATTERY Y TOP
CONNECTOR OFF Operation of this module can be controlled by the
ÎÎ
CURRENTLY ON
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED REMOTE PROGRAMMER attached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
MEMORY PROTECT
BATTERY software. Program and configuration data can be locked
Î ÎÎ
Î
KEY POSITION
Î
CONNECTOR
FRONT
through software passwords or manually by the memory
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
MODULE OK
RUN protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
position, program and configuration data cannot be
Î
ENABLED
MEMORY
changed. The status of a CPU is indicated by the four
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER green LEDs on the front of the module.
Î ÎÎ
Î
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
The CSE 925 requires forced air cooling for proper
Î ÎÎ
Î
PROTECTED
Î
RUN WITH operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40 _C
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should
Î
ENABLED
RUN WITH
Î ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Î ÎÎ
Î
STOP
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
BATTERY
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on the
Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTORS
IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller
Î ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
Installation Manual for detailed information.
Î ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Installation
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎ
FLOATING POINT MATH
Î ÎÎ
Î
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
ÎÎÎÎ detailed information about installation, startup, and

SERIAL PORT
Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-485
COMPATIBLE proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
Î ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
ÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CSE925 PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
LABEL
44A726758–148R01 such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
CSE 925 shipped with the PLC programming software, for
Figure 1. CSE 925 - Location of Major Features tion Manual.
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface tors on the module (see Figure 1).
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF
products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface, position.
31-2 t
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs 3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit GFK-1167C

1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic November 1999
D Make sure that rack power is off. Serial Port

D Install the CSE 925 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
Figure 2).
D Turn on power. Figure 2.
The module should power up and the top LED should The serial connection is made from the serial port on the
blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully, CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are other serial device, through the RS-422/RS-485 to
off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
After the program has been verified the toggle switch may the needs of your particular application. See reference
be moved to the appropriate operation mode position. 3 for more information on serial communications.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program. Configuration
The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also used to load the State The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with IC641
Logic operating system into the CSE 925 CPU module. (MS-DOS) programming software. There are no DIP
The operating system is provided on a floppy disk with switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The
the CSE 925. The operating system is stored in flash CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration
memory on the module. For information on loading the at power-up and periodically during operation. The
operating system, see the State Logic Control System User’s actual configuration must be the same as the
Manual. programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to
the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault
SERIAL a45301
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Batteries
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
P C B P G
S P T C B
U M M C
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
or
N
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

C

*
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
METER RACK 1
removing the old battery. Specific indication of a low
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
B
Î
R
M
Removing a Module
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
The instructions below should be followed when
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î NOTE D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
RACK 7
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
B
R
50 FEET(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
M
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM). the back of the cover.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

* FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT. D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
RACK.
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702) rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial Connection to D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
Programmer it from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
4 PLC CPUs
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 State Logic Control System User’s Manual

Battery
Serial Port

Central Processing Unit - 64 MHz, 32-Bit, IC697CSE925
Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
Rack fan Assembly, 24 VDC IC697ACC744
31-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
Expansion Memory
32
IC697MEM713/715/717/719
GFK-0160F CMOS Expansion Memory
August 1997
Expansion Memory
CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM713/715/717/719)
datasheet GFK-0160F
Features
D Available in 64, 128, 256 and 512 Kbytes

a44742
D For expansion of CPU 771, CPU 772, or PCM

D Memory retained by battery on CPU or PCM
D Does not require additional slot

D Configurable for data and program storage
D Error checking by CPU checksum routine
D No tools required for installation

D Field Installable
Functions
Memory is retained in the event of power loss by the
This CMOS Expansion Memory is available in four
battery on the base board housing.
versions; 64, 128, 256 and 512 Kbytes. This memory
may be used to expand logic and data memory in ei- Logic program memory is continually error-checked
ther the CPU 771 (IC697CPU771) and CPU 772 by the PLC CPU as a background task.
(IC697CPU772) modules, or the Programmable Co- The PCM error checks storage memory when power
processor Module (IC697PCM711). It is installed as a is cycled and on hard or soft resets.
daughter board and resides in the same slot as the
module it serves. Memory on this board supplements
memory available on the base board.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Expansion Memory
GFK-0160F CMOS Expansion Memory
August 1997
Installation
a42711
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Installation Manual (See reference 4).

ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
D Plug the 64 pin connector into the connector on
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
the base board, and engage snaps.
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
OPEN
D Place module in rack. REPLACEMENT CPU 771
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
BATTERY MODULE OK
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
RUN
D Turn power on. CURRENTLY
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED ON = OK, ENABLED
BATTERY
ÎÎ
Î Î
RUN WITH
CONNECTOR
OUTPUTS
CPU Installation:
ÎÎ
Î
ENABLED
Î
RUN WITH
ÎÎ
Î
OUTPUTS
D Clear memory using either MS-DOSr or

DISABLED
ÎÎ
Î
Windowsr programming software following
STOP
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
instructions in the Programming Software User’s CONNECTIONS
Manual (See reference 1).
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
EXPANSION BATTERY. USE
ÎÎ
Î
MEMORY IC697ACC701
PCM Installation: BOARD
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM713 MODULE FUNCTION
D For the PCM follow the instructions in the Pro-

ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM715 12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
IC697MEM717
grammable Coprocessor Module Support Software
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM719
User’s Manual (See reference 3).
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL PORT
ÎÎ
Î
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
Batteries
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
The Lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as

Î ÎÎ
Î MODULE
Î
IC697CPU771
shown in figure 1. This battery maintains user LABEL
44A726758–106
CPU 771
calendar clock on the PLC CPU. Be sure to install the
new battery before removing the old battery. Specific
indication of a low battery state is detailed in Refer-
ences 3 and 4.
Figure 1. Location of Expansion Memory and Battery
on CPU771/772 and PCM
32-2 t
GFK-0600F
Expansion Memory 3
CMOS Expansion Memory GFK-0160F

August 1997
Table 1. References
Reference Title
3 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User ”s Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC697MEM713/715/717/719 [
Battery
Shelflife 10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)

t
GFK-0600F
1
Expansion Memory
33
IC697MEM731/732/733/735
GFK-0531E 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
August 1997
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM731/732/733/735)
datasheet GFK-0531E
a44437
Features
D Available in 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes
non-volatile flash memory, 256 KBytes and 512
Kbytes.
D For expansionofCPU780/781/782/788/789.
D Memory retained by battery on CPU.
D Does not require additional slot.
D Configurable for data and program storage.
D Error checking by CPU checksum routine.
D Installation requires only a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
D Field Installable.
D Parity generation and checking for each byte of
SRAM.
Functions
CMOS Expansion Memory is available in four ver-
sions; 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes non-vola-
tile flash memory, 256 KBytes and 512 Kbytes. This
memory must be used to provide logic and data
memory in the PLC CPU 780/781/782/788/789 Central
Processor Unit modules. It is installed as a daughter
board and resides in the same slot as the module it
serves. This board is required for proper operation of
these CPUs since the base board contains no RAM
memory.
Memory is retained in the event of power loss by the
battery on the base board housing. Flash memory is Figure 1. Example of 32-Bit CMOS Expansion
retained in the event of a power loss with or without the Memory Board
battery connected.
Logic program memory is continually error-checked
by the PLC CPU as a background task. Memory par-
ity errors are reported to the PLC CPU when they oc-
cur.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Expansion Memory
GFK-0531E 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
August 1997
Installation MEMORY
PROTECT
a45157
ÎÎ
KEY
D Installation should not be attempted without refer- SWITCH
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ring to the Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and applicable data sheets (Refer to Refer-
ences 3, 4, 5 and 6).
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
LED
D Align the expansion memory board and CPU con- STATUS
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
INDICATORS
nectors. B
ÎÎÎÎ
A
D Align the captive screws on the expansion memory T
T
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
OPEN E
board with the standoffs already installed on the REPLACEMENT R CPU 781
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
BATTERY
CPU. CONNECTOR
Y TOP
OFF
D Push the expansion memory board onto the CPU CURRENTLY

ÎÎÎÎ ON
ÎÎÎÎ
connector ensuring that the mating screws remain INSTALLED REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
BATTERY
aligned with their respective standoff. KEY POSITION
ÎÎÎÎÎ
CONNECTOR
FRONT
D Screw each expansion memory board screw into
ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE OK
Î
RUN
the standoffs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
Î
ENABLED
tightening each screw. MEMORY
ÎÎÎÎ
PROTECT
D Make sure rack power is off before installing the REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎ
ONLY
CPU module. Place module in rack. ON = OK, ENABLED,
ÎÎÎÎ
PROTECTED
D Turn power on.
Î
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ÎÎÎÎ
D Clear memory with MS-DOSr or Windowsr pro-
Î
ENABLED
RUN WITH
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUTS
gramming software following instructions in the DISABLED
Programming Software User’s Manual (Refer to Ref- STOP
ÎÎÎÎ
EXPANSION
MEMORY BATTERY
erence 1). BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
CONNECTORS
IC697MEM731
IC697MEM732
ÎÎÎÎ
INSTALL NEW
IC697MEM733 BATTERY BEFORE
Batteries IC697MEM735 UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
The Lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION
in Figure 2. This battery maintains user memory when pow- 16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
ÎÎÎÎ
PROCESSING UNIT
er is removed and operates the calendar clock on the PLC
CPU. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the
old battery. Specific indication of a low battery state is de- ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
tailed in References 3, 4 and 5. COMPATIBLE
ÎÎÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
Î
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Î ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
IC697CPU781
LABEL
44A726758-128R01
CPU 781
Figure 2. Example of Location of Expansion Memory and

Battery on CPU 780/781/782/788/789 (CPU781 Shown)
33-2 t
GFK-0600F
Expansion Memory 3
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory GFK-0531E

August 1997
Table 1. References
Reference Title
2 Programmable Logic Controller Reference Manual
4 Data Sheet for IC697CPU781, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale
5 Data Sheet for IC697CPU782, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale, Floating Point
6 Data Sheet for IC697CPU780, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale, Floating Point, for Redundancy Applications
7 Data Sheet for IC697CPU788/789 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale for Genius Triple Redundancy Systems
Table 2. Specifications for CMOS Expansion Memory Modules [

Battery
Shelf life: 10 years at 20_C (68_ F)
Memory retention: 6 months nominal without applied power
Current required form 5V bus: 2.25 amps (includes expansionmemory board and CPU module)

128 KByte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory IC697MEM731
256 KByte w/256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash memory, IC697MEM732
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
t
GFK-0600F
1
Coprocessor Modules
34
IC697PCM711
GFK-0164G Programmable Coprocessor Module
August 1997
Coprocessor Modules
Programmable Coprocessor Module (IC697PCM711)
datasheet GFK-0164G
Features a44716
• Single slot Coprocessor

• Dual Tasking
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
• MegaBasic t OK
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
USER 1
• CCM2 Protocol USER 2
• 12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
• 90% of an IBMr AT performance
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
• Up to 96 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS logic and PCM 711
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î PCM 711
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
COPROCESSOR MODULE OK
data memory on board USER 1
ÎÎ
Î
USER 2
• Supports up to 512 Kbytes optional expansion ON = OK, ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
memory OR USER
•
PUSH TO RESTART
Programmed by IC647, IC640 or IBM-compatible
ÎÎ
Î
APPLICATION
PUSH AND HOLD TO
Personal Computer STOP AND RESET
• Two RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 serial ports

ÎÎ
Î BATTERY
ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTIONS
• High performance access to PLC memory
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALL NEW
• Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
• Reset pushbutton BATTERY. USE

IC697ACC701
•
•
Three Status LEDs
Soft Configuration (No dip switches or jumpers)
with MS-DOSr or Windowsr based programming
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
PORT 1
RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
software configuration function
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
• Simultaneous communications on both ports at up
ÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMABLE
to 9.6 Kbaud, or up to 19.2 Kbaud individually. COPROCESSOR,
COMMUNICA TIONS
ÎÎ
Î
OPTIONAL MEMORY
Functions USE IC697MEM71
ÎÎ
Î PORT 2
ÎÎ
Î
The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) is a RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
ÎÎ
Î
Coprocessor to the PLC CPU. It can be programmed COMPATIBLE
to perform operator interface, real time computations,

data storage, data acquisition and data communica-
tions functions. It communicates with the PLC CPU
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
IC697PCM711
LABEL
44A726758–203
over the backplane and can access user and system

data using extensions to the powerful MegaBasic lan-
guage. No application program support is required in
the PLC CPU. Dual tasking allows running a MegaBasic program at
the same time the PCM is used as a communications
Many PCMs can be supported in a single IC697 PLC
interface. Operation of the module may be initialized
system and each can accommodate an optional ex-
by a pushbutton or by an attached PCM development
pansion memory up to 512 Kbytes. system. The status of the PCM is indicated by three
green LEDs on the front of the module.
tMegaBasic is a trademark of Christopher Cochran; rIBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Coprocessor Modules
August 1997
Installation Expansion Memory

• Installation should not be attempted without refer- The PCM can operate with or without an expansion
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller memory daughter board. The base memory on the
Installation Manual (see reference 5). PCM board has up to 95 Kbytes user memory. The ex-
• Make sure rack power is off. pansion memory daughter board permits expansion of
• Install expansion memory if required. program/data memory by 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes.
The battery which supports this memory is located on
• Connect the battery to either of the battery con- the base board housing as shown in figure 2.
nectors on the module. (See figure 2)
• Install in the rack. (See figure 1)
• Turn on power.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the a42759
top LED stays on.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL a42786g
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 0
ÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
C B
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
G
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î
S P T B
U M C OPEN
or
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
REPLACEMENT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î

N BATTERY PCM 711
B CONNECTOR
MODULE OK
ÎÎ
Î
C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
USER 1
USER 2
CURRENTLY
ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ACTIVE
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ É
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ONE INSTALLED
BATTERY OR USER
METER CONNECTOR
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÉÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
PUSH TO RESTART
RACK 1 APPLICATION.
PUSH AND HOLD TO
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î Î É Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
STOP AND RESET.
B P
R C
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ É
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
M M BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÉÎÎÎ ÎÎ

Î
INSTALL NEW
IC66* BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎ
Î
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 6
NOTE EXPANSION
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PORT 1
Î Î Î
MEMORY
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING BOARD
RS–232 OR
B G RS–422/485
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM713
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
R B (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE IC697MEM715
COMPATIBLE
M C IC697MEM717
ÎÎ
Î
IC697MEM719
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
N MODULE FUNCTION
B
ÎÎ
Î
C PROGRAMMABLE
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
COPROCESSOR,
COMMUNICATIONS
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
METER OPTIONAL MEMORY
RACK 7 USE IC697MEM71
ÎÎ
Î
P
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
B
Î
ÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î PORT 2
ÎÎ
Î
S R
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
RS–232 OR
Î
M RS–422/485
COMPATIBLE

Î Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
I/O TERMINATOR IC697PCM711
(LAST RACK) LABEL
44A726758–203
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713 PCM 711
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration (PCM Figure 2. Programmable Coprocessor Module - User
Shown in Rack 1) Details
34-2 t
GFK-0600F
Coprocessor Modules 3
Programmable Coprocessor Module GFK-0164G

August 1997
Programming and Configuration Table 1. Port 1 or 2 - RS-232

An IC647 or IC640 computer, or IBM-compatible PC, SIGNAL
PIN FUNCTION NAME I/O
XT, or AT computer with PCM Development Software
installed is connected to the top port of the PCM. The 1 Shield - -
default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM Development 2 Transmitted Data TD Output
Software is used to configure the serial port parame- 3 Received Data RD Input
ters, to define the interface to the PLC CPU, to select 4 Request To Send RTS Output
5 Clear To Send CTS Input
task functions and to program MegaBasic applica-
7 Signal Ground 0V -
tions. The PCM parameters can also be configured 8 Data Carrier Detect DCD Input
using MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming soft- 20 Data Terminal Ready DTR Output
ware. Consult reference 3 for details of operation.
Table 2. Port 1 or 2 - RS-422/RS-485
ÎÎÎÎ Î
Programmer a43735
IC697CBL705 SIGNAL
ÎÎÎÎ Î
RS-232 PCM
(DEFAULT PORT)
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
3PL
9 Send Data (A) SD (A) Output
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10 Request to Send (A) RTS (A) Output
4PL
11 Clear to Send (A) CTS (A) Input
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PCM
PROGRAMMING S/W 12 Termination for pin 13 - -
13 Receive Data (A) RD (A) Input
PIN PIN 21 Send Data (B) SD (B) Output
TXD 2 3 RXD 22 Request to Send (B) RST (B) Output
RXD 3 2 TXD
RTS 4 5 CTS 23 Clear to Send (B) CTS (B) Input
CTS 5 20 DTR 24 Termination for pin 23 - -
8 8
20 1 SHLD 25 Receive Data (B) RD (B) Input
GND 7 7 GND
PCM
IC647 AND
IBM PS/2 25-PIN Configuration
25-PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this
board for configuration. However, the board must be
Figure 3. PCM Development System Connection to PCM configured before operation using PCM Development
Software (See reference 3).
Serial Ports
Status Indication
Both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 compatible.
Both ports acting simultaneously can each support up Three Status LEDs are available as shown in Figure 2.
to 9.6 Kbaud full duplex data communications, or they The top LED indicates the condition of the module, the
can support up to 19.2 Kbaud individually. bottom two LEDs may be assigned to a configured
function.
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL) Controls

Connectors 3PL and 4PL contain signals for both RS-232 One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold for less
and RS-422/RS-485 types of communication circuits. The than 5 seconds will restart an application. Push and
pin-out for the RS-232 signals are per the RS-232 specifi- hold for more than 5 seconds and the module factory
cation with an exception that pins not normally used for default configuration will be installed (this action will
RS-232 are used for RS-422/RS-485 signals. Details are not clear memory but will permit communication with
shown in tables 1 and 2. the programmer using factory default settings).
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Batteries If during power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected

the Module OK LED (top) will not stay on. Specific in-
dication of a low battery state is detailed in the PCM
in figure 2. This battery maintains user memory when
Support Software User’s Manual.
power is removed. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery.
Table 3. References
Reference Title
1 ProgramingSoftware User ’s Manual
3 PCM Support Software User ’s Manual
4 MegaBasic Programming Language Reference Manual
Table 4. Specifications for IC697PCM711 [
Battery
Shelf life 10 years at 20°C (68°F)
Current required from 5V bus 1.0 amp
Serial Ports RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 compatible
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Stan-
dards, shipped with the PLC programming software, for additional guidelines.

PCM, 12 Mhz, 20 Kbyte, Expandable IC697PCM711
34-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
Coprocessor Modules
35
IC697ADC701
GFK-0521E Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) (IC697ADC701)
datasheet GFK-0521E
Features
a44517
D Single slot Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor

D Runs Alphanumeric Display System software
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î Î Î
OK
D PORT 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
High performance access to PLC memory
Î
PORT 2
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Reset pushbutton; three status LEDs
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î Î
D Soft Configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)
with MS-DOSr or Windowsr based programming
ADC 701
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ALPHANUMERIC
MODULE OK
DISPLAY
software configuration function
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PORT 1 ACTIVE
COPROCESSOR
PORT 2 ACTIVE
D ON = OK, ACTIVE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Easy fill-in-the-blank system building
PUSH TO RESTART
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
APPLICATION.
Pop-up windows; pull down menus PUSH AND HOLD TO
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
STOP AND RESET.
D 15 User definable function keys per screen BATTERY
D
Î
CONNECTIONS
Printer logging to a serial printer
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PORT 1
The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module is a RS-232 OR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS-422/485
coprocessor to the IC697 PLC CPU. It is programmed PRINTER
(PCOP)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
to perform Alphanumeric Display System display, re-
port, and alarm functions through an Operator Inter-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION
face Terminal, which can be an OIT or Mini OIT, a
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ALPHANUMERIC
VT100 compatible terminal, or an IC647 industrial DISPLAY
computer or IBMr compatible personal computer

COPROCESSOR
running TERMF. It communicates with the IC697

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU over the system backplane.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PORT 2
RS-232
Up to 63 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS-422/485
TERMINAL
supported in a single IC697 PLC system and can be
located in either the main rack or expansion racks.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
IC697ADC701
ÎÎÎÎÎ
LABEL
Operation of the module may be initialized by de- 44A726758-205R01
pressing a pushbutton on the module or by an at-

tached ADS (PCOP) development system. The status
of the ADC is indicated by three green LEDs on the
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Installation
Installation Manual , the ADS User’s Manual, and the
ADS Reference Manual.
D Make sure rack power is off before installing the A44518
Aphanumetic Display Coprocessor module.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
nectors on the module (see figure 2).
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
D Install in the rack (see figure 1).
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
D Turn on power.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
The module should power-up and blink the top LED.
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
OPEN
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the REPLACEMENT
ADC 701
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY
top LED stays on. CONNECTOR MODULE OK
PORT 1 ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
PORT 2 ACTIVE
CURRENTLY
ON = OK, ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECOR1. PUSH TO RESTART
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
APPLICATION.
PUSH AND HOLD TO
PARALLEL STOP AND RESET.
a44525
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
COM1
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
CONNECTIONS
P C B A
ÎÎ
Î
S P T D
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î
U M C
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
ÎÎ
Î
IC697ACC701
ONE
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
METER
PORT 1
RACK 1 OIT RS-232 OR
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
RS-422/485
PRINTER
ÎÎ
Î
B P (PCOP)
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
R C
M M
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ALPHANUMERIC
ÎÎ
Î
DISPLAY
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
COPROCESSOR
RACK 6
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
B G
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
R B NOTE
M C PORT 2
ÎÎ
Î
RS-232
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET RS-422/485
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME TERMINAL
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
ONE MODULE
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î
METER RACK 7 IC697ADC701
LABEL
44A726758-205R01
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
P B
S R
M
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ADC 701
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I/O TERMINATOR IC66*
(LAST RACK) BLOCK
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM 711
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM 713
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM 731/734
ADC - ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY COPROCESSOR, ADC 701
PCM - PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM 711
Figure 2. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor

Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration Module - User Details
35-2 t
GFK-0600F
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) GFK-0521E

August 1997
Programming and Configuration Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL)

An IC647, IC640, or an IBM-compatible PC, XT, AT, or Port 1 (3PL) is normally connected to an RS-232 serial
PS/2r computer with PCM Development Software COM port of a host computer for communications to
(PCOP) installed connects to the top port as shown in PCOP at 19.2 Kilobaud. Alternately, port 1 may be con-
figure 3. The default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM nected to a serial RS-232 printer (see the Alphanumeruc
Development Software is used to configure the serial Display System User’s Manual to reconfigure Port 1). Fig-
port parameters and to install the Alphanumeric Dis- ure 3 shows typical cable connections for this purpose
play System software onto the ADC. Refer to the the and Table 1 shows the details of the RS-232 signals.
ADS User’s Manual, for details of operation.
Table 1. Port 1 and 2 – RS-232 Signals
SIGNAL
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
a44697 1 Shield - -
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
2 Transmitted Data TD Output
ADC
3 Received Data RD Input
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
PROGRAMMER RS-232
3PL
4 Request To Send RTS Output
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
5 Clear To Send CTS Input
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4PL 7 Signal Ground GND -
PCM 8 Data Carrier Detect DCD Input
PROGRAMMING S/W
20 Data Terminal Ready DTR Output
IC647 PROGRAMMER AT CABLE
(IC690CBL705) (IC690CBL702)
PIN PIN PIN PIN Port 2 (4PL) is configured as a 19.2 Kbaud RS-232 port
TD 2 3 RD CD 1 1 SHLD and interfaces to the OIT or other terminal’s RS-232
RD 3
RTS 4
2
5
TD
CTS
RD 2 2
3
TD
RD
port for keyboard input and screen output. Figure 4
TD 3
CTS 5 20 DTR DTR 4 8 DCD shows appropriate cable connections and Table 2
DCD 8 8 DCD RTS 7 5 CTS shows usable RS-422 signal details.
DTR 20 1 SHLD CTS 8 20 DTR
GND 7 7 GND GND 5 7 GND
IC647 ADC AT ADC Table 2. Port 1 and 2 – RS-422/485 Signals
AND IBM PS/2 25-PIN 9-PIN 25-PIN
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
25-PIN SIGNAL
CONNECTOR
PIN FUNCTION NAME6 I/O
7 Signal Ground SG -
Figure 3. Example of PCM Development System 9 Send Data (A) SD (A) Output
Connection to ADC 10 Request To Send (A) RTS (A) Output
11 Clear To Send (A) CTS (A) Input
12 Termination for pin 11 - -
Serial Ports 13 Receive Data (A) RD (A) Input
21 Send Data (B) SD (B) Output
Although both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 22 Request To Send (B) RTS (B) Output
compatible and the signals shown in both Table 1 and 23 Clear To Send (B) CTS (B) Input
Table 2 are available at each connector, the use of each 24 Termination for pin 25 - -
port is dedicated for ADC operation. 25 Receive Data (B) RD (B) Input
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
ÎÎ
Î Î
PIN PIN a44698
Î Î
1 SHLD IC693
TXD 2 3 RXD
Î Î
OIT OR
RXD 3 2 TXD IC697
Î Î
RTS 4 5 CTS ADC
PRIMARY CTS 5 20 DTR PORT 1
Î Î
PORT 1 GND 7 7 GND OR
DTR 20 8 DCD PORT 2
DCD 8
25- PIN 25- PIN 25- PIN 25- PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Figure 4. ADC Port 2 Connection to an OIT
Configuration Controls
One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold for less
There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this than 5 seconds will restart the Alphanumeric Display
board for configuration. However, the Alphanumeric System software. Push and hold for more than 5 se-
Display System software must be loaded using PCM conds and the module factory default configuration
Development Software (refer to the Alphanumeric Dis- will be installed (this action will not clear memory but
play System User’s Manual for details). The ADC must will permit communications with the programmer
be configured with the MS-DOS or Windows based using factory default settings).
programming software configuration function prior to
use.
Batteries
in figure 2. This battery maintains user memory
Status Indication when power is removed. Be sure to install the new
battery in the unused battery connector before re-
Three Status LEDs are available as shown in figure 2. moving and discarding the old battery. If during
The top LED indicates the condition of the ADC mod- power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected, the
ule, the bottom two LEDs indicate serial port activity. Module OK LED (top) will not stay on.
Table 3. References
Reference Title
3 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User ’s Manual
5 Alphanumeric Display System User ’s Manual
6 Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
7 Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
8 Mini Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
9 IC600 Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
35-4 t
GFK-0600F
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) GFK-0521E

August 1997
Table 4. Specifications for IC697ADC701 [
Battery
Shelflife 10 years at 20_C (68_F)
Current Required from 5V Bus 1.0 amp
Serial Ports RS-232andRS-422/RS-485compatible
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Stan-
dards, shipped with the PLC programming software, for additional guidelines.

AlphanumericDisplay Coprocessor Module IC697ADC701
t
GFK-0600F
1
36
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL252
GFK-0756D 12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0756D
Features a45146
Î
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
Î
C1 C1
D 20 ms input filter
A1 B1 D1 A1 B1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
Î
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
D Proximity switch compatible

A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
Î
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
Functions FUSE FUSE
The 12 volt AC Input module provides 32 input points

INPUT
12VAC
Î
Î 1
10MA/PT
50/60 HZ
Î
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows 2
A1
A2
A1 3
Î
each group of eight points to be used on a different A2 4
A3
H
phase of the AC supply. 5 A4
Î
A3
A5 ~
A4 6
A6 N
Î
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteris- A5
7
A7
8
tics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input char- A6 A8
Î
9
A7 10
acteristics are compatible with a large range of available
Î
11
A8
proximity switches. B1
12
B1
B2
Î
13
B2 B3
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each 14
B4 H
Î
B3 15
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included B4 16 B5 ~
B6 N
Î
at the top of the module. B5
18
17
B7
B6 B8
Î
19
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct re- B7 20
Î
placement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- B8 21
C1
C1 22
ences are user configurable without the use of jumpers
Î
23 C2
C2 C3
or DIP switches on the module. 24
H
Î
C3 25
C4
C4 26
C5 ~
Configuration is done using the configuration function N
Î
27 C6
C5
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software C6
28 C7
Î
C8
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ether-
29
C7
30
Î
net TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming C8 31
D1
D1 32
Software configuration function is installed on the pro-
Î
33 D2
D2
D3
gramming device. The programming device can be an 34
D4 H
Î
D3 35
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer. D4 36
D5 ~
Î
D5 37 D6 N
Î Î
D7
D6 38
39 D8
Î
D7
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL252
SLOT LABEL 44A726758–027R01
t
GFK-0600F
2 Discrete Input Modules
August 1997
Operation of the 12 VOLT AC Input Module

LED a45148
OPTO
ISOLATOR FILTER SYSTEM
H INTERFACE BACKPLANE
~
N
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL252
Input Characteristics Two-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and the
The 12 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire devices.
variety of input devices, such as: This module is designed to be compatible with many of these
two–wire devices; however each device type must be care-
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches fully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF
states.
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
3-wire To determine compatibility with a specific proximity switch,
find the ON state characteristics of the switch in the diagram
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reli- shown below in Figure 2. If that point falls to the left of the
able operation of the switching device. Input current is typi- input load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
cally 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leak- As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible
age current in the OFF state without turning on. proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown below.
Three-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 2.5
current in the OFF State. volts or less.
a44138
10
8 15V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 6 OPERATIONAL NON–OPERATIONAL
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH 4
10V SUPPLY
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
36-2 t
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules 3
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0756D

August 1997
Module Power a42143

TERMINALS FIELD WIRING
The 12 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from
ÎÎ
the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
1
ÎÎ
2 A1
Module Mechanical Keying A2
Î
ÎÎÎ
3
4 A3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
H
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents in- 5 A4
~
ÎÎ
advertent substitution of one module type for another 6 A5
N
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on A6
Î
ÎÎÎ
7
the board below the connector. The key is included with 8 A7
ÎÎ
each module. 9 A8
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto 10
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
11
the backplane center rail. When the module is ex- B1
tracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring 12
ÎÎÎ
B2
13
the slot to accept only identical module types.
ÎÎ
B3
14
If it is necessary to change the module location in the B4 H
Î
ÎÎÎ
15
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail 16
B5 ~
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
N
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- 17
B6
ÎÎ
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It 18
B7
may then be reinserted onto the module and the mod- 19

B8
ule inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note 20
ÎÎ
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost 21
ÎÎ
rack position. 22
C1
C2
Î
ÎÎÎ
23
C3
24
Î
ÎÎÎ
C4 H
25
Field Wiring ~
ÎÎ
C5
26
C6 N
Î
ÎÎÎ
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on the 27
C7
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is iso-
ÎÎ
28
C8
lated from the others, a wire from the power source to 29
the power input terminal for each group (terminal 30
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power input termi- 31
D1
nals for each group are not connected inside the mod-
Î Î
32
33 D2
ule).
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
34 D3
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept H
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D4
35
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 D5 ~
ÎÎ
36
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if 37
D6 N
Î
ÎÎÎ
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle 38 D7
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2)wires to be routed out through 39 D8
the terminal board cavity. 40
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board by

passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the lower
corner of the terminal board.
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures module. Module features referenced in the following proce-
dures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
The following procedures are recommended when connect-
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
ing field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
a43855
JACKSCREW HINGED JACKSCREW
DOOR
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎ CORD
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features

1. Turn off power before removing or installing ter- 3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
minals boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.10
ule to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
board securely in place. The Detachable field wir- wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation
ing terminal board can now be removed from the diameter of .135 inch (3.43 mm) not be exceeded. To
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- ensure proper connection, two wires may be termi-
wise until it is fully disengaged. nated on any one terminal only if both wires are the
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the same size.
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in 4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maxi-
Figure 5. mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2)wires are to be used, then wire
Caution markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
Do not use the hinged door to remove the space for the hinged door to close.
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
36-4 t
GFK-0600F
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0756D

August 1997
ÎÎ Î JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î DO NOT
Î
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board

5. After completing connections to all modules in a only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is rec- board with its correct mating rack slot location.
ommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the 8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recom-
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable mended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles, bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
Removing an I/O Module
indicate circuit wiring information and provide The instructions below should be followed when re-
space to record user circuit wiring identification. moving an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for 1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to in- the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
sert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow the back of the cover.
quick identification of the module voltage type 2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage). with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
should be securely fastened to the rack by insert- from the backplane connector.
ing the terminal board strap (attached to each 3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- from the rack.
tom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL252 [
Rated Voltage: 12 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal

Inputs per Module: 32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation: 1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
Input Current: 10mA (typical) at rated voltage
InputImpedance: 1.12K ohms typical
Input Characteristics -
On-state Voltage: 7.5 to 15 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage: 0 to 2.5 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent: 6mA to 15mA
Off-state Current: 0 to 2.5mA (2mA minimum at 2.5V input)
Filter Delay Time: 20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus: 0.3 amps
Standards.

Input Module : 12 Volt AC, 32 Points IC697MDL252
36-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
37 IC697MDL253
GFK-0757C 24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0757C
Features a45147

D 20 ms input filter A1 B1 C1
ÎÎ
D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
ÎÎ
C2 C2
A2 B2 D2 A2 B2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
ÎÎ
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
Functions A7
A8
B7
B8
C7
C8
D7
D8
A7
A8
B7
B8
C7
C8
D7
D8
ÎÎ
FUSE FUSE
ÎÎ
INPUT 10MA/PT
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows 50/60 HZ
ÎÎ
24VAC
each group of eight points to be used on a different 1
A1
ÎÎ
2
phase of the AC supply. A1 3 A2
A3
ÎÎ
A2 4
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteris- A3 5 A4 H
A5 ~
ÎÎ
tics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input char- A4 6
A6 N
7
acteristics are compatible with a large range of available A5
ÎÎ
8
A7
A6 A8
proximity switches. 9
ÎÎ
A7 10
11
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each A8 B1
ÎÎ
12
B1
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included 13
B2
B3
ÎÎ
B2 14
at the top of the module. B3 15
B4 H
~
ÎÎ
B5
B4 16
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct re- 17 B6 N
B5 B7
ÎÎ
placement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- B6
18
B8
19
ences are user configurable without the use of jumpers
ÎÎ
B7 20
or DIP switches on the module. B8 21
ÎÎ
22
C1
C1
C2
Configuration is done using the configuration function 23
ÎÎ
C2 C3
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software
24
C3 25 C4 H

~
ÎÎ
C4 26 C5
27 C6 N
C5
ÎÎ
net TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming C6
28 C7
29 C8
Software configuration function is installed on the pro-
ÎÎ
C7
30
gramming device. The programming device can be an C8 31
ÎÎ
32 D1
D1
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer. 33 D2
D2
ÎÎ
34 D3
D3 35 D4 H
~
ÎÎ
D4 D5
36
D5 37 D6 N
ÎÎ
D7
ÎÎÎÎ
D6 38
39 D8
D7
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL253
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

LED
a45148
OPTO FILTER
ISOLATOR SYSTEM
H INTERFACE BACKPLANE
~ N
FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
The 24 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire devices.
variety of input devices, such as: This module is designed to be compatible with many such
two-wire devices; however each device type must be care-
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches fully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF
states.
Three–wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 5
a42231
11 24V SUPPLY
10
NON–OPERATIONAL
8 20V SUPPLY
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE 6
ACROSS
PROXIMITY 4
SWITCH OPERATIONAL
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
37-2 t
GFK-0600F
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0757C

August 1997
Module Power TERMINALS

a42143
FIELD WIRING
The 24 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from
ÎÎ
Î Î
the 5 volt bus on the backplane. 1
A1
ÎÎ
2
ÎÎ
3 A2
Module Mechanical Keying
ÎÎ
4 A3
H
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
5 A4
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents in- ~
A5
Î Î
6
advertent substitution of one module type for another A6 N
7
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
Î
ÎÎÎ
A7
the board below the connector. The key is included with 8
9 A8
each module.
Î Î
10
Î
ÎÎÎ
the backplane center rail. When the module is ex- B1
12
tracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
ÎÎ
B2
13
the slot to accept only identical module types. B3
Î
ÎÎÎ
14
B4 H
If it is necessary to change the module location in the 15
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B5 ~
ÎÎ
B6 N
ÎÎ
B7
B8
ÎÎ
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost 21
ÎÎ
C1
rack position. 22
C2
Î
ÎÎÎ
23
C3
24
Î
ÎÎÎ
C4 H
25
Field Wiring ~
ÎÎ
C5
26
C6 N
Î
ÎÎÎ
C7
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is iso-
ÎÎ
28
C8
lated from the others, a wire from the power source to 29
ÎÎ
Î Î
D1
nals for each group are not connected inside the mod-
Î Î
32
D2
ule). 33
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
34 D3
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
ÎÎ
D4 H
35
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 ~
ÎÎ
Î Î
36 D5
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if D6 N
37
ÎÎ
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle
38 D7
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2wires to be routed out through
ÎÎ
39 D8
the terminal board cavity.
40
corner of the terminal board.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎ Î
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
BOARD
CORD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎ CORD
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
STRAP STRAP
minals boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
ule to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal (2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
board securely in place. The Detachable field wir- #14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
ing terminal board can now be removed from the maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connec-
wise until it is fully disengaged. tion, two wires may be terminated on any one ter-
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the minal only if both wires are the same size.
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maxi-
mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
Caution #14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
Do not use the hinged door to remove the mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
terminal board. The hinged door could space for the hinged door to close.
37-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎÎ PULL
ON DOOR

6. A door label insert is included with each module to Removing an I/O Module
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification. The instructions below should be followed when re-
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for moving an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to in- 1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
sert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
quick identification of the module voltage type the back of the cover.
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage). 2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
should be securely fastened to the rack by insert- rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
ing the terminal board strap (attached to each from the backplane connector.
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- 3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
tom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

On-state Voltage: 13.5 to 30 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage: 0 to 5 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Current: 0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time: 20ms typical
Standards.

Input Module - 24 Volts AC, 32 Points IC697MDL253
37-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
38
IC697MDL254
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0784C
Features a45227

Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
Î
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2

A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
Î
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
Î
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
Functions A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
Î
FUSE FUSE
Î
INPUT 5MA/PT
50/60 HZ
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows 48VAC
Î
1
each group of eight points to be used on a different 2
A1
Î
A1 A2
phase of the AC supply. 3
A3
A2 4
Î
A4 H
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteris- A3 5
A5 ~
6
Î
A4 A6 N
tics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input char- 7
A5 A7
acteristics are compatible with a large range of available 8
Î
A6 9
A8
proximity switches. A7 10
Î
11
A8 B1
Î
B1 B2
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included B2 14
13
B3
Î
B4 H
at the top of the module. B3 15
B5 ~
Î
B4 16
B6 N
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct re- B5
17
B7
Î
18
placement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- B6 19
B8
ences are user configurable without the use of jumpers B7
Î
20
B8 21
or DIP switches on the module. C1
Î
C1 22
23 C2
Configuration is done using the configuration function C2 C3
Î
24
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software C3 25 C4 H
C5 ~
Î
C4 26
27 C6 N
C5
C7
Î
net TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming C6
28
29 C8
Software configuration function is installed on the pro- C7
Î
30
C8
D1
Î
D1 32
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer. D2
33 D2
D3
Î
34
D3 D4 H
35
~
Î Î
D4 D5
36 N
D5 37 D6
Î
D7
D6 38
Î Î
39 D8
D7
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL254
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

LED
a45148
OPTO
H BACKPLANE
INTERFACE
~
N
FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
The 48 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide OFF state leakage current are higher than for three-wire de-
variety of input devices, such as: vices. This module is designed to be compatible with many
such two-wire devices; however each device type must be
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and
OFF states.
Three-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 2.5
48V SUPPLY a44081

15
14
12
10
NON–OPERATIONAL
8
40V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 6
ACROSS
PROXIMITY 4
SWITCH OPERATIONAL
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
I LOAD (mA)
38-2 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Module Power
The 48 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from a42143
the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
ÎÎ
1
ÎÎ
Module Mechanical Keying 2 A1
A2
Î
ÎÎÎ
3
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents in- 4 A3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A4 H
advertent substitution of one module type for another 5
~
ÎÎ
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on 6 A5
A6 N
Î
ÎÎÎ
the board below the connector. The key is included with 7
each module. A7
ÎÎ
8
9 A8
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
10
the backplane center rail. When the module is ex-
Î
ÎÎÎ
11
tracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring B1
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
12
the slot to accept only identical module types. 13
B2
ÎÎ
B3
B4 H
Î
ÎÎÎ
B5 ~
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B6 N
ÎÎ
B7
B8
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost
ÎÎ
20
rack position. 21
ÎÎÎ
C1
22
C2
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
23
C3
ÎÎÎ
24
C4 H
Field Wiring 25
~
ÎÎ
C5
26
N
ÎÎ
C6
Î Î
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is iso- C7
ÎÎ
28
lated from the others, a wire from the power source to 29 C8
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
nals for each group are not connected inside the mod- D1
Î Î
32
D2
ule). 33
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
34 D3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D4 H
35
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 D5 ~
ÎÎ
36
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if D6 N
37
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle D7
38
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out through D8
39
the terminal board cavity. 40

corner of the terminal board. Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎÎ
CORD
ÎÎ
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎ CORD
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
STRAP STRAP

Figure 5. mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
38-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
ÎÎ Î JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î DO NOT
Î
PULL
ON DOOR

insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to in- 1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage). 2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- 3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Input Current: 4.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
On–state Voltage: 33 to 56 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off–state Voltage: 0 to 10 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On–state Current: 3mA to 7mA
Off–state Current: 0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Standards.

Input Module: 48 Volt AC, 32 Points IC697MDL254
38-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
39
IC697MDL250
GFK-0084J 120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0084J
Features a44707

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
D Proximity switch compatible A2 B2 C2

C3
D2 A2 B2 C2
C3
D2
ÎÎ
A3 B3 D3 A3 B3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
Functions
ÎÎ
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
ÎÎ
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
FUSE FUSE
The 120 volt AC Input module for the programmable
controller provides 32 input points in four isolated
groups of eight points each. This allows each group of
INPUT
120VAC
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
1
50/60 HZ
ÎÎ
A1
eight points to be used on a different phase of the AC A1
2
3 A2
ÎÎ
supply. A2 4
A3
H
A4
A3 5
~
ÎÎ
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with A4 6
A5
N
A6
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC stan- 7
ÎÎ
A5 A7
8
dard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible A6 9 A8
ÎÎ
A7
with a large range of available proximity switches. 10
11
ÎÎ
A8
B1
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each B1
12
13 B2
ÎÎ
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- B2
14
B3
H
B3 B4
~
ÎÎ
cluded at the top of the module. 15
B5
B4 16
N
B6
ÎÎ
17
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct B5
18
B7
B6
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- B8
ÎÎ
19
B7
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- 20
ÎÎ
B8 21
ers or DIP switches on the module. C1 22
C1
ÎÎ
23 C2
C2
Configuration is done using the configuration function 24
C3
of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming software

H
ÎÎ
C3 C4
C4
25
C5 ~
26
ÎÎ
C6 N
C5 27
C7
net TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming C6 28
ÎÎ
29 C8
Software configuration function is installed on the pro- C7
30
ÎÎ
C8
D1
D1
ÎÎ
32
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer. D2 33 D2
D3
ÎÎ
34
D3 H
D4
D4
35
D5 ~
ÎÎ
36
N
Î
D5 37 D6
D7
ÎÎ
D6 38
ÎÎÎ
39
D8
D7
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL250
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

a42140
VOLTAGE SYSTEM
~ ATTENUATOR LED INTERFACE BACKPLANE
NEUTRAL OPTO
ISOLATOR FILTER
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
This module is compatible with a wide range of both

2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
Input Characteristics compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
The 120 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustra-
wide variety of input devices, such as: tion below.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and ON state characteristics are compatible. As an exam-
3-wire ple, the ON state requirements of a compatible prox-
imity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is shown.
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dis- In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
sipation and associated high reliability and long life. 2.2mA.
Input current characteristics provide 10mA typically
in the ON state, and can sink up to 2.2mA of leakage
current in the OFF state to the input device.
120 VOLTS a42232

45
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE 100 VOLTS
25
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
OPERATIONAL
0
2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
39-2 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0084J

August 1997
Module Power
The 120 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.35 amps
a42143
from the 5-volt bus on the backplane. TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

1
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
2 A1
Î
ÎÎÎ
3 A2
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
A3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
4
inadvertent substitution of one module type for A4 H
5
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
ÎÎ
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 6 A5 ~
N
ÎÎ
Î Î
7 A6
key is included with each module.
A7
ÎÎ
8
When the module is first installed, the key latches 9 A8
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is 10
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur-
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
11
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. B1
Î Î
12
B2
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B3
B4
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
H
15
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- B5 ~
Î Î
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. 16
B6 N
17
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
Î
ÎÎÎ
B7
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. 18
B8
19
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
Î Î
leftmost rack position. 20
21
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
C1
22
ÎÎ
C2
23
Field Wiring C3
Î
ÎÎÎ
24
C4 H
25
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on
26
C5 ~
the right of this page. Since each group of eight in-
ÎÎ
C6 N
27
puts is isolated from the others, a wire from the pow- C7
ÎÎ
28
er source to the power input terminal for each group 29
C8
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power 30

input terminals for each group are not connected in-
ÎÎ
31
side the module).
Î
ÎÎÎ
32 D1
D2
The detachable field wiring terminal board accepts 33
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
34 D3
ÎÎ
H
D4
~
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
D5
both wires are the same size. There is room for a 36
N
D6
bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out through 37
the terminal board cavity.

The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
38
40
39 ÎÎÎ D7
D8
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the

lower corner of the terminal board.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
dures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illus-
trated in the following figure.
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
minal boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
ule to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
board securely in place. The detachable field wir- (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maxi-
ing terminal board can now be removed from the mum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
wise until it is fully disengaged. two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the only if both wires are the same size.
39-4 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0084J

August 1997
Î Î JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable mended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to in- D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage). D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Input Current: 10mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
On-state Voltage: 75 to 132 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage: 0 to 25 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Current: 0 to 3mA (2.2 minimum at 25V input)
Standards.

Input Module - 120 Volt AC, 32 Points IC697MDL250
39-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
40
IC697MDL240
GFK-0375E 120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL240)
datasheet GFK-0375E
Features
a44322
D 16 Isolated Points
D Proximity switch compatible A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
Functions A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module provides 16 FUSE FUSE
input points which are isolated. This allows each
point to be used on a different phase of the AC sup- INPUT 50/60 HZ
120VAC, ISOL
ply. 1
2
A1
~
H N
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with A1 3
A2
4 ~
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC stan- 5
H N
A2 A3
dard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible 6
H
~ N
7
with a large range of available proximity switches. A3 8
A4
~
H N
9
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each A4
10
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- 12

11
B1 ~
cluded at the top of the module. B1 13
H N
14
B2
~
H N
The module is mechanically keyed to allow correct B2
15
B3
16 ~
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- 17
H N
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- B3 18

B4
H
~
N
19
ers or DIP switches on the module. B4 20
21
Configuration is done using the configuration func- 22
C1
~
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming C1 H N
23
C2
~
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
24
H N
C2 25
C3
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The 26
H
~ N
27
Programming Software configuration function is C3
28
C4
H
~ N
29
installed on the programming device. The program- C4 30
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or com- 31
D1
patible Personal Computer. D1 32
H
~ N
33
D2
34
H
~ N
D2 35
D3
36
H
~ N
37
D3 D4
38
H
~ N
39
D4 40
MODULE IC697MDL240
SLOT LABEL 44A726758-007R03
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module

a42140
VOLTAGE SYSTEM
~ ATTENUATOR LED INTERFACE BACKPLANE
NEUTRAL OPTO
ISOLATOR FILTER
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Input Characteristics This module is compatible with a wide range of both

The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module is compatible compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
with a wide variety of input devices, such as: ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustra-
tion below. If that point falls to the left of the input
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and As an example, the ON state requirements of a com-
3-wire patible proximity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is
shown.
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dis-
sipation and associated high reliability and long life. In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
4mA.
in the ON state, and can sink up to 4mA of leakage
120 VOLTS a42232

45
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE 100 VOLTS
25
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
OPERATIONAL
0
2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. On-State Characteristics Compatibility
40-2 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module GFK-0375E

August 1997
Module Power
a44321
The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module requires .25 TERMINALS FIELD WIRING
amp from the 5-volt bus on the backplane.
ÎÎÎ
1
A1
~
Î ÎÎ
2
H N
Module Mechanical Keying 3
ÎÎÎ
A2
4
H
~ N
ÎÎÎ
5
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents A3
~
Î ÎÎ
6
inadvertent substitution of one module type for H N
7
ÎÎÎ ~
A4
8
shaped area on the board below the connector. The H N
9
ÎÎÎ
10
When the module is first installed, the key latches 11

B1
H
~ N
ÎÎÎ
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur- 13
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. 14

B2
~
ÎÎÎ
H N
15

B3
H
~ N
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
ÎÎÎ
17

B4
~
H N
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the 20
ÎÎÎ
C1
Note: Only the power supply can be placed in the 22 ~
ÎÎÎ
H N
C2
24
H
~ N
ÎÎÎ
25
C3
26 ~
ÎÎÎ
Field Wiring 27
H N
28
C4
~
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each 29
H N
input is isolated (separate) from each of the other in- 30
ÎÎÎ
puts, each input can be powered by a separate power 31
Î ÎÎ
source. 32
D1
~
H N
ÎÎÎ
33
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept D2
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG

34 ~
ÎÎÎ
H N
35
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a D3
~
ÎÎÎ
36
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is H N
ÎÎÎ
37
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires D4
to be routed out through the terminal board cavity.

38
H
~ N
39
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board 40

lower corner of the terminal board. Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
minal boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
board securely in place. The detachable field wir- #14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
ing terminal board can now be removed from the maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- (3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper con-
wise until it is fully disengaged. nection, two wires may be terminated on any one
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the terminal only if both wires are the same size.
40-4 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module GFK-0375E

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage 120 volts AC, 60 Hz sinusoidal

Inputs per Module 16individuallyisolated
Isolation 1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between inputs
Input Current 10mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
InputCharacteristics
On-state Voltage 75 volts to 132 volts, 60 Hz sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage 0 to 20 volts, 60 Hz sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent 8mA to 15 mA
Off-state Current 0 to 4mA (2.2mA minimum at 25V input)
Filter Delay Time 20mstypical
Current Req. from 5V Bus 0.25 amps
Standards.

Input Module - 120 Volt AC, 16 Points, Isolated IC697MDL240
40-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
41
IC697MDL251
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0718C
Features a45225

Î
Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
Î
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
Î
C8 C8
Functions A8 B8
FUSE
D8 A8 B8
FUSE
D8
This 120 volt AC Input module provides 16 input

points in four isolated groups of four points each.
INPUT
120 VAC
Î
Î 1
10MA/PT
50/60 HZ
Î
A1
This allows each group of four points to be used on a A1
2
3 A2
Î
different phase of the AC supply. A2 4
A3
A4 H
A3 5
~
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with
Î
A4 6
N
Î
7
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC stan- A5
8
A6
Î
9
dard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible A7 10
with a large range of available proximity switches.
Î
A8 11
12
B1
B1 B2
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
Î
13
B2 B3
14
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- B3 B4 H
Î
15
~
cluded at the top of the module. B4 16
N
Î
B5 17
18
Î
19
B7
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- 20
Î
B8 21
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- C1 22
C1
Î
C2
ers or DIP switches on the module. C2
23
C3
24
C3 H
Î
25 C4
Configuration is done using the configuration func- C4 26
~
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming N
Î
C5 27
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr C6 28
Î
29
C7
Î
C8 31
Programming Software configuration function is D1 32 D1
Î
D2
installed on the programming device. The program- D2 33
D3
34
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or com- H
Î
D3 D4
35
D4 ~
patible Personal Computer. 36
N
Î
D5 37
Î Î
D6 38
39
Î
D7
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL251
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 120 VOLT AC16 Point Input Module
LED
a45226
OPTO
VOLTAGE FILTER
ISOLATOR SYSTEM
H ATTENUATOR
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
Y
N
FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE

Input Characteristics compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
The 120 Volt AC 16 Point Input Module is compatible ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustra-
with a wide variety of input devices, such as: tion below.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and ON state characteristics are compatible. As an exam-
3-wire ple, the ON state requirements of a compatible prox-
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dis- In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
sipation and associated high reliability and long life. 2.2mA.
in the ON state, and can sink up to 2.2mA of leakage
120 VOLTS a42232

45
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE 25 100 VOLTS
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
OPERATIONAL
0
2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
41-2 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Module Power
a45224
The 120 Volt AC 16 Point Input Module requires 0.35
amps from the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
ÎÎÎ
1

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
2 A1
3 A2
ÎÎÎ
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents A3
4
Î
inadvertent substitution of one module type for 5 A4 H
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely ~

Î
6
shaped area on the board below the connector. The N
Î
7
8
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
10
9
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
11
B1
ing the slot to accept only identical module types.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
12
B2
13
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
ÎÎÎ
B3
14
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail B4 H
Î
15
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up-
~
Î
16
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. N
17
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
18
19
Î
Î ÎÎ
21
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
C1
22
ÎÎÎ
C2
23
Field Wiring C3
Î
ÎÎÎ
24
C4 H
25
Î
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on ~
26
the right of this page. Since each group of four inputs
Î
N
27
is isolated from the others, a wire from the power
Î
28
source to the power input terminal for each group
29
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power
30
input terminals for each group are not connected in-
side the module). 31
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
32 D1
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept D2
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
33
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 34 D3
ÎÎÎ
D4 H
Î
both wires are the same size. There is room for a 36
~
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out N
Î
37
through the terminal board cavity.
Î
38
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the 40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

41-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Inputs per Module: 16 (four groups of four inputs each)
On–state Voltage: 75 to 132 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off–state Voltage: 0 to 25 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On–state Current: 6mA to 15mA
Off–state Current: 0 to 3mA (2.2 minimum at 25V input)
Standards.

Input Module: 120 Volt AC, 16 Points IC697MDL251
41-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
42 IC697MDL241
GFK-0376G 240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL241)
datasheet GFK-0376G
Features a44320
D 16 individually isolated points

A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
D Proximity switch compatible A5

A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
FUSE FUSE
Functions INPUT
240VAC, ISOL 1
50/60 HZ
2
A1
H
~N
A1 3
This 240 volt AC Isolated Input module for use with a 4
A2 ~N
H
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 16 5
A2
6
A3
~N
isolated input points. This allows each point to be 7
H
used on a different phase of the AC supply. A3 8

A4
H
~N
9
10
A4
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with 12
11
B1
~N
H
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC stan- B1 13
dard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible 14

B2
H
~N
15
B2
with a large range of available proximity switches. 16
B3
H
~N
17
B3 18
B4
H
~N
20
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- B4
21
cluded at the top of the module. 22

C1
H
~N
C1 23
24
C2
H
~N
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct C2 25
C3
26 ~N
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- 27 H
ences are user configurable without the use of jump-

C3
28
C4
H
~N
29
ers or DIP switches on the module. C4 30
31
32 D1
~N
Configuration is done using the configuration func- D1
33 H
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming ~N

D2
34
H
D2 35
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr 36
D3
H
~N
37
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The D3
38
D4
~N
H
Programming Software configuration function is D4 40
39
installed on the programming device. The program- MODULE IC697MDL241

SLOT
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or com- LABEL 44A726758–008R03
patible Personal Computer.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 240 VOLT AC 16 Point Input Module
a42140
VOLTAGE
~ ATTENUATOR LED
SYSTEM
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
NEUTRAL OPTO
ISOLATOR FILTER
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE

Input Characteristics
The 240 Volt AC Isolated Input Module is compatible 2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
with a wide variety of input devices, such as: compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustra-
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches tion below.
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
3-wire ON state characteristics are compatible. As an exam-
ple, the ON state requirements of a compatible prox-
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dis-
sipation and associated high reliability and long life. In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
5mA.
in the ON state, and can sink up to 5mA of leakage
240 VOLTS a44341

45
NON–OPERATIONAL
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 25 100 VOLTS
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
OPERATIONAL
0
2 4 6 8 10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. On-State Characteristics Compatibility
42-2 t
GFK-0600F
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module GFK-0376G

August 1997
Module Power a44321

The 240 Volt AC 16 Isolated Input Module requires
ÎÎÎ ~
0.25 amps from the 5 volt bus on the backplane. 1
A1
Î ÎÎ
2
H N
ÎÎÎ ~~
A2
4
ÎÎÎ
H N
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents 5
A3
Î ÎÎ
inadvertent substitution of one module type for 6
H N
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely 7
ÎÎÎ ~A4
shaped area on the board below the connector. This 8
H N
key is included with each module. 9
Î
ÎÎÎ
10
ÎÎ ~~
B1
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur- H N
ÎÎÎ ~
13
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. B2
Î ÎÎ
14
H N
ÎÎÎ ~
B3
H N
ÎÎÎ
17
B4
H N
19
20
ÎÎÎ ~~
21
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the C1
Î ÎÎ
22
leftmost rack position. H N
23
ÎÎÎ ~
C2
24
H N
ÎÎÎ ~
25
Field Wiring C3
Î ÎÎ
26
H N
27
ÎÎÎ
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on 28
C4
H N
the right of this page. Since each input is isolated 29
from the other inputs, a wire from the power source
ÎÎÎ ~
30
to the power input terminal for each input is required 31

D1
(power input terminals for each input are not con- 32
H N
nected inside the module).
ÎÎÎ ~~
33
D2
34
ÎÎÎ
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept H N
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10

35
D3
36
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if H N
ÎÎÎ ~
37
both wires are the same size. There is room for a D4
38
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out H N
39
through the terminal board cavity. 40

Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL241
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
42-4 t
GFK-0600F
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module GFK-0376G

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR
The instructions below should be followed when re-
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
moving an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
sert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The theboard cover with your thumbs on the front of
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 240 VAC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal

Inputs per Module: 16individuallyisolated
On-state Voltage: 160 to 264 volts AC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage: 0 to 40 volts AC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Current: 0 to 5mA (2.2 mimimum at 40V input)
Standards.

Input Module: 240 Volt AC, Isolated, 16 Points IC697MDL241
42-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
43
IC697MDL653
GFK-0379F 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0379F
a44082
Features
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
A1 B1 C1
Î
D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
Î
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
Î
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
D Proximity switch compatible A5

A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
Î
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
D Input filter selectable* - 1mS or 10mS A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
Î
FUSE FUSE
D One input configurable as interrupt*

Î
INPUT INPUT
24 VDC, P/N 24 VDC, P/N
Î
1
A1
2
Î
A1 3
A2
* These features are available for all IC697 Program- A2 A3
Î
4
A4
A3 5
mable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be A5 DC
Î
A4 6
available when this module is used with other types A5
7
A6
A7
Î
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controllers A6
8
9
A8
Reference Manual for details.
Î
A7 10
A8 11
B1
Î
12
B1 B2
13
B2 B3
Functions
Î
14
B3 B4
15
DC
Î
B5
B4 16
B6
17
B5
Î
B7
The 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Module B6
18
B8
19
provides 32 input points in four isolated groups of
Î
B7 20
eight points each. The input current-voltage charac- B8 21
Î
C1
C1 22
teristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications. 23
C2
C2
Î
C3
24
C3 C4
Î
C5 DC
C4 26
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- C5 27
C6
Î
C7
cluded at the top of the module. C6 28
C8
29
Î
G7
30
Î
D1
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- D1 32
33
D2
Î
D2
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- D3
34
D3
D4
ers or DIP switches on the module. 35
Î
D4 D5 DC
36
D6
D5 37
Î
Î ÎÎ
D6 38
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
D8
39
D7
ÎÎ
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL653
SLOT
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The LABEL 44A726758–011R01
Programming Software configuration function is

installed on the programming device. The program-
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or com-
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Module
LED
a44080
OPTO
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
DC

FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
Input Characteristics patible with many such 2-wire devices; however each
device type must be carefully evaluated for compati-
This input module is designed to have both positive bility in both the ON and OFF states.
and negative logic characteristics in that it sinks or
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
sources current from the input device to the user com-
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
mon. The input device is connected between the
in the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the
power bus and the module input as shown above.
left of the input load line, the ON state characteristics
This module is compatible with a wide variety of in- are compatible. As an example, the ON state require-
put devices, such as: ments of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches; volts drop are shown below.
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
3-wire. switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 5 volts or less.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module. a42231
11 24V SUPPLY
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to en-
10
sure reliable operation of the switching device. Input NON–OPERATIONAL
current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can ac- 8 20V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
cept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state VOLTAGE 6
without turning on. ACROSS
PROXIMITY
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since SWITCH
4
OPERATIONAL
they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and
2
low leakage current in the OFF State.
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the 0
0 2 4 6 8 10
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage
I LOAD (mA)
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be com- Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
43-2 t
GFK-0600F
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0379F

August 1997
Input Filter Selection er input terminals for each group are not connected
inside the module).
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options,
this module may be configured to have either a 1mS
or 10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module, TERMINALS FIELD WIRING a43986
not per point basis; all points have the same filter
time. See the applicable Programmable Controllers Ref-
1
Î Î
Î Î
erence Manual for detailed information. A1
2
Î Î
A2
3
Î Î
A3
Interrupt 4
A4
+
Î Î
5
A5 DC
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may 6
Î Î
A6 +
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configura- 7
Î Î
tion allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the 8
A7
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Inter- 9
A8
rupt response is not affected by input filter time selec-
Î Î
10
tion. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controllers 11
Î Î
Reference Manual for detailed information. B1
12
Î Î
B2
13
B3
Î Î
B4 +
15
Î ÎB5 DC
Î Î
B6 +
Î Î
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely 18 B7
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each B8
19
module has a key packaged with it.
Î Î
20
21
Î Î
C1
Î Î
C2
C3
Î Î
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. 24 +
C4
25
Î Î
If it is necessary to change the module location in the C5 DC
26
Î Î
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail C6 +
27
Î Î
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- 28 C7
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. 29 C8
Î Î
30
31
Î Î
D1
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply 32
Î Î
D2
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1 33
D3
Î Î
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a 34
+
D4
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver 35
Î Î
D5 DC
Module (in an expansion rack). 36
Î Î
D6 +
37
Î Î
38 D7
Field Wiring 39
D8
40
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each
group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a
wire from the power source to the power input termi-
nal (10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (pow- Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL653
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures board on this input module. Module features refer-
enced in the following procedures which are common
The following procedures are recommended when to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the follow-
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal ing figure.
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎTERMINAL
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
ÎÎ
TIE STRAP
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

terminal board and swing it outward. 4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maxi-
mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
43-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
5. After completing connections to all modules in a the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recom- correct mating rack slot location.
mended that a cable tie be wrapped around the wire 8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
bundle and tightly secured through the cable tie that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be allowed
cleat located at the lower right corner of the terminal above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
board. For extremely large wire bundles, additional not obstruct the rack grill work.
cable ties should be used.
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is The instructions below should be followed when re-
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion moving an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red: the back of the cover.
high voltage).
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
the terminal board strap (attached to each module) from the backplane connector.
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 24 volts DC

Isolation: 1500 volts - any input to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs): -3 to +30 volts DC
Input Impedance: 2.6K ohm, typical
On-state Voltage: 13.5 volts to 30 volts
On-state Current: 6mA to 15mA
Off-state Voltage: 0 volts to 5 volts
Filter Delay Time: 1mS or 10mS configurable
Current Required from 5V Bus: 0.30 amp
Standards.

Input Module, 24 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points IC697MDL653
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory
for price and availability.
43-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
44
IC697MDL652
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0378F
Features a44142
Î
D1
D
A1 B1 C1 A1 B1 C1 D1
Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
Î
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3

A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
Î
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
D
Î
Input filter selectable* - 1mS or 10mS A7
A8
B7
B8
C7
C8
D7
D8
A7
A8
B7
B8
C7
C8
D7
D8
D
FUSE FUSE
Î
One input configurable as interrupt*
INPUT INPUT
Î
12 VDC, P/N
* These features are available for all IC697 12VDC, P/N
1
Î
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not A1
2
A1
A2
3
be available when this module is used with other types
Î
A2 A3
4
of PLCs. See the applicable Programming Software User’s A3 5
A4
DC
Î
A5
A4 6
Manual for details. A5
7
A6
Î
A7
8
A6 9 A8
Functions A7
Î
10
A8 11
B1
Î
B1 12
13 B2
The 12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Mod- B2
14
B3
Î
ule provides 32 input points in four isolated groups B3 15
B4
B5 DC
B4 16
of eight points each. The input current-voltage char-
Î
B6
B5 17
B7
acteristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications. B6
18
Î
19 B8
B7
20
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of
Î
B8 21
C1
C1 22
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are C2
Î
23
C2
C3
included at the top of the module. C3
24
C4
Î
25
C4 C5 DC
26
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct C5 27 C6
Î
C7
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O ref- C6 28
29
C8
Î
C7
erences are user configurable without the use of C8
30
31
jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Î
D1 D1
32
33 D2
D2
Î
D3
34
D4

35
D4 DC
Î
D5
36
Î
D5 37 D6
D7
Î
D6 38
Î
D8
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The D7
40
39
D8
Programming Software configuration function is MODULE IC697MDL652
SLOT
installed on the programming device. The program- LABEL 44A726758–010R01

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 12 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module
LED
a44080
OPTO
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
DC

FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE

Input Characteristics To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
This input module is designed to have both positive in the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the
and negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources left of the input load line, the ON state characteristics
current from the input device to the user common. are compatible. As an example, the ON state require-
The input device is connected between the power bus ments of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5
and the module input as shown above. volts drop are shown below.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of in- OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
put devices, such as: switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 2.5 volts or less.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
3-wire. a44138
10
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
8 15V SUPPLY
driven by any IC697 programmabale controller volt- ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
age compatible output module. ACROSS
6 OPERATIONAL NON-OPERATIONAL
PROXIMITY
4
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to en- SWITCH
10V SUPPLY
sure reliable operation of the switching device. Input 2
current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can ac- 0
cept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state 0 2 4 6 8 10
without turning on. I LOAD (mA)
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since

they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
Input Filter Selection
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage With the IC697 programmable controller and certain
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for other CPU options, this module may be configured to
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be com- have either a 1mS or 10mS input filter. Configuration
patible with many such 2-wire devices; however each is on a module, not per point basis; all points have the
device type must be carefully evaluated for compati- same filter time. See the applicable Programmable Con-
bility in both the ON and OFF states. troller Installation Manual for detailed information.
44-2 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Interrupt a43986
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
ÎÎ
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configura- 1
tion allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the A1
ÎÎ
2
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Inter- A2
Î
ÎÎÎ
3
rupt response is not affected by input filter time selec- A3
4 +
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
tion. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller 5
A4
DC
ÎÎ
Reference Manual for detailed information. A5
6
A6 +
ÎÎ
7
A7
ÎÎ
A8
9
ÎÎ
B1
Î
ÎÎÎ
B2
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
ÎÎ
13
ÎÎ
module has a key packaged with it. B3
14
ÎÎ
B4 +
15
When the module is first installed, the key latches DC
ÎÎ
B5
B6 +
Î
ÎÎÎ
17
B7
ÎÎ
B8
19
20
ÎÎ
21
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- C1
Î
ÎÎÎ
22
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. C2
23
Î
ÎÎÎ
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the C3
24 +
ÎÎ
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. C4
25
DC
ÎÎ
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply C5
26
C6 +
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
Î
ÎÎÎ
27
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a 28 C7
ÎÎ
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver 29 C8
ÎÎ
31
D1
Î
ÎÎÎ
32
Field Wiring 33 D2
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D3
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each 34
+
ÎÎ
D4
group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a 35
D5 DC
ÎÎ
wire from the power source to the power input termi- 36
D6 +
Î
ÎÎÎ
nal (10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (pow- 37
38 D7
er input terminals for each group are not connected
ÎÎ
D8
inside the module). 39
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎTERMINAL
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎ
CORD STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
44-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Input Voltage Range (Vs): –2.5 to +15 volts DC
Input Impedance: 1.12K ohm, typical
On-state Voltage: 7.5 volts to 15 volts
Off-state Voltage: 0 volts to 2.5 volts
Off-state Current: 0 to 2.5mA (2mA minimum at 2.5V input)
Filter Delay Time: 1mS or 10mS configurable
Standards.

Input Module, 12 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points IC697MDL652
44-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
45
IC697MDL654
GFK-0380G 48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0380G
Features a44079

A1 B1 C1
ÎÎ
D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
ÎÎ
A2 B2 C2 D2
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
ÎÎ
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
ÎÎ
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
D Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms FUSE FUSE
D One input configurable as interrupt* INPUT

48 VDC, P/N ÎÎ
ÎÎ
INPUT
48 VDC, P/N
ÎÎ
A1 A1
2
* These features are available for all IC697 Program- A2 A2
ÎÎ
3
mable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be A3 4
A3
A4
ÎÎ
5 + –
A5
DC
A5 6
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controller A6
ÎÎ
7 – +
A6 A7
Reference Manual for details. 8
ÎÎ
A7 A8
9
A8 10
ÎÎ
11
B1 B1
12
ÎÎ
B2 B2
13
Functions B3 14 B3
ÎÎ
B4 + –
B4 15
B5 DC
16
ÎÎ
B5
B6 – +
17
B6
The 48 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module provides 32 18 B7
ÎÎ
B7 19 B8
input points in four isolated groups of eight points
ÎÎ
B8 20
each. The input current-voltage characteristics meet C1 21
C1
ÎÎ
IEC standard (type 1) specifications. C2 22
C2
23
C3
ÎÎ
24 C3
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each C4 25 C4 + –
ÎÎ
C5 DC
C5 26
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- 27 C6 – +
C6
ÎÎ
cluded at the top of the module. G7
28 C7
29 C8
ÎÎ
C8
30
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct D1 31
ÎÎ
D1
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- D2 32
33 D2
ÎÎ
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- D3
34 D3
D4 D4
ers or DIP switches on the module. 35 + –
ÎÎ
D5 D5 DC
36
D6 – +
ÎÎ
D6 37
ÎÎÎ
Configuration is done using the configuration func- D7 38
D7
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming 39 D8
Î
D8
40
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr SLOT MODULE IC697MDL654
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The LABEL 44A726758–012

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 48 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module
LED a44080
OPTO
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
DC

FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
Input Characteristics characteristics of the switch in the diagram shown

below. If that point falls to the left of the input load
This input module is designed to have both positive line, the ON state characteristics are compatible. As
and negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources an example, the ON state requirements of a compat-
current from the input device to the user common. ible proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are
The input device is connected between the power bus shown below.
and the module input as shown above. OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
This module is compatible with a wide variety of in- switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
put devices, such as: voltage of 5 volts or less.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches; 48V SUPPLY a44081
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and 15

14
3-wire.
12
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly NON–OPERATIONAL
10
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module. 8
40V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to en- VOLTAGE
ACROSS
6
sure reliable operation of the switching device. Input PROXIMITY

SWITCH 4
current is typically 4.7mA in the ON state, and can OPERATIONAL
accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state 2
without turning on. 0
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since 0 1 2 3 4 5

I LOAD (mA)
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for Input Filter Selection
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be com-
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options,
patible with many such 2-wire devices; however each
this module may be configured to have either a 1mS
device type must be carefully evaluated for compati-
or 10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module,
bility in both the ON and OFF states.
not per point basis; all points have the same filter
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity time. See the applicable Programmable Controller Refer-
switch, find the ON state ence Manual for detailed information.
45-2 t
GFK-0600F
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0380G

August 1997
Interrupt The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board

When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may lower corner of the terminal board.
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configura-
tion allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Inter-
rupt response is not affected by input filter time TERMINALS FIELD WIRING
a43986
selection. Refer to the applicable Programmable Con-
ÎÎ
troller Reference Manual for detailed information. 1
ÎÎ
A1
2
A2
Î
ÎÎÎ
3
A3
4
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
+
A4
DC
ÎÎ
A5
6
A6 +
Î
ÎÎÎ
A7
ÎÎ
A8
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 10
Î
ÎÎÎ
B1
12
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B2
ÎÎ
B3
+
B4
Î
ÎÎÎ
15
B5 DC
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B6 +
17
ÎÎ
B7
B8
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
C1
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. C2
Î
ÎÎÎ
23
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the 24 C3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
C4
+
DC
ÎÎ
C5
26
C6 +
Î
ÎÎÎ
27
28 C7
Field Wiring
ÎÎ
29 C8
30
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on 31
D1
32
the right of this page. Since each group of eight in-
Î
ÎÎÎ
33 D2
puts is isolated from the others, a wire from the pow-
ÎÎ
34 D3
er source to the power input terminal for each group D4
+
Î
ÎÎÎ
35
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power D5 DC
36
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
input terminals for each group are not connected in- D6 +
37
side the module).
ÎÎ
38 D7
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept 39 D8
wire sizes ranging from #22 (0.36 mm2 ) through #14 40
(2.10 mm2 ). Two wires may be terminated on a given
lug if both wires are the same size. There is room for
a bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires to be routed
out through the terminal board cavity. Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

minals boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- ranging from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2 ) through AWG
ule to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal #14 (2.10 mm2 ). It is important that when using
board securely in place. The detachable field wir- AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wire for wiring all points,
ing terminal board can now be removed from the that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
Figure 5. mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires are to be used, then wire
45-4 t
GFK-0600F
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0380G

August 1997
JACKSCREW a43747
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR

5. After completing connections to all modules in a provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure board with its correct mating rack slot location.
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is rec- 8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recom-
ommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the mended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
Removing an I/O Module
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to in-
sert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by insert-
ing the terminal board strap (attached to each
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Input Voltage Range (Vs) –3 to +56 volts DC
InputImpedance: 10.3K ohm, typical
On-state Voltage: 33 volts to 56 volts
Off-state Current 3mA to 7mA
Filter Delay Time: 1 ms or 10 ms configurable
Standards.

Input Module: 48 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points IC697MDL654
45-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
46
IC697MDL640
GFK-0719D 125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
August 1997
datasheet GFK-0719D
Features a45223
D 16 Points - Four isolated groups of four points each

Î
Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility A2
A3
B2
B3
C2
C3
D2
D3
A2
A3
B2
B3
C2
C3
D2
D3
Î
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
C5 C5
A5 B5 D5 A5 B5 D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
C8
Î
A8 B8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
D Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms FUSE FUSE
D One input configurable as interrupt* INPUT

125VDC, P/N
Î
Î 1
5MA/PT
A1
Î
* These features are available for all IC697 Program- 2
3
A2
A1
Î
A3
mable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be avail- 4
A4
5
able when this module is used with other types of PLCs.
Î
+ –
A2 6
See the applicable Programmable Controller Reference 7 DC
Î
– +
Manual for details. A3 8
9
Î
10
A4 11
Î
B1
12
B2
B1 13
Î
Functions 14
15
B3
B4
Î
B2 + –
16
17 DC
Î
The 125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Input Module pro- B3 18 – +
19
Î
vides 16 input points in four isolated groups of four 20
B4
points each. The input current-voltage characteristics 21
Î
C1
meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications. 22
C2
Î
C1 23
24 C3
C4
Î
C2 25
+ –
26
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included DC
Î
27
C3 – +
at the top of the module. 28
Î
29
C4 30
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct re-
Î
31
32 D1
placement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- D2
Î
D1 33
D3
ences are user configurable without the use of jumpers 34
D4
Î
D2 35
or DIP switches on the module. 36
+ –
DC
Î
37
Î Î
D3 – +
39
Î
D4 40
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr SLOT

MODULE IC697MDL640
LABEL 44A726758–024R01
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 125 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module

LED a44080
OPTO
VOLTAGE FILTER
ISOLATOR SYSTEM
ATTENUATOR BACKPLANE
INTERFACE
DC

FIELD MODULE
CONNECTIONS
Input Characteristics the proximity switch leakage is less than 2mA with a
module input voltage of 35 volts or less.
This input module is designed to have both positive and
a45221
negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources current 35
125V SUPPLY
from the input device to the user common. The input

device is connected between the power bus and the 30
module input as shown above. 25

NON–OPERATIONAL
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input 20

devices, such as: ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches; ACROSS
PROXIMITY
15
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2 and 3-wire. SWITCH 10 97V SUPPLY
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly driven 5

by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output module. OPERATIONAL
0
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure 0 1 2 3 4 5
reliable operation of the switching device. Input cur- I LOAD (mA)
rent is typically 5mA in the ON state, and can accept up

to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state without turn- Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
ing on. Thermal Derating
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they If this input module is operated above the normal input
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leak- voltage of 125 VDC, it may be necessary to derate the
age current in the OFF State. number of input points used per group as shown below.
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and 130V SUPPLY
a45222
the OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire 135V, 145V
4 SUPPLY
devices. This module is designed to be compatible with
many such 2-wire devices; however each device type NUMBER
3
OF
must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the INPUTS
ON and OFF states. ON PER 2
GROUP
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch in 1
the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the left
of the input load line, the ON state characteristics are 0
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)
of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop
are shown below. OFF state compatibility is assured if Figure 3. Input Points vs. Temperature
46-2 t
GFK-0600F
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module GFK-0719D

August 1997
For example, if an input voltage of 130 volts DC or less a47014

is used to activate the input module, no derating is re-
ÎÎÎÎ
quired. However, if input voltages greater than or equal 1
ÎÎÎÎ
to 135 volts DC are used, no more than 3 inputs per 2
A1
group should be simultaneously activated at ambient A2
ÎÎÎÎ
3
temperatures greater than 50°C (122°F). 4
A3
ÎÎ
A4
5
Input Filter Selection DC
ÎÎ
6
ÎÎ
7
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options, this
module may be configured to have either a 1mS or 8
9
10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module, not per
ÎÎÎÎ
10
point basis; all points have the same filter time. See the
11
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual for B1
12
detailed information. B2
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
13
B3
Interrupt
ÎÎÎÎ
14
B4
15
ÎÎ
DC
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may be con- 16
figured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the
ÎÎ
17
CPU to be interrupted on either the rising or falling edge of 18
the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by in- 19
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
20
put filter time selection. Refer to the applicable Program-
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
21
mable Controller Reference Manual for detailed informa- 22
C1
ÎÎÎÎ
tion. C2
23
C3
ÎÎÎ Î
25
C4
ÎÎ
DC
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents in- 26
ÎÎ
advertent substitution of one module type for another 27
ÎÎ
28
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
29
the board below the connector. The key is included with
30
each module.
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
31
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto 32 D1
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
D2
the backplane center rail. When the module is ex- 33
ÎÎÎ Î
tracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring 34 D3
D4
the slot to accept only identical module types.
ÎÎ
35
DC
36
ÎÎ
37
ÎÎ
38
may then be reinserted onto the module and the mod-
ule inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost Figure 4. Field Wiring Connections
rack position.
Field Wiring wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 mm2).
The module is wired as shown in the following illustra- Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if both wires
tion. Since each group of four inputs is isolated from the are the same size. There is room for a bundle of forty #14
others, a wire from the power source to the power input (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out through the terminal
terminal for each group (terminal number 10, 20, 30, or board cavity. The wire bundle can be secured to the termi-
40) is required (power input terminals for each group nal board by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at
are not connected inside the module). the lower corner of the terminal board.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎÎ
CORD
ÎÎ
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
CORD
Î
TIE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
STRAP STRAP

46-4 t
GFK-0600F
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module GFK-0719D

August 1997
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î DO NOT
Î PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Inputs per Module ]: 16 (four groups of four inputs each)
Input Voltage Range (Vs) –35 to +145 volts DC
On-state Voltage: Positive: 90 volts to 145 volts
Negative: –20 volts to Vs –90 volts
Off-state Voltage: Positive: –35 volts to +35 volts
Negative: Vs –35 volts to 56 volts
Off-state Current: 0 to 2mA (2mA mimimum at 125V input)
Standards.
]Number of inputs on is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in Figure 3.

Input Module: 125 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,16Points IC697MDL640
46-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
47
IC697MDL651
GFK-0377D TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL651)
datasheet GFK-0377D
Features a44723
D 32 TTL compatible Input points

D No user power required Î
Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
Î
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
D Each Input has pullup resistor A4

A5
B4
B5
C4
C5
D4
D5
A4
A5
B4
B5
C4
C5
D4
D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
D Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
Î
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
FUSE FUSE
D One input configurable as interrupt*

* These features are available for all IC697
A1
INPUT
TTL
Î
Î
5V, 3MA/PT
1
A1
Î
programmable controllers (PLCs). They may not be A2
2
3
A2
Î
A3 4
A4
5
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controller A4 A5
Î
6
A5 A6
Installation Manual for details. 7
A7
Î
A6 8
A8
A7 9
Î
10
A8
11
B1
Î
B1
12
Functions B2 13
B2
Î
B3 B3
14
B4
B4 15
Î
B5
The TTL Input Module for the IC697 programmable B5
16
B6
17
controller provides 32 TTL compatible input points B6
Î
B7
18
B7 B8
which are configured as one group. 19
Î
COM 1
B8 20
21
C1
No user power is required and the use of open-collec-
Î
C1
22
C2 C2
tor drivers is simplified since each input has an inter- 23
Î
C3 24
C3
nal pullup. C4 25 C4
Î
26 C5
C5
27 C6
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each C6
Î
28 C7
C7
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are in- 29 C8
Î
C8 30
cluded at the top of the module. D1 31
Î
D1
D2 32
D2
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct 33
Î
D3 D3
34
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- D4 35 D4
Î
D5 D5
37 D6
D6
Î
ers or DIP switches on the module. D7
38
D7
D8
39
Î
D8 COM 2
40
Configuration is done using the configuration func- SLOT
MODULE IC697MDL651
LABEL 44A726758-009R03

over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - TTL Input Module

a44859
ISOLATED
5V
LED
OPTO
FILTER
ISOLATOR
SYSTEM
BACKPLANE
INTERFACE
USER COMMON
FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE
Input Characteristics Interrupt

This input module is designed to have negative logic When used with an IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
characteristics - it sinks current from the input device be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configura-
to the user common. The input device is connected tion allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
between the power bus and the module input as rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Inter-
shown above. rupt response is not affected by input filter time selec-
This module is compatible with a wide variety of in- tion. Refer to the Programmable Controller Installa-
put devices, such as: tion Manual for detailed information.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;

D Counters, BCD outputs, and other TTL compat- Module Mechanical Keying
ible outputs.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly inadvertent substitution of one module type for
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
module. shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
The module contains an isolated 5V supply and pul-
lup resistors for each input point. This configuration When the module is first installed, the key latches
simplifies the use of open-collector drivers and elimi- onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
nates the need for a user supplied power source. extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur-
Input current is typically 1.7mA in the ON state, and ing the slot to accept only identical module types.
can accept up to 1.1mA leakage current in the OFF
state without turning on.
Input Filter Selection ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options, module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
this module may be configured to have either a 1 ms
or 10 ms input filter. Configuration is on a module, Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply
not per point basis; all points have the same filter can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
time. See the applicable Programmable Controller Instal- (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a
lation Manual and the Programming Software User’s CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Manual for detailed information. Module (in an expansion rack).
47-2 t
GFK-0600F
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0377D

August 1997
Field Wiring TERMINALS

a44724
FIELD WIRING
Î Î
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since the
1
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
32 points share a common, only one connection is re- A1
2
quired between user common and the module com-
ÎÎ
A2
3
mon (pin 20 or 40). However, two user connections A3
Î
ÎÎÎ
4
are provided for wiring convenience. A4
5
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A5
6
ÎÎ
A6
7
ÎÎ
A7
8
A8
9
10
11
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B1
12
B2
Î
ÎÎÎ
13
B3
14
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
B4
15
ÎÎ
B5
16
B6
Î
ÎÎÎ
17
B7
ÎÎ
18
B8
19
COM 1
20
ÎÎ
21
C1
Î
ÎÎÎ
22
C2
23
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
C3
24
ÎÎ
C4
25
C5
ÎÎ
Î Î
26
C6
27
28
Î Î C7
ÎÎ
29 C8
Î Î
30
Î Î
31
D1
32
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D2
33
ÎÎ
D3
34
D4
Î
ÎÎÎ
35
D5
36
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D6
37
ÎÎ
38 D7
D8
39
COM 2
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
ÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ
TIE CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

47-4 t
GFK-0600F
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module GFK-0377D

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Inputs per Module: 32
98.4’ (30m) maximum cable length
Input Voltage Range (Vs): -3 to +7 volts DC
Impedance: 5.9K ohms, ±5%
On-state Voltage: -3 volts to 0.5 volts
On-state Current: 1.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
Off-state Current: 1.1mA (maximum)
Current Required from 5V Bus: .53 amp

Standards.

Input Module, Negative Logic TTL, 32 Points IC697MDL651
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price
andavailability.
47-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
48
IC697MDL671
GFK-0880C Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic (IC697MDL671)
datasheet GFK-0880C
a47013
Features
H
ÎÎ
16 points total - 4 isolated groups of 4 points each
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
H
ÎÎ
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
14 interrupt points; 2 configuration points A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
H Positive/Negativelogiccompatibility A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
ÎÎ
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
H
ÎÎ
Proximity switch compatible FUSE FUSE
H
ÎÎ
INTERRUPT 10 MA/PT
Input filter selectable - 1 ms or 10 ms
ÎÎ
–––
24 VDC, P/N 1
A1
H
2
ÎÎ
All 14 interrupts can run at maximum I/O A1 3
A2
A3
interrupt rate (See Table 1 for module
ÎÎ
4
A4
5
specifications). A2 DC
ÎÎ
6
7
H
ÎÎ
A3 8
First input configured as interrupt 9
ÎÎ
10
A4
11
B1
ÎÎ
12
B2
Functions B1 13
B3
ÎÎ
14
B4
15
B2 DC
ÎÎ
16
The 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Interrupt Input 17
ÎÎ
B3 18
Module provides 16 points total in four isolated groups 19
ÎÎ
of four points each. The first 14 points (A1 through D2) B4 20
21
are interrupt inputs and the last 2, D3 and D4 are
ÎÎ
C1
22
configuration inputs. The input current-voltage C1 23
C2
ÎÎ
C3
24
characteristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications. 25 C4
C2
ÎÎ
DC
26
27
ÎÎ
C3 28
point are located at the top of the module. 29
ÎÎ
C4 30
31
ÎÎ
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct 32
D1
D1 D2
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O 33
ÎÎ
* D3
34
* D4
references are user configurable without the use of 35
ÎÎ
D2 DC
jumpers or DIP switches on the module. EDGE SELECT
36
37
ÎÎ
D3 RISING=N/C
ÎÎÎ
––– 38
FALLING = 24 VDC
Configuration is done using the configuration FILTER SELECT 39
function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr

Î
D4 1ms=N/C
––– 40
10ms=24 VDC *CONFIGURA TION
programming software running on Windowsr 95 or SLOT MODULE IC697MDL671

LABEL 44A726758–029R01
Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the

SNP port. The Programming Software configuration
function is installed on the programming device. The
programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2
or compatible Personal Computer.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Interrupt Module

Operation of the Interrupt module is described
following the illustration of a block diagram of the
module.
a47022
LED
OPTO
INTERFACE BACKPLANE
DC

FIELD
CONNECTIONS MODULE

This interrupt module will generate an interrupt to available configuration option is to select the %I
the PLC, allowing the execution of an interrupt block, reference address.
when any or all of its 14 interrupt inputs satisfy its
configured edge and filter selection. All interrupts are Module Configuration
reported as one word at the module’s selected
reference address. The PLC reads the interrupt word The configuration inputs D3 and D4 configure all 14
and acknowledges the interrupt. The module is then interrupt inputs at power-up. The module will default
ready to generate the next PLC interrupt. to rising edge trigger and 1 ms interrupt filter with no
configuration input connection. Configuration inputs
D3 and D4 are read only at system power-up.
Note Activating input D3 will reconfigure the module (after a
power cycle) for falling edge detection. Activating input
If you are using CPU software earlier than Re- D4 will reconfigure the module (after a power cycle) for
lease 6.00 this module requires a ladder diagram a 10 ms interrupt filter. The module configuration
to perform the above functions The ladder dia- cannot change after power-up.
gram is provided as Attachment A at the
end of this data sheet. I/O Triggered Interrupt Block
Interrupts are edge triggered and require a minimum Each Interrupt module can call one LD (Ladder
pulse width (as configured) for the trigger to occur. Diagram) program block triggered by the first input
Interrupts on a single input may not occur at a address configured for the module (similar to other
frequency greater than 500 Hz with a model CPM915 IC697 Input modules). This means that an Interrupt
CPU (frequency depends on model of CPU, see Table module configured at %I0001 must be programmed
1 for more information). Within an interrupt module, to execute an LD program block triggered by %I0001.
interrupts will be reported as they are received which To do this, the program block must first be included in
means that all interrupts have equal priority. Multiple the program block declarations and then entered in
interrupts may be reported simultaneously. the interrupt declaration editor.
Software Configuration Requirements Event Triggered Programs

Release 4.02 or later of IC641 programming software Each interrupt module can cause an event-triggered
is required for configuration of the module. When the program to be scheduled for execution. The trigger
module is selected via the Configuration function, the must be the first %I reference configured for this
proper configuration is automatically set. The only module.
48-2 t
GFK-0600F
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic GFK-0880C

August 1997
Interrupt Word Default the interrupt conditions at the time the CPU interrupt
was generated. This data will be written to the %I
At power-up, configuration dependent default data is reference that has been configured for the module.
present at the %I reference for the Interrupt module Current interrupt data is valid within the interrupt
regardless of the level of each interrupt input. The block only. Each interrupt input corresponds to a bit
default data for rising edge selection is all zeros; the in the interrupt word. The interrupt word also
default data for falling edge selection is all ones. The contains the module configuration read at power-up.
level of the configuration bits detected at power-up
will also be present in the default word. Modules configured for positive edge trigger will
report a 1 (one) for active interrupts while negative
Interrupt Reporting edge interrupts will report a 0 (zero) for active
interrupts. The interrupt handling logic must
An interrupt received on any of the 14 interrupt reference the %I data to determine which subset of
inputs will cause an interrupt to be sent to the CPU. the interrupt points are active (see Interrupt Handling
The CPU will read the interrupt module and capture Logic below).
Interrupt Word
Two examples of interrupt reports are shown below.
RISING EDGE FALLING EDGE
D4 D3 D2 D1 C4 C3 C2 C1 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1 D4 D3 D2 D1 C4 C3 C2 C1 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D4 = 10 ms Filter Select D4 = 1 ms Filter Select

D3 = Rising Edge Select D3 = Falling Edge Select
A2 = Positive Interrupt B4 = Negative Interrupt
Interrupt Handling Logic

Any user application logic you have developed for an Note
interrupt module should be contained in the interrupt
handling logic associated with that module. Logic
Referencing the global %I data directly
outside of the interrupt handling logic will have no
from within a standalone C program is not
meaningful data to act upon. The interrupt bits and
recommended since the global data may
associated transitions are undefined outside of the interrupt
not reflect the state of the %I bits at the
handling logic.
time at which the interrupt occurred.
If the interrupt handling logic is an interrupt block
within the RLD program, then the global %I contacts
and/or %I transition contacts can be referenced to If the interrupt handling logic is an event-triggered
RLD program, then the global %I data can be
determine which interrupt points are active.
referenced to determine which interrupt points are
If the interrupt handling logic is an event-triggered active. However, this is not recommended since the
standalone C program, then the %I word should be global %I data may not reflect the state of the %I bits
included in the program’s input specification list. This at the time that the interrupt occurred.
data can then be referenced using the input
specification macros to determine which interrupt Refer to the IC697 Programmable Controller Reference
points are active. Refer to the C Programmer’s Toolkit Manual for more information on interrupt handling
Reference Manual for more information. logic.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Interrupt Buffer H Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and

3-wire.
Interrupts received while the CPU is processing a
previous interrupt will be stored in a buffer. When the In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
CPU acknowledges the previous interrupt, the module driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
will immediately generate a new CPU interrupt to module.
report all of the buffered interrupts. For buffered The input circuitry provides sufficient current to
interrupts, data is not available about the number of ensure reliable operation of the switching device.
interrupts received on a single input. Information about Input current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and
the order in which interrupts from different inputs can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF
occurred is also not available for buffered interrupts. state without turning on.
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since
Important Module Information
H Interrupt modules cannot be used in a Remote I/O low leakage current in the OFF State.
Scanner rack since a remote drop cannot have any
I/O module interrupts.
H If a DOIO instruction is used with an I/O and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
interrupt, transition contacts associated with 3-wire devices. This module is designed to be
scanned inputs may not operate as expected. compatible with many such 2-wire devices; however
each device type must be carefully evaluated for
H When using the Mask/Unmask I/O Interrupt
compatibility in both the ON and OFF states.
Service Request #17 (SVCREQ #17), the mask
applies to all interrupts on the module. When To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
entering the address of the interrupt to mask, use switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
the first %I reference of the module. in the diagram shown in Figure 2. If that point falls to
the left of the input load line, the ON state
Caution characteristics are compatible. As an example, the ON
state requirements of a compatible proximity switch
of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown in Figure 2.
Caution should be exercised since an I/O
interrupt can interrupt the execution of a OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
function block in the main block or any switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
program block. This means that unex- voltage of 5 volts or less.
pected results may occur if the interrupt
block and a program block access the
a42231
same data. 11 24V SUPPLY
10 NON–OPERATIONAL
Input Characteristics 8 20V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
This input module is designed to have both positive and VOLTAGE 6
ACROSS
negative logic characteristics in that it sinks or sources PROXIMITY
4
current from the input device to the user common. The SWITCH OPERATIONAL
input device is connected between the power bus and 2
the module input as shown in Figure 1.
0
This module is compatible with a wide variety of 0 2 4 6 8 10
input devices, such as: I LOAD (mA)
H Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches; Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
48-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Module Mechanical Keying TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

a47014
Î Î
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely A1
Î Î
2
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each A2
3
Î Î
module has a key packaged with it. A3
4 +
Î Î
A4
DC
Î Î
the backplane center rail. When the module is 6
+
7
Î Î
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types. 8

10
9
Î Î
Î Î
11
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it B1
Î Î
12
upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. B2
13
Î Î
B3
+
Î Î
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. B4
15
DC
Î Î
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply 16
+
17
Î Î
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a 18
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
19
Î Î
Î Î
21
C1
Î Î
22
Field Wiring 23
C2
Î Î
C3
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each 24 +
C4
Î Î
group of four inputs is isolated from the others, a wire 25
DC
Î Î
from the power source to the power input terminal 26
+
(10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (power 27
input terminals for each group are not connected 28
Î Î
inside the module). Each group can be powered to
operate as either positive logic or negative logic. 30
29
Î Î
Î Î
31
D1
32
Î Î
D2
33
Î Î
D3
34
D4 +
Î Î
35
DC
Î Î
36
+
37
38
Î Î
Î Î
39
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures board on this input module. Module features
referenced in the following procedures which are
The following procedures are recommended when common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal following figure.
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎ
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

1. Turn off power before removing or installing 3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
module to access a jackscrew which holds the (2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
terminal board securely in place. The detachable #14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
field wiring terminal board can now be removed maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
from the module by turning the jackscrew mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper
counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged. connection, two wires may be terminated on any
one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a
Caution maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If
AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then
wire markers should be placed at least 8 inches
Do not use the hinged door to remove the (203 mm) from termination end to provide
terminal board. The hinged door could sufficient space for the hinged door to close.
48-6 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
5. After completing connections to all modules in a way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure correct mating rack slot location.
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is 8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance be allowed
the wire bundle and tightly secured through the above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
cable tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the not obstruct the rack grill work.
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space
The instructions below should be followed when
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is
removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease H Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red: the back of the cover.
high voltage).
H Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
the terminal board strap (attached to each module) from the backplane connector.
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures H Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Attachment A - Using CPU Software Earlier Than Release 6.00

Unsupported CPU Interface to Module IC641 Programming Software Support Ladder Logic
The following logic is required for each Interrupt
Full CPU support for this module was not available
module used without the availability of full PLC CPU
with CPU software prior to Release 6.00. The
support. This logic contains the following required
Interrupt module requires IC641 programming
operations:
software ladder logic when using CPU software
earlier than Release 6.00. This logic is available on the H First scan interrupt acknowledge to clear
PLC Bulletin Board with a file name of gfk671.zip. For interrupts occurring during the PLC CPU STOP
information on how to use the Bulletin board, contact mode.
your local authorized PLC distributor or sales office. H Reads the interrupt word at slot address +92H
Also, the following rules must be followed when using a VME READ instruction.
using the module: H Interrupt acknowledge: two VME WRITE
instructions using inputs 1DH (Hexadecimal) and
H The Interrupt module will only function when 15H (Hexadecimal) at slot address +81H
installed in Rack 0. (Hexadecimal).
H Toggle module’s %I reference for transition
H Calls to other program blocks and external blocks contacts.
are not allowed inside an interrupt block.
Note
H The Mask/Unmask I/O Interrupt Service Request Do not use this ladder logic with CPU soft-
#17 (SVCREQ #17) cannot be used. ware Release 6.00, or later. It is only in-
tended to be used with CPU software prior
H Event triggered programs are not supported. to Release 6.00
|[ PROGRAM BLOCK DECLARATIONS ]

+–––––––+
| INT3 | LANG: LD (* Interrupt bd slot 3 *)
+–––––––+
|[ INTERRUPTS ]
(*************************************************************************)
(* Interrupt Block I/O triggered by first %I reference address for the *)
(* module. *)
(*************************************************************************)
+–––––––––––––+
+––––––––>[%I00001]––––>|CALL INT3 |
+–––––––––––––+
[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC – MAIN BLOCK ]
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* First scan call resets board and clears interrupts which may have *)
| (* occurred during PLC stop mode. Should be the first rung in main. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 5 >>
|
|FST_SCN +–––––––––––––+
+––] [–––+CALL INT3 +
| +–––––––––––––+
|
[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ]
48-8 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
+[ START OF LD BLOCK INT3 ]

|
|[ VARIABLE DECLARATIONS ]
V A R I A B L E D E C L A R A T I O N T A B L E
REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

––––––––– –––––––– ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
%I00001 ITABLE3 Interrupt Table
%L00001 SLOTTAB Slot Address Table
%L00010 SLOT# Slot number
%L00011 INTADD Interrupt word address.
%L00012 HINT High Interrupt Address. (0)
%L00013 MODEADD Mode register Address.
%L00014 HMODE High Mode Address (0).
%L00015 INTWD3 Interrupt Word
%L00016 TIME1 Time from start of sweep.
%L00017 DELAYT Time1 + delay time.
%L00018 TIME2 Time after delay elapse.
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Data Init below is look–up table for Rack 0 slot addressing. *)
| (* %L12 and %L14 clear upper address for INTADD and MODEADD. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
_____________________________________________________________________________
| |
| D A T A _ I N I T F U N C T I O N |
| |
| New Value > Element: 00001 Length: 00009 |
| |
| (Ordered left to right) |
| 1 +00000 +04096 +06144 +08192 +10240 |
| 6 +12288 +14336 +16384 +18432 |
|_____________________________________________________________________________|
| << RUNG 4 >>

|
|FST_EXE +–––––+ +–––––+ +–––––+
+––] [–––+DATA_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
| |INIT_| | INT | | INT |
| | INT | | | | |
| | Q+–SLOTTAB CONST –+IN Q+– HINT CONST –+IN Q+– HMODE
| | LEN | +00000 | LEN | +00000 | LEN |
| |00009| |00001| |00001|
| +–––––+ +–––––+ +–––––+
|
| (*************************************************************************)
| (* User to provide slot# for Interrupt board at constant 3 example below.*)
| (* INTADD = Interrupt word address; slot + 92h *)
| (* MODEADD = Reset address; slot + 81h. *)
| (*************************************************************************)
|
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
| << RUNG 6 >>

|
|FST_EXE +–––––+ +–––––+ +–––––+
+––] [–––+MOVE_+–––––––––––––––––+ ADD_+–––––––––––––––––+ ADD_+–
| | INT | | INT | | INT |
| | | | | | |
| CONST –+IN Q+– SLOT# CONST –+I1 Q+–INTADD CONST –+I1 Q+–MODEADD
| +00003 | LEN | +00146 | | +00129 | |
| |00001| (92h) | | (81h) | |
| +–––––+ @SLOT# –+I2 | @SLOT# –+I2 |
| +–––––+ +–––––+
|
£| << RUNG 7 >>
|
|FST_EXE
+––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> SKPFST
|
| (*********************************************************************)
| (* First scan logic clears interrupts which may have occurred while *)
| (* PLC–CPU was in stop mode. *)
| (*********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 9 >>
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
| | WRT_| | WRT_|
| | BYTE| | BYTE|
| CONST –+IN | CONST –+IN |
| 001C | LEN | 0014 | LEN |
| |00001| |00001|
| CONST –+AM | CONST –+AM |
| 0029 | | 0029 | |
| | | | |
| MODEADD–+ADR | MODEADD–+ADR |
| +–––––+ +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 10 >>
|
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––+ SVC_+–––––––––+ ADD_+–
| | REQ | | UINT|
| | | | |
| CONST –+FNC | TIME1 –+I1 Q+–DELAYT
| 00009 | | | |
| | | | |
| TIME1 –+PARM | CONST –+I2 |
| +–––––+ 00002 +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 11 >>
|
| DELAY :
|
48-10 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
| << RUNG 12 >>

|
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––+ SVC_+–––––––––+ LT_ +–
| | REQ | | UINT|
| | | | |
| CONST –+FNC | TIME2 –+I1 Q+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> DELAY
| 00009 | | | |
| | | | |
| TIME2 –+PARM | DELAYT –+I2 |
| +–––––+ +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 13 >>
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
| | WRT_| | WRT_|
| | BYTE| | BYTE|
| 001C | LEN | 0015 | LEN |
| |00001| |00001|
| 0029 | | 0029 | |
| | | | |
| +–––––+ +–––––+
| << RUNG 14 >>
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> EXIT
|
| << RUNG 15 >>
|
|SKPFST :
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Read interrupt word at slot address + 92h. *)
| (* Length must be two bytes. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 17 >>
|
| +–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
| | RD_|
| | BYTE|
| CONST –+AM |
| 0029 | LEN |
| |00002|
| INTADD –+ADR Q+–INTWD3
| +–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Interrupt board reset (HSI toggle for interrupt acknowledge = slot *)
| (* address + 81h). *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
| << RUNG 19 >>

|
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
| | WRT_| | WRT_|
| | BYTE| | BYTE|
| 001D | LEN | 0015 | LEN |
| |00001| |00001|
| 0029 | | 0029 | |
| | | | |
| +–––––+ +–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Tests for falling edge configuration from config input D3. *)
| (* Bit test Interrupt word (INTWD3) bit 15. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 21 >>
|
| +–––––+
+––––––––+ BIT_+–
| |TEST_|
| | WORD|
|INTWD3 –+IN Q+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> FALLEDG
| | LEN |
| |00001|
| CONST –+BIT |
| 00015 +–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Toggles transition table for positive transition contacts/coils *)
| (* which function within the interrupt block only. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 23 >>
|
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––+ AND_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
| | WORD| | WORD|
| | | | |
|INTWD3 –+I1 Q+–ITABLE3 INTWD3 –+IN Q+–ITABLE3
| | LEN | | LEN |
| |00001| |00001|
| CONST –+I2 | +–––––+
| C000 +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 24 >>
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------->> USER
|
48-12 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
|
| << RUNG 25 >>
|
|FALLEDG :
|
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Toggles transition table for negative transition contacts/coils *)
| (* which function within the interrupt block only. *)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 27 >>
|
| +–––––+ +–––––+
+––––––––+ OR_ +–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
| | WORD| | WORD|
| | | | |
|INTWD3 –+I1 Q+–ITABLE3 INTWD3 –+IN Q+–ITABLE3
| | LEN | | LEN |
| |00001| |00001|
| CONST –+I2 | +–––––+
| 3FFF +–––––+
|
|
| << RUNG 28 >>
|
| USER :
|
| (*************************************************************************)
| (* User logic to be inserted here. A DOIO at the end of user logic on *)
| (* outputs associated with the interrupts is suggested for best thru–put.*)
| (*************************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 30 >>
|
+ EXIT :
|
+[ END OF BLOCK LOGIC ]
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Inputs per Module: 14 interrupts (total of 16 inputs with four groups of four inputs each)
Input Voltage Range (Vs): –3 to +30 volts DC
On-state Voltage: Positive: 13.5 volts to 30 volts
Negative: –3 volts to Vs –13.5 volts
Off-state Voltage: Positive: –3 volts to 5 volts
Negative: Vs –5 volts to 30 volts
Minimum Pulse Width 1 ms Filter Select: 1 ms on and off
10 ms Filter Select: 11 ms on and off
Minimum Interrupt Burst (1 ms Filter Selection) [
Single Point:
withIC697CPM915CPU
at 1 second PLC WatchdogSetting 500 Hz
with IC697CPU731 CPU 290 Hz

at 2.5 seconds PLC WatchdogSetting
Minimum Through-Put *
Interrupt Input to Discrete Output Response 1.5 ms
with IC697CPM915 CPU and IC697MDL740
Output Module with DOIO Function
* Amount of user logic in the interrupt block may affect performance.
Standards.

Interrupt Input Module, 24 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,14interrupt points (16 points total) IC697MDL671
48-14 t
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
49 IC697MDL350
GFK-0081H 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL350)
datasheet GFK-0081H
a44710
Features
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
D 0.5 amp capacity per point A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
ÎÎ
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
D High inrush capacity (20x rated current)

A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
ÎÎ
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
ÎÎ
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
The 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module provides 32 A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each. FUSE FUSE
This allows each group of 8 points to be used on a dif- OUTPUT

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
50/60 HZ
120VAC
ferent phase of the AC supply. Each group of 8 out- 0.5A/PT
2A MAX/GRP
ÎÎ
1
puts is individually fused with a 5 amp fuse. PILOT DUTY
2 A1
A1
ÎÎ
3 A2
The module provides a high degree of inrush current A2
4 A3
H
ÎÎ
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of A3 5 A4
~
A5
inductive and incandescent loads. The module will A4 6 N
ÎÎ
7 A6
A5
pick up most size 2 contactors. 8 A7
ÎÎ
A6
9 A8
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each A7 10
ÎÎ
A8 11
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuits as well as B1
12 B1
ÎÎ
an LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located B2
13 B2
14 B3
together at the top of the module.
ÎÎ
H
B3 15 B4
B4 16 B5
~
ÎÎ
17 B6
N
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- 18 B7
ÎÎ
B6
19 B8
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- B7
20
ÎÎ
B8 21
ers or DIP switches on the module.
C1 22 C1
ÎÎ
Configuration is done using the configuration func- C2 23 C2

24
ÎÎ
C3
C3 H
25 C4
~
C4 26
ÎÎ
C5
N
C5 27 C6
ÎÎ
C6 C7
29
C8
ÎÎ
30
installed on the programming device. The program- C8
31
D1 D1
ÎÎ
32
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or com- D2 33 D2
ÎÎ
34 D3
D3 H
35 D4
D4 ~
ÎÎ
36 D5
N
Î
D5 37 D6
ÎÎ
D6 38 D7
ÎÎ Î
D7 39 D8
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL350
SLOT LABEL 44A726758-005R01
t
GFK-0600F
2 Discrete Output Modules
August 1997
Operation of the 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module

TO OTHER OUTPUTS a42138
ÎÎ Î
OPTO OPEN FUSE
ISOLATOR DETECTOR ~
FUSE
SYSTEM
BACKPLANE COMMON
INTERFACE LED
ÎÎÎ
OPTO OUTPUT
ISOLATOR DRIVER LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Output Characteristics Fault Mode Selection

The 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compat-
ible with a wide variety of load devices, such as: The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in re-
D Solenoids and motor starters sponse to certain operating or default conditions.
D Indicators
The rating of 0.5 amps per point applies to the long-
D Maintain existing output state
term current capacity of each point. Because of over-
D Turn outputs OFF
all heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current capacity for each group of 8 outputs is limited This is explained in more detail in the applicable Pro-
at higher temperatures (refer to the specifications on grammable Controller Reference Manual.
the last page of this data sheet).
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
Fusing
than its long-term current rating.
Each group of 8 outputs is fused with a 5 amp fuse.
The rate at which such surges can be repeated de- Replaces with a 5 amp fuses. Replace with either of
pends on the current rating of the device and the the following types:
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON). For typi-
cal incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty D 3AG - 5 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 5 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
Steady-state Repetition Rate
Current (mA) (Hz)
100 5
250 1
500 0.1
49-2 t
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules 3
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0081H

August 1997
Module Mechanical Keying TERMINALS

a42146
FIELD WIRING
inadvertent substitution of one module type for 2 A1
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely 3 A2
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 4 A3 H
key is included with each module. 5 A4 ~

6 A5 N
7 A6
8 A7
9 A8
10
12 B1
If it is necessary to change the module location in the 13 B2
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail 14 B3 H
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- 15 B4 ~
ward to unhook the latch while pulling if off the rail. 16 B5 N
It may then be reinstated onto the module and the 17 B6
module inserted into the rack in the desired location. 18 B7
Note: only the power supply can be placed in he left- 19 B8
most rack position. 20
21
22 C1
23 C2
24 C3 H
Field Wiring 25 C4 ~
26 C5 N
27 C6
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of 28 C7
eight outputs is isolated from the others, a wire from 29 C8
the power source to the power input terminals for 30
each group is required (power input terminals for 31
each group are not connected inside the module). 32 D1
33 D2
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept 34 D3 H
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG 35 D4
~
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a 36 D5 N
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is 37 D6
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 wires to be 38 D7
routed out through the terminal board cavity. 39 D8
40

lower corner of the terminal board. Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎ
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
49-4 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0081H

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 120 volts AC

Outputs per Module: 32 (four groups of 8 outputs each)
Isolation: 1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between groups
Output Voltage Range: 85 to 132 volt, 47-63 Hz
Output Current: 0.5 amps maximum per point
2 amps maximum per group
Output Characteristics -
Inrush Current: 10 amps maximum per point for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop: 3 volts maximum
Response Time-On: 1 ms maximum
Response Time-Off: 1/2cycle
OutputLeakage: 1.5 mA maximum
Standards.

Output Module - 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32 Points IC697MDL350
49-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
50
IC697MDL340
GFK-0082H 120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module (IC697MDL340)
datasheet GFK-0082H
Features
a44711
D 2 amp capacity per point

A1 B1 C1
ÎÎ
D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
ÎÎ
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current) A5 B5 C5

C6
D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
ÎÎ
A6 B6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
ÎÎ
FUSE FUSE
ÎÎ
OUTPUT 50/60 HZ
4A MAX/GRP
Functions 120VAC
ÎÎ
2A/PT 1
PILOT DUTY
ÎÎ
2
A1 3 A1
ÎÎ
4
The 120 Volt AC 2 Amp Output Module provides 16 5 A2 H
A2
ÎÎ
output points in four isolated groups of four points 6 ~
7 A3 N
each. This allows each group of four points to be used
ÎÎ
A3 8
on different phases of the AC supply. Each group of 9 A4
ÎÎ
10
four outputs is individually fused with a 10 amp fuse. A4
11
ÎÎ
12
B1 13 B1
ÎÎ
The module provides a high degree of inrush current 14
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of 15 B2 H
ÎÎ
B2
16 ~
inductive and incandescent loads. The module will 17 B3 N
ÎÎ
B3
pick up most size 4 contactors. 18
19 B4
ÎÎ
B4 20
21
LED indicators which give the ON/OFF status of each
ÎÎ
22
point on the logic(PLC) side of the circuit as well as an C1
23
ÎÎ
C1
24
LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located to- 25
ÎÎ
C2 C2 H
gether at the top of the module. 26 ~
ÎÎ
27 C3 N
C3
28
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
ÎÎ
29 C4
C4 30
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer-
ÎÎ
31
ences are user configurable without the use of DIP D1
32
ÎÎ
33 D1
switches or jumpers on the module. 34
ÎÎ
D2 35 D2 H
Configuration is done using the configuration func-

36 ~
ÎÎ
37 D3 N
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowse programming
ÎÎ Î
D3
38

39 D4
Î
D4 40
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The SLOT MODULE IC697MDL340
LABEL 44A726758–006R01
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 120 Volt AC 2 AMP Output Module
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
OPTO OPEN FUSE
ISOLATOR DETECTOR ~
FUSE
SYSTEM
ÎÎÎ
BACKPLANE COMMON
INTERFACE LED
ÎÎÎ
OPTO OUTPUT
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE

The 120 Volt AC 2 Amp Output Module is compatible The module can be configured from the programmer
with a wide variety of load devices, such as: so that output points assume one of two states in re-
D Solenoids and motor starters sponse to certain operating or default conditions.
D Indicators D Maintain existing output state
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the long-
term capacity of each point. Because of overall heat
D Turn outputs OFF
dissipation within the module, the maximum current This is explained in more detail in the programming
capacity for each group of four outputs is limited to 4 manual.
amperes.
conducting a surge current which is much greater Fusing
than its long-term current rating.
The rate at which such surges can be repeated de- Each group of 4 outputs is fused with a 10 amp fuse.
pends on the current rating of the device and the Replace with either of the following types:
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON).For typi-
cal incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty
D 3AG - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
cycle, the following repetition rates apply. D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
Current (mA) (Hz)
0.5 5
1 1
2 0.1
50-2 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module GFK-0082H

August 1997

a42145
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 3 A1
key is included with each module. 4 H
5 A2 ~
When the module is first installed, the key latches 6 N
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is 7 A3
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. 9 A4

10
11
12
13
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- B1
14 H
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
15
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the B2 ~
16 N
17 B3
Note: only the power supply can be placed in the left-
18
most rack position. 19 B4
20
21
22
Field Wiring 23 C1
24 H
25
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of
C2 ~
26 N
four outputs is isolated from the others, a wire from 27 C3
each group is required (power input terminals for 29 C4
each group are not connected inside the module). 30
31
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept 32
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG 33 D1
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a 34 H
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is 35 D2 ~
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) 36 N
wires to be routed out through the terminal board 37 D3
cavity. 38
39 D4

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
STRAP
ÎÎ
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

50-4 t
GFK-0600F
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module GFK-0082H

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 120 volts AC

Outputs per Module: 16 (four groups of four outputs each)
500 volts between groups
Output VoltageRange: 85 to 132 volts, 47 to 63 Hz
Output Current: 2 amps maximum per point
Inrush Current: 20 amps maximum for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop: 3 volts maximum
Response Time-Off: 1/2cycle
OutputLeakage: 1.5 mA maximum
Standards.

Output Module - 120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16 Points IC697MDL340
50-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
51
IC697MDL341
GFK-0382J 120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module (IC697MDL341)
datasheet GFK-0382J
Features a44139
D 12 individually isolated points

D 2 amp capacity per point A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
D1
D2
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
D1
D2

A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
Functions FUSE FUSE
50/60 HZ
OUTPUT
The 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module for use 120/240V AC
16A MAX/MODULE
2A/PT
1
with a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 12 PILOT DUTY
isolated output points. This allows each point to be used on

2
3
H
~N
A1
A1 4
different phases of the AC supply. Each output point is indi- 5
H
~N
vidually fused with a 3.15 amp replaceable fuse. 6 A2
A2 7

9
H
A3
~N
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of in- A3 10
11
ductive and incandescent loads. The module will operate 12
H
~N
most size 4 contactors. B1
13 B1
14
LED indicators which give the ON - OFF status of each 15
H
~N
16 B2
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit as well as an B2 17
LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located at the 18

19
H
B3
~N
top of the module. If one or more of the fuses should B3 20
21
blow, this LED will turn ON. 22
H
~N
23 C1
C1
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct re- 24
placement with a similar module type in the field. I/O 25
H
~N
26 C2
references are user configurable without the use of jump- C2 27
ers or DIP switches on the module. 28

29
H
C3
~N
C3 30
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowse programming 32
H
~N
D1 33 D1
34

H
~N
36 D2
D2
Programming Software configuration function is 37
installed on the programming device. The program- 38

H
~N
39 D3
ming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or com- D3
40
patible Personal Computer. SLOT

MODULE IC697MDL341
LABEL 44A726758–013R02
Although this module is configured as a 16 point out-

put, only outputs 1 through 12 are available to be refer-
enced in your program. For example, if the starting
reference is Q0017, then valid references are Q0017
through Q0028.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module

a44140
SYSTEM
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OPEN FUSE
DETECTOR ÎÎÎÎ FUSE
3.15A
H
~
N
BACKPLANE LED
INTERFACE
ÎÎÎ
OPTO OUTPUT
FIELD
MODULE CONNECTIONS

Output Characteristics For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the Programming Software User’s Manual for
The 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module is IC641 software products.
compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D Solenoids
D Motor starters Fusing
D Indicators Each output is fused with a replaceable 3.15 amp fuse.
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the long-term Replace with the following type:
current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 3.15 amp, 250V, Slo-blo
dissipation within the module, the maximum current for
the module is limited to 16 amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently con-
ducting a surge current which is much greater than its long-
term current rating. The rate at which such surges can be This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inad-
repeated depends on the current rating of the device and the vertent substitution of one module type for another in a
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON). given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on the
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty board below the connector. Each module has a key pack-
cycle, the following repetition rates apply to this module. aged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto the
Steady-State Current (mA) Repitition Rate (Hz) backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the
0.5 5 key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to ac-
1 1
cept only identical module types.
2 0.1 If it is necessary to change the module location in the rack
after the key has been latched onto the center rail of the
rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to un-
Fault Mode Selection hook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It may then be
reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into
This output module can be configured from the programmer the rack in the desired location.
so that output points assume one of two states in response to
certain operating or default conditions. These states are: Note that on;y a power supply can be placed in the left-
most rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the power sup-
D Maintain existing output state ply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU
D Turn outputs OFF rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion rack).
51-2 t
GFK-0600F
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module GFK-0382J

August 1997
Field Wiring TERMINALS

a43985
FIELD WIRING
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each
1
output is isolated from the other outputs, a wire from the H N
power source to the power input terminal for each output 2 ~
3 A1
is required (power input terminals for each output are not
4
connected inside the module). H N
5 ~
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept 6 A2
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 7

H N
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if 8 ~
9 A3
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
10
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out
11
through the terminal board cavity. H N
12 ~
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board 13 B1

H N
lower corner of the terminal board. 15 ~
16 B2
17
H N
18 ~
19 B3
20
21
H N
22 ~
23 C1
24
H N
25 ~
26 C2
27
H N
28 ~
29 C3
30
31
H N
32 ~
33 D1
34
H N
35 ~
36 D2
37
H N
38 ~
39 D3
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CORD CORD CORD
TIE TIE TIE STRAP
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
ing terminal board can now be removed from the mum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43) not be
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires
wise until it is fully disengaged. may be terminated on any one terminal only if
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the both wires are the same size.
51-4 t
GFK-0600F
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module GFK-0382J

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
tom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not it from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 120/240 volts AC

Outputs per Module: 12 individually isolated
500 volts between points
Output Voltage Range: 85 to 264 volts AC, 47-63 Hz
16 amps maximum per module
Output Characteristics
Inrush Current: 20 amps maximum for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop: 1.5 volts maximum
Response Time-Off: 1/2 cycle maximum
Output Leakage: 3 mA maximum at 120 volts AC
6 mA maximum at 240 volts AC
Current Required from 5 V Bus: .25 amp
Standards.

OutputModule, 120/240 VAC, 2 Amp Isolated, 12 Points IC697MDL341
51-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
52
IC697MDL753
GFK-0383F 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL753)
datasheet GFK-0383F
Features
a44141
D 32 Points - Two isolated groups of 16 points each
D 0.5 amp capacity per point

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current) A4
A5
B4
B5
C4
C5
D4
D5
A4
A5
B4
B5
C4
C5
D4
D5
ÎÎ
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
ÎÎ
FUSE FUSE
Functions OUTPUT
ÎÎ 4A MAX/GRP
ÎÎ
5/48 VDC NEG
0.5A/PT 1
PILOT DUTY
ÎÎ
2 A1
A1
3 A2
The 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output
ÎÎ
A2
4 A3
Module provides 32 output points in two isolated A3 5 A4
ÎÎ
A4 6 A5
groups with 16 points in each group. 7 A6
A5
ÎÎ
8 A7
A6 9 A8
ÎÎ
This is a wide range module in that the rated voltage A7 10
can be 5 volts DC or 10 to 60 volts DC. It provides a A8 11
ÎÎ
B1 12 B1
high degree of inrush current at 10 volts to 60 volts 13 B2
ÎÎ
B2
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of B3
14
15
B3
B4
ÎÎ
loads which have such characteristics. It also operates B4 16 B5
17 B6
at TTL levels.
ÎÎ
B5
18 B7
B6
19 B8
ÎÎ
B7
20
LED indicators which give the ON - OFF status of B8 21
ÎÎ
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are C1 22 C1
23 C2
ÎÎ
located at the top of the module. C2
24 C3
C3 25
ÎÎ
C4
C4 26 C5
ÎÎ
C6
replacement with a similar module type in the field. C6 28 C7
29
ÎÎ
C8
I/O references are user configurable without the use C7
30
C8
of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
ÎÎ
31
D1 32 D1
ÎÎ
D2 33 D2

34 D3
ÎÎ
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming soft-
35 D4
D4
36 D5
ware running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr

D5
ÎÎ
37 D6
ÎÎ Î
D6 38 D7
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The D7 39 D8
Î
40
Programming Software configuration function is D8
MODULE IC697MDL753
installed on the programming device. The program- SLOT 44A726758–015R03

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output Module
LED
ÎÎÎÎ
SYSTEM OPTO OUTPUT
BACKPLANE COMMON
ÎÎÎÎ
INTERFACE ISOLATOR DRIVER
LOAD
FIELD
MODULE CONNECTIONS

The 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output This output module can be configured from the pro-
Module is compatible with a wide variety of load de- grammer so that output points assume one of two
vices, such as: states in response to certain operating or default
D Solenoids conditions. These states are:
D Motor starters D Maintain existing output state
D Indicators D Turn outputs OFF
D TTL interface
For more detailed information on module configuration,
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the long-
refer to the applicable Programming Software User’s
Manual.
current for each group of 16 outputs is limited to 4
amperes.
Fusing
Each output on this module is capable of transiently The 5/48 VDC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output Mod-
conducting a surge current which is much greater ule has no replaceable fuses. If protection is required,
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which a fuse as specified below may be externally connected
such surges can be repeated depends on the current to each output point by the user.
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt), Fast Acting
time the device is ON).
D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt), Fast Acting
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50%
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply to this
module.
Current (mA) (Hz)
100 5.0
250 1.0
500 0.1
52-2 t
GFK-0600F
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0383F
August 1997

a43984
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents TERMINALS FIELD WIRING
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each 2 A1
module has a key packaged with it. 3 A2
4 A3
5 A4
6 A5
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur- 7 A6
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. A7
8
If it is necessary to change the module location in the 9 A8
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. 12 B1
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the 13 B2
15 B4
Note that only a power supply can be placed in the 16 B5
leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the pow- 17 B6
er supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the 18 B7
CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion 19 B8
rack). 20
21
22 C1
Field Wiring 23 C2
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each 24 C3
25 C4
group of 16 outputs is isolated from the other group, a
wire from the power source to the power input termi- 26 C5
27 C6
nals for each group is required (power input terminals
28 C7
for each group are not connected inside the module).
29 C8
30
31
32 D1
33 D2
34 D3
35 D4
36 D5
37 D6
38 D7
39 D8
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î Î Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
52-4 t
GFK-0600F
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0383F
August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL753

Rated Voltage: 5 volts DC (" 5%)
10 to 60 volts DC
Outputs per Module: 32 (two groups of 16 outputs each)
Output Voltage Range: 5 volts or 10 to 60 volts
Output Current
5 volts DC 16 mA maximum per point
10 to 60 volts DC 0.5 amps maximum per point
OutputCharacteristics
Inrush Current
10 to 60 volts DC: 5 amps maximum for 20 ms
Output Voltage Drop:
5 volts DC: 0.5 volts maximum (16 mA)
10 to 60 volts DC: 1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
Response Time-On: 1 ms typical
Response Time-Off: 1 ms typical
OutputLeakage:
5 volts DC: 250 µAmaximum
10 to 60 volts DC: 1 mA maximum

Output Module, 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32 Points IC697MDL753
52-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
53 IC697MDL752
GFK-0381E 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL752)
datasheet GFK-0381E
Features a44083

Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
Î
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
Functions
Î
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
Î
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
The 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module provides 32
Î
FUSE FUSE
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each.
Î
OUTPUT
12VDC 2A MAX/GRP
The module provides a high degree of inrush current 0.5A/PT
Î
PILOT DUTY 1
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of A1
2 A1
Î
loads which have such characteristics. A2
3 A2
4 A3
Î
A3
A5
A4
A4 6
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are located
Î
7 A6
A5
together at the top of the module. 8 A7
Î
A6
9 A8
A7 10
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
Î
A8 11
replacement with a similar module type in the field. B1 12 B1
Î
13 B2
I/O references are user configurable without the use B2
14 B3
Î
B3
of jumpers or DIP switches on the module. B4
15 B4
16 B5
Î
Configuration is done using the configuration func- B5 17 B6

18 B7
B6
Î
19 B8

B7
20
Î
B8 21
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The C1 22 C1
Î
23 C2
24 C3
Î
C3
installed on the programming device. The program- 25 C4
ming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compat-

C4
26 C5
Î
C5 27 C6
ible Personal Computer. C6 28 C7
Î
29 C8
G7
30
Î
C8
31
D1 32 D1
Î
D2 33 D2
34 D3
Î
D3
35 D4
D4
36 D5
Î
D5
Î ÎÎ
37 D6
D6 38 D7
ÎÎ
D7 39 D8
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL752
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module
LED
ÎÎÎÎ
SYSTEM OPTO OUTPUT
BACKPLANE COMMON
ÎÎÎÎ
LOAD
FIELD
MODULE CONNECTIONS
Output Characteristics rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of
The 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compatible
with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
D Solenoids
D Motor starters Fault Mode Selection
D Indicators The module can be configured from the programmer
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the long- so that output points assume one of two states in re-
term current capacity of each point. Because of over- sponse to certain operating or default conditions.
all heat dissipation within the module, the maximum D Maintain existing output state
current for each group of 8 outputs is limited to 2 am-
peres. D Turn outputs OFF
For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the applicable Programming Software User’s
Current (mA) (Hz)
Manual.
100 5.0
250 1.0 Fusing
500 0.1
The 12 VDC 0.5 Amp Output Module has no fuses. If
protection is required, a fuse as specified below may
be externally connected to each output point by the
Each output on this module is capable of transiently user.
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
such surges can be repeated depends on the current D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
53-2 t
GFK-0600F
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0381E

August 1997

a42142
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each 2 A1
module has a key packaged with it. 3 A2
ing the slot to accept only identical module types. 7 A6

8 A7
9 A8
10
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. B1
12
Note that only a power supply can be placed in the 15 B4
leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the pow- 16 B5
er supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the 17 B6
CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion 18 B7
rack). 19 B8
20
21
Field Wiring 22 C1

24 C3
group of eight outputs is isolated from the others, a
25 C4
wire from the power source to the power input termi-
26 C5
nals for each group is required (power input terminals
27 C6
for each group are not connected inside the module).
28 C7
29 C8
30
31
32 D1
33 D2
34 D3
35 D4
36 D5
37 D6
38 D7
39 D8
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
minal boards. Open the hinged door on the mod- from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.1
53-4 t
GFK-0600F
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0381E

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Output Voltage Range: 10 to 15 volts
OutputCharacteristics
Inrush Current: 10 amps maximum for 20 ms
Output Voltage Drop: 1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
Response Time-On: 1 ms typical
Response Time-Off: 1 ms typical
OutputLeakage: 1 mA maximum
Standards.

Output Module, 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp 32 Points IC697MDL752
53-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
54
IC697MDL750
GFK-0085G 24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL750)
datasheet GFK-0085G
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each a44709

Î
Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
Î
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
Functions A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
Î
FUSE FUSE
Î
The 24/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module for the OUTPUT
2A MAX/GRP
Î
24/48 VDC
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 32 0.5A/PT
1
PILOT DUTY
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each.
Î
2 A1
A1
3 A2
This output module provides a high degree of inrush A2
Î
4 A3
A3 5 A4
current which makes the outputs suitable for a wide
Î
A4 6 A5
range of loads which have such characteristics. A5

7 A6
Î
8 A7
A6
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each A7
9 A8
Î
10
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are located A8 11
Î
12 B1
together at the top of the module. B1
13 B2
B2
Î
14 B3
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct B3 15 B4
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- B4 B5
Î
16
17 B6
B5
ences are user configurable without the use of jump- 18 B7
Î
B6
B8
ers or DIP switches on the module. B7 20
19
Î
B8 21
Configuration is done using the configuration func- C1 22 C1
Î
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming C2
23 C2

24 C3
Î
C3 25 C4
C4 26
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The C5
Î
C5 27 C6
Programming Software configuration function is C6 28 C7
Î
29 C8
installed on the programming device. The program- C7
30
ming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compat-

Î
C8 31
D1 32 D1
Î
ible Personal Computer. D2 33 D2
34 D3
D3
Î
35 D4
D4
36 D5
Î
D5 37 D6
Î
D6 38 D7
Î
39 D8
D7
Î
40
D8
MODULE IC697MDL750
SLOT LABEL44A726758–002R01
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 24/48 Volt DC

0.5 Amp Output Module
LED
SYSTEM OPTO OUTPUT
ÎÎÎ
BACKPLANE COMMON
ÎÎÎ
LOAD
FIELD
MODULE CONNECTIONS

The 24/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compat- The module can be configured from the programmer
ible with a wide variety of load devices, such as: so that output points assume one of two states in re-
D Solenoids sponse to certain operating or default conditions.
D Motor starters D Maintain existing output state
D Indicators D Turn outputs OFF
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the long-
This is explained in more detail in the Programmable
Controllers Reference Manual.
current for each group of 8 outputs is limited to 2 am-
peres.
Fusing
conducting a surge current which is much greater The 24/48 VDC 0.5 Amp Output Module has no fuses.
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which If protection is required, a fuse as specified below may
such surges can be repeated depends on the current be externally connected to each output point by the
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of user.
D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply. D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
Steady-State Repetition Rate

Current (mA) (Hz)
100 5
250 1
500 0.1
54-2 t
GFK-0600F
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0085G

August 1997
Module Mechanical Keying TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

a42142
inadvertent substitution of one module type for 2 A1

another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely 3 A2
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 4 A3
key is included with each module. 5 A4
6 A5
11
If it is necessary to change the module location in the 12 B1
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail 13 B2
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up- 14 B3
Note: Only the power supply can be placed in the 18 B7
leftmost rack position. 19 B8
20
21
22 C1
Field Wiring 24
23 C2
C3
25 C4
group of eight outputs is isolated from the others, a 27 C6
wire from the power source to the power input termi- 28 C7
nals for each group is required (power input terminals 29 C8
for each group are not connected inside the module). 30
31
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept 32 D1
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 33 D2
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if 34 D3
both wires are the same size. There is room for a 35 D4
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out 36 D5
through the terminal board cavity. 37 D6
38 D7
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board 39 D8
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎTERMINAL
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
ÎÎ
TIE STRAP
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

54-4 t
GFK-0600F
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module GFK-0085G

August 1997
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
5. After completing connections to all modules in a the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recom- correct mating rack slot location.
mended that a cable tie be wrapped around the wire 8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
bundle and tightly secured through the cable tie that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be allowed
cleat located at the lower right corner of the terminal above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
board. For extremely large wire bundles, additional not obstruct the rack grill work.
cable ties should be used.
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space The instructions below should be followed when re-
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is moving an I/O modulefrom its slot in a rack.
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of the
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label board cover with your thumbs on the front of the
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on the
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red: back of the cover.
high voltage). D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover with
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board your fingers to disengage the clip from the rack rail
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting and pull the board firmly to remove it from the
the terminal board strap (attached to each module) backplane connector.
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997

Rated Voltage: 24 or 48 volts DC
Output Characteristics
Output Voltage Drop: 1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
Response Time-Off: 1 ms maximum
Output Leakage: 1 mA maximum
Standards.

Output Module, 24/48 VDC 0.5 Amp, 32 points IC697MDL750
54-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
55
IC697MDL740
GFK-0086G 24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module (IC697MDL740)
datasheet GFK-0086G
Features a44712

D 2 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current) A1 B1 C1
ÎÎ
D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
ÎÎ
A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
ÎÎ
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
C5
Functions A5
A6
B5
B6 C6
D5
D6
A5
A6
B5
B6
C5
C6
D5
D6
ÎÎ
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8 C8 D8
ÎÎ
The 24/48 Volt DC 2 Amp Output Module provides FUSE FUSE
16 output points in four isolated groups of 4 points
ÎÎ
OUTPUT
4A MAX/GRP
each. Each group of four outputs is individually fused 24/48VDC
ÎÎ
2A/PT 1
with a 10 amp fuse. PILOT DUTY
2
ÎÎ
A1 3 A1
ÎÎ
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of A2
5 A2
6
ÎÎ
loads which have such characteristics. 7 A3
A3 8
ÎÎ
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each 9 A4
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit as well as 10
ÎÎ
A4
11
an LED to indicate the status of the fuse are located 12
ÎÎ
B1
together at the top of the module. 13 B1
ÎÎ
14

15 B2
ÎÎ
16
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O refer- 17 B3
B3
ÎÎ
19 B4
ers or DIP switches on the module.
ÎÎ
B4 20
21
Configuration is done using the configuration func-
ÎÎ
22

C1 23 C1
ÎÎ
24
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr C2 25 C2
ÎÎ
26
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The 27 C3
C3
ÎÎ
Programming Software configuration function is 28
29 C4
ÎÎ
C4 30
ming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compat- 31
ÎÎ
32
ible Personal Computer. D1
33 D1
ÎÎ
34
D2 35 D2
ÎÎ
36
Î
37 D3
D3
ÎÎ
38
ÎÎ Î
39 D4
D4 40
SLOT MODULE IC697MDL740

LABEL 44A726758–003R01
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation of the 24/48 Volt DC 2 AMP Output Module
Î ÎÎ
OPTO OPEN FUSE

ISOLATOR DETECTOR
FUSE
SYSTEM COMMON
BACKPLANE
ÎÎÎ
INTERFACE LED
OPTO OUTPUT
ÎÎÎ
FIELD
MODULE CONNECTIONS
Output Characteristics Steady-state Repetition Rate

Current (mA) (Hz)
The 24/48 Volt DC 2 Amp Output Module is compat- 0.5 5
ible with a wide variety of load devices, such as: 1 1
2 0.1
D Solenoids
D Motor starters Fault Mode Selection
D Indicators The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in re-
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the long- sponse to certain operating or default conditions.
term current capacity of each point. Because of over- D Maintain existing output state
current for each group of four outputs is limited to 4 D Turn outputs OFF
amperes. This is explained in more detail in the programming
manual.
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which
Fusing
such surges can be repeated depends on the current Each group of 4 outputs is fused with a 10 amp fuse.
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of Replace with either of the following types:
time the device is ON). For typical incandescant de-
vices operating at a 50% duty cycle, the following rep- D 3AG - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
etition rates apply. D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
55-2 t
GFK-0600F
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module GFK-0086G

August 1997

a42141
shaped area on the board below the connector. The 2

A1
4
A2

A3
9 A4

B2
Note: only the power supply can be placed in the left- 16
17
most rack position. B3
18
19 B4
20
Field Wiring 21
22
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of 23 C1

eight outputs isisolated from the others, a wire from 24

C2
each group is required (power input terminals for 26
each group are not connected inside the module). 27 C3

28

C4
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG 30
#14 (2.1mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a 31
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is 32
33
room for a bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out D1
34
through the terminal board cavity.
35 D2
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the 37 D3
lower corner of the terminal board. 38
39 D4
40
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
TIE
TIE CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
55-4 t
GFK-0600F
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module GFK-0086G

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Rated Voltage: 24 or 48 volts DC

Output Voltage Drop: 0.8 volt (0.4 ohm) maximum
Response Time-Off: 2 ms maximum
OutputLeakage: 1 mA maximum
Standards.

Output Module - 24/48 VDC 2 Amp 16 Pt IC697MDL740
55-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
56
IC697MDL940
GFK-0384E Relay Output, 16 Point Module
August 1997
]]]Relay Output, 16 Point Module (IC697MDL940)
datasheet GFK-0384E
Features a44323
D 16 points - 8 isolated Form C

- 2 groups of 4 Form A
Î
Î
A1 B1 C1 D1 A1 B1 C1 D1
D 2 amp per point switching capacity

A2 B2 C2 D2 A2 B2 C2 D2
Î
A3 B3 C3 D3 A3 B3 C3 D3
A4 B4 C4 D4 A4 B4 C4 D4
D RC snubber and fuse protection per point A5 B5 C5 D5 A5 B5 C5 D5
Î
A6 B6 C6 D6 A6 B6 C6 D6
A7 B7 C7 D7 A7 B7 C7 D7
D
Î
No user power required A8 B8 C8 D8 A8 B8
FUSE
C8 D8
FUSE
D
Î
Removable field wiring terminal OUTPUT 24-240VAC 50/60HZ
5-125VDC
Î
RELAY, 16PT
480VA, 60 WATT
2A PILOT DUTY
NO A1
1
Î
16A MAX/MODULE
2 V
A1 3 NC
Î
A1
Functions 4
NO
A2
Î
A2 5 V
NC
6 A2
NO
Î
The 16 point Relay Output Module is versatile, A3
7 A3
V
8
rugged, and easy to use. It will switch a variety of NC
Î
9 A3
NO
low to medium power loads such as relays, contactors, A4 10 A4
Î
11 V
and lamps. B1
12 NC A4
Î
13
The resistive rating of the module is 2 amps per point 14

NO B1
Î
B2 15 V
at 120/240 VAC or 24 VDC and 0.2 amps per point for 16
NC B1
Î
NO
125 VDC. Power to energize the relay coils is supplied B3
17 B2
18 V
by the module and each output is individually fused
Î
19 NC B2
NO
and suppressed with an RC snubber. B4 20 B3
Î
21 V
NC
LED indicators which display the ON - OFF status of C1 22 B3
Î
23 NO B4
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are 24 V
Î
C2 25 NC B4
located at the top of the module. 26
Î
C3 27
Field wiring is made to a removable terminal board 28
NO C1
Î
NO
and the module is mechanically keyed to ensure cor- C4
29
NO
C2
30 C3
Î
rect replacement with a similar module type in the 31 NO C4
field. I/O references are user configurable without the 32
Î
D1
33 V
use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Î
34
D2 35 NO D1
Configuration is done using the configuration func- NO
Î
36 D2
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming soft-

37 NO
ÎÎ
D3 D3
NO
38
ware running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
D4
Î
39
D4
40 V
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Pro- MODULE IC697MDL940
SLOT
gramming Software configuration function is installed LABEL 44A726758-016RO3
on the programming device. The programming de-

vice can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Per-
sonal Computer.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Operation - Relay Output Module

a44515
LED
NO
Î ÎÎ
RELAY FORM
DRIVER C SNUBBER V
RELAY FUSE 3A
NC
SYSTEM
BACKPLANE
Î ÎÎ
INTERFACE
RELAY
DRIVER
FORM
A
RELAY
SNUBBER
Î ÎÎ FUSE 3A
NO
LED
Output Protection For more detailed information on module configuration,

refer to the Programming Software User’s Manual.
Fusing
Each output is protected with a 3 amp fuse. Replace
with either of the following types: This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
D 3AG - 3.0 amp, 250V, Fast Acting inadvertent substitution of one module type for
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 3.0 amp, 250V, Fast Acting another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
Suppression
Each output is suppressed with an RC snubber to re- onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
duce high frequency noise transients on the board. extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur-
Proper suppression of the switched load is still recom- ing the slot to accept only identical module types.
mended and will contribute to improved system reli-
ability. Suppression at the load will not only lengthen con- If it is necessary to change the module location in the
tact life, but will also reduce noise transients in the control rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
wiring. of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up-
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
Fault Mode Selection module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
This output module can be configured from the pro- Note that on;y a power supply can be placed in the
grammer so that output points assume one of two leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the pow-
states in response to certain operating or default er supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the
conditions. These states are: CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion
D Maintain existing output state rack).
D Turn outputs OFF
56-2 t
GFK-0600F
Relay Output, 16 Point Module GFK-0384E

August 1997
Field Wiring TERMINALS FIELD WIRING

a44324
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. You have NO A1

1
the choice of selecting either a normally open or a 2 V
normally closed relay contact (or both) for each of the 3 NC A1
eight Form C relays, and four normally open contacts 4
NO A2
for each group of Form A relays. A connection is pro- 5 V
vided at the V terminal for a power source for the NC
6 A2
load. Each Form C relay and each group of the Form NO
7 A3
A relays can switch either an AC or a DC load.
8 V
NC A3
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG 10
NO A4
#14 (2.1mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a 11 V
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is NC
12 A4
room for a bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out
13
through the terminal board cavity. NO
14 B1
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board 15 V
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the 16 NC B1
lower corner of the terminal board. 17 NO B2
18 V
NC B2
19
20 NO B3
21 V
NC B3
22
NO B4
23
24 V
25 NC B4
26
27
NO C1
28
NO C2
29
NO C3
30
NO C4
31
32
33 V
34
NO D1
35
NO
36 D2
NO D3
37
38 NO D4
39
40 V
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE STRAP
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎ
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

56-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

module) into the small rectangular slots in the bot- D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
tom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not it from the rack.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 1. Electrical Specifications for IC697MDL940 [
Relay Type: Fixed coil, moving armature

Outputs per Module: 16
Configuration 8 points - Form C (each point isolated)
8 points - Form A (2 groups with 4 points per group)
500 volts between Form C circuits or Form A groups
Maximum Load Current (Resistive)
Per Module 16 amps

Per Group (Form A) 4 amps
Output Switching Characteristics
Nominal Voltage Rating 120/240 VAC or 5/24/125 VDC

Maximum Power 480 VA (AC loads) or 60 watts (DC loads)
Maximum Load Current (resistive) 2.0 amps from 5 to 265 VAC (maximum), 47-63 Hz
2.0 amps from 5 to 30 VDC (maximum)
0.2 amps from 31 to 125 VDC (maximum)
0.2 amps from 31 to 150 VDC (maximum, Form A only)
Minimum Load Current 10 mA
Maximum Output leakage 1 mA at 120 VAC
Response Time-On: 10 msec (maximum)
Response Time-Off: 10 msec (maximum)
Switching Frequency 20 cycles/minute (inductive load)
Contact Type Silver alloy
Contact Resistance 0.2 ohm (maximum)
Contact Life Mechanical: 20 x 106 operations
Electrical: 105 operations at rated resistive load

Protection (each output) 3 amp fuse
Snubber (R = 47 ohms, C = 0.015 µfd)
Current Required from 5 V Bus: 750 mA
Standards.
56-6 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Table 2. Typical Contact Life vs. Load Conditions
Operating Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Contact Life

Voltage Resistive Inductive 1,2 (number of operations)
24 - 120VAC 2.0 amp 1.0 amp 300,000
24 - 120VAC - 2.0 amp 150,000
24 - 120VAC 1.0 amp 0.5 amp 500,000
24 - 120VAC 0.1 amp 0.05 amp 1,000,000
240VAC 2.0 amp 1.0 amp 150,000
240VAC - 2.0 amp 50,000
240VAC 1.0 amp 0.5 amp 200,000
240VAC 0.1 amp 0.05 amp 500,000
24VDC 2.0 amp 1.0 amp 300,000
24VDC - 2.0 amp 100,000
24VDC 1.0 amp 0.5 amp 500,000
24VDC 0.1 amp 0.05 amp 1,000,000
1 Power Factor = 0.4 minimum for AC inductive loads.
2 Time Constant = 7ms for DC inductive loads.

Output Module - Relay, 16 Point IC697MDL940
t
GFK-0600F
1
57
Analog Modules
Base Converter Module - IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module - IC697ALG440
GFK-0385F
August 1997 Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Analog Modules
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels Base Converter Module - IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module -
IC697ALG440
datasheet GFK-0385F
Features a44001
D Complete Analog subsystem includes Base Converter

and Expander modules
D Base Converter module has eight differential inputs OK OK
individually configurable for voltage or current EXP ACTIVE EXP ACTIVE
D Accepts unipolar or bipolar Analog Inputs up to " 10

volts full scale
D Accepts 4 to 20 milliamp current loop signals INPUT
INPUT
ANALOG
ANALOG
D Individual user scaling on each input channel on Base HIGH LEVEL
2
1
Converter module; scaling on a per module basis for 3

CHANNEL 1 + 4 1
Expander modules 2 5
D Fast update rate for Base Converter module 6

7 GND
D Voltage and current Expander modules, each with 16 CHANNEL 2

GND 8
9
inputs, provides for additional inputs at a lower cost 10

11
per point + 12 3
CHANNEL 3 4 13
D Complete subsystem can accept up to 120 inputs 14
15 GND
D No jumpers or DIP switches to configure GND 16
17
D Easy configuration with MS-DOSror Windowsr CHANNEL 4 18

19
programming software configuration function. + 20 5
6 21
22
CHANNEL 5 23 GND
GND 24
25
26
27
CHANNEL 6 7
+ 28
8 29
30
31 GND
GND 32
CHANNEL 7
33 COM
COM 34
35 GND
36
3 37
CHANNEL 8 E 1
4 38 E
2
39
COM 40
MODULE IC697ALG230
Figure 1. Base Converter Module
t
GFK-0600F
2 Analog Modules
GFK-0385F Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
August 1997
Functions a44002
The High Level Analog Input subsystem for the Pro-
ÎÎ
grammable Logic Controller (PLC) accepts analog in-
ÎÎ
puts of up to Ç 10 volts full scale, or 4 to 20 milliamp
OK OK
current loop signals. These inputs are converted to
digital form for use by the CPU or other controllers
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
accessing analog inputs via the VME backplane.
Converted data is presented as 2’s complement (sign
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
+ 15 bits). The basic converter is 14 bits resolution (1 EXPANDER
EXPANDER
ANALOG ( )
ANALOG (V)
ÎÎ
part in 16384); an oversampling and averaging tech- HIGH LEVEL 1 +
nique further enhances this resolution. Inputs are + 2 1
ÎÎ
2 3
protected against transient and steady-state overvol- CHANNEL 1
ÎÎ
4
tage conditions. 5 +
CHANNEL 2 3
ÎÎ
+ 6
Analog inputs use %AI references in the program- 4 7
ÎÎ
8
mable controller. A maximum of 8K words of %AI CHANNEL 3
9 +
ÎÎ
memory is currently available in the programmable CHANNEL 4
+ 10 5
6 11
controller. Each input channel uses one word (16 bits)
ÎÎ
12
+
of %AI memory. CHANNEL 5 13
ÎÎ
+ 14 7
Field wiring is made to a removable terminal board CHANNEL 6

8 15
ÎÎ
16
and the module is mechanically keyed to ensure cor- 17 +
ÎÎ
CHANNEL 7 9
rect replacement with a similar module type in the +
10
18
19
ÎÎ
field. I/O references are user configurable without the CHANNEL 8 20
21 +
use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
ÎÎ
+ 22 11
CHANNEL 9
Configuration is done using the configuration func- 12 23
tion of the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming soft-

ÎÎ
24
CHANNEL 10 25 +
ware running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over

ÎÎ
+ 26 13
14 27
ÎÎ
CHANNEL 11
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Pro- 28
29 +
ÎÎ
gramming Software configuration function is installed CHANNEL 12 + 30 15
on the programming device. The programming de-
ÎÎ
16 31
vice can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Per- CHANNEL 13 32
ÎÎ
33 GND
sonal Computer. GND 34
CHANNEL 14
ÎÎ
35 GND
36
ÎÎ
3 37
CHANNEL 15 E
ÎÎÎ
1
4 38 E
2
39
Î
CHANNEL 16
COM 40
MODULE IC697ALG441
Figure 2. Expander Module
57-2 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 3
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels GFK-0385F

August 1997
High Level Analog Input System Modules

Three module types are included in the High Level
Analog Input subsystem: a Base Converter module, a D Expander Modules
Current Expander module, and a Voltage Expander Up to seven Expander modules can be daisy-
module. A typical subsystem will use a Base Convert- chained off the Base Converter module to in-
er module and (if required) one or more expander crease the number of inputs of the total subsys-
modules. tem up to a maximum of 120.
D Base Converter module - catalog number The Base Converter module accepts any mix of
IC697ALG230 the two Expander module types.
A common user scaling factor applies to all in-
This module has eight differential inputs and
an expansion port. Each input can be individu- puts on each Expander module, however each
ally configured for either voltage or current. Expander module may be individually scaled as
required.
Each of the input channels also has individual
user scaling. D Current Input Expander module - catalog number
IC697ALG440
On-board load resistors are included for normal
input current ranges up to Ç 40 mA. If other The Current Expander module has 16 current
current ranges or different resolution is re- inputs each accepting up to Ç 20 mA.
quired, external resistors may be used. D Voltage Input Expander module - catalog number
Standard system configurations for Ç 10 volts IC697ALG441
and 4 to 20 mA are available. These, and other The Voltage Expander module has 16 differen-
lower input ranges, can be scaled to engineer- tial voltage inputs each accepting up to Ç 10V
ing units with the user scaling feature. signals.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER a44003g
P C B E E E E E E E
S P A X X X X X X X
U S P P P P P P P
E
o (I) (I) (V) (V) (I) (V) (I)
r
Î Î
C
O
B N
R V
M E
R
T
E
R
UP TO 7 EXPANDER MODULES PER SUBSYSTEM
Figure 3. Example of High Level Analog Input System
t
GFK-0600F
4 Analog Modules
August 1997
System Operation
The following illustration is a block diagram of the
High Level Analog Input system followed by an ex-
ample of typical input connections.
a44004
LOW A/D
IN 1 PASS
FILTER
BASE
CONVERTER CONTROL
INPUTS
LOW
IN 8 PASS
FILTER OPTO-ISOLATION
MUX PLC BACKPLANE
LOW
IN 1 PASS AMP
FILTER
EXPANDER CONTROL
INPUTS
LOW
IN 16 PASS
FILTER MUX EXPANDER EXPANDER
CHANNEL CHANNEL
SIGNAL ADDRESS
Figure 4. High Level Analog Input System Block Diagram
Î * * 250 a44005
JMP
Î
IN
Î 10K
HIGH
* 250 IMPEDANCE
.1 µ fd
IN
10K MUX
COM
(ANLGCOM) TO
GND EXPANDER
10K SIGNAL MODULES
COMMON
* CURRENT EXPANDER ONLY ** BASE CURRENT ONLY
Figure 5. Example of Input Connections
57-4 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 5

August 1997
User Wiring Connections addition to the information in this data sheet, circuit
wiring diagrams are printed on the inside surface of
The following illustration shows the wiring assign- the label inserted in each module’s hinged door.
ments for the screw terminals on the terminal board
of the Base Converter and Expander modules. In
INPUT EXPANDER EXPANDER a44007
ANALOG ANALOG ( ) ANALOG ( )
1 1 + 1 +
2 + 2 1 + 2 1
3 2 3 2 3
+ 4 1 4 4
2 5 5 + 5 +
6 + 6 3 + 6 3
7 GND 4 7 4 7
GND 8 8 8
9 9 + 9 +
10 + 10 5 + 10 5
11 6 11 6 11
+ 12 3 12 12
4 13 13 + 13 +
14 + 14 7 + 14 7
15 GND 8 15 8 15
GND 16 16 16
17 17 + 17 +
18 + 18 9 + 18 9
19 10 19 10 19
+ 20 5 20 20
6 21 21 + 21 +
22 + 22 11 + 22 11
23 GND 12 23 12 23
GND 24 24 24
25 25 + 25 +
26 + 26 13 + 26 13
27 14 27 14 27
+ 28 7 28 28
8 29 29 + 29 +
30 + 30 15 + 30 15
31 GND 16 31 16 31
GND 32 32 32
33 COM 33 GND 33 GND
COM 34 GND 34 GND 34
35 GND 35 GND 35 GND
36 36 36
3 37 3 37 3 37
E 1 E 1 E 1
4 38 E 4 38 E 4 38 E
2 2 2
39 39 39
COM 40 COM 40 COM 40
MODULE IC697ALG230 MODULE IC697ALG440 MODULE IC697ALG441

BASE CONVERTER CURRENT EXPANDER VOLTAGE EXPANDER
JUMPER CONNECTS AN INTERNAL 250 OHM LOAD FOR CURRENT INPUTS: LEAVE OFF FOR VOLTAGE
INPUTS (BASE CONVERTER ONLY).
GROUND (GND) IS CHASSIS GROUND.
COMMON (COM) IS ANALOG COMMON.
+ AND – SHOW POLARITY FOR DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS REFERENCED TO COM.
PINS 35 THROUGH 40 FORM THE ANALOG EXPANSION BUS.
Figure 6. Field Wiring Connections to I/O Terminal Boards (Base Converter and Expander Modules)
t
GFK-0600F
6 Analog Modules
August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures board on an Analog Input Base Converter or Expan-
der module. Module features referenced in the fol-
The following procedures are recommended when lowing procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
STRAP
ÎÎ
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP

board securely in place. The detachable field wir- (2.10mm) wire for wiring all points, that a maxi-
mum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10mm) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10mm) wires are to be used, then wire
57-6 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 7

August 1997
Î ÎÎ JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ DO NOT
ÎÎÎ
PULL
ON DOOR

t
GFK-0600F
8 Analog Modules
August 1997
Field Wiring Considerations arate analog common, or if the system is grounded, a

separate (from power devices) quiet ground. It could
Connections to Base Converter and Expander mod- be limited in scope to only the base converter and
ules from user devices are made to screw terminals on associated expander COM. The differential configura-
the removable 40-terminal connector block mounted tion reduces errors from DC or low frequency AC sup-
on the front of each module. All field connections to ply and ground currents by separating the signal
the inputs should be wired to the I/O terminal board wires from the common which may carry these cur-
using a good grade of twisted, shielded instrumenta- rents. High frequency and higher voltage spike noise
tion cable. is reduced by filters at the module inputs.
The internal resistor for 20 mA current inputs on the Do not confuse these inputs with Isolated type inputs,
Base Converter module is connected by jumpering which have no reference to any common. Sources that
the upper two terminals on the group for the desired have high impedance isolation must not be left floating
channel, for example, JMP 0 to IN 0+ (refer to Figure since the high input impedance of the module may
5 for signal names for each group). allow common mode voltage to drift out of range.
This may cause noisy or erroneous data, possibly af-
Ground connections, (GND), on the terminal board fecting other channels as well. The differential input
are provided for connecting shields. This ground con- allows freedom with respect to location where the
nection is made directly to the rack, resulting in supe- signal is referenced to the supply. The differential in-
rior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain cur- put can be converted to single ended (referenced to
rents. Actual selection of ground location may be COM), by connecting IN(–) directly to COM at the
influenced by system power and ground consider- module terminal. Typical connections for differential
ations. However, best operation will be obtained inputs are shown in the two figures on the next page.
when system ground is physically close to the rack
Current inputs require a connection between JMP and
containing the analog circuits. Normally, the shield is
IN+ terminals to connect the internal shunt. This con-
grounded at only one end.
verts the 4 - 20 MA current to a 1 to 5 volt signal.
For additional system grounding information refer to the Jumpers are arranged on adjacent terminals to permit
discussion on system grounding in chapter 3 of the applica- use of commercially available jumper strips, which
ble Programmable Controller Installation Manual. allows for both jumper and wire in the same terminal.
Isolated current sources should be referenced to COM
The module provides electrical isolation of externally
by jumpering IN– to COM. Non isolated loops usual-
generated noise between the input field wiring and
ly should have the return side of the loop supply con-
the backplane through use of optical isolation.
nected to the analog common. Usually one supply
The best advantage of the superior noise rejection of sources several loops, and it is preferable to locate the
the differential inputs is obtained by running both supply near the analog input. The IN(–) side is re-
input lines to the signal source (as shown in Figure 9), turned to COM, either at the module, or wired back
regardless of where ground reference or power sup- to the common side of the loop supply, if the supply is
ply commons are located. remote.
Inputs are differential. This means the input converted Field wiring should be shielded wire. Twisted pair,
value is the result of the difference between the posi- triad (3 wire twisted) or multiple pair cable may be
tive input (+) and the negative input (–), each with used. Shields are usually grounded at the end nearest
respect to COM. Either input can be either polarity where analog signal ground or common is estab-
with respect to COM. The voltage between the in- lished. Ground at the module if in doubt. Ground
puts is called Normal Mode, while the voltage between terminals are provided for convenience on the mod-
inputs and COM is called Common Mode. All input ule. Variations in data caused by high noise environ-
signals should have a reference to a system common ments are often reduced by additional AC bypass of
to ensure that common mode voltages remain within the shield to ground with a .01 to .1 microfarad capaci-
the input range of the module. This is normally a sep- tor at the ungrounded end.
57-8 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 9

August 1997
In extreme noise environments, the shield can be enclosure, either using a ground bar or a collar clamp
grounded at both ends, provided the shield is not which grounds the shield directly to the metallic en-
used to carry any analog signal or analog supply volt- closure. This gives a much lower ground impedance
ages. For noise or surges conducted from sources out- than possible on the module. The shield is continued
side the control enclosure, you should consider termi- up to the module but does not require connection at
nating the shield at the incoming location of the the module.
Voltage Input Examples
{I} {I}
+ +
+ +
Voltage IN Voltage IN
Source V – Source V –
(Grounded – (Isolated)) –
at source) GND GND
{I} {I}
+ +
IN IN
– –
Bridge GND Slide GND

Circuit wire
COM
ALG230
Local
System
System analog common or low noise (quiet) Ground (optional) Ground
Current Input Examples
I {I} {I}
+ +
IN IN
2 wire – I –
loop powered
GND Isolated GND
Source
{I} {I}
+ +
+ IN IN
– Out
I – I –
GND GND
3 wire source Multiple
drops
Loop
Supply COM 250 ohms max
ALG230
Local
System
System analog common or low noise (quiet) Ground (optional) Ground
t
GFK-0600F
10 Analog Modules
August 1997
ANLGCOM is the reference level for all signal inputs. Expansion Bus
For normal operation when the input signals are ref-
erenced to ground, the ANLGCOM terminal may be The bottom six terminals (35 through 40) on the ter-
left open since it is internally connected to ground minal board on the Base Converter and Expander
through an RC circuit as shown in Figure 9. Note that modules make up an expansion bus for connecting
all input signals must be within Ç 13 volts of ANLG- input Expander modules to the Base Converter mod-
COM to obtain specified performances. ule. An analog multiplexer on the Expander module
acts as a switching circuit to connect analog inputs,
one at a time, to the A/D (Analog to Digital) converter
on the Base Converter module.
IN 15V a44008g
Input Sampling Techniques
IN The objective of the input sampling technique for the
V analog subsystem is to provide 8 input channels on
15V
the base module that have a fast (approximately 3 ms)
INPUT FROM
update rate and additional expander channels that are
ON-BOARD
POWER
BACKPLANE updated less frequently, but have a lower cost per
SUPPLY channel.
OUTPUT
Operation is such that the base module initially up-
ANLGCOM dates all eight channels plus one expander channel.
COMMON On each successive scan all eight channels of the base
converter are again updated - plus the next expander
60V channel in sequence. After 16 analog input scans all 16
TO
channels of the first expander have been sampled; on
GROUND EARTH GROUND the next scan, all eight base converter channels plus
ON PLC RACK
the first channel of the next Expander module are
scanned.
Figure 9. ANLGCOM Connection to Ground This sampling technique continues until all available
expander channels (16 x number of Expander mod-
ules) have been scanned, at which time the sequence
Note starts over. The number of analog scans required to
For applications in which the input signals are include sampling of all expander channels is equal to
not referenced to ground, an offset voltage the total number of Expander modules x 16 (16 chan-
may be introduced between ANLGCOM and nels per Expander module) in the system.
GND as shown in Figure 9 to ensure that the With no Expander modules present, each base con-
input is within the common mode limits of verter channel is updated once every 2.4 milliseconds.
Ç 13 volts. Note that all inputs for a single With one or more Expander modules present, this
Base Converter/Expander subsystem are ref- update time increases to 2.8 milliseconds.
erenced to ANLGCOM on the Base unit. The
Each expander channel is updated every 2.8 x N ms
maximum offset voltage for ANLGCOM is Ç
(where N = total number of Expander channels pres-
60 VDC with respect to earth ground.
ent). Note that the scan sequence is free running and
If any of the inputs appear to be fluctuating in values, it cannot be synchronized with any external event.
ensure that all terminal pairs are connected to COM Also note that all inputs of an Expander module will be
or GND. scanned even if they are not being used.
57-10 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 11

August 1997
Table 1. Analog Input Channel Update Times
Number of Expander Base Channel Expander Channel

Modules Update Rate (ms) Update Rate (ms)
0 2.4 –
1 2.8 45
2 2.8 90
3 2.8 134
4 2.8 179
5 2.8 224
6 2.8 269
7 2.8 314
Connecting the Expander Bus three-conductor shielded cable can be used, with the
third wire making the EXPSHLD connection, and the
Terminals 36 and 38 connect the selected analog expan-
shield connection to GND.
sion signal to the Base Converter module. Terminal 40
provides the analog common connection between mod- Terminals 37 and 39 are the expander differential data
ules. These terminals should be bussed in parallel with bus. This is a serial communications port which allows
twisted, shielded wire, observing polarity on terminals the base converter processor to control the expanders.
36 and 38. The shield must be connected at terminal 40 They must be connected with twisted pair cable, ob-
at both ends of all links between modules in order to serving polarity. Shielding is optional; if used, connect
connect COM of all boards together. Alternately, a the shield to GROUND at terminal 35.
NOTE: SHIELDS MUST BE CONNECTED AT EACH END TO TB40 a44009
BASE
Î Î Î
CONVERTER EXPANDER 1 EXPANDER 2
Î Î
35 35 35
36 36 36
Î Î Î
37 37 37
38 38 38
39 39 39
40 40 40
Figure 10. Expander Bus Connections
t
GFK-0600F
12 Analog Modules
August 1997
Module/R ack Configuration Expander channel numbers are assigned by the sys-
tem based on the physical location of the Expander
A high level analog input system for the program- module relative to the base converter module. For
mable controller can consist of any combination of example, the Expander module in the slot to the im-
Base Converter modules and Expander modules up to mediate right of the base converter module is as-
the I/O module capacity of the rack, or a maximum of signed channels 9 through 24, the next expander is
120 inputs for each Base Converter module. assigned channels 25 through 40, etc., as shown in the
following figure.
Up to seven Expander modules may be interfaced to a
Base Converter module to attain the maximum of 120 Expander modules should be located to the immedi-
inputs (7 Expander modules x 16 inputs = 112 + 8 ate right of the controlling Base Converter module,
inputs on Base Converter). Expander modules must be with no empty slots or different module types located
physically located in the same rack as the Base Con- between the Base Converter and Expander modules,
verter module, and must be installed in slots to the or between Expander modules.
right of the base converter module. These modules must
be adjacent to each other.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER a44010g
P C B E E E
S P A X X X
U S P P P
E
Î C
O
N
V
Î
E
R
T
E
R
CHANNEL 41 THROUGH 56
CHANNEL 1 THROUGH 8
Figure 11. Example of Channel Number Assignments
Module Mechanical Keying If it is necessary to change the module location in the

Each module includes a mechanical key that prevents of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up-
inadvertent substitution of one module type for ward to unhook the latch while pushing it off the rail.
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely It may then be reinserted into the rack in the desired
shaped area on the board below the connector. location.
When the module is first installed, the key latches Note that in an IC697CHS PLC rack only the power
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is supply can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and
extracted, the key remains attached to the center rail, slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always con-
thereby configuring the slot to accept only identical tain a CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
module types. Module or Remote I/O Scanner (in expansion racks).
57-12 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 13

August 1997
Configurable Functions D The type selected (voltage or current) for each Expan-
der module
You can configure certain functions through the MS- D The number of channels used for all present Expander
DOS or Windows software configurator function us- modules
ing the programming device. These functions in- After the CPU has been updated with this initial con-
clude input ranges, user scaling, and the alarm figuration data, the CPU provides the following mod-
comparator function. These functions and their defi- ule configuration data;
nitions are listed in Table 2.
D The high and low alarm settings for each main input
channel
Module Configuration Data D The input type (voltage or current) for each main in-
put channel
When power is initially applied to the analog modules
D CPU alarm interrupt, whether enabled or disabled on
the CPU will be updated, through backplane and
a per channel basis (Base Converter module only)
module software, with the following configuration
data: D CPU fault reporting, whether enabled or disabled on a
per channel basis for Base Converter module and per
D Number of main (Base Converter module) input chan- board for Expander module
nels used
Each of the input channel values is checked for over-
D Number of Expander modules present and their slot range, underrange, and open wire if configured for 4,
location relative to the Base Converter module 20 mA.
Table 2. Configurable Features for the Base Converter Module
Feature Channel or Module Selections Default Setting

–10V, +10V
0, +10
Voltage/Current Channel –5V, +5V –10V, +10V
0, +5V
4, 20 mA
Report Faults Channel Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Scaling Points Channel
User Value " 32767 µA +32000, –32000 µA
mV or mA " 10000 mV +10000 mV, –10000 mV
Report Alarms Channel Enabled/Disabled Disabled
Alarm Values Channel
Low " 32767 –32767
High " 32767 +32767
t
GFK-0600F
14 Analog Modules
August 1997
Features of the Voltage Expander module that can be set-up during configuration are listed below.
Table 3. Configurable Features for the Voltage Expander Module

–10V, +10V
0, +10
Voltage Module –5V, +5V –10V, +10V
0, +5V
Report Faults Module Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Scaling Points Module
User Value " 32767 +32000, –32000
mV " 32767 +10000 mV, –10000 mV
Features of the Current Expander module that can be set-up during configuration are listed below.
Table 4. Configurable Features for the Current Expander Module

Current Module 4, 20 mA 4, 20 mA
Report Faults Module Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Scaling Points Module
User Value " 32767 +32000, 0
mA " 32767 +20000 mA, 4000 mA
Note
For detailed information on using the config-
uration function refer to the Programming User Scaling
Software User’s Manual.
The scaling feature allows you to define any linear
Input Ranges relationship between the sensed input voltage or
current and the value in engineering units that is
The Base Converter input type (voltage or current) returned to the PLC. The default configuration, as
can be individually programmed for each input point. shown in Figure 12, provides values of –32000 to
The range selected should match the input signal. + 32000 corresponding to a voltage input range of
Current inputs require the use of the built-in or a user sup- – 10 to +10 volts. If a channel (or Expander mod-
plied external burden resistor. The Expander input ule) is configured for current, default scaling is 0 to
points are all the same on a module, either voltage or 32000 for an input current range of 4 to 20 mA (see
current, determined by the module type. Figure 13).
57-14 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 15

August 1997
INPUT POINT a44011

VOLTAGE 32000, 10000
10000MV
32000
5000MV POINT
(16000,5000)
30000 10000 USER

SCALING
0 10000 30000
32000
5000MV
10000MV
POINT
32000, 10000
Figure 12. User Scaling for Voltage Input

Scaling can be configured on a per channel basis for Note
the Base Converter module and on a per module
Scaling to engineering units does not in-
basis for Expander modules. Scaling is set by enter- crease the resolution of the value, but does
ing the desired voltage or current input value and transform it into more convenient units.
the corresponding engineering units for each of two Scaling can be used to compensate for dif-
points. Engineering units are a 16-bit signed value ferences between actual and theoretical val-
(– 32768 to +32767). ues due to inaccuracies encountered in field
When configuring scale factors, 0 mV or 0 mA must devices.
correspond to an engineering units number between
+32767 and –32767.
INPUT POINT 1 a44012
CURRENT 32000, 20000
20000 MA
16000 MA (16000, 12000)
12000 MA
8000 MA
4000 MA POINT 2
(0, 4000) USER
30000 10000
SCALING
0 10000 30000
4000 MA
8000
8000 MA
12000 MA
16000 MA
20000 MA
Figure 13. User Scaling for Current Input
t
GFK-0600F
16 Analog Modules
August 1997
Using Data Commands to Modify Communications Request

Configuration Function Block Format
The Data Command provides a mechanism which The ladder logic representation of the COMMREQ
allows you to modify some of the diagnostic configu- function block is as follows:
ration parameters of the Analog Input Base Converter
%Q0200 +——————+
Module from ladder logic. The Data Command uses —] [———(enable)+ COMM_+—(ok)—
the COMMREQ function block and a small block of | REQ | %Q0201
parameters to update certain configuration parame- %R0001——+IN FT+————––––——————( )——
| |
ters on the fly. CONST ——+ SYSID|
0107 | |
Sending Data Commands Using the | |
CONST ——+ TASK |
COMMREQ Function 00001 | |
+——————+
The PLC ladder program sends a Data Command us-
ing the COMMREQ (Communication Request) func-
tion. The COMMREQ requires that all its command The Communications Request function block has four
data be placed in the correct order in the CPU inputs and two outputs. The first input is an enable
memory before it is executed. It should then be input. Generally a one-shot coil is used to enable the
executed by a by a one-shot to prevent sending the COMMREQ function. This prevents multiple mes-
data to the module multiple times. Successive sages from being sent. The second input (IN) is the
COMMREQs must be separated by at least 1 millisec- starting location of the COMMREQ command block.
ond to guarantee correct processing. The SYSID input is used to indicate which rack and
A description of the COMMREQ function and its slot to send the message to (physical location of Ana-
command block data follows, along with a ladder ex- log module). The last input (TASK) is set to the chan-
ample which uses registers %R0001 to %R0009 for the nel number to be configured. In the above example,
COMMREQ command block. Refer to the applicable channel 1 of rack 1, slot 7 will be configured and the
Programmable Controller Reference Manual for additional COMMREQ command block starts at Register 0001.
specific information on COMMREQs. Power is always passed to the ok output. The fault
output (FT) is enabled if the COMMREQ fails.
COMMREQ Function Block Description
The Communications Request (COMMREQ) function
is a conditionally executed function that
communicates a particular request, through the
ladder logic program, to the Analog module.
57-16 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 17

August 1997
Command Block command to move these values to the Register

tables (refer to the applicable Programmable
The command block for Data Commands is made
Controller Reference Manual, for information on using
up of nine words (all values in hexadecimal unless
the block move function).
otherwise indicated). Use the block move
Table 5. Command Block for Data Commands
Location Data Description

%R0001 0003 Length of data is three words
%R0002 0000 Not used (Always zero)
%R0003 0000 Not used
%R0007 nnnn Data Command - Command Word - Word 0
Analog Input Data Command Parameters Thresholds for each channel of the Base Converter.
Each Data Command reconfigures all of the parameters
The Data Command can be used to change the configu- for the specified channel using the new data.
ration of Fault Reporting, Alarm Interrupts, and Alarm
Table 6. Analog Input Data Command Parameters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Location Description Data
Command Word 0 Configuration Word Bit 8: 0 - Fault Report Enable
1 - Fault Report Disable
Bit 13: 0 - Alarm Interrupt Disable
1 - Alarm Interrupt Enable
Command Word 1 HighAlarm Threshold Range +/– 32767 Engineering Units
Command Word 2 Low Alarm Threshold Range +/– 32767 Engineering Units
Bits in the configuration word are numbered with bit effect unless the channel has Alarm Interrupts en-
1 being the least significant bit. Note that changing abled in the initial configuration folder created using
the configuration of the Alarm Interrupt will have no the IC641 configuration software.
t
GFK-0600F
18 Analog Modules
August 1997
Example - Sending Data Commands porting, enable alarm interrupts, and set the high and
low alarm thresholds to +20000 and –20000, respec-
An example of ladder logic for sending a data com- tively.
mand to an Analog Input module using COMMREQ
function blocks is shown below. In this example, the If the COMMREQ command data is formatted incor-
COMMREQ command block is located in registers rectly, or has an invalid command, the Analog Input
%R0001 through %R0009. The command to send the module will set the Error Status %I bit, and return an
data is initiated by the conditional input %I0289 error code in Module Status Code %AI word.
which sets output %Q0200 for one sweep. The Ana- Note that the comments within /* . . . . */ have been in-
log Input module is located in Rack 1, slot 7 (first ex- cluded for information purposes only. They are not gener-
pansion rack). This command will disable fault re- ated by the programming software.
|
|%I0289 %Q0200
+–—] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%I0290 %Q0201
+——] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+— /* Move Command block into Registers 1—7 */
| | WORD|
| | |
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0001 /* Command block data starts at %R0001 */
| 0003 | | /* Command data length is 3 words */
| | | /*
| CONST —+IN2 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 1080 +—————+ /* First word (Command Word) */
| /* In this case, disable fault reporting */
| /* and enable alarm interrupts */
57-18 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 19

August 1997
|
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+— /* Move data into registers 8 through 14 */
| |WORD |
| | |
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0008
| 4E20 | | /* Register 8 sets the High Alarm */
| | | /* to 20000 (Hexadecimal 4E20) */
| CONST —+IN2 |
| B1E0 | | /* Register 9 sets the Low Alarm */
| | | /* to –20000 (Hexadecimal B1E0) */
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 | | /* Remaining registers are not used */
| | |
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 0000 +—————+
|
|
|
|
|
| /* Now call the COMMREQ to send the message */
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [————————+COMM_+
| | REQ | /* COMMREQ will set output %T0051 if failure */
| | | /* detected when sending message. %T0051 */
| %R0001 —+IN FT+———————————————————————————————————————————( )——
| | | /* Command block data starts in R0001 */
| | |
| CONST —+SYSID| /* Analog Input Module is in rack 1, slot 7 */
| 0107 | |
| | |
| CONST —+TASK | /* Task is set to the channel to be */
| 00000001 +—————+ /* configured, in this case channel 1 */
|
|
t
GFK-0600F
20 Analog Modules
August 1997
Diagnostics for Expander module configuration data. The LED is

turned on when the Expander module is configured
Diagnostic capabilities for the analog high level input The LED is turned off when a board failure has been
system include: detected.
D LEDs on modules for system status indication
D Monitoring health of Base Converter and Expander Analog Input Diagnostics
modules
Analog input diagnostics, including the Alarm
D Detection of configuration errors Comparator Function and I/O fault reporting are de-
scribed below
D Monitoring communication between Base Converter
and Expander modules
D Overrange and underrange detection Alarm Comparator Function
D Open wire detection The Alarm Comparator Function provides a mecha-
D Monitoring of high and low alarm limits nism to initiate special processing when an input goes
outside a specified operating range. Alarm Thresh-
D Expander channel not responding olds can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of
the signal. Typically, they are set at levels beyond
which the input should not operate or levels beyond
which alternate processing is required. They can also
Module LEDs be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal, ensur-
There are two LEDs on the Base Converter module ing that they will never be activated. The desired op-
erating range is defined by user configurable high and
and one LED on each of the Expander modules.
low thresholds. The alarms do not affect operation of
the module or change the scaled input value. The
Base Converter Module Alarm Comparator function is available only on the
Base Converter module.
The Base Converter module has two LEDs. The up-
per LED, labeled BOARD OK flashes when the mod-
Alarm Contacts
ule has powered-up, passed its diagnostic tests, and is
waiting for configuration data from the CPU. After When the scaled input value goes outside either of
receiving configuration data, the Board OK LED is the configured thresholds, the appropriate high
turned on if the data from the CPU is OK; it is turned (–[HIALR]–) or low (–[LOALR]–) alarm contact for
off if there is a configuration error. the channel is energized. One alarm is generated each
time an alarm threshold is crossed. The IC697 CPU
The lower LED, labeled PORT OK, turns on when
supports one –[HIALR]– and one –[LOALR]– con-
communication is established with one or more Ex-
tact pair per channel of the Base Converter module.
pander modules, and the expansion bus is operating
properly. Once the system is up and operating, this
LED is turned on when any of the configured expan- Alarm Interrupts
sion channels are responding. When none of the
configured expansion channels are responding, the In addition, either alarm will also generate a triggered
PORT OK LED is turned off ladder interrupt, if enabled in the channel configura-
tion. The IC697 CPU supports a separate triggered
interrupt block for each input channel. When an
Expander Modules alarm interrupt occurs, the CPU updates the data for
that channel before activating the interrupt block.
There is one LED on an Expander module. This LED Within the interrupt block, the logic can determine
flashes when the Base Converter module is waiting which alarm occurred by examining the input data.
57-20 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 21

August 1997
reported again until the fault condition is removed

Caution and then occurs again.
Fault Contacts
An I/O interrupt can interrupt execution of
any program block, including the _Main Any combination of the following faults on a channel
block. Therefore, unexpected results can will cause the corresponding fault contact to be ener-
occur if the interrupt block and the pro- gized. The IC697 CPU supports one –[FAULT]– and
gram block access the same data. When it –[NOFL T]– contact pair per input channel on both
is necessary for a program block and an in- Base Converter and Expander Modules.
terrupt block to access the same data, a Use of fault contacts requires that Point Faults be en-
SVCREQ #17 can be used to temporarily abled in the CPU, as described in the applicable Pro-
block the interrupt from executing when grammable Controller Reference Manual.
the shared data is being accessed.
Base Converter Faults
The execution of a block triggered from an interrupt
supersedes the execution of the normal program se- Overrange
quence. Execution of the normal program is sus- Input overrange occurs when either of the following
pended, and only resumed after the interrupt block conditions is present:
completes.
1. The scaled input value is greater than 32767. Un-
der this condition, the value is held at 32767.
Alarm Configuration
2. The actual input voltage or current is greater than
Each Base Converter channel can be configured to the maximum Analog to Digital converter range
have a high and a low threshold value. Maximum (approximately +10.2 volts or 40.8 mA).
values are " 32767. The high threshold must be great-
er than the low threshold. Threshold limits are based Underrange
on circuit scaling. If scaling is changed, review and Input underrange occurs when either of the following
readjust the Alarm Thresholds if necessary. conditions is present:
Note that an alarm threshold of " 32767 disables the 1. The scaled input value is less than –32767. Under
corresponding alarm, thus it is possible to have only a this condition, the value is held at –32767.
high or low alarm. By default, the high and low alarm 2. The actual input voltage or current is less than the
thresholds are set to + and – 32767, respectively. minimum Analog to Digital converter range
The alarm thresholds can be changed dynamically (approximately –10.2 volts or –40.8 mA).
using the Diagnostic Config Data Command, de-
scribed elsewhere in this data sheet. Open Wire
This diagnostic occurs when a channel is configured
Use of alarm contacts requires that Point Faults be
for current mode (4–20 mA) operation and the input
enabled in the CPU, as described in the applicable
current drops below 2mA.
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Expander Faults
I/O Fault Reporting
Expander Channel Not Responding
The IC697 Analog Input Modules support fault detec-
tion which is used to activate fault (–[FAULT]– / This fault is a result of a communications failure on
–[NOFL T]–) ladder contacts in the PLC. In addition, the expansion bus, or one or more expansion channels
a corresponding fault message is logged in the PLC are not responding due to a hardware failure.
I/OFault Table, unless fault reporting has been dis-
abled in the channel configuration. Base Converter A/D Communications Fault
If fault reporting is enabled in the channel configura- This error occurs when certain internal failures occur
tion, each fault condition is reported once, and is not on the Base Converter module. When this happens, a
t
GFK-0600F
22 Analog Modules
August 1997
fault message is sent to the CPU by way of a CPU in- Analog Signal Terms
terrupt. The module LEDs are turned off and the
module halts after sending the message to the CPU. This section explains some general terms relating to
measurements at analog I/O terminals.
Configuration Errors Single-Ended

The following configuration mismatch errors are de- Single-ended circuits have the signal measured
tected by the Base Converter and reported to the CPU: relative to a common connection, usually the power
supply. Other analog I/O signals typically share this
D User scaling error (user scaling offset calculation ex- common. Single-ended circuits require the fewest
ceeds 16 bit signed data)
terminal points, giving the highest density and lowest
D Expander module Configuration Error, Expander price, but at the cost of more restrictive wiring and
module current or voltage range, or number of chan- errors due to voltage drops and currents in the
nels not as expected common connections. Single-ended circuit
connections are most similar to the wiring of discrete
modules.
Note Signal Common

The system cannot determine if terminal The term signal common refers to a point in the signal
board resistors or jumpers for current in- that may be connected to the corresponding points in
puts are properly installed. However, this other signal loops. It may or may not be connected to
will often result in overrange faults when earth ground.
current input signals are applied.
Differential
User Scaling Error
Differential signals are measured on two wires which
This error occurs when the user’s two scaling points are separate, but not isolated from the power supply.
connected on a plot of engineering units versus mV or Differential inputs allow a greater degree of freedom
mA do not cross the engineering unit’s X-axis be- in wiring commons and grounds without affecting
tween +32767 and –32767. In other words, 0 mV or 0 accuracy. There is a limited voltage rating (see
mA must correspond to an engineering units number Common Mode) between the signal level wires and
between +32767 and –32767. When this occurs a the power supply wires. This limitation also applies to
fault is logged in the PLC I/O Fault Table. The module voltage differences among additional I/O on the same
LEDs are turned off and the module halts after re- supply.
porting the fault to the CPU.
Differential inputs usually come in groups sharing the
supply common tie point. Some voltage outputs may
Expander Module Configuration Error have an external return or remote sense which allows the
load common or ground to be different than the
This error occurs when the Expander module configu-
supply of the output module by a small voltage.
ration range or the number of channels per Expander
Current loop signals are less susceptible to differences
module is not as expected. On power-up the Base
in voltage between circuit components (see
Converter module scans the Expander modules con-
compliance). Differential inputs permit series inputs
nected to the expansion bus to determine their type.
with current loops, since the signal can be offset from
If the actual configuration does not match the config-
common. Do not confuse differential inputs with
ured range or number of channels, an Expander mod-
isolated inputs; differential requires the common tie
ule Configuration error is reported
point reference for all inputs of the group, usually
either ground or the supply common.
57-22 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 23

August 1997
Isolated input will produce minimum value and, if diagnostics

are available, underrange or open wire faults.
Isolated inputs are usually two-wire and are
dielectrically insulated from supplies and ground.
Bipolar
Sometimes additional connections are provided for
excitation of transducers such as RTDs, but these Bipolar signals can reverse polarity in operation.
signals are not shared with other I/O points. Isolated Reversed signal connections to a bipolar input will
modules allow high voltages to exist between I/O produce data of opposite sign.
devices and the PLC. Do not confuse isolated inputs
with the isolation between groups of analog circuits, Ground Loop
or isolation from other components of the system,
such as logic or power supplies. When a conductor is grounded in more than one
place, differences between grounds can induce
currents producing voltage drops in the wire. If the
Normal Mode conductor is also used to carry an analog signal, these
This is the actual signal across the signal wires of voltage drops produce an accuracy error or noisy
differential or isolated I/O. This may also include values. If a single point ground is used, the voltage
unwanted noise such as power line frequency pickup. difference between locations may still appear in series
with the desired signal. This is overcome by using
differential or isolated inputs and running a separate
Common Mode return from the remote source. This preserves the
integrity of the signal, and the ground voltages
This is the voltage between the analog signal wires
appear as common mode voltage at the receiving end.
and the common point of the power supply of a
differential signal, or to ground in the case of an
isolated signal. It is desirable that all common mode Current Loop
signals are ignored by the circuit, but in practice there This is a standard analog interface defined by the
is some error introduced in the data. This is specified Instrument Society of America in ANSI/ISA-S50-1. The
as Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR), usually signal level is 4mA to 20mA. Three types of signal
expressed in decibels (db). Differential circuits also sources are defined, Types 2, 3, and 4. These
have a maximum common mode voltage correspond to the number of wires used. The isolation
specifications, usually stated as a maximum voltage of the transmitter may impact the type of PLC input
with respect to circuit common. Exceeding the required. When non-isolated inputs are used, isolation
common mode voltage rating of differential signals may be provided by means of a current transducer
causes large errors in the data conversion and may that has isolation between the current loop and/or
affect several points. power supply. The Standard covers only isolated or
common (single-ended) inputs. Differential inputs
Unipolar often used in PLCs, and connecting several current
loops together, as often occurs with PLCs, are not
Unipolar signals or ranges do not change polarity covered well in the Standard, and often introduce
during normal operation; for example 0 to 10 volts, or additional complication regarding location of
4mA to 20mA. Reversed connection to a unipolor commons and grounds.
t
GFK-0600F
24 Analog Modules
August 1997
Table 7. Analog Input Specifications [
Input Ranges: Voltage: –10 volts to +10 volts

Current: 4 to 20 milliamps
Resolution: Default Scaling (16 bit)
312.5 microvolts per LSB step on voltage
0.5 microamps per LSB step on 4 to 20 mA
No missing codes over 16 bits on voltage
No missing codes over 14 bits on current
NOTE: User scaling may introduce skipped codes in the lower 2 or 3 bits depending
upon the factors used.
Accuracy: Calibration Factory set at full scale = 10 volts ±2 millivolts on Base Converter module.
Maximum errors at 25° C (77°F) are:
Base Converter Voltage, ±.01% of full scale, ±.02% of value
Base Converter Current, ±.05% of full scale, ±.1% of value
ExpanderVoltage, ±.03% of full value, ±.02% of value
ExpanderCurrent, ±.07% of full scale, ±.1% of value
Base Converter Continuallyself-calibrates for zero and positive full scale (before user scaling)
values. Field calibration not normally required; there is no zero adjustment. A
trimpot on the Base Converter adjusts full scale value at 10V input. For critical
applications this can be reset to compensate for ageing of the reference.
Accuracy:
Linearity ±.02% of full scale over entire negative to positive range.
Temperature Coefficient ±5 PPM per °C typical

±15 PPM per °C maximum, voltage
±30 PPM per °C maximum, current
Input Impedance: Voltage Inputs:

Greater than 10 megohms at DC
AC impedance, 20K ohms in series with .47 mfd capacitor.
Current Inputs:
250 ohm, 0.1% precision shunt
Common Mode Rejection: Voltage Range - Peak signal input must be between +13 and –13 volts with
respect to the ANLGCOM terminal.
Sensitivity: Response to common mode signals within the above limits is typically 70 dB
CMRR, corresponding to a .02% full scale reading for a 0V input at 10 volts
common mode.
NOTE: Continuous input signals beyond the common mode range can result in
abnormal conversions without causing alarms.
Crosstalk: High-speed inputs on the Base Converter module may show some interaction
between adjacent channels. This is typically .04% of the difference between the
affected input and the adjacent channel input levels. The effect can be
minimized by arranging inputs with similar levels on adjacent channels. There
is no measurable interaction between Expander input channels.
Conversion Rate: Base Converter inputs updated sequentially about every 2.4 ms to 2.8 ms (maxi-
mum) for all 8 channels.
One Expander input updated during each scan of the Base Converter inputs.
Time between Expander updates = 44.8 x N ms (N = number of Expander
modulespresent).
57-24 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 25

August 1997
Table 5. Analog Input Specifications (continued) [
Response Time: Each input has a low pass filter with a 100 radian/second (0.01 second) cutoff.
A digital filter on the Base Converter input channels adds a second pole at 450
radians/second. A sample and hold maintains full resolution.
Settling times, to the specified accuracies, for a zero to full scale step input are as
follows:
5.0% 30 milliseconds
Input Protection: Inputs isolated from VME backplane - but not between input channels. They
are, however, protected from overvoltage to the levels listed below.
Impulse: Inputs normally not affected by common mode damped ringwave of up to
1000 volts peak. Common or transverse mode peaks up to 2500 volts cause no
damage, but may cause occasional bad data if they occur coincidentally with
conversion of the affected channel.
Electrostatic Discharge: Inputs survive up to 15KV ESD.
ContinuousOvervoltage: Inputs survive common mode or normal mode 120 VAC or 125 VDC fault for at
least 1 minute. Longer times may damage input current limiting resistor.
Damage limited to only the affected input.
Power Requirements:
RackBackplane +5 volts at 0.8A (4 watts) maximum for Base Converter
+5 volts at 0.4A (2 watts) for each Expander module
Field Side No power required for the module; however, current for 4 to 20 mA inputs
must be user supplied.
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance
to more stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards.

Analog Input Base Converter Module IC697ALG230
Analog Input Expander Modules
Current, 4 to 20 mA IC697ALG440
Voltage, –10 to +10 Volts IC697ALG441
t
GFK-0600F
1
Analog Modules
58
IC697ALG320
GFK-0388G High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module (IC697ALG320)
datasheet GFK-0388G
Features a44034
D High Level Analog voltage and current outputs on

one module
D Output module has four outputs individually configur- OK OK
able for voltage or current

D Provides unipolar or bipolar Analog voltage outputs
up to Ç 10 volts full scale
D Provides 0 to 22.5 milliamp current loop signals OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ANALOG (V&I)
ANALOG (V&I)
D Individual user scaling on each output channel HIGH LEVEL
+ 2
1
I
D Fast update rate CHANNEL 1

1I
4
3
1V
D No jumpers or DIP switches for user to configure GND 6

5
D
7 GND
Calibrated at factory with factory calibration data N.C. 8
9
stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory 10 I
+
2I 11
Easy configuration using the configuration function of 12 2V
the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming software CHANNEL 2 13
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over

GND 14
15 GND
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Pro- N.C. 16
17
gramming Software configuration function is installed + 18 I
on the programming device. The programming de- 3I 19
vice can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Per-

20 3V
21
GND
sonal Computer. CHANNEL 3
22
23 GND
N.C. 24
25
Functions +
4I
26
27
I
28 4V
The high level Analog Output system for the Pro- 29
grammable Logic Controller (PLC) accepts digital data GND 30

31 GND
from the CPU or other controllers accessing the PLC CHANNEL 4
N.C. 32
33
backplane. This output data is converted by a Digital V 34
N.C.
to Analog (D/A) converter to analog outputs of up to USER 35 N.C.

COM 36
10 volts full scale, or 0 to 22.5 milliamp current loop 37 COM
signals. COM 38
39 GND
The basic converter is 16 bits resolution (1 part in GND 40
65536) with 14-bit monotonicity. Outputs are isolated SLOT

MODULE IC697ALG320
LABEL 44A726758–020R02
from the backplane and are protected against tran-
sient and steady-state overvoltage conditions.
Analog outputs use %AQ references in the PLC. A
maximum of 8K words of %AQ memory is available
in the PLC. Each output channel uses one word (16 Figure 1. High Level Analog Output Module
bits) of %AQ memory.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Analog Modules
August 1997
System Operation
A block diagram of the IC697ALG320 High Level Ana-
log Output module and an example of user field wir-
ing connections to the module are shown below.
a43970
Î Î
10V
VLOAD
Î
VOUT
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
ÎÎ
VRET
CH 1
Î
GND JUMPER FOR
OUTPUT
ÎÎÎ
REF
4–20MA
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
D V LOAD
PLC OPTO– OUT
BACKPLANE ISOLATION A
RET
GND
Î VC
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
VOUT
VRET
Î
ÎÎÎ
CH 2
GND
REF
V OUT
RET
GND
USER
POWER SUPPLY
PWR +
PWR
VCM
.001 10K
GND
MODULE USER
GROUND GROUND
Figure 2. Block Diagram and User Wiring Information for IC697ALG320
Connections for both voltage and current loads are 3. Power for the voltage output is derived from the
shown in the above illustration. Note the following PLC backplane. Power for the 4 to 20 mA current
regarding the illustration: output must be supplied by the user. A single con-
1. Each output may be configured for either voltage nection (PSPOS and PSNEG) serves all four channels.
or current - not both.
2. If used as a current output you must jumper VOUT
to IREF.
58-2 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 3
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module GFK-0388G

August 1997
Channel-to-Channel Compliance User Wiring Connections

While it is expected that output loads will be floating
Figure 4 shows the wiring assignments for the screw
or tied to the same potential (normally ground), the
terminals on the terminal board on the Analog Out-
module is designed to allow up to 0.5 VDC com-
put module. In addition to the information in this
pliance voltage (labeled VC in the previous illustra-
data sheet, circuit wiring diagrams are printed on the
tion) difference between outputs and still operate
inside surface of the label inserted in the module’s
within specifications. This prevents ground loop cur-
hinged door.
rents or errors from occurring due to small differences
in ground potential at different locations. Note that in OUTPUT a43973
addition to this offset, outputs will operate properly in ANALOG ( V & )
the presence of a large amount of high frequency 1 I REF
noise (refer to specifications). IOUT + 2
1I 3 V OUT
+
As shown in the previous illustration. the output cir- I RET 4 1V
cuitry is isolated from the PLC backplane. This allows 5 VRET
the module to operate within specifications with a GND GND 6
common mode voltage of up to Ç 60V from ground 7 GND GND
(shown as VCM in the illustration). It must be ob- N.C. 8
9 I REF
served, however that the entire output section of the
I OUT + 10
module (all four channels) operates at a singleoffset 11 V OUT
2I +
voltage from ground potential. Common mode volt- I RET 12 2V
age between outputs must be within the specifications 13 V RET
stated in the previous paragraph. GND GND 14
15 GND GND
N.C. 16
User Power for Current Loops 17 I REF
I OUT + 18
This module will accommodate a wide range of load 3I 19 + VOUT
impedance; up to 800 ohms. The range of allowable I RET 20 3V
power supply voltage for a given load impedance is 21 V RET
shown in Figure 3. For example, a 24V Ç 20% supply GND GND 22

23
(19.2 to 28.8 volts) will provide sufficient power with GND GND
N.C. 24
loads from 200 to 550 ohms. I REF
25
I OUT + 26
4I 27 VOUT
V (USER POWER a43972 I RET 28 4V

SUPPLY) 29 V RET
30
MAX
28.8 GND GND 30
28 31 GND GND
26 N.C. 32
33 N.C.
24
PWR 34
22 V
USER 35 N.C.
20
19.2 PWR COM 36
18 37 COM PWR
MIN
16 PWR COM 38
14 39 GND GND
GND GND 40
12
10 R MODULE IC697ALG320
L
200 400 600 800
Figure 4. Field Wiring Connections to Module’s
Figure 3. User Power vs. Load Impedance I/O Terminal Board
t
GFK-0600F
4 Analog Modules
August 1997
Connections to User Devices shields. This ground connection is made directly to

the rack, resulting in superior rejection of noise
Connections to the Analog Output module from user caused by any shield drain currents. Actual selection
devices are made to screw terminals on a removable of ground location may be influenced by system pow-
40-terminal connector block mounted on the front of er and ground considerations. However, best opera-
the module. All field connections to the outputs tion will be obtained when system ground is physical-
should be wired to the I/O terminal board using a ly close to the rack containing the analog circuits.
good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation Normally, the shield is grounded at only one end (see
cable. Separate connections are provided on the ter- Figure 5).
minal board for both current outputs and voltage out- For additional system grounding information refer to the
puts for each channel. Actual terminals used are de- discussion on system grounding in chapter 3 of the Pro-
termined by the configuration that has been selected grammable Controller Installation Manual.
for each individual channel.
The module provides electrical isolation of externally
Ground connections for each channel, labeled GND, generated noise between the output field wiring and
on the terminal board are provided for connecting the backplane through use of optical isolation.
VOLTAGE: CURRENT: a43974
Î Î Î Î
REF
V OUT OUT
+ USER V OUT USER
V DEVICE DEVICE
Î Î
V RET RET
GND
Î Î
SHIELD CONNECTED
AT MODULE END ONLY
V RET
GND
NC
Î Î
SHIELD CONNECTED
AT MODULE END ONLY
Figure 5. Cable Connections to Field Devices
58-4 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 5

August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures board on the Analog Output module. Module features
referenced in the following procedures which are com-
The following procedures are recommended when mon to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the fol-
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal lowing figure.
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CORD
CORD
CORD TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
STRAP
ÎÎ
TIE
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
Figure 6. I/O Module Common Features

board securely in place. The Detachable field wir- (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maxi-
ing terminal board can now be removed from the mum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43 mm) not
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clock- be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two
wise until it is fully disengaged. wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the both wires are the same size.
t
GFK-0600F
6 Analog Modules
August 1997
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR

58-6 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 7

August 1997
Module/R ack Configuration configuring the slot to accept only identical module
types.
A high level analog output system for the program- If it is necessary to change the module location in the
mable controller can consist of multiple Analog Out- rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
put modules providing up to a maximum of 252 out- of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it up-
put channels. ward to unhook the latch while pushing it off the rail.
A maximum of seven Analog Output modules can be It may then be reinserted into the rack at the desired
installed in a CPU rack, and a maximum of eight Ana- location.
log Output modules can be installed in an expansion Note that in an IC697CHS PLC rack only the power
rack. supply can be placed in the leftmost slot in the rack, and
Channel numbers for each Analog Output module in slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always con-
a system are assigned by the system. tain a CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module or Remote I/O Scanner (in expansion racks).
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
MAIN RACK a43975
P C B
* * * * * * * Configurable Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
S P T
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U M
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î You can configure certain functions through the

MS-DOS or Windows software configurator func-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î tion using the programming computer. These func-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ tions include output ranges, user scaling, and fault

reporting. Each of these functions and their defini-
tions are listed in Table 1.
7 EXPANSION
* MODULES
ANALOG OUTPUT
CAN BE
RACKS INSTALLED IN ANY
(MAXIMUM) OF THESE SLOTS Module Configuration Data
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION RACK After the CPU has been updated, the Analog Output
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
* ÎÎ
* *ÎÎ
*ÎÎ
*ÎÎ
*ÎÎ
*Î
module is ready for configuration data. The CPU pro-
vides the following module configuration data
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ* Î
B
R
D The output circuit type (voltage or current) for
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
M
each output channel
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ D CPU fault reporting interrupt, whether enabled

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
or disabled on a per channel
D The default value for outputs and whether out-
puts are enabled or disabled on system failure or
Figure 8. Example of Analog Output Module Installation CPU command
Each of the output channel values is checked for over-
Module Mechanical Keying range, underrange, and open wire; open wire only if
configured for current range.
Each module includes a mechanical key that prevents
shaped area on the board below the connector. Note
When the module is first installed, the key latches For more detailed information on using the
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is configuration function, refer to the Program-
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, thereby ming Software User’s Manual.
t
GFK-0600F
8 Analog Modules
August 1997
Table 1. Configurable features for IC697ALG320

–10V, +10V
0V, +10V
Voltage/Current Channel –5V, +5V –10V, +10V
0V, +5V
4, 20 mA
Report Faults Channel Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Scaling Points Channel
User Value Ç 32767 µA +20000, –4000 µA
mV or mA Ç 10000 mV +10000 mV, –10000 mV
Output Default Channel Hold/Off Off
Default Value Channel Ç 32767 0
Output Ranges can be configured to Hold Last State or default to a

configured Default Value. If configured to Hold Last
For each output circuit, the range selected during con- State, the channel will maintain the last output value
figuration should match the signal. The 4 to 20 mil- received from the CPU until communications resume.
liamp range can be used for current output devices. If Output Default is configured to OFF, the configured
For current loop operation, the terminal board jumper Default Value is applied.
for each applicable channel must be installed (refer to
Note that the data available to the outputs will be dif-
Figure 4, Field Wiring Connections to I/O Terminal
ferent according to where the system is in relation to
Board).
time (starting at power-up). This time vs. output data
relationship is shown below (Figure 9).
Output Default
Output Default mode is activated when the CPU out- Default Value
put data is not being received, such as during power- If the Output Default is set to OFF, this value, pro-
up, when the CPU is stopped, or CPU communica- grammed in Engineering Units, is applied to the out-
tions have been lost. When this occurs, each channel put until communications are restored.
CONDITION SYSTEM FAILURE a43977

CONFIGURATION CPU OR
POWER RECEIVED FROM CPU RUNNING PLC SOFTWARE
(CPU STOPPED) (I/O SCAN) RESET CPU
UP
STOP
OUTPUTS OUTPUTS AT OUTPUTS AT HOLD OUTPUTS AT

AT DEFAULT VALUE LAST SCAN LAST STATE LAST SCAN
0 (EVEN WITH HOLD VALUE OR VALUE
LAST STATE ACTIVE) DEFAULT
(USER CONFIG)
STATE
Figure 9. Time vs. Output Data Relationship
58-8 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 9

August 1997
User Scaling software configurator function. Scaling is set by en-

tering the desired voltage or current value and the
corresponding engineering units for each of two
User scaling is definable on a per circuit basis on the points. Engineering units are a 16-bit signed value
Analog Output module. The scaling feature allows (–32767 to +32767). When configuring scale factors,
the user to convert the value in engineering units into 0 mV or 0 mA must correspond to an engineering unit
millivolts or milliamps as required by the output de- number between +32767 and –32767.
vice being controlled. Engineering units provide mea-
surement that relates to the application, such as, pres-
sure (psi), speed (feet per second), or temperature
(degrees F, C, or K). The default configuration for Note
channels configured for voltage, as shown in Figure
Scaling to engineering units does not in-
10, provides values of –32000 to +32000 correspond-
crease the resolution of the value, but does
ing to a voltage output range of –10 to +10 volts. If a
transform it into more convenient units.
channel is configured for current, default scaling is 0
Scaling can be used to compensate for dif-
to 32000 for a current range of 4 to 20 mA (see Figure
ferences between actual and theoretical
11).
values due to inaccuracies encountered in
Scaling can be configured by the user on a per chan- field devices.
nel basis with the MS-DOS or Windows programming
OUTPUT POINT a44136

VOLTAGE 32000, 10000
10000MV
32000
5000MV POINT
(16000,5000)
30000 10000 USER

SCALING
0 10000 30000
32000
5000MV
10000MV
POINT
32000, 10000
Figure 10. User Scaling for Voltage Output

t
GFK-0600F
10 Analog Modules
August 1997
OUTPUT POINT 1 a44137

CURRENT 32000, 20000
20000 µ A
16000 µ A (16000, 12000)
12000 µ A
8000 µ A
POINT 2
4000 µ A
(0, 4000)
30000 10000 USER
SCALING
0 10000 30000
4000 µ A
8000
8000 µ A
12000 µ A
16000 µ A
20000 µ A
Figure 11. User Scaling for Current Output
Using Data Commands to Modify memory before it is executed. It should then be

executed by a by a one-shot to prevent sending the
Configuration data to the module multiple times. Successive
COMMREQs must be separated by at least 1 millisec-
The Data Command provides a mechanism that al- ond to guarantee correct processing.
lows you to modify some of the diagnostic configura-
A description of the COMMREQ function and its
tion parameters of the Analog Output Module from
command block data follows, along with a ladder ex-
ladder logic. The Data Command uses the COMM-
ample which uses registers %R0001 to %R0008 for the
REQ function block and a small block of parameters
COMMREQ command block. Refer to the applicable
to update certain configuration parameters on the fly.
Programmable Controller Reference Manual for additional
specific information on COMMREQs.
Sending Data Commands Using the
COMMREQ Function COMMREQ Function Block Description
The PLC ladder program sends a Data Command us- The Communications Request (COMMREQ) function
ing the COMMREQ (Communication Request) func- is a conditionally executed function that
tion. The COMMREQ requires that all its command communicates a particular request, through the
data be placed in the correct order in the CPU ladder logic program, to the Analog module.
58-10 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 11

August 1997
Communications Request starting location of the COMMREQ command block.

The SYSID input is used to indicate which rack and
Function Block Format slot to send the message to (physical location of Ana-
log module). The last input (TASK) is set to the chan-
The ladder logic representation of the COMMREQ
nel number to be configured.
function block is as follows:
In the above example, channel 1 of rack 1, slot 7 will
%Q0200 +——————+
—] [———(enable)+ COMM_+—(ok)—
be configured and the COMMREQ command block
| REQ | %Q0201 starts at Register 0001. Power is always passed to the
%R0001——+IN FT+——————————————( )—— ok output. The fault output (FT) is enabled if the
| | COMMREQ fails.
CONST ——+ SYSID|
0107 | |
| |
CONST ——+ TASK | Command Block
00001 | |
+——————+ The command block for Data Commands is made up
of eight words (all values in hexadecimal unless
The Communications Request function block has four otherwise indicated). Use the block move command
inputs and two outputs. The first input is an enable to move these values to the Register tables (refer to
input. Generally a one-shot coil is used to enable the the applicable Programmable Controller Reference
COMMREQ function. This prevents multiple mes- Manual, for information on using the block move
sages from being sent. The second input (IN) is the function).
Table 2. Command Block for Data Commands
Location Data Description

%R0001 0002 Length of data is two words
%R0002 0000 Not used (Always zero)
Analog Output Data Command Parameters both of the parameters for the specified channel using
the new data.
The Data Command can be used to change the config-
uration of Fault Reporting and Output Default values Bits in the configuration word are numbered with bit
for each channel. Each Data Command reconfigures 1 being the least significant bit.
Table 3. Analog Output Data Command Parameters
Location Description Data
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Command Word 0
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁConfiguration Word Bit 5: 0 - Default Outputs
1 - Hold Last State
Bit 8: 0 - Fault Report Enabled
1 - Fault Report Disabled
Command Word 1 Output Default Value Range Ç 32767 Engineering Units
t
GFK-0600F
12 Analog Modules
August 1997
Example - Sending Data Commands porting, and set the high and low alarm thresholds to
+20000 and –20000, respectively.
An example of ladder logic for sending a data com-
mand to an Analog Output module using COMM- If the COMMREQ command data is formatted incor-
REQ function blocks is shown below. In this example, rectly, or has an invalid command, the Analog Output
the COMMREQ command block is located in registers module will set the Error Status %I bit, and return an
%R0001 through %R0008. The command to send the error code in Module Status Code %AQ word.
data is initiated by the conditional input %I0289
which sets output %Q0200 for one sweep. The Ana- Note that the comments within /* . . . . */ have been in-
log Output module is located in Rack 1, slot 7 (first cluded for information purposes only. They are not gener-
expansion rack). This command will disable fault re- ated by the programming software.
|
|%I0289 %Q0200
+–—] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%I0290 %Q0201
+——] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+— /* Move Command block into Registers 1—7 */
| | WORD|
| | |
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0001 /* Command block data starts at %R0001 */
| 0002 | | /* Command data length is 2 words */
| | | /*
| CONST —+IN2 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 | | /* Not used (always 0000) */
| | |
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 0080 +—————+ /* First word (Command Word) */
| /* In this case, disable fault reporting */
| /* and default outputs */
58-12 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 13

August 1997
|
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+— /* Move data into registers 8 through 14 */
| |WORD |
| | |
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0008
| 4E20 | | /* Register 8 sets the Output Default Value */
| | | /* to 20000 (Hexadecimal 4E20) */
| CONST —+IN2 |
| 0000 | | /* Remaining registers are not used */
| | |
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 | |
| | |
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 0000 +—————+
|
|
|
|
|
| /* Now call the COMMREQ to send the message */
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [————————+COMM_+
| | REQ | /* COMMREQ will set output %T0051 if failure */
| | | /* detected when sending message. %T0051 */
| %R0001 —+IN FT+———————————————————————————————————————————( )——
| | | /* Command block data starts in R0001 */
| | |
| CONST —+SYSID| /* Analog Output Module is in rack 1, slot 7 */
| 0107 | |
| | |
| CONST —+TASK | /* Task is set to the channel to be */
| 00000001 +—————+ /* configured, in this case channel 1 */
|
|
t
GFK-0600F
14 Analog Modules
August 1997
Analog Output Diagnostics rent capability of the Analog to Digital converter

(approximately10 volts or 22.5 mA, respectively).
Diagnostic capabilities for the analog high level out- When this occurs, the actual output is clamped at 10.2
put module include: volts if configured for voltage operation or 22.5 mA if
configured for current mode operation. An Over-
D LED on modules for system status indication range fault is reported to the CPU I/O fault table if
D Monitoring the health of the module Fault Reporting is enabled in the module configura-
tion, and the corresponding Fault Contact is ener-
D Detection of configuration errors gized if Point Faults are enabled in the CPU configura-
D Overrange detection tion.
D Underrange detection
Underrange
D Open wire detection
Output Underrange occurs when the output is driven
Module LED beyond the minimum actual voltage or current capa-
bility of the Analog to Digital converter (approximate-
There is one LED on the Analog Output module. This ly –10 volts or 0 mA, respectively). When this occurs,
LED, labeled BOARD OK flashes when the module has the actual output is clamped at –10.2 volts if config-
powered-up, passed its diagnostic tests, and has configured for voltage mode operation, or 0 mA if config-
uration data for the CPU. The Board OK LED is turned ured for current mode operation. An Underrange
on if the configurator data from the CPU is OK. It is fault is reported to the CPU I/O Fault Table if Fault
turned off if there is a configuration error, and a fault is Reporting is enabled in the module configuration, and
logged in the CPU I/O Fault Table. the corresponding Fault Contact is energized if Point
Faults are enabled in the CPU configuration.
I/O Fault Reporting
The IC697 Analog Output Modules support fault Open Wire
detection which is used to activate fault (–[FAULT]–/
–[NOFL T]–) ladder contacts in the PLC. In addition,
This diagnostic occurs when a channel is configured
a corresponding fault message is logged in the PLC
for current mode (4–20 mA) operation and the out-
I/OFault Table, unless fault reporting has been dis-
put current drops below 1.5 mA. When this occurs, an
abled in the channel configuration.
Open Wire fault is reported to the CPU I/O Fault Table
If fault reporting is enabled in the channel configura- if Fault Reporting is enabled in the module configura-
tion, each fault condition is reported once and is not tion, and the corresponding Fault Contact is ener-
reported again until the fault condition is removed gized if Point Faults are enabled in the CPU configura-
and occurs again. tion.
Fault Contacts
Any combination of the following faults on a channel
will cause the corresponding fault contact to be ener- Configuration Errors
gized. The IC697 CPU supports one –[FAULT]– and
–[NOFL T]– contact pair per output channel. Use of
The following configuration mismatch errors are detected
fault contacts requires that Point Faults be enabled in
the CPU, as described in the applicable Programmable by the Analog Output module and reported to the CPU.
Controller Reference Manual.
D User scaling error (where user scaling offset calcula-
Overrange tion exceeds 16-bit signed data)
Output Overrange occurs when the output is driven D Calibration EEPROM failure (output calibration data
beyond the maximum actual output voltage or cur- is invalid)
58-14 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 15

August 1997
User Scaling Error tween –32767 and +32767. If this condition is not
This error occurs when the user’s two scaling points met the result is a configuration user scaling error, and
connected on a plot of engineering units versus mV or a fault is reported to the CPU. The module LED is
mA do not cross the engineering unit’s axis between turned off and the module halts after sending the
–32767 and +32767. In other words, 0 mV or 0 mA message to the CPU. The valid limits for user scaling
must correspond to an engineering units number be- are shown in the following figure.
a43983
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE OR CURRENT
32768 32767
NOT
OK
OK
CROSSES
ABSCISSA BETWEEN
32768 AND 32767
Figure 12. Valid Limits for User Scaling
Calibration EEPROM Failure

During the manufacturing process each channel of
the Analog Output module is calibrated for accuracy.
If the calibration data becomes corrupted, a Calibration
EEPROM fault is reported to the CPU. The module
LED is turned OFF and the module halts after send-
ing the message to the CPU. This failure is not user
serviceable. If it should occur, contact the PLC Hot-
line for help at 1 800 GE FANUC (1 800 433 2682), or
International direct dial 804 978 6036.
t
GFK-0600F
16 Analog Modules
August 1997
Table 4. Analog Output Specifications [
Output Ranges: Voltage: –10 volts to +10 volts (default)

Current: 0.0 mA to 22.5 mA (4 to 20 mA default)
Resolution: 16 bit with 14 bit monotonicity
312.5 microvolts per LSB step on voltage
0.5 microamps per LSB step on 4 to 20 mA
No missing codes over 16 bits on voltage.
No missing codes over 15 bits on current.
NOTE: User scaling may introduce degraded granularity in output
voltage depending upon the scaling factors used.
Accuracy:
Calibration Voltage: Factory set at full scale = 10 volts Ç2.5millivolts.
Current: Factory set at 4.0 mA Ç5 µA and 20 mA Ç 5 µA.
Full Scale, with 24.0 VDC field side voltage.
Field calibration not possible Calibrated at factory with calibration data stored in EEPROM
memory.
MaximumErrors at 25_C (77_F)
Linearity Ç 0.02% of full scale over entire negative to positive range.
TemperatureCoefficient Voltage: Ç 25 PPM per _C typical

Current: Ç 50 PPM per _C typical
OutputLoading:
Voltage: R: minimum = 2000 ohms
C: maximum = 1000 picofarads
Current ]: R: up to 800 ohms
C: maximum = 1.0 microfarad
L: maximum = 250 millihenrys
] The current output should be monitored for stability with step changes
using inductive loads. There will be combinations of R, L, and C that will
not be stable and will require additional capacitance on the current output
terminals to maintain output stability with inductive loads (as shown in the
following figure).
a43976
Î
IL
Î
+ CL
USER
DEVICE
CABLE
RL
Short Circuit: Voltage and current outputs will handle a continuous short circuit
without harm and will return to the proper output (output when
short occurred) when the short is removed.
ConversionRate: All outputs are updated sequentially approximatelyevery
2.0 milliseconds (maximum) for all 4 channels.
58-16 t
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules 17

August 1997
Table 4. Analog Output Specifications (continued) [
Response Time:
Settling times, to the specified accura-
cies, for a zero to full scale step output
at maximum rated load capacities are:
Voltage: 5.0% 0.5 milliseconds
0.1% 2.0 milliseconds
Current: 5.0% 1.0 milliseconds

0.1% 5.0 milliseconds
Output Protection: Outputs isolated from VME backplane - but not between output
channels. They are designed to have a Ç 0.5 VDC compliance
circuit-to-circuit and operate within specifications. The outputs are
protected from overvoltage to the levels listed below.
Impulse: Outputs normally are not affected by common mode damped ring-
wave of up to 1000 volts peak. Common or transverse mode peaks
up to 2500 volts cause no damage, but may cause occasional bad
data if they occur coincident with conversion of the affected
channel. The noise level is a direct function of the grade of cable
used for connections.
Power Requirements:
RackBackplane +5 VDC at 1.66A (8.3 watts) maximum
Field Side 150 mA of DC user power must be supplied by the user for the cur-
rent outputs. The recommended operating voltage is 24 VDC. A
range from 10 VDC to 30 VDC (user load impedance dependent,
see Figure 3) can be used with some loss in output accuracy.
Field side power to the Analog Output module should be
connected to the module with a good quality shielded cable in
environments where noise could be coupled into the field side
power wiring.
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring
compliance to more stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to
InstallationRequirements for Conformance to Standards.

High Level Analog Output Module IC697ALG320
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option

please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
GFK-0600F
1
Special Applications Modules
59
IC697HSC700
GFK-1057D High Speed Counter
August 1997
High Speed Counter (IC697HSC700)
datasheet GFK-1057D
Features a45425
D Single slot module

D Five selectable counter types
Î
D 12 single-ended or differential inputs
OK
Î OK
Î
O1 O1
D TTL, Non-TTL and Magnetic Pickup input O2 O2
Î
O3 O3
thresholds O4 O4
D Four positive logic (source) outputs with LED

Î
Î
HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED COUNTER
indicators COUNTER 5/12/24 VDC
Î
D External oscillator 5/12/24 VDC
2
1
I1
Î
D Built-in +5 VDC output I1 I2
4
3
D
Î
5
Software configuration I2
6 I3
D
Î
7
Internal module diagnostics I3
I4
8 SHIELD
D
Î
9
Module OK and Output State LEDs I4
INCOM
10
D
Î
11
Removable terminal strip for field wiring 12 I5
I5
connections
Î
I6 13
14
Configuration is done using the configuration function
Î
I6 15
of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming software

16 I7
Î
I7 I8 17
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ether- 18

I9
SHIELD
Î
INCOM
net TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming I8 20
21
Î
Software configuration function is installed on the pro- I9 22 I9
gramming device. The programming device can be an I10 23
Î
I10
IBMr XT, AT, PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
24
25
Î
I11 26 I11
I12 27
Î
Functions I12
28
29
SHIELD
Î
INCOM
30
OSC
The IC697 High Speed Counter (HSC) module, catalog O1 31
Î
5V
32 SHIELD
number IC697HSC700, directly processes rapid pulse O2 33
Î
UNUSED
34
signals up to 200 KHz (800 KHz for Type E in A Quad B V L+ 35 V
O3
Î
mode). The module is able to sense inputs, process 36 O1
Î
37 O2
input count data, and control its outputs without
Î
O4 38 O3
Î
communicating with the PLC CPU. The HSC has a 01–04 1.0A @ 12/24VDC OUTCOM 40
39 O4
simple and user-friendly PLC interface that makes it 01–04 0.02A @ 5 VDC
4.0A MODULE MODULE IC697HSC700
extremely useful in industrial applications such as: LABEL 44A726758–030R01
h Turbine flowmeter
h Meter proving
h Velocity measurement
h Material handling
h Motion control
h Process control
t
GFK-0600F
2 Special Applications Modules
August 1997
Product Compatibility Requirements Two sets of bi-directional counter inputs can be

connected differentially. Each pair of inputs can be
Product Version configured for Up/Down, Pulse/Direction or A Quad B
mode. The Type C configuration has three Strobe
IC697 CPU 5.50 or later (CPU models 781, 782,
914, 924) registers with Strobe inputs and two Preload values
with Preload inputs.
MS-DOS Program- 5.0x or later
ming Software
Windows Program- 1.0 or later
Type D
ming Software In Type D configuration, the HSC has four bi-directional
32-bit counters that can be configured to count in
High Speed Counter Types Up/Down, Pulse/Direction, A Quad B x1, A Quad B x2, or
A Quad B x4 mode. Each counter has a marker input
The High Speed Counter can be configured as one of
which can be used to set its accumulator value to the
five types: A, B, C, D, or E. All counters have 12 inputs,
counter’s Home Position value. When configured in A
four preset outputs, and optional PLC ladder interrupt
Quad B mode, the High Speed Counter detects and
capability.
reports quadrature errors.
Type A
Type E
In Type A configuration, the HSC has four identical and
independently programmable unidirectional 16-bit The Type E counter contains two identical 16-bit
counters, which can be configured for up or down counters with Strobe and Preload inputs capable of
operation. Each counter has three inputs: Preload, Count counting Up/Down or A Quad B signals. Each has a
Pulse and Strobe. Count Disable and a Strobe Disable input. The Type E
counter is designed primarily as a Down counter, but
Type B can handle up counts to account for A Quad B jitter.
When a counter counts down to zero, it turns on a
In Type B configuration, the HSC has two identical and dedicated preset output with a 5µs response.
programmable bi-directional 32-bit counters. Each
counter can be independently configured to operate in
Up/Down, Pulse/Direction or A Quad B mode. Both
Type A, B, C, and D
counters have two independent Strobe inputs and Strobe Operating Features
registers. Each counter has a single Preload input to set
the accumulator and a Disable input to suspend counting. Operating features of the High Speed Counter for Types
A, B, C, and D are described below. Features that have
selectable parameters are configured using the MS-DOS
This counter type can be configured to link strobes. In or Windows programming software configurator
this mode, a count on the Counter 2 inputs will strobe function that has been installed on your programming
both Counter 1 and Counter 2 Accumulator values into computer. For detailed information about selectable
their respective Strobe 1 registers. This feature can be features, refer to the High Speed Counter User’s Manual,
used to accurately measure a pulse rate against a GFK-1062.
reference pulse or to compare two different pulse rates.
Type C Count Rate

Maximum count rates are 200 KHz with the high
In Type C configuration, the HSC has one differential frequency filter and 30 Hz with the low-frequency filter.
bi-directional 32-bit counter with a Disable input to
suspend counting. It also provides a Home cycle to Selectable Input Filters
initialize the accumulator to a pre-defined Home
Position. A Home Switch input and a Marker input are The Count, Count Disable, and Preload inputs for
used to indicate the Home Position to each counter each counter can be configured for a high frequency
input. The configured Home value specifies the filter (2.5 microseconds) or a low-frequency filter
accumulator value at the Home Position. (12.5 milliseconds).
59-2 t
GFK-0600F
Special Applications Modules 3
High Speed Counter GFK-1057D

August 1997
Continuous or Single-Shot counting On and Off Preset values. There are four On/Off Preset
outputs which can be independently assigned to any
Each counter can be configured to operate in either counter. An assigned output’s state indicates when the
continuous or single-shot mode. counter Accumulator is between the defined On and
Off points. Output polarity can be configured to On
Continuous Counter Mode: If either the upper or lower only between points or Off only between points by the
count limit is exceeded the counter wraps around to the relative location of the On/Off Presets.
other limit and continues.
Single-shot Counter Mode: The counter counts to either
the upper or lower limit and stops. When the counter Selectable Preset Interrupts
is at the limit, counts in the opposite direction back it off
from the limit. Each Preset output can generate PLC interrupts from
On and/or Off transitions. Interrupts can be enabled for
either or both transitions of each Preset output.
Counter Accumulator
The Accumulator contains the current count value of Oscillator
each counter. The CPU can read the accumulator value
or set it from the application program. The module provides an external oscillator output that
can be wired as a count input to any counter and used
as a timing reference for measurement. The 5V square
Counts per Timebase Register wave oscillator output can be configured to operate at
frequencies from 15 Hz to 1 MHz. This output has a
Each counter stores the number of counts that have CMOS buffer with a 47 ohm output impedance.
occurred in a specified period of time. A timebase value
from 1 ms to 65535 ms can be configured.
Data Commands
Strobe Register The PLC can send data commands to the HSC through
%AQ data or with a COMMREQ. These commands
Type A, B and C counters have one or more Strobe
allow the user to dynamically modify counter operation
registers that capture the current Accumulator value
and configuration parameters. Configuration
when a Strobe input transitions. The Strobe inputs are
parameters that can be dynamically modified include:
edge-triggered and can be configured for positive-edge
accumulator value, counter limits, Preload values, On
or negative-edge response. The Strobe registers can be
and Off Preset values and Home Position.
configured to update at any Strobe trigger or only on
the first strobe trigger
Velocity Command
Preloads A %AQ or COMMREQ Data Command can be used to
Counters A, B and C have one or more Preload inputs. generate an internal velocity of up to 100,000 counts per
The Preload inputs set the accumulator to a configured second. The counter accumulator will increment or
Preload value. %Q bits sent from the PLC can also be decrement at the commanded velocity. Counts
used to generate Preload and set the accumulator to the generated by the user count inputs will be accumulated
configured Preload value. in addition to the Velocity Command counts.
Selectable On/Off Output Presets Accumulator Adjust

Counter output signals can be configured to be On or A data command can be used to adjust the accumulator
Off when the count Accumulator reaches configured value from –128 to +127 counts at any time.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Type E Operating Features Counter Outputs

Operating features of the High Speed Counter for Type The Type E counter supports two types of output
E are described below. presets, Fast Response and Standard.
Fast Response: There is one dedicated fast response
output for each accumulator. The fast response output
Count Rate and Input Filters turns on within 15µs of the associated counter
decrementing to zero, with less than 2µs variation. In
The maximum count rate with the low-frequency filter
addition, two output modes are supported for the fast
(12.5 milliseconds) is 30 Hz; with the high-frequency
response outputs.
filter (2.5µs), the maximums are 200 KHz inUp/Down
mode and 800 kHz in A Quad B mode. The Count, Pulse Output Mode: The output turns on when the
Count Disable, and Preload inputs for each counter can Accumulator counts down to zero and stays on for a
use either filter, but the Strobe and Strobe Disable inputs configured duration, from 1 to 1000 milliseconds.
use only the high-frequency filter.
Latched Output Mode: (Single Shot mode only) The
output turns on when the Accumulator counts down to
zero and stays on until a Preload occurs.
Continuous or Single-Shot Counting
Standard Output Presets: Outputs 3 and 4 can be
Each counter can be configured to operate in either assigned to either counter and configured to be On or
continuous or single-shot mode. Off when the count Accumulator reaches configured
Continuous Counter Mode: When the counter On and Off values. An assigned output’s state indicates
decrements to zero, it turns on the fast response output when the counter Accumulator is between the defined
and automatically preloads itself to the preload value On and Off points.
and continues counting.
Single-shot Counter Mode: When the counter counts to Output Interrupts
zero, it turns on the fast response output and ignores
Interrupts can be enabled or disabled for Off to On
count pulses until a preload occurs.
transitions of the fast response outputs. Interrupts can
be enabled or disabled for either transition of the
Preloads standard preset outputs.
A rising edge on the Preload input, a rising edge on the

%Q Preload Accumulator bit, or the counter
Oscillator
decrementing to zero in Continuous mode will set the The module provides an external oscillator output that
accumulator to a configured Preload value. Preloads can be wired as a count input to any counter and used
caused by the Preload input and count decrementing to as a timing reference for measurement. The 5V square
zero will set a %I bit in the PLC to indicate a preload wave oscillator output can be configured to operate at
occurred. frequencies from 15 Hz to 1 MHz. This output has a
CMOS buffer with a 47 ohm output impedance.
Strobe Register Stack
Data Commands
Each counter has a Strobe Register stack which will
store up to four strobe values. Strobes can be configured The PLC can send data commands to the HSC through
to occur on rising, falling, or both edges of the Strobe %AQ data or with a COMMREQ. These commands
input. %I bits indicate how many strobes have allow the user to dynamically modify counter operation
occurred. A Reset Strobes %Q bit or a Preload clears the and configuration parameters. Configuration
Strobe Register stack and %I indicators. A Strobe parameters that can be dynamically modified include:
Disable input causes all Strobe input transitions to be Preload values, On and Off Preset values, and Fast
ignored. Response output duration.
59-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Location in a System between the CPU and the HSC. The following figure shows
two typical installations: (A) a High Speed Counter
A High Speed Counter module can be installed in any I/O installed in the CPU rack in a single rack installation and
slot in the CPU rack or in any I/O slot in an expansion rack (B), multiple High Speed Counter modules installed in an
in a system. For interrupts to work, there can be no empty slots expansion rack in a multiple rack system.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÉÉ
SINGLE RACK CONFIGURATION a47028
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÉÉ
A ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
P
ÎÎ
S
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
C
ÎÎ
P
UÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
H
S
C
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÉ
ÉÉÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CPU RACK EXPANSION RACK
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÉÉÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
B Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
P
Î
ÎÎ
S
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
C B
Î
P T
U MÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÉ
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
P
S
B
R
M
H H
S S
C C
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÉÉÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÉÉ
É
ÉÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÉÉ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
EXPANSION RACK CONFIGURATION
Figure 1. Example of High Speed Counter Module Installation Configurations
Installing a High Speed Counter Table 1. MODULE OK LED Status

State Description
For detailed instructions on how to install a High Speed
Counter module. refer to Installation Procedures in the When the MODULE OK LED is off, the High
Speed Counter module is not functioning. This
applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
OFF is the result of a hardware malfunction; for ex-
Also refer to the High Speed Counter User’s Manual. ample, the diagnostic checks detected a failure,
Following is a basic description of the module (refer to or the PLC CPU is not present. Corrective ac-
Figure 2 for location of hardware features). tion is required in order to get the module
functioningagain.
When the LED is on steadily, the High Speed
Counter module is functioning properly.
Status Indication ON Normally, this LED should always be on,
indicating that the diagnostic tests were
successfully completed and the programming
Five status LEDs are viewable on the module as shown in software configuration data for the module is
Figure 2. The function of each LED is as follows: correct.
The LED flashes at a 1 Hz rate when power-up
Flashing diagnostics have completed successfully and
MODULE OK LED the module is waiting for configuration. It also
flashes at a 4 Hz rate when an error
The MODULE OK LED indicates current status of the occurs. When the error is cleared, the LED will
High Speed Counter module as described in Table 1. return to being on steadily.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Output LEDs (O1 - O4) a47050
These four LEDs indicate the ON/OFF state of the

corresponding module output circuit. The output
circuits can be used to drive indicating lights, solenoids, MODULE OK OK
relays, and other such similar devices. The LEDs are O1
either ON or OFF (output activated or not activated). OUTPUT O2
CIRCUIT O3
STATUS O4
User Terminal Connector HIGH SPEED COUNTER

5/12/24 VDC
The removable terminal strip has 40 screw terminals for 1
connection to field devices to the High Speed Counter 2 I1
I2 3
inputs and outputs. Pin assignments for field wiring 4
connections are provided in the following table. For 5

6 I3
detailed information on how each signal applies to the I4 7
8
different counter types, refer to the High Speed Counter 9
SHIELD
INCOM
User’s Manual. 10
11
12 I5
Table 2. User Terminal Connector Pin Assignments DETACHABLE TERMINAL I6 13
STRIP FOR FIELD WIRING 14

15
Pin Signal Pin Signal CONNECTIONS 16 I7
Number Name Number Name I8 17
18 SHIELD
I9
1 IN1P 21 IN9P INCOM
20
21
2 IN2P 22 IN10P I9
22
I10 23
3 IN1M 23 IN9M 24
25
4 IN2M 24 IN10M I11
26
5 IN3P 25 IN11P I12 27

28 SHIELD
6 IN4P 26 IN12P INCOM
29
30
OSC
7 IN3M 27 IN11M 5V
31
32 SHIELD
8 IN4M 28 IN12M UNUSED
33
34
9 SHIELD 29 SHIELD V L+ 35 V
36 O1
10 INCOM 30 INCOM 37 O2
Î
38 O3
11 IN5P 31 OSC 39 O4
Î
OUTCOM 40
12 IN6P 32 5VP MODULE IC697HSC700
LABEL 44A726758–030R01
13 IN5M 33 SHIELD
14 IN6M 34 not used
15 IN7P 35 OUTPWR
16 IN8P 36 OUT1
17 IN7M 37 OUT2
18 IN8M 38 OUT3
19 SHIELD 39 OUT4
20 INCOM 40 OUTCOM Figure 2. High Speed Counter Module - User Features
59-6 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures Speed Counter module. Module features referenced in the
following procedures which are common to most IC697 I/O
modules are illustrated in the following figure.
ing field wiring to the detachable terminal board on the High
a43855
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎTERMINAL
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
BOARD
CORD ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ CORD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
TIE STRAP
TIE CLEAT CLEAT
ÎÎÎÎ
CLEAT
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î
CORD
ÎÎÎÎ Î
TIE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
STRAP STRAP
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW a43747
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
59-8 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Table 3. Specifications for IC697HSC700 [
General:
ModuleOperating Voltage 5 VDC (from backplane)
ModuleCurrent Drain 1A + (10 mA x number of ON outputs) + (1.6 x
encoder current)
Maximum Count Rate
Types A - D, and Type E in Up/Down mode 200 KHz
Type E in A Quad B mode 800 KHz
Output Points Powered by user supplied 5V, or 10 to 30 VDC
LEDs MODULE OK and O1 - O4 (Output circuit. status)
Input and Output Isolation
Peak (1 second) 1500 volts
SteadyStatus 30 V AC/DC
Inputs
VoltageRange
TTL 5 VDC
Non-TTL 10 to 30 VDC
Magnetic Pickup (I1 to I4 only) 400 mV
Input Thresholds (I1 to I12) TTL Non-TTL Magnetic Pickup
Von 1.4V 8.0V 400 mV
Voff 0.8V 5.0V 200 mV
Encoder Power 5 VDC, 500 mA @40°C (104°F), 300 mA @60°C

(140°F)
Input Filter Delay
IN1 to IN8 10 ms or 2 µs selectable
IN9 to IN12 2 µs
Input Impedance 6000 ohms
Input Hysteresis 250 mV typical
Input Cable Shielded cable recommended
Maximum length: 30 meters (100 feet)
Outputs
Output Type Positive Logic, optically isolated
Maximum Supply Voltage 30.0 VDC
Maximum Output Current at 60°C (140°F) 1.0 A for each output using 10 to 30 VDC supply
Output Current using 5 VDC supply 20 mA typical
Inductive Load Clamp Voltage –8.0 V typical
OFF State Leakage Current 10 µA for each output
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 3. Specifications for IC697HSC700 (continued)
Output Response Time

Type A - D, Type E Slow Response 300 µs typical
650 µs worst case
Type E Fast Response 24 Volts: On: 7 µs typical

10 µs worst case
Off: 56 µs typical
5 Volts On: 10 µs typical

15 µs worst case
Off: 63 µs typical
Output Response Variation
Slow Response 650 µs worst case
Fast Response 1 µs worst case
Output Protection 5.0 A fuse (5x20mm replaceable) common to all
outputs

High Speed Counter Module IC697HSC700
59-10 t
GFK-0600F
1
60
AD697SLP711
GFK-0734C State Logic Processor Module (SLP)
August 1997
State Logic Processor Module (SLP) (AD697SLP711)
datasheet GFK-0734C
a45121
Features
D Natural English Language Programming using ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
STATUS
ECLiPS
D Structured State Logic program architecture ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
D Advanced Diagnostics STATE LOGIC
PROCESSOR
D Simulation capabilities
ÎÎ
Î
D PID Loop control
ÎÎ
Î
D Handles complex math easily (floating point, ÎÎ
Î
square root, trig. functions)
ÎÎ
Î
D Allows any combination of Natural English State ÎÎ
Î
Logic and Ladder Logic programs in same system
ÎÎ
Î
D Configurable to operate with any IC697 PLC ÎÎ
Î
D Up to 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
D CCM2 Protocol
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
D 21 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS logic memory ÎÎ
Î
on board
Î ÎÎ
Î
D Supports optional expansion memory
D Two RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 serial ports
Î Î ÎÎ
D Soft configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)
D Restart/ResetPushbutton
D OK Status LED The PLC CPU and SLP modules together in the IC697
PLC provide a dual processor architecture which can be
used in a wide variety of applications. The SLP provides
Functions total state logic control, including diagnostic and simula-
tion capabilities, for those applications requiring reduced
The State Logic Processor Module (SLP) provides real development and startup times. For those applications
time multi-tasking control for machine and process ap- where both ladder logic and state logic programming is
plications. It can also be programmed to perform com- desired, the dual processor architecture allows a user to
putations, data acquisition, data communications and create both ladder logic and state logic application pro-
operator interface functions. The SLP is programmed grams in any combination for efficient parallel processing
using the English Control Language Programming Sys- solutions.
tem (ECLiPS) software package. It communicates with In IC697 PLC ladder logic control systems, the SLP mod-
the PLC CPU over the backplane and can access user ule can be added to provide high level machine and pro-
and system data. Many SLPs can be supported in a cess level diagnostics which can drastically reduce total
single IC697 PLC system and each SLP can support up system downtime. Also, the SLP module can provide ma-
to 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. chine or process simulation capabilities to IC697 PLC lad-
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
der logic control systems to help reduce debug and start- Expansion Memory
up times.
The SLP can operate with or without an expansion
a47012
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 0
memory daughter board. The base memory on the SLP
module has 21 Kbytes of user program memory space.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎP
ÎÎ
Î
S
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
C
ÎÎ
P
U
ÎÎ
Î
Î
S
L
P
B
T
M
G
B
C
or
PC The expansion memory daughter board permits expan-
sion of the user program memory space by 64, 128, 256
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
N
B
or 512 Kbytes. The battery which supports this memory
C
is located on the base SLP module housing as shown in
ONE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ figure 2.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
METER
IC660* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM))
a45122
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
RACK 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B P
R C
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
M M
STATUS
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
IC660*
BLOCK
ÎÎ
RESTART
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
OPEN
RACK 6
NOTE REPLACEMENT
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
BATTERY
B G CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
Î
R B
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST CURRENTLY
M C
INSTALLED
ÎÎ
Î
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎÎÎ
N BATTERY
B
C CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
ONE
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ IC660* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)) PORT
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
METER 1
RACK 7
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
P B
S R
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
Î
M
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ I/O TERMINATOR
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
(LAST RACK) EXPANSION
LEGEND MEMORY
ÎÎ
Î
SLP – STATE LOGIC PROCESSOR
CPU – SELECTED CPU MODEL BOARD
BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711 IC697MEM713
ÎÎ
Î
BTM – BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713 IC697MEM715
GBC/NBC – BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 IC697MEM717
ÎÎ
Î
PCM – PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711 IC697MEM719
ÎÎ
Î
Figure 1. SLP Module in an IC697 PLC System Configuration
Installation
ÎÎ
Î
PORT
2

ÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ
ring to the State Logic Processor User’s Guide (see
ÎÎ
Î
reference 1).
D
SLP 711
Install expansion memory if required.
nectors on the module. (See figure 2)
D Install the SLP Module in the rack. (See figure 1) Figure 2. State Logic Processor Module, User Details
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED, in-
Programming and Configuration
dicating that power up diagnostics are in progress. There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this mod-
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the ule for configuration. However, the module must be
top LED stays on. configured into the overall PLC system using IC641
60-2 t
GFK-0600F
State Logic Processor Module (SLP) GFK-0734C

August 1997
(MS-DOS r) configurator software (see reference 4). An Table 1. Port 1 or 2, RS-232C

IBM-compatible PC-XT or AT computer with the
SIGNAL
ECLiPS programming system software installed is con-
nected to port 1, (top port) as shown in figure 3. The top
port is the default programming port, but the SLP can 1 Shield - -
also be configured to be programmed through port 2, 2 Transmitted Data TD Output
the bottom port. The Default setting is 19,200 bps. 3 Received Data RD Input
Both ports can be configured independently as 4 Request To Send RTS Output
RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 serial ports for operation with a 5 Clear To Send CTS Input
variety of serial devices such as operator interfaces, bar
7 Signal Ground 0V -
code readers, weigh scales, etc. One of the two ports can
also be configured to communicate with the CCM2 proto- 8 Data Carrier Detect DCD Input
col as a slave typically for use with operator interface ter- 20 Data Terminal Ready DTR Output
minals. Refer to the State Logic Processor User’s Guide for
details of operation.
Table 2. Port 1 or 2, RS-232/RS-485
SIGNAL
Î
a45124
Î
RS-232 SLP
(DEFAULT PORT)
3PL 9 Send Data (A) SD (A) Output
Î
PC
10 Request To Send (A) RTS (A) Output
ÎÎÎÎÎ
4PL
ECLiPS 11 Clear To Send (A) CTS (A) Input
PROGRAMMING S/W
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
PIN PIN 13 Receive Data (A) RD (A) Input
Î
TXD 2 3 RXD
IC647 RXD
RTS
3
4
2
5
TXD
CTS
PROGRAMMER
Î Î
CTS 5 20 DTR PCM
AND
IBM PS/2
DCD 8 8 DCD 22 Request To Send (B) RTS (B) Output
DTR 20 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND 23 Clear To Send (B) CTS (B) Input
25-PIN MALE 25-PIN FEMALE 25-PIN MALE 25-PIN FEMALE
25 Receive Data (B) RD (B) Input
Figure 3. Development PC System Running ECLiPS Status Indication

and its Connection to SLP
Three Status LEDs exist on the SLP module as shown in
figure 2. The top LED indicates the condition of the
module and is ON during normal operation. The bot-
tom two LEDs are not used and will always be off.
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL)
Controls
Connectors 3PL and 4PL contain signals for both One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold the pushbut-
RS-232C and RS-422/RS-485 types of communication ton for less than 5 seconds will simply restart the user ap-
circuits. The pin-out for the RS-232C signals are per the plication program if it was configured to auto-run at power
RS-232C specification with an exception that pins not up. Push and hold for more than 5 seconds and the mod-
normally used for RS-232C are used for RS-422/RS-485 ule is reinitialized and the user application program must
signals. Details are shown in tables 1 and 2. be reloaded.
r MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Battery fore removing the old battery (two connectors are pro-
vided). Indication of a low battery is provided through
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown the ECLiPS programming system software (see refer-
in figure 2. This battery maintains user memory when ence 2) and IC641 programming software (see refer-
power is removed. Be sure to install a new battery be- ence 4).
Table 3. References
Reference Title
1 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide
2 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual
3 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide
5 Programmable Logic Controller Reference Manual
Table 4. Hardware Specifications for AD697SLP711 [
Battery
Shelf Life 10 years at 20°C (68°F)
Current required from 5 VDC backplane bus 1.0 amp
Standards.
60-4 t
GFK-0600F
Special Application Modules 5
State Logic Processor Module (SLP) GFK-0734C
August 1997
Table 5. Firmware Specifications

Tasks 256
States per task 255
Integer Variables (range –32768 to +32767) 1000
Floating Point Variables (range ±1.175494E–38 1000
to ±3.402823E+38) 32–bit IEEE format
String Variables 100
String Variable Size 80 characters
Character Variables 64
PID Loops 10
Number of Timers unlimited
Timer Resolution 1/100 second
Maximum Total Number of States 600
Available Program Memory 21 Kbytes
User Reference Type and Quantity Available
%I 1024
%Q 1024
%AI 256
%AQ 256
%T 256
%M 2048
%G 1280
%S 128
%SA 128
%SB 128
%SC 128
%R 2048

Description of Item Catalog Number
State Logic Processor Module (21 Kbytes) for IC697 PLC Systems AD697SLP711
Series 90™–70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual, GFK–0600F 60-5

1
Bus Expansion Modules
61
IC697BEM731/734
GFK-0165G Bus Controller Module
August 1997
Bus Controller Module (IC697BEM731/734)
datasheet GFK-0165G
Features a44715
D
D
Thirty Drops per channel
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
IC66* (IC660 or IC661) I/O Diagnostics
OK
D
Redundant blocks, cables and CPUs supported CH 1 OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Global Communications
D Hand Held Monitor Port
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
BEM 731
IC66* LAN Communications BUS CONTROLLER
ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE OK
ÎÎ Î
1 CHANNEL
D
CHANNEL 1 OK
Soft configuration by CPU NOT USED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ON = OK
D Operation augmented by IC697 PLC Alarm Pro-

cessor function
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
HAND HELD
MONITOR
CHANNEL 1
Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
MODULE FUNCTION
The IC66* Bus Controller (GBC/NBC) is available as a
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
BUS
single channel controller. It occupies a single IC66* CONTROLLER
( 1 CHANNEL )
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
PLC slot. The bus controller is configured by the MS-
DOS r or Windowsr programming software configu-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Removal of terminal
rator function. IC66* Input/Output blocks are block breaks bus if
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
external jumpers are
not applied as shown
scanned asynchronously by the bus controller and I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
CHANNEL 1
data is transferred to the CPU once per scan over the
SER 1 SER 1
backplane of the IC697 PLC rack.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ SER 2 SER 2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
The bus controller also supports directed communica-
ÏÏÏÏ
SHIELD SHIELD
tions initiated by a PLC CPU Communication Service
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OUT IN
Request. In addition, it may be configured to perform
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
NC NC
global communications.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
NC NC
Faults reported by the bus controller are managed by
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
NC NC
the PLC Alarm Processor Function which time stamps
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
and queues faults in a table.
Î
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
For applications requiring peer to peer information IC697BEM731C
LABEL
44A726758-11
transfer, the Bus Controller can serve as a communica-
tions node linking other devices (Bus Controllers,
PCIMs, and other IC66* devices) via the IC66* bus.
Such a network can provide communications be-
tween multiple PLCs and host computers.
In addition, messages called Datagrams can be trans-
These communications include transmitting global mitted in response to individual commands in the lad-
data from one CPU to another. The global data area is der logic. Datagrams can be sent from one device on
identified by MS-DOS or Windows configuration. the network to another, or broadcast to all devices on
After initialization, the specified data area is trans- the bus. IC66* LAN communications are supported
ferred between devices automatically and repetitively. throughout the IC69* PLC family.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Bus Expansion Modules
August 1997
Installation a42985

ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ring to the applicable PLC Installation Manual.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
D Install in rack. (See figure 1)
D Turn on power. ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
The module should power up and blink the top LED
Î ÎÎ
Î Î BEM 731
ÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE OK
for about 5 seconds. When the diagnostics have com-
ÎÎ
Î
CHANNEL 1 OK
pleted successfully the top LED stays. The middle NOT USED
ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK
LED is turned ON when a valid configuration for the
ÎÎ
Î
module has been received from the CPU, and the
HAND HELD
IC66* I/O bus operation has been verified. The bot-
ÎÎ
Î
MONITOR
CHANNEL 1
tom LED is OFF under all conditions.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g BUS
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
CONTROLLER
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER ( 1 CHANNEL )
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
P C B G
S P T B Removal of terminal
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
U M C block breaks bus if
external jumpers are
or not applied as shown
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
N
B
C CHANNEL 1
Î
SER 1 SER 1
ÎÎ
Î
ONE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
METER SER 2 SER 2
ÎÎ
Î
RACK 1
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏ
SHIELD SHIELD
OUT IN
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
B P
R C NC NC
ÎÎ
Î
M M
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
NC NC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ
Î
NC NC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î
RACK 6 MODULE
NOTE IC697BEM731C
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
LABEL
Î Î
B G 44A726758-11
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
M C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
B
C
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ONE
METER
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 7
Figure 2. IC66 * Bus Controller Module User Details
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
P B
S R
M
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
Note
LEGEND CPU
BRM
-
-
SELECTED CPU MODULE
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
Refer to Figure 1, Bus Transmitter Module
BTM
GBC/NBC
-
-
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
version IC697BEM713A must be installed to
PCM
PS
-
-
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
the right of the GBC/NBC or any other
IC697 I/O modules. BTM version
IC697BEM713B can be installed as shown in
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration the figure (next to the CPU).
61-2 t
GFK-0600F
Bus Expansion Modules 3
Bus Controller Module GFK-0165G

August 1997
Removing a Module D Updates all outputs on the I/O blocks.

D Sends any command received from the CPU (for
The instructions below should be followed when re- example, Clear Circuit Fault) to the appropriate
moving a module from its slot in a rack. device.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of The IC66* I/O bus scan is independent of the IC697
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of PLC CPU sweep. The PLC CPU sweep is shown be-
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on low.
a42189
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the BUS CONTROLLER CPU SWEEP
BUS INPUTS
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it TOKEN AND UPDATE
INPUTS
from the rack. IN DIAGNOSTICS
LADDER
Bus Controller Operation LOGIC
OUTPUTS
Each IC66* I/O serial bus conveys data by passing a AND SEND
”token” among the devices on the bus. COMMANDS OUTPUTS
BUS
TOKEN
OUT PROGRAMMER
a43528
COMMUNICATIONS
BUS WINDOW
CONTROLLER TOKEN PATH
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MESSAGES SYSTEM
COMMUNICATIONS
(DEVICE 31)
WINDOW
1 2 3 30
Figure 4. CPU Sweep
During the I/O service portions of the CPU sweep, the

Figure 3. Bus Scan Cycle Bus Controller:
During the bus scan, the Bus Controller: D Makes available to the CPU all discrete inputs and
D Receives all inputs from the I/O blocks. analog inputs.
D Receives any faults and sets diagnostic status refer- D Receives current outputs and new commands
ences for use of the PLC CPU when it is accessed from the CPU.
once each scan. D Reports its status and that of the serial bus.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Communications Window labeled 44A730116-G02 for those cables with 75 ohm

impedance. Also supplied with each board are two
The Bus Controller can communicate with the CPU prefabricated plugs for termination of both 75 ohm
via the Communications window using these com- and 150 ohm cables at the last IC66* I/O block on the
mands: Serial bus. These plugs are labeled 44A713909-004 for
75 ohm termination and 44A713909-003 for 150 ohm
1 Pulse Test Outputs termination.
2 ReadConfiguration Using shielded, twisted pair cable, create a serial bus
connecting the Bus controller, I/O blocks, and other
3 WriteConfiguration
permanently-installed devices as shown in figure 5.
4 ReadDiagnostics
5 Clear Circuit Fault Caution
6 Clear All Circuit Faults
7 AssignMonitor All cable used for one serial bus must be
8 Enable/DisableOutputsGlobal of the same type, or the bus will not work.
9 Enable/DisableData Other busses connected to the same CPU may use
different types of cable (unless joined by a Bus
10 Switch BSM
Switching Module, as shown in figure 6). Cable speci-
11 Read Device fications are found in Table 2 . For applications using
12 Write Device Belden 9182 type cable, prefabricated cables are avail-
13 Dequeue Datagram able in 15 inch and 36 inch lengths for interconnection
of IC66* I/O blocks (not compatible with IC697 PLC
14 Send Datagram
IC66* Bus Controllers). One 75 ohm and one 150 ohm
15 Request Datagram Reply plug is included with each IC66* Bus Controller. See
the Ordering Information on page 7 .
Î
Hand Held Monitor Port (1PL)
Î
a43031
Î
1PL
Port 1 PL is for the Hand Held Monitor Connection.
3PL
IC66* Bus Field Terminal Connections
(3PL) SINGLE CHANNEL (3PL)
(LAST DROP) (INTERMEDIATE DROP)
Connector 3 PL contains the necessary connection SER 1
12 6
SER 1
12 6
SER 1
points for the IC66* bus. SER 2 * SER 2 SER 2

11 5 11 5
The serial bus must be terminated at each end by its
SHLD IN 10 4 SHLD IN 10 4
characteristic impedance. If the Bus Controller is at SHLD OUT
the end of the bus, select the correct impedance for 9 3 9 3
the cable length and type, as shown in table 2. 8 2 8 2
Included with each board are two small packages con- 7 1 7 1

taining two resistors each. Use the resistors in the * USER INSTALLED TERMINATION RESISTOR
package labeled 44A730116-G01 for those cables with
150 ohm impedance. Use the resistors in the package Figure 5. Wiring Diagram
61-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Configuration Dual Serial Busses with a BSM

The module powers up with no assumed baud rate or For some applications, a dual serial bus may be used
serial bus address. The MS-DOS or Windows pro- to provide a backup communications path. Bus
gramming software configurator function defaults Switching Modules (BSMs) connect bus stubs contain-
these to 153.6K baud standard and serial bus address ing a few IC66* I/O blocks with two serial busses,
of 31. After a valid configuration has been stored to each with its own Bus Controller(s) or PCIM mod-
the system, the PLC CPU transfers the configured ule(s). Blocks on a stub are connected using short
baud rate and serial bus address to the module at the lengths of non-terminated cable.
conclusion of the store and each time the Bus Control-
* a44796
ler is power cycled.
CPU CPU
Setting the Bus Controller Baud Rate BUS BUS * CPU REDUNDANCY
INTERFACE INTERFACE REQUIRES EXTERNAL
The default baud rate is set at 153.6 Kbaud (standard). MODULE MODULE COMMUNICATION FOR
DATA EXCHANGE AND
This rate supports an IC66* I/O bus up to 2000 feet in CPU SYNCHRONIZATION
length. For greater distances the baud rate may be
selected from the table below to support an IC66* I/O BUS A
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
bus up to 7500 feet in length. (153.6 Kbaud Extended BUS B
has additional delays between messages to support a

longer bus length.)
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Caution ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
BSM
Select the same baud rate for the Bus Con-

troller as that used for other devices on BSM
CONTROLLER UP TO 7
the bus. The bus will not operate unless all MORE BLOCKS
BLOCK
devicesare set to the same baud rate.
Figure 6. Dual Bus System
Table 1. IC66* Bus Length vs. Baud Rate
See Reference 4 for other redundant configurations.
Maximum IC66*
Baud Rate I/O Bus Length Monitoring Bus Status
(K baud) (Feet) To display serial bus status, set the Hand Held Moni-
153.6 Standard 2000 tor to Monitor mode and attach to PL1. From the
153.6 Extended 3500 Block/Bus Status screen, press F4 (Bus).
76.8 4500
S E R I A L B U S S T A T S
38.4 7500
A C T V D E V I C E S =
S C A N T I M E = mS
Other baud rates may be configured with the MS-
DOS or WIndows configuration software. In a dual bus system, cable length and block place-
ment should be planned well. Before installing blocks
or cabling for a system using BSMs, read the Bus
Setting the Serial Bus Address Switching Module Data Sheet (GFK-0072).
The default serial bus address is 31. Other serial bus Dual busses are supported by two busses in different
addresses may be assigned with the MS-DOS or Win- CPUs. The IC697 PLC will not support redundant
dows programming software configuration function. busses in separate bus controllers in the same CPU.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 2. IC66* Bus Cable Specifications

Terminating Re-
sistor –10% to Number of Dielectric Ambient Maximum Length Cable Run,
Cable # Outer +20% Conductors Voltage Temp. feet/meters at baud rate
& Make Diameter .5 Watt Installation /AWG Rating Rating 153.6s 153.6e 76.8 38.4
(B)9182 .350in. 150 ohms In conduit 2 / #22 30v 60_C 2000ft 3500ft 4500ft 7500ft
(A)9B23 8.89mm (.329 mm2) 606m 1061m 1364m 2283m•
(C)4596
(B)89128 .322in 150 ohms In plenum 2 / #22 150v 200_C 2000ft 3500ft 4500ft 7500ft
8.18mm No conduit (.329 mm2) 606m 1061m 1364m 2283m•
(B) .270in 120 ohms Double 2 / #24 30v 80_C 1000ft 1500ft 2500ft 3500ft
6.86mm Shields (.199 mm2) 303m 455m 758m 1061m•
(B)9207 .330in 100 ohms In conduit 2 / #20 300v 80_C 1500ft 2500ft 3500ft 6000ft
8.38mm (.519mm2) 455m 758m 1061m 1818m•
(B)89207 .282in 100 ohms In plenum 2 / #20 150v 200_C 1500ft 2500ft 3500ft 6000ft
(A)4794 7.16mm No conduit (.519 mm2) 455m 758m 1061m 1818m•
(B)9815 .330in 100 ohms Direct 2 / #20 1500ft 2500ft 3500ft 6000ft
8.38mm burial (.519 mm2) 455m 758m 1061m 1818m•
(B)9855 .315in 100 ohms In conduit 4 (2 pair) 150v 60_C 1200ft 1700ft 3000ft 4500ft
8.00mm #22 (.329 364m 516m 909m 1364m•
mm2)
(B)89696 .274in 100 ohms In plenum 4 (2 pair) 150v 200_C 1200ft 1700ft 3000ft 4500ft
(B)89855 6.96mm No con- #22 (.329 364m 516m 909m 1364m•
duit fire re- mm2)
sist
(B)9463 .243in 75ohms In conduit 2 / #20 150v 60_C 800ft 1500ft 2500ft 3500ft
(A)9814 6.17mm (.519 mm2) 242m 455m 758m 1061m
(B)9302 .244in 75 ohms In conduit 4 (2 pair) 300v 80_C 200ft 500ft 1200ft 2500ft
6.20mm #22 (.329 30m 152m 333m 758m
mm2)
Notes: A = Alpha, B = Belden, C = Consolidated

• Limited to 16 taps at 38.4 K baud.
Table 3. References
Reference Title
4 Bus Controller User ’s Manual
61-6 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Table 4. Specifications for IC697BEM731/734 [
Current required from 5V Bus 1.3 amps


IC660/IC661Bus Controller IC697BEM731
IC697BEM734
Communications Cable (Belden 9182 type)
15 inch, qty. 3 IC660BLC001
36 inch, qty. 1 IC660BLC003
Bus TerminatorPlugs
150 ohm, qty. 4 IC660BLM506
75 ohm, qty. 4 IC660BLM508
t
GFK-0600F
1
62
IC697BEM742, IC697BEM744
GFK-1002E FIP Bus Controller
January 1998
Bus Expansion Modules a45466
Features
H Interfaces FIP or World FIP I/O serial bus to IC697
OK
PLC RUN
H Two versions available for standard IC697 racks: CD 1

TEN 1
IC697BEM742 and IC697BEM744 - both have 2M CD 2
TEN 2
of RAM and 2M of Flash memory
H Data rate for IC697BEM742 is 1 Mbit/second,
FIP
BEM 742
FIP
FIELDBUS DUAL
IC697BEM744 is 2.5 Mbits/second FIELDBUS CHANNEL CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
H
FIP CH S2
Four FIP Bus Controllers per PLC system 1 MHZ
PUSH TO
H
RESET MODULE
Two FIP bus channels provide redundant bus ca- CHANNEL 1
pability 6 D+
7 D–
H RS-485 serial port attaches to PC for easy in-system CHANNEL 2

6 D+
firmware upgrade (no PROMS to change) 7 D–
H Pushbutton for resetting Bus Controller and enab-

MODULE
IC697BEM742
LABEL
ling Bus Controller to accept upgrades 44A735979–003R01
H FIP bus faults managed by PLC Alarm processor

Function
H Six status LEDs
H Software configuration (no DIP switches or jump-
ers to set) using Windowsr programming software
configuration function running on Windowsr 95
or Windows NTr
Functions
A FIP Bus Controller (FBC) is a two channel bus con-
troller that occupies a single slot in an IC697 PLC stan-
dard or VME Integrator rack. I/O devices on the FIP
bus are scanned asynchronously by the bus controller
and I/O data is transferred to the CPU once per scan.
Up to 31 Bus Controllers, of any kind, can be included
in an IC697 PLC system. Of the 31 Bus Controllers, a
maximum of four can be FIP Bus Controllers.
* BEM742 shown; BEM744 looks the same except for door label
A FIP bus may serve:
H IC697 and IC693 PLCs interfaced to the bus by
FIP Bus Controllers.
H Generic Devices, such as general-purpose
H Remote Drops, IC693 I/O racks that are interfaced computers that are interfaced to the bus via a 3rd
to the bus through Remote I/O Scanner Modules. Party FIP Module.
Each remote drop can include any mix of discrete
and analog I/O modules. A FIP bus is used primarily for I/O control. It is also
used to store configuration data to remote devices
H Field Control Stations, Field Control I/O modules
and to report faults.
that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Bus
Interface Unit (BIU).
t
GFK-0600F
January 1998
Location in a System which allows IC693 I/O modules to be on the FIP Bus. The
IC693 Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it serves are
A FIP Bus Controller module can be installed in any I/O referred to as a FIP I/O Nest. For detailed information
slot in the CPU rack of an IC697 PLC system. The on the IC693 Remote I/O Scanner, refer to the Remote I/O
following figure shows a typical installation with a FIP Bus Scanner User’s Manual.
Controller connected to an IC693 Remote I/O Scanner
IC697 PLC IC697 PLC

a46559
PS
CPU
FBC
PS
CPU
FBC
Optional Redundant FIP I/O Bus
Î Î
FIP I/O Bus
Field Control
Î Î Î Î
I/O Station
FIP Bus FIP Inter-
Î Î
PS
CPU
Î Î
PS
Scanner
FBC
Interface Unit face Module
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Generic
Device
Up to 8 Field Control
Remote I/O Rack IC693 PLC
modules (4 shown).
Î Î
Remote I/O Nest
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Optional Expansion Rack
Figure 1. Example of FIP Bus Controller In a System
Installing a FIP Bus Controller H Push the FIP Bus Controller into the card guide
until it is aligned with the connector on the rack
H Installation should not be attempted without refer- backplane.
H While pressing the upper and lower flanges on the
Installation Manual and the FIP Bus Controller User’s
left of the module, push it into the connector until
Manual.
it clicks onto the rack rails. Be sure that the board
H Be sure that rack is powered down. has seated properly in the connector.
H Position the FIP Bus Controller at its intended slot H Bus connections to the connectors on the front of
location in the rack. the module can now be made.
62-2 t
GFK-0600F
FIP Bus Controller GFK-1002E

January 1998
a45465 Status LEDs

The six LEDs located on the front of the FIP Bus Con-
troller display module status and communications
MODULE OK LED
activity.
RUN LED
CARRIER DETECT CH 1 LED The top two LEDs indicate module health. The bot-
TRANSMIT ENABLE CH 1 LED
CARRIER DETECT CH 2 LED
tom four LEDs indicate communications activity on
TRANSMIT ENABLE CH 2 LED the FIP bus. Two LEDs are dedicated to each of the
BEM 742 two FIP channels.
FIP
RESTART FIELDBUS DUAL
CHANNEL CONTROLLER
PUSHBUTTON
FIP CH S2
1 MHZ
MODULE OK
PUSH TO
RESET MODULE Shows the status of the FIP Bus Controller. This LED
CHANNEL 1
6 D+
blinks during power-up diagnostics and should re-
SERIAL PORT 7 D–
main on as long as power is applied to the Bus Con-
RS–485
COMPATIBLE CHANNEL 2 troller.
6 D+
7 D–
MODULE
IC697BEM742 RUN
LABEL
44A735979–003R01
Shows the operational status of the FIP Bus Control-
ler. This LED turns ON when the module is acting as
the Bus Arbiter for the FIP network.
FIP BUS
CHANNEL 1
CONNECTOR
CARRIER DETECT CH 1
This LED is ON when detecting a carrier signal on the
FIP bus attached to channel 1.
TRANSMIT ENABLE CH 1
FIP BUS
CHANNEL 2 This red LED is ON when the FIP Bus Controller
CONNECTOR
transmits data on the FIP bus attached to channel 1.
CARRIER DETECT CH 2
This LED is ON when detecting a carrier signal on the
FIP bus attached to channel 2.
BEM 742
TRANSMIT ENABLE CH 2
* BEM742 is shown; BEM744 looks the same except This red LED is ON when the FIP Bus Controller
for door label transmits data on the FIP bus attached to channel 2.
Figure 2. FIP Bus Controller Module - User Features Pushbutton

A pushbutton located directly below the LEDs is pro-
FIP Bus Controller Description vided as a means to enable the Bus Controller to ac-
cept an upgrade of its operating firmware. It is also
Following is a basic description of the module features used to locally reset the Bus Controller in the event of
(refer to Figure 2 for location of hardware features). a watchdog timeout.
t
GFK-0600F
January 1998
Serial Connector The FIP Bus

The 15-pin Serial Connector on the FIP Bus Controller The FIP bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire. Proper
provides for attachment of a PC computer to perform cable selection is critical to successful operation of the
an upgrade of the operating firmware of the Bus Con- system. Suitable cable types are listed in the FIP Bus
troller. The port supports the RS-485 electrical standard. Controller User’s Manual.
Conservative wiring practices, as well as national and
Table 1. RS-485 Serial Port Pin Assignments local codes, require physical separation between control
Pin Pin
circuits and power distribution or motor power. Refer
Number Signal Name Number Signal Name to sections 430 and 725 of the National Electric Code.
1 Shield Ground 9 Termination

Table 3. FIP Bus Characteristics
Resistor* Bus Type Single twisted pair plus
2 no connection 10 RXD– shield. Fiber optics cable and
modems can also be used.
3 no connection 11 RXD+
4 ATTACH 12 TD– Baud Rate BEM742: 1.0 Mbaud
BEM744: 2.5 Mbaud
5 +5V (5 Volts DC) 13 TD+
6 RTS– 14 RTS+ Maximum Bus Length 1000 meters per section (for
1.0 Mbaud,); 500 meters per
7 0V (DC Ground) 15 CTS+ section for 2.5 Mbaud
8 CTS+ Shell Board Frame
Ground 4000 meters per network for
* A 120 ohm resistor is capacitively coupled to the board frame ground.
1.0 Mbaud; 2000 meters per
network for 2.5 Mbaud.
3 repeaters per network.
FIP Bus Connectors (Channel 1 and 2)
Maximum Number of 32 devices per section
Devices
Two 9-pin connectors on the FIP Bus Controller pro-
vide for attachment of one or two FIP busses. The top DataEncoding Manchester II Encoding
9-pin connector is for FIP bus Channel 1 and the bot-
tom 9-pin connector is for FIP bus Channel 2. Since Connecting the Serial Bus
signals on both busses are identical, the two busses For information about bus selection and installation,
provide a redundant bus capability. please refer to the FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual.
Table 2. FIP Bus Connector Pin Assignments Connect the bus cable to the connector(s) on the front
of the Bus Controller. When installed in a single me-
Pin Pin dia or simplex configuration, either connector can be
Number Signal Name Number Signal name used. When installed in a dual media or redundant
configuration, both the Channel 1 and 2 connectors
1 no connection 6 D+
must be used. Both connectors accept a standard
2 no connection 7 D– 9-pin D-type male connector.
3 no connection 8 no connection
D+
4 no connection 9 no connection
D– Channel 1
5 no connection Shell Signal Ground*
* The connector shell is capacitively coupled to the board frame ground.
Note that if cables with plastic shell connectors are not
D+
connected to both ports, the provided plastic
Channel 2
connector cover and nylon screws should be used to D–
cover the exposed metal connector of the FIP
communication port not used.
62-4 t
GFK-0600F
FIP Bus Controller GFK-1002E

January 1998
Bus Controller Operation H Allows the broadcast of any aperiodic I/O data by
any 3rd Party device but only for the maximum
The Bus Controller handles all data transfer between time configured (optional)
the PLC and the devices on its bus. In order to do H Allows the transmission of any messages by any
this, the Bus Controller must interface two completely device but only for the maximum time configured
separate and asynchronous activities: (optional)
A. The FIP bus scan, a cycle of communications H Receives a diagnostic message from each IC6**
between the devices on a bus (including the Bus device
Controller itself).
B. The CPU sweep, the cycle of actions that includes

communications between the CPU and the Bus Diagnostics
Controller.
FIP devices on the bus will automatically report faults,
The Bus Controller manages data transfer between alarms and certain other predefined conditions to the
the bus and the CPU by maintaining two separate PLC.
on-board RAM memories. One interfaces with the
bus and the other interfaces with the CPU. The Bus The Bus Controller stores any diagnostic messages it
Controller automatically transfers data between these receives. They are read automatically by the IC697
two memories, making data available to the bus or to CPU. Faults can then be displayed in the fault table
the CPU when it is needed. using the Windows programming software and
cleared from the programmer. Detailed information
on faults on the FIP bus can be found in Chapter 5 of
The FIP Bus Scan the FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual.
A FIP bus scan (also referred to as a macro-cycle) con- In addition to the built-in diagnostics capabilities of FIP
sists of a fixed set of operations that are repeated as devices, the Windows programming software applica-
long as the RUN LED of the FIP Bus Controller is ON. tion program can make use of additional diagnostics
The length of the macro-cycle, once configured never mechanisms provided by the IC697 PLC.
varies. Therefore, the bus scan is fixed.
H System Status References that have been defined
During the bus scan, the FIP Bus Controller: for FIP use.
H Requests all produced data from all devices to be H Fault and No Fault contacts that can be used to
broadcast on the FIP network, at the predefined detect fault and lack of fault conditions.
period
H Alarm contacts that can be used to indicate when
H Independently tests the presence of any remote an analog value has reached an assigned alarm
devices (optional) limit.
Table 4. Applicable Manuals

Reference Title
1 IC697 FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual
2 IC693 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
3 IC670 FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
t
GFK-0600F
January 1998
Table 5. Specifications for IC697BEM742/BEM744 [
OperatingConditions:
Atmospheric Pressure 80 kPa to 108 kPa
Storage and TransportCharacteristics
Atmospheric Pressure 66 kPa to 108 kPa
Free Fall 250mm (9.84 inches)
GeneralSpecifications
Module Operating Voltage 5 VDC (from backplane)
ModuleCurrent Drain 1.4 Amps, typical
Memory for IC697BEM742 2 Megabytes of RAM, 2 Megabytes of Flash
Memory for IC697BEM744 2 Megabytes of RAM, 2 Megabytes of Flash
LEDs OK Module OK
RUN Bus Arbiter Status
CD 1 Carrier Detect Channel 1
TEN 1 Transmit Enable Channel 1,
CD 2 Carrier Detect Channel 2
TEN 2 Transmit Enable Channel 2
Data Rate for IC697BEM742 1Mbit/second
Data Rate for IC697BEM744 2.5Mbits/second
Protocol FIP/W orld FIP

FIP Bus Controller Module, 2 Mbytes of RAM and 2 Mbytes of Flash memory IC697BEM742
(Data Rate: 1 Mbit/second)
FIP Bus Controller Module, 2 Mbytes of RAM and 2 Mbytes of Flash memory IC697BEM744
(DataRate:2.5Mbit/second)
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price
andavailability.
62-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
63
IC697BEM713
GFK-0161H Bus Transmitter Module
August 1997
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713)
datasheet GFK-0161H
Features
D High Performance Parallel Programmer Interface a44434
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D Bus Expansion Interface
D Supports up to 7 Expansion racks
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
D
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OK
Three LED indicators provide module, program- PGMR ACTIVE
Î
mer port, and expansion port status BUS ACTIVE
D No DIP switches to set, easy software configura-
Î
tion into PLC system
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BUS BEM 713
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Functions TRANSMITTER
Î
MODULE OK
PROGRAMMER
PORT ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION
The Bus Transmitter Module (BTM) permits expan- PORT ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED
sion from the main CPU rack when more modules are
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
required in a system than can be contained in the MODULE FUNCTION
CPU rack. The BTM allows expansion from the CPU BUS TRANSMITTER
Î ÎÎ
Î
HIGH SPEED
rack to a maximum of 7 additional IC697 PLC racks. It PARALLEL
INTERFACE TO
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMER AND
also provides a high performance parallel interface to IC697 EXPANSION
RACKS.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
the programming device.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
The module occupies a single slot and has two con-
PARALLEL
nectors. The top one is for attachment to the pro-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PORT
gramming device. The bottom one is for a daisy- PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ONLY
chained arrangement through Bus Receiver Modules
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
to expansion racks.
50 FT. MAXIMUM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
CABLE LENGTH
Three green LEDs provide status indication of each
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
port and module status.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
The BTM must be configured into the IC697 PLC sys- EXPANSION
tem using the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming

PORT
software configuration function.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
TO BEM 711
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
(7 DROPS
MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î 50 FT. MAXIMUM TOTAL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
CABLE LENGTH TO
Î
LAST BEM 711
Î
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
IC697BEM713
LABEL
44A726758–103
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Installation
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42786g

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
ring to the applicable Programmer Controller Installa- P C B G
tion Manual (See reference 3). S P T B
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U M C

or
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
N
B
D Install in any slot (except slot 1) in the main CPU C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
rack. ONE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
D Turn on power.
METER
RACK 1
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
B P
Note R
M
C
M
BTM Version IC697BEM713A must be

installed to the right of any IC697 interrupt ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
source modules (GBC, PCM, Integral Inputs).
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 6
BTM Version IC697BEM713B and later NOTE
versions can be installed as shown in Figure 1.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
R B (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
M C
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
N
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Module Mechanical Keying B
C
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents METER
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
RACK 7
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely P
S
B
R
shaped area on the board below the connector. The M

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I/O TERMINATOR
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto (LAST RACK)
LEGEND
the backplane center rail. When the module is ex- CPU -
BRM -
SELECTED CPU MODULE
tracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring BTM -
GBC/NBC -
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
the slot to accept only identical module types. PCM -
PS -
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748

rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration
Î Î
a43562
ward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. BTM
ÎÎ
WSI
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the PARALLEL
Note: Only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position. PARALLEL
CABLE
Î
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only), the
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
programmer is connected to the top connector of the
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
BTM with cable IC647CBL703 as shown in Figure 2.
Expansion Rack Attachment

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
The BTM is attached to BRMs in expansion racks with
cable IC600WDFxxx (where xxx is length in feet) as ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
shown in Figure 1. Figure 2. Parallel Programmer Attachment to BTM
63-2 t
GFK-0600F
Bus Transmitter Module GFK-0161H

August 1997
Status Indications
a42986
Three green LEDs at top of module provide module
status information as described below.
The top LED (MODULE OK) LED is ON when the
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
CPU software completes its power-up configuration
ÎÎÎÎÎ
of the BTM, and has polled (or attempted to poll) each LED STATUS
INDICATORS
expansion rack in the system. It is OFF when any of
these conditions are not met.
ÎÎ
Î
The middle LED (Programmer Port Enabled) is the
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BEM 713
Programmer Port Active LED. This LED is either blink-
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE OK
Î
ing or ON when the programmer and the PLC are PROGRAMMER
PORT ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î
communicating. It is OFF when they are not commu- PARALLEL EXPANSION
PORT ENABLED
PROGRAMMER PORT
ÎÎ
Î
nicating. Note that this port is not used in commu- ON = OK, ENABLED
nications between the Windows programmer and the
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
PLC. BUS TRANSMITTER
ÎÎ
Î
HIGH SPEED
PARALLEL
The bottom LED (Expansion Port Enabled) provides INTERFACE TO
ÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMER AND
IC697 EXPANSION
the status of the expansion bus. This LED is either RACKS.
ÎÎ
Î
blinking or ON when the BTM is communicating with
ÎÎ
Î
the Bus Receiver Modules connected to it through the
PARALLEL
parallel I/O bus link. It is OFF when they are not com-
ÎÎ
Î
PORT
municating. PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î
ONLY
ÎÎ
Î 50 FT. MAXIMUM
ÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION PORT CABLE LENGTH
Removing a Module TO BUS RECEIVER
MODULE

ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION
PORT
moving a module from its slot in a rack.
ÎÎ
Î
TO BEM 711
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of (7 DROPS
ÎÎ
Î
MAXIMUM)

ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
50 FT. MAXIMUM TOTAL
CABLE LENGTH TO
Î
the back of the cover. LAST BEM 711

Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
IC697BEM713
ÎÎ
Î
LABEL
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the 44A726758–103

from the rack.
Figure 3. Bus Transmitter Module - User Details
Table 1. References
Reference Title
2 Programmer Controller Reference Manual
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 2. Specifications for IC697BEM713 [
Current Required from 5V Bus 1.4 Amp

ProgrammerInterfaceSpecification
Effective Data Rate 500Kbytes/sec
Time to store 16 Kbyte program 20 - 30 seconds
Maximum cable length 50 feet (15 meters)
ExpansionInterfaceSpecification
Maximum cable length 50 ft maximum per system
Effective Data Rate 500kbytes/sec
ElectricalIsolation non-isolateddifferentialcommunications.
Standards.

Programmer Cable, parallel IC647CBL703 (10 ft. (3m) cable)
I/OCable IC600WD005A (5 ft. (1.5m) cable)
IC600WD010A (10 ft. (3m) cable)
IC600WD025A (25 ft. (7.5m) cable)
IC600WD050A (50 ft. (15m) cable)
63-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
64
IC697BEM711
GFK-0162F Bus Receiver Module
August 1997
Bus Receiver Module (IC697BEM711)
datasheet GFK-0162F
Features
a44453
D High Speed Parallel Bus Expansion Interface

D Supports up to seven Expansion racks ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
OK
D Supports Hold Last State LAST RACK
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
Î
BUS ACTIVE
D System Fault Isolation

ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
D Three LED indicators provide module, termina-
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
BEM 711
tion, and bus expansion port status BUS
RACK
RECEIVER
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î Î
CONFIGURED
D No DIP switches to set, easy software configura-

TERMINATION
INSTALLED
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION
tion into PLC system PORT ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK, ENABLED
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
BUS RECEIVER
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
HIGH SPEED
INTERFACE FROM
Functions IC697 EXPANSION
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
RACKS TO IC697
MAIN RACK
This Bus Receiver Module (BRM) permits expansion

ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
from the main rack to a maximum of seven additional
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î EXPANSION
Î ÎÎ
Î
PORT IN
IC697 PLC racks with up to 50 feet (15 meters) total of (TOWARDS CPU)
TO BEM 711
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
interconnecting cable. OR BEM 713
The module occupies a single slot and has two connec-

ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î 50 FT. MAX. TOTAL
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
tors, one for attachment to the upstream or CPU rack CABLE LENGTH
FROM BEM 713 TO
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
and the other for a daisy chained arrangement to addi- LAST BEM 711
tional expansion racks. The Bus Receiver Module must EXPANSION
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
PORT OUT
always be installed in slot 1. (AWAY FROM CPU)
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
TO BEM 711
INSTALL
TERMINATOR
ÎÎÎÎ
Three green LEDs provide status indication of module
Î ÎÎ
Î
PLUG IN LAST
RACK IN CHAIN
status, rack activity status and presence of the I/O Bus USE IC697ACC702
Terminator Plug (IC697ACC702) which is required in

ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
IN FIRST SLOT ONLY
the last rack.
ÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE
Î
IC697BEM711
The Bus Receiver Module supports hold last state op-
ÎÎÎÎ
LABEL
44A726758–201
eration of the output modules in the event of loss of
communications with the CPU. It also permits isola-
tion and repair of a faulty module within a rack.
The BRM must be configured into the IC697 PLC sys-

tem using the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software configuration function.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Installation Terminator plug

The terminator plug which is supplied with each BRM
is only required in the last BRM in the chain as shown
ring to the applicable Programmer Controller Installa-
in figure 2. It may be discarded or saved as a spare if
tion Manual (see reference 3).
this BRM is not at the end of the chain.
D Make sure rack power is off. If this BRM is at the end of the chain, the terminator
plug is installed in the lower expansion port, which is
D Insert label inside module access door (see figure 2). labeled EXPANSION PORT OUT. The plug should be
D Install in slot 1 of the rack. secured with its attached screws.
D Select expansion rack ID on rack with BERG jump-

ers (see figure 1). Module Mechanical Keying
D Turn on power. This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
Rack Number Jumpers key is included with each module.
When the Bus Receiver Module is installed the remote onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
rack ID must also be set up. This is done with the extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configur-
BERG jumpers located behind the power supply as ing the slot to accept only identical module types.
shown in figure 1. For more details, see Chapter 3 of
the Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Expansion Rack Attachment
Using cable IC600WDxxxA (where xxx is length in
feet as shown in figure 2) a Bus Transmitter Module
(BTM) in the CPU rack connects to a BRM in an ex-
a42823
pansion rack. Additional expansion racks are added
by daisy-chaining cabling between BRMs.
Removing a Module
ÎÎ 01
ÎÎ 8
moving a module from its slot in a rack.
ÎÎ 4
2
RACK NUMBER =2
1 the back of the cover.
Figure 1. Rack Number Jumpers (Rack 2 Selected) from the rack.
64-2 t
GFK-0600F
Bus Receiver Module GFK-0162F

August 1997
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ PARALLEL a42786g
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
a42987
P C B G
S P T B
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
U M C
or
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
N
B
C
ONE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎ
METER LED STATUS
INDICATORS
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
RACK 1
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
B P
R C
M M
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
BEM 711
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î

ÎÎ
IC66* RACK
CONFIGURED
I/O BLOCK
Î
ÎÎ
TERMINATION
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
INSTALLED
EXPANSION
Î
EXPANSION PORT IN,
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
RACK 6 PORT ENABLED
NOTE ON = OK, ENABLED
CONNECT TO BEM713
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING OR NEXT BEM711
R B MODULE FUNCTION
Î
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
M C
or AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL BUS RECEIVER
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
Î
HIGH SPEED

N
B INTERFACE FROM
C IC697 EXPANSION
Î
RACKS TO IC697
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
MAIN RACK
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î
METER RACK 7
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î
P B EXPANSION
S R
Î
PORT IN
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
M
(TOWARDS CPU)
TO BEM 711

Î Î
OR BEM 713
I/O TERMINATOR
Î
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND CPU - SELECTED CPU MODULE
Î
50 FT. MAX. TOTAL
BRM - BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711 EXPANSION PORT OUT CABLE LENGTH
BTM - BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713 FROM BEM 713 TO
TO NEXT BEM711
Î
GBC/NBC - BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734 LAST BEM 711
PCM - PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711 (IF LAST RACK IN
Î
CHAIN, INSTALL EXPANSION
PORT OUT
TERMINATOR PLUG
Figure 2. Typical PLC System Configuration HERE) (AWAY FROM CPU)
Î
TO BEM 711
INSTALL
TERMINATOR
Î
Status Indications PLUG IN LAST
RACK IN CHAIN
Î
USE IC697ACC702
The three green LEDs provide status information as
Î
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎ
shown in figure 3. The top LED is ON when power is IN FIRST SLOT ONLY
Î
applied, the rack is configured, there are no fatal
ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697BEM711
faults present in the rack and communications are
Î
LABEL
established with the CPU, and there is at least one 44A726758–201
other module in the rack. The middle LED indicates

the presence of the terminator plug: ON is plug pres-
ent. The bottom LED is on when the CPU is in run
mode and has communicated with this rack within
the last 500 milliseconds, otherwise it is off. When this
light is out the output modules go to their configured
fault state (either On or Hold Last State) Figure 3. Bus Receiver Module - User Details
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 1. References
Reference Title

ExpansionInterfaceSpecification
Maximum cable length 50 feet (15meters)
Effective Data Rate 500Kbytes/sec
ElectricalIsolation Non-isolateddifferentialcommunication.
Standards.

Bus Receiver Module IC697BEM711
Terminator Plug IC697ACC702
I/OCable IC600WD005A, 5 ft. (1.5m)
IC600WD010A, 10 ft. (3m)
IC600WD025A, 25 ft. (7.5m)
IC600WD050A, 50 ft. (15m)
64-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
65
IC697BEM733/735
GFK-0539C Remote I/O Scanner
August 1997
Remote I/O Scanner (IC697BEM733/735)
datasheet GFK-0539C
The IC697 Remote I/O Scanner (IC697BEM733/735) is remote drop can consist of up to eight racks, linked by
an intelligent module that mounts in a remote IC697 Bus Transmitter and Bus Receiver modules. 9-slot
rack, and interfaces IC697 I/O modules to an IC66* and/or 5-slot IC697 racks can be used. The maximum
bus. distance from the first rack to the last rack in a remote
drop is 50 feet (15 meters).
The Remote I/O Scanner can handle any mix of dis-
Features crete and analog inputs and outputs up to a total of
D Can be located up to 7500 feet (2275 meters) from 1024 discrete inputs and 1024 discrete outputs, or 64
controller. analog inputs and 64 analog outputs (regardless of the
number of racks in the remote drop). A remote drop
D Supports standard IC697 discrete and analog I/O can include all presently-available IC697 discrete mod-
modules.
ules, analog modules, and analog expander modules.
D Supports PCM, ADS, and analog expander mod- Bus Transmitter, Bus Receiver, PCM, and ADS mod-
ules. ules can also be placed in a remote drop. A remote
drop cannot have any I/O module interrupts, bus con-
D Handles up to 128 bytes of inputs and 128 bytes of
trollers, communications modules, or other modules
outputs per remote drop.
that depend on COMREQ instructions for their op-
D Configurable with MS-DOSr programming soft- erations.
ware configuration function or with an IC66*
The Remote I/O Scanner is ideally suited for use in an
Hand-held Monitor.
IC697 PLC system. However, any type of PLC or
D Compatible with all types of IC66* host. computer capable of controlling an IC66* bus can be
D Supports both CPU and IC66* bus redundancy.[ used as the host. Suitable hosts include IC660 PLCs,
IC655 PLCs, and computers equipped with a PCIM
D Each remote drop can include up to eight racks[, (Personal Computer Interface Module), QBIM (Q-Bus
with a Remote I/O Scanner located in rack 0. Interface Module), or a third-party GENI-based inter-
D Up to 30 remote drops can be located on the same face.
IC66* bus. [ Remote I/O Scanner IC697BEM733/735B or later required.
Together, a Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it * IC660 or IC661 products.
serves make up a remote drop on the IC66* bus. A
a42453
CPU
BUS
CONTROLLER
HAND–HELD
MONITOR
COMMUNICATIONS
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
BUS
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
REMOTE DROP
ÎÎ ÎÎ
P
ÎÎÎÎ
S
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
S C
A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
N
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
E
R
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O BLOCKS
r MS-DOS is a registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Module Description LEDs
The Remote I/O Scanner consists of a single circuit The Remote I/O Scanner has three LEDs that show
board, with a hinged door which serves as a faceplate. through the transparent portion at the top of the door.
The module does not require batteries; the faceplate
battery holder is not used.
Module OK lights when the module has passed its
powerup diagnostic tests. If this LED
flashes, it indicates a problem. If this
LED is off, there is a fatal error that will
a44761 cause the Remote I/O Scanner to go to
stop/faulted mode.
I/O Enabled lights when the Remote I/O Scanner is
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î receiving output data from the CPU.
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
MODULE OK LED If this LED flashes, either I/O data is
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
I/O ENABLED LED
BUS B ACTIVE LED
forced or there is a Device Number
conflict.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Bus B Active on a dual (redundant) bus, this LED lights
when Bus B is active.
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
IC66*
BEM 733
HAND HELD The following table summarizes the LED indications.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MONITOR MODULE OK
CONNECTOR I/O ENABLED
ÎÎ
Î
BUS B ACTIVE
ON = OK,
Module OK I/O Enabled Meaning
ÎÎ
Î
ACTIVE
On On Normal Operation
ÎÎ
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Blinking On Fault detected
ÎÎ
Î
IC66* BUS
REMOTE I/O
SCANNER On Blinking I/Odataforced
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL
Alternate Alternate Fault detected, and I/O
ÎÎ
Î
PORT GENIUS
RS–422/485 HAND HELD
MONITOR blinking blinking data forced
ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
Synchronous Synchronous Device Number conflict
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL blinking blinking
PORT
ÎÎ
Î
RS–422/485 On Off Outputs not being
COMPATIBLE
updated from CPU
ÎÎ
Î Off Off No power or fatal error
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÏÏÏÏ
Î
SER1
SHIELD
IN
ÎÎ
Î
SHIELD
ÏÏ
ÎÎ ÏÏ
ÎÎ
SER2
IC66*
OUT
Connectors
ÎÎ
Î
BUS
ÏÏ
ÎÎ ÏÏ
ÎÎ
SHIELD
TERMINALS SER1A
D 9-pin male D Connector: the upper connector. Used

IN A
ÎÎ
Î
R
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÌÌ ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÌÌ
E
D SHIELD
SER2A
for attaching an IC66* Hand-held Monitor.
ÎÎ
Î
U OUT A
ÌÌ
ÎÎ ÌÌ
ÎÎ
N
D
D 15-pin female D Connector: the center connector is

ÎÎ
Î
A SHIELD
SER1B
ÌÌÎÎ
ÎÎ ÌÌ
N IN B
C
an RS-422 compatible RS-485 serial port, for direct
ÎÎ
Î
Y
SHIELD
Î
SER2B
OUT B
connection of a serial programmer or for connection
Î ÎÎ
Î MODULE
IC697BEM733
LABEL
44A726758–110R02
to a multidrop communications network.
D The IC66* bus terminal strip is attached to the con-
BEM 733/735 nector at the bottom of the module. Because the ter-
minal strip is removable, it is possible to service or re-
place the module while the system is operating
without disrupting bus communications.
65-2 t
GFK-0600F
Remote I/O Scanner GFK-0539C

August 1997
Compatibility ing them the most recent output data from its own
%Q and %AQ memories.
This Remote I/O Scanner is compatible with:
IC66* Hand-held Monitor: IC66* Communications with the Host
version 4.0 (IC660HHM501G) or later. After the Remote I/O Scanner completes a successful
For an IC697 PLC: CPU firmware release 2.0 or later, login with the host, it begins data transfer on the
MS-DOS programming software release 3.0 or later, IC66* bus. When the Remote I/O Scanner receives
Bus Controller release 3.0 or later. the IC66* bus communications token, it transmits the
most recent input data from the configured portion of
For an IC600 PLC: CPU rev. 105 or later, MS-DOS its %I and %AI memories. When the host’s bus con-
programming software release 4.02 or later, Bus Con- troller has the communications token, it sends the Re-
trollers (IC660CBB902 or 903) must be version 1.7 or mote I/O Scanner new output data from the host.
later. The Remote I/O Scanner places the output data into
For an IC655 PLC: CPU rev. 4.0 or later, MS-DOS pro- the configured portion of its %Q and %AQ memories.
gramming software release 2.01 or later, any version
Bus Controller. Remote Drop Installation
For a Host Computer: any version PCIM or QBIM.
The Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual gives installation
procedures for the racks, power supplies, and mod-
Required Equipment ules in a remote drop. Be sure to follow the ground-
The following additional equipment may be required ing procedures carefully.
to use a Remote I/O Scanner:
Module Locations
D At least one IC697 5-slot or 9-slot remote rack with
power supply. A remote drop can consist of up to eight IC697 racks,
numbered 0 to 7. Rack numbers are configured by
D If the parallel version of MS-DOS programming setting the jumpers located on the rack backplane.
software will be used, the remote drop must include
See the User’s Manual for instructions. Before instal-
a Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713).
ling modules in a remote drop, determine where to
D If the remote drop will be part of a multidrop net- place them.
work, which cannot be guaranteed to be on the same D The Remote I/O Scanner must be located in rack 0,
electrical ground and served by the same phase on slot 1 (remote drop).
the mains, isolation must be provided separately for
each CPU and Remote I/O Scanner. If isolation is re- D A Bus Transmitter can be located in any slot of rack
quired, use the RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 0; however, there must be no empty slots between
converter (catalog number IC655CCM590), or the Bus Transmitter and the Remote I/O Scanner.
equivalent product. Slot 2 is recommended.
D In a multiple-rack remote drop, a Bus Receiver
Operation must be located in slot 1 of each expansion rack.
D A high-level analog input module and its associated
The Remote I/O Scanner scans the I/O modules in the
expander modules must be installed in the same
remote drop in the same manner as an IC697 CPU
rack of a remote drop. The high-level analog input
scans the I/O modules in the PLC. At powerup, scan-
module must be in the lowest slot position of the group,
ning begins immediately unless a fatal diagnostic er-
with the expander modules to its right.
ror occurs. All I/O in a remote drop, except those that
are forced, default to Off at powerup. I/O that are D Empty slots are permitted between modules, with
forced at powerup start in the forced state or value. two exceptions:
During operation, the Remote I/O Scanner first scans A. There can be no empty slots to the left of a Bus
the input modules in rack and slot order, storing the Transmitter, analog, PCM, or ADS module.
input data in its own %I and %AI memories. Then, it B. If, in the future, modules will be placed in the
scans the output modules in rack and slot order, send- empty slots and a Hand-held Monitor will be
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
used to reconfigure the remote drop, locate IC66* Bus Connections

empty slots to the right in the rack. Otherwise,
reconfiguration will change the I/O references For single (non-redundant) bus installations, the
assigned to the boards already there. IC66* bus cable is connected to the upper four termi-
nals of the Remote I/O Scanner (1 - 4 in the diagram).
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÑÑÑÑÑ The lower eight terminals are not connected.
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÑÑÑÑÑ
REMOTE DROP a44753
ÎÎP
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎS
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I
ÑÑÑÑÑ
I I I I
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÑÑÑÑÑ
Î
S C / / / / /
A a44890
O O O O O
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
N FOR FOR A
N
E SINGLE DUAL
Î ÎÎ Ñ
R BUS BUS
SHIELD
CONNECT SER 1 2
1 IN CONNECT
EMPTY
BUS TO BUS
ÎÎ
ÏÏ ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏ
TOP FOUR SHIELD STUB CABLE
SER 3 4
TERMINALS 2 OUT HERE
Remote I/O Scanner Installation

ÏÏ
ÎÎ 5
ÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎ
6
SHIELD
ÏÏ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎ
SER1A TERMINALS
R IN A
D Be sure the rack is powered-down. E FOR
ÏÏ
ÌÌ
ÎÎ ÏÏÏ
ÎÎÎ
ÌÌÌ
D SHIELD BUS A
U SER2A 7 8 OUT A
D Grasp the module firmly and insert it into the card
ÌÌ
ÎÎ ÌÌÌ
ÎÎÎ
NOT N
USED D
guide. 10 SHIELD
ÌÌ
ÎÎ ÌÌÌ
ÎÎÎ
A SER1B 9
N IN B TERMINALS
C
D Align the module’s printed circuit board with the FOR
ÌÌ
ÎÎ ÌÌÌ
ÎÎÎ
Y
SER2B 11 12 SHIELD BUS B
connector on the rack backplane. Slide it towards OUT B
the connector until it begins to seat.
D Place one thumb on the left of the top plastic For dual (redundant) bus installations, the serial bus
flange and the other thumb on the left of the bot- cable from the Bus Controller on bus A connects to
tom plastic flange. Push the board into the con- the center four terminals on the terminal strip (5 - 8 in
nector until the top and bottom latches click onto the diagram). The cable from the Bus Controller on
the rack rails. Bus B connects to the lower four terminals (9 - 12).
D Be sure the module has seated properly. The Remote I/O Scanner contains an integral bus
switching relay; there is no need to attach an external
D If the rack is in a high-vibration area, use screws to Bus Switching Module for dual bus configurations. If
secure the module in the rack. there is a bus stub from the Remote I/O Scanner to
additional devices which are controlled by its bus
switching action, it connects to the top four terminals
Remote I/O Scanner Removal (1 - 4); otherwise the top four terminals are unused.
D Be sure the rack is powered-down. The maximum exposed length of bare wires should be
D Grasp the module firmly at the top and bottom of two inches. For added protection, each shield drain
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of wire should be insulated with spaghetti tubing to pre-
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on vent the Shield In and Shield Out wires from touch-
ing each other or the signal wires.
On a bus, connect Serial 1 to the Serial 1 terminals of
the previous device and the next device. Connect Seri-
al 2 to the Serial 2 terminals of the previous device
and the next device. Connect the Remote I/O Scan-
ner ’s Shield In terminal to Shield Out of the preced-
D Slide the printed circuit board along the card guide ing device. Connect Shield Out to Shield In of the
and remove it from the rack. next device. If the Remote I/O Scanner is the first de-
65-4 t
GFK-0600F
Remote I/O Scanner GFK-0539C

August 1997
vice on a bus, Shield In can be left unconnected. If it is nected directly to it, the serial port must be termi-
the last device on a bus, Shield Out can be left uncon- nated by connecting a 220 ohm resistor across pins 10
nected. Note that the IC66* bus connections for a Re- and 11 and another 220 ohm resistor across pins 8 and
mote I/O Scanner are not the same as the connections 15. These connections must be made inside the con-
for an IC697 bus controller, even though the terminals nector ’s D-shell. At the other end of the cable, termi-
are physically identical. nate the SD and RTD pins in the same way.
Direct Programmer Connections

IC66*
BUS REMOTE
a44755 If the programmer is equipped with the parallel version
CONTROLLER I/O SCANNER of MS-DOS programming software and a Workstation
SER1
SER1 SHIELD IN Interface board, connection is made to a Bus Transmitter
SER2 SHIELD
module in rack 0.
SER2
OUT
SHIELD SHIELD
If the programmer is equipped with the serial version
OUT IN of MS-DOS programming software and a Workstation
Interface board, connection is made to the serial port
on the Remote I/O Scanner module.
IC66* Bus Termination If the programmer does not have a Workstation Inter-
face board, connection must be made via an inter-
If the Remote I/O Scanner is at either end of a bus mediate RS422/RS485 to RS232 converter.
(electrically), connect the appropriate terminating re-
sistor across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals. Im- If the serial port is needed for connection to a multi-
pedance for the IC66* bus will be 75, 100, 120, or 150 drop communications network, an intermediate con-
ohms. Chapter 2 of the I/O System User’s Manual (for nector can be used. See the Remote I/O Scanner User’s
IC660*) lists the correct impedance to use for each Manual for details.
approved type of bus cable.
In a redundant bus application, if either cable of the Programmer Grounding
dual bus ends at the Remote I/O Scanner, it must have
its own terminating resistor. The upper four connec- For proper operation, the programmer must have a
tors are never terminated in a dual bus configuration. ground connection in common with remote drop rack
0. Normally, the common ground connection is pro-
Note vided by connecting the programmer’s power cord to
the same power source (with the same ground refer-
If the Remote I/O Scanner will be powered up
ence point) as the rack. If a common ground cannot
when not connected to a properly-terminated
be established, use the RS-422 Isolated Repeater/
bus, connect a 75-ohm resistor across its Serial
RS-232 Converter IC655CCM590, or an equivalent
1 and Serial 2 terminals to assure proper
product to protect the equipment.
powerup.
Serial Port Connections Configuration

The Remote I/O Scanner’s serial port can be used for A Remote I/O Scanner must be configured to:
connection to a multidrop communications network D Assign its Device Number (serial bus address).
or for direct connection of a programmer running the
serial version of IC641 Programing Software. D Assign its baud rate.
D Specify starting references and lengths for discrete
Serial Port Termination inputs and outputs, and for analog inputs and out-
puts.
If the Remote I/O Scanner will be at the end of a com-
munications network, or if a programmer will be con- D Specify the Remote Drop ID.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Configuration can be done with: IC697 PLC Configuration

D MS-DOS programming software release 3.0 or later. If the system host is an IC697 PLC, each Remote I/O
This software provides full configuration of I/O Scanner must be added to the PLC configuration. With
modules and allows selection of module options. MS-DOS programming software release 3.0 or later, a
D An IC66* Hand-held Monitor, version 4.0 or later. The separate program folder should be created for each re-
HHM automatically assigns I/O references to the mote drop. The folders should be organized so that the
modules in the remote drop. The I/O modules in the re- remote drop folders are located in the central PLC fold-
mote drop operate in default mode if a Hand-held Monitor is er. The Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual gives complete
used to enter or change configuration. If the remote drop configuration instructions.
includes any analog expanders, a Hand-held Monitor
cannot be used for configuration.
Specifications [
Module Type IC697 Remote I/O Scanner,IC697BEM733/735
LEDs Module OK, I/O Enabled, Bus B Active
Size Occupies single slot in IC697 remote rack
Ports One 15-pin RS-422/485 compatible serial port,
one 9-pin IC66* Hand-held Monitor port.
Current Required from +5V Bus 0.8 amps
Bus Type Daisy-chained bus cable; single twisted pair plus shield or Twinax. Fi-
ber optics cable and modems can also be used.
Bus Termination 75, 100, 120, or 150 ohm resistor at both ends of electrical bus cable.
Baud Rate Configurable. 153.6 Kbaud standard, 153.6 Kbaud extended, 76.8
Kbaud, or 38.4 Kbaud.
Maximum Bus Length 7500 feet (2275 meters) at 38.4 Kbaud, 4500 feet (1365 meters) at 76.8
Kbaud, 3500 feet (1060 meters) at 153.6 Kbaud extended, 2000 feet 605
meters) at 153.6 Kbaud, standard. Maximum length at each baud rate
also depends on cable type. The IC66* I/O System User’s Manual
provides a complete list of cable types, showing corresponding bus
lengths and baud rates.
Maximum Number of Devices per Bus 32 devices at 153.6 Kbaud standard, 153.6 Kbaud extended, or 76.8
Kbaud. 16 devices at 38.4 Kbaud. Includes bus controller and Hand-
held Monitor.
Maximum Number of Remote Drops per Bus Depends on baud rate as follows:
153.6K baud extended Up to 20 fully-loaded drops, or up to 30 drops if not fully-loaded.
153.6K baud extended Up to 20 fully-loaded drops, or up to 30 drops if not fully-loaded.
76.8Kbaud Up to 10 fully-loaded drops, or up to 30 drops if not fully-loaded.
Standards.
For More Information,

Please refer to these related publications:
Remote I/O Scanner Module User’s Manual.
Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Programming Software User’s Manual.
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
65-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
66
IC697BEM721
GFK-0645C I/O Link Interface Module
August 1997
I/O Link Interface Module (IC697BEM721)
datasheet GFK-0645C
Module Features
a45005
D IC697 PLC interface to CNC-compatible serial I/O

link.
D I/O Link master or slave. MODULE OK
LINK ACTIVE
LINK CFG
D Occupies single slot in PLC rack.

D Three status LEDs
D I/O Link reset pushbutton. I/O LINK
D 1.5 MHz serial port transmission rate.
Overview
The Fanuc I/O Link is a serial interface that provides
high-speed exchange of I/O data between a master
device and up to 16 slaves. The maximum distance
between individual devices on an I/O Link is 10 meters
(33 feet). If greater distances are required between
modules, optional fiber optics cable and Optical
Adapters can be used to increase the maximum distance
between individual devices to 100 meters (330 feet).
Up to four I/O Link Interface Modules can be installed

in an IC697 PLC. Each I/O Link Interface Module can be
used in either master or slave mode. Usually, when
there are multiple I/O Link Interface Modules in the
same PLC, they are on separate I/O Links. However, it
is possible to have more than one I/O Link Interface
Module in the IC697 PLC connected to the same link, if
that suits the needs of the application.
When used as a master, an I/O Link Interface Module

can exchange up to 1024 discrete inputs and 1024
discrete outputs with slave devices. Potential slaves
include the IC693 PLC, Series 0 CNC, and Power Mate The I/O Link Module is configured using the MS-DOSr
CNC. programming software. Application software, supplied
on diskettes with the I/O Link Module, can be used to
When used as a slave, the IC697 I/O Link Interface set up and control the I/O Link. This application
Module can exchange up to 64 discrete inputs and 64 software can also be used to assign the location of the
discrete outputs with the master. The master may be input and output data to and from the I/O Link, and to
another IC697 PLC, a Series 15, Series 16, or Series 18 provide diagnostics capabilities for the I/O Link. The
CNC, a Series 0 Model C CNC, or an F-D Mate CNC. The MS-DOS programmer is used to integrate this
IC697 PLC and Series 0 CNC can be used as either application software with the rest of an application
master or slave. program.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Module Description Reset Pushbutton

The I/O Link Interface Module occupies one slot in the The Reset pushbutton provides a convenient means of
IC697 PLC rack. It can be installed in any rack, in any reset if a failure occurs. If the module is being used as a
slot except slot 1, which is reserved for the CPU module. master, pushing the Reset button resets both the
module and operation of the link. The application
a45015 program must be used to re-initialize the link. If the
module is being used as a slave, pushing the Reset
ÎÎ
button resets the module, if a fault has caused the
module to stop operating while the rest of the link
ÎÎÎ
MODULE OK
LINK ACTIVE continues to function.
Î
LINK CFG
RESET
Î Serial Ports
Î Î ÎÎ
PUSHBUTTON
BEM 721 BEM 721
Î ÎÎ
MODULE OK MODULE OK
LINK ACTIVE LINK ACTIVE The front of the I/O Link Interface Module has two
LINK CFG LINK CFG
ON OR BLIN K = OK ON OR BLIN K = OK
20-pin, D connector, RS-422/485 serial ports. These
PUSH TO RESET PUSH TO RESET
ports are used for connection to the Fanuc I/O Link.
I/O LINK I/O LINK
INTERFACE INTERFACE
MODULE FUNCTION MODULE FUNCTION
SERIAL I/O LINK

INTERFACE
SERIAL I/O LINK
INTERFACE
Application Software
: MASTER MODE : MASTER MODE The IC697 I/O Link Interface Module is provided with
: SLAVE MODE
an application software diskette. Program logic on the
RS-422/485 RS-422/485 diskette can be used to integrate up to four I/O Link
RS-422/485
SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT
Interface Modules into the PLCs application program.
CONNECTOR It will transfer I/O data between the module and the
NEXT
(JD1A)
NEXT
(JD1A)
PLC, perform diagnostics functions, and transfer
PREVIOUS
(JD1A)
application program commands to the module.
RS-422/485 RS-422/485
Additional application program logic can be created to
SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT perform the following functions:
RS-422/485
CONNECTOR
NOT NOT
1. To specify the number of I/O Link Interface Modules
USED USED
NEXT
present in the PLC.
(JD1A)
MODULE
IC697BEM721
MODULE
IC697BEM721
2. To specify, for each I/O Link Interface Module:
LABEL LABEL
44A726758-125R01 44A726758-126R01
A. A rack and slot location.
B. Master or slave operation.
3. And, for each I/O Link Interface Module that will be

LEDs a master:
The module has three LEDS that show its operating,
configuration, and communications status. A. To assign a data length and I/O addresses for
each slave on its link.
Module OK: indicates the module’s operating
status. B. To control operation of the link and monitor
Link Active: indicates the module’s module and link status.
communications status. The I/O Link Interface Module User’s Manual (GFK-0644),
Link Cfg: indicates whether I/O Link chapter 4, explains how to add logic for I/O Link
configuration has occurred. Interface Modules to an application program.
66-2 t
GFK-0600F
I/O Link Interface Module GFK-0645C

August 1997
Module Installation LED LED

Status Status Indication
The I/O Link Interface Module can be installed in any Module On The I/O Link Module has
rack, in any slot except slot 0, which is reserved for the OK passed its powerupdiagnostics
CPU module. The only placement restriction is the and the hardware is operating
module not be located to the left of any board that properly.
generates interrupts (such as a PCM, IC66* Bus OFF The module has failed a
Controller, Analog, Factory LAN, or Ethernet module). diagnostic test, or a run-time
failure has been detected.
Blinking The module is running powerup
Caution diagnostics.
Link On The module is ready to communi-
Active cate with the I/O Link.
Rack power MUST be OFF when installing
or removing the I/O Link Module. OFF A failure has occurred with the
I/O Link, and communications
1. Grasp the module firmly with your hand and insert are not possible.
it into the card guide. Blinking The module is transferring data
on the I/O Link.
2. Align the module’s printed circuit board with the
connector on the rack backplane and slide it towards Link Cfg ON I/O Link configuration has
occurred, and the module is
the connector until it has started to seat.
ready to communicate.
3. Place one thumb on the left side of the top plastic OFF The module has not been config-
flange and the other thumb on the left side of the ured for link operation.
bottom plastic flange. Push the board into the
connector until the top and bottom latches click onto
the rack rails. Module Removal
4. Visually inspect the board to be sure it has seated 1. Remove power from the rack.
properly.
2. Grasp the module firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover, with your thumbs on the front of
Caution the cover, and your fingers on the plastic clips on the
back of the cover.
Make sure no exposed wiring touches any 3. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover to
conductive material. Such contact could disengage the clips from the rack rail.
damage the module, and other units to 4. Pull the module firmly to remove it from the
which it is connected. backplane connector.
5. A CPU module must be present in rack 0 slot 1 before 5. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
applying power to the I/O Link Interface Module. Turn on from the rack. Avoid contact with neighboring
power, and observe the LEDs. boards and wiring.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Cable Types for the I/O Link

The following cables and connectors can be used to complete the I/O Link between devices.
Item Catalog Number Vendor Description

Cable A03B-0807-K801 [ 5 meter length with connectors on both ends. Connects
between master and slave device, or between two slave
devices.
Cable A03B-0807-K802 [ 10 meter length with connectors on both ends.
Connects between master and slave device, or between
two slave devices.
Cable AMW 2076 OKI Electric Cable 10-pair shielded cable without connectors, for making
custom-length cable. Connects between master and
slave device, or between two slave devices.
Connector A02B-0120-K301 [ 20-pin connector with solder lug. Consists of the two
followingparts.
Connector PCR-E20FS Honda 20-pin female connector with solder lug.
PRC-V20L Honda Connector cover.
Cable A03B-0807-K803 [ 1 meter length with connectors on both ends.
Connects between master or slave and Optical Adapter.
This cable can only be used with an Optical Adapter; do
not use it for master/slave or slave/slave connections.
Optical Adapter A138-154-B001 [ Required for optical fiber cable.
Cable A66L-6001-009 [ Optical fiber cable for use with Optical Adapter.
” #L10R03 10m
” #L15R03 15m
” #L20R03 20m
” #L30R03 30m
” #L40R03 40m
” #L50R03 50m
” #L60R03 60m
” #L80R03 80m
” #L90R03 90m
” #L100R03 100m
[ See your local PLC distributor or local sales office for purchasing information.
66-4 t
GFK-0600F
I/O Link Interface Module GFK-0645C

August 1997
I/O Link Connection

a45018
The devices on an I/O Link must be installed in the order
expected by the master. If the IC697 PLC is the master, JD1A JD1B
be sure to connect the devices on a link in the order that
agrees with the information provided to the application
Program Block.
JD1A JD1B
Using the appropriate cable, connect the devices on the
link. Notice that the cables are marked JD1A on one end
and JD1B on the other.
The functions of the ports on the I/O Link Interface
Module depend on whether the module is used as a
master or as a slave. Refer to the illustrations below.
Serial Port Pin Assignments
I/O Link Module Used as a Master
Pin # Signal Pin # Signal
If the module will be used as a master, connect the cable 1 SIN 11 0 volts
from the first slave to the upper port. The lower port is 2 *SIN 12 0 volts
not used in master mode. 3 SOUT 13 0 volts
4 *SOUT 14 0 volts
5 15 0 volts
a45017 6 16 0 volts
7 17
8 18 +5 volts
JD1A JD1B
9 +5 volts 19
10 20 +5 volts
JD1B The +5-volt output from each connector powers the

NOT
USED fiber optic link modules for long distance applications.
The +5-volt output is not used otherwise.
Caution
Do not use a cable that includes the +5 volt

I/O Link Module Used as a Slave line (cable A03B-0807-K803) to directly
connect I/O Link devices. Damage to the
If the module will be used as a slave, connect the cable
equipment may result.
from the previous device (either the master or another
slave) to the upper port. If the module is followed by If the link includes Optical Adapters and fiber optic
another slave on the link, connect the cable from that cables, please refer to the I/O Link Interface Module User’s
device to the lower port. Manual for installation instructions.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Module Specifications [
Physicaldimensions: 6.3in x 9.19in (160mm x 233mm). Single slot in IC697 rack.
Module type: IC697 PLC module, providing I/O Link communications with
up to 16 slave devices in master mode.
Current requirement from +5-volt bus 1.0 Amp without Optical Adapter.
0.2 Amps per Optical Adapter.
LEDs: Module OK, I/O Link Active, I/O Link Configured
Pushbutton: ResetI/OLink
Configuration:
In master mode Controls up to 16 slaves
Choice of 32 or 64 inputs/outputs per slave.
In slave mode Controlled by one master
Choice of 32 or 64 inputs/outputs
I/O Points:
In master mode 1024 inputs, 1024 outputs maximum
(64inputs/outputsperslavemaximum)
In slave mode 64 inputs, 64 outputs maximum
PLC capacity (examples; for further details, refer
to the I/O Link Module User’s Manual):
781 CPU Up to four I/O Link Modules
771 CPU Up to two I/O Link Modules
731 CPU One I/O Link Module
RS-422/485 Serial Ports: 1.5 MHz transmission rate.
Standards.
For More Information,

Please refer to these related publications:
I/O Link Module User’s Manual (GFK-0644).
Programmable Controller Installation Manual (GFK-0262).
Programming Software User’s Manual (GFK-0263).
Programmable Controller Reference Manual (GFK-265).
66-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
67
IC697BEM761
GFK-0096F I/O Interface Module for the IC600 PLC
July 1995
I/O Interface Module for the IC600 PLC (IC697BEM761)

datasheet GFK-0096F
Features
D Interfaces IC697 I/O modules to the I/O bus of an
ÎÎÎÎÎ
a44495
IC600 programmable controller

D Rack-dependent I/O references
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
D Supports up to eight racks per I/O system ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
RACK
MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
I/O CHAIN
Functions
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
The I/O Interface Module to the IC600 programmable
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
control provides an interface between the IC600 I/O I/O INTERFACE BEM 761
RACK
bus and IC697 I/O modules. The I/O Interface Mod-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
MODULE
ule resides in an IC697 rack and has two 37-pin con- I/O CHAIN
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
nectors identical to those used on the IC600 I/O Re- ON = OK
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ceiver for interconnection to the IC600 I/O bus. MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC600 PLC systems may be configured to include INTERFACE BETWEEN
IC697 I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC600I/O, IC697 I/O, and IC660 I/O. Both IC600 and RACK AND IC600
I/O CHAIN
IC697 I/O racks may be included on a single I/O

chain.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC600
Each IC697 I/O rack is assigned 128 (five-slot rack) or I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CHAIN
256 (nine-slot rack) I/O references. Up to eight such DOWN–
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
STREAM
racks may be used in a system, providing up to 2000
addressable points. Any point can be used for an in-
put or an output.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ MAX. 50 FT. I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CABLE LENGTH FROM
FIRST TO LAST RACK
A minimum of 8K registers in the IC600 PLC are re-
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IN A LOCAL I/O
quired for operation of the I/O Interface Module. STATION. 10 RACKS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MAXIMUM, ONLY LAST
RACK TERMINATED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC600
I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CHAIN
UPSTREAM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
USE THIS MODULE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
IC697BEM761
ÎÎÎÎÎ
LABEL
44A726758–302
t
GFK-0600F
July 1995
Operation of the Module and eight or four for the I/O modules. Although
IC697 I/O modules themselves may have 16 or 32
points, each of the eight available I/O slots in the
The I/O Interface Module is an intelligent module that IC697 rack is assigned 32 discrete points. Thus a nine-
allows IC697 I/O racks to interface to the IC600 I/O slot rack fully populated with 32 point modules will
chain. In operation, the I/O Interface Module reads/ have 256 points (128 for a five-slot rack), giving a max-
writes data to each I/O module in the rack. It ex- imum system size of 2000 points (896 for a five-slot
changes this data with the IC600 CPU via the I/O bus. rack). Table 1 shows I/O mapping by rack and slot.
An I/O chain may include up to eight IC697 I/O racks, The I/O Interface Module must be inserted in slot 1
as well as additional IC600 racks. Each IC697 rack has (next to the Power Supply slot) with slots 2 through 9
nine or five slots - one for the I/O Interface Module, reserved for I/O modules.
Table 1. I/O Mapping by Rack and Slot

Slot Number
Addressing
r ing Rack
a
No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1- 32 33- 64 65- 96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225- 256

Standard 1 257-288 289-320 321-352 353-384 385-416 417-448 449-480 481- 512
2 513-544 545-576 577-608 609-640 641-672 673-704 705-736 737- 768
I/O 3 769-800 801-832 833-864 865-896 897-928 929-960 961-992 *993-1000
4 1- 32 33- 64 65- 96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225- 256
Complementary 5 257-288 289-320 321-352 353-384 385-416 417-448 449-480 481- 512
6 513-544 545-576 577-608 609-640 641-672 673-704 705-736 737- 768
7 769-800 801-832 833-864 865-896 897-928 929-960 961-992 *993-1000
8 1- 32 33- 64 65- 96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225- 256
Standard 9 257-288 289-320 321-352 353-384 385-416 417-448 449-480 481- 512
AI 10 513-544 545-576 577-608 609-640 641-672 673-704 705-736 737- 768
AO 11 769-800 801-832 833-864 865-896 897-928 929-960 961-992 *993-1000
12 1- 32 33- 64 65- 96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225- 256
Complementary 13 257-288 289-320 321-352 353-384 385-416 417-448 449-480 481- 512
14 513-544 545-576 577-608 609-640 641-672 673-704 705-736 737- 768
15 769-800 801-832 833-864 865-896 897-928 929-960 961-992 *993-1000
* Do not use these I/O points if this rack contains an Advanced I/O Receiver. Refer to GFK-0152, the IC600 PLC to IC697 I/O User’s
Manual for further details.
Rack Number table or Auxiliary I/O table to which I/O points for
that rack will mapped. Racks 0, 1, 2, and 3 are
The 2000 I/O points are mapped into the Main I/O mapped into the Main I/O Table and racks 8, 9, 10, and
table (I/O 0001-I/O 1000) and the Auxiliary I/O table 11 are mapped into the Auxiliary I/O table. Racks 4
(AI/A O 0001-AI/A O 1000). The rack number is set by through 7 and 12 through 15 are used only for com-
configuring a group of jumpers located on the rack plementary I/O addressing, which is explained later.
backplane directly behind the power supply.
This number determines the location in the Main I/O
67-2 t
GFK-0600F
I/O Interface Module for the IC600 PLC GFK-0096F

July 1995
Setting the Rack Number For example, if rack number 2 is used, addresses
529-536 may not be used for IC600 I/O or IC660 I/O
The rack number is set by jumpers on the backplane references. It may, however, be used by other IC697
behind the power supply. Jumper positions are set so I/Oracks.
that the sum of those digits with the jumper in the “1”
References 1001 to 1024 are reserved by the IC600
position is the desired rack number.
PLC for interrupts and system operation. Therefore,
For example, rack number 2 would have the 2 jumper slot 9 in racks 3, 7, 11, and 15 should be unoccupied
in the 1 position and the 1, 4, and 8 jumpers in the 2 (see table 1).
position.
Registers 8060 through 8074 and registers shown in
Table 2 are reserved for control and status informa-
a42823
tion. Use of these registers is described in the IC600
PLC to IC697 I/O User’s Manual (GFK-0152).
Table 2. I/O Rack Address Assignments and Reserved

Addresses
ÎÎ
01
Reserved
ÎÎ
8 I/O
Rack IC600 I/O Reference Reserved
ÎÎ
4 No. Range Addresses Registers
RACK NUMBER =2
2 0 I/O 1-256 513-520 R8075-R8077
1 I/O 257-512 521-528 R8078-R8080
1 2 I/O 513-768 529-536 R8081-R8083
3 I/O 769-1000 537-544 R8084-R8086
4 I/O 1-256 545-552 R8087-R8089
5 I/O 257-512 553-560 R8090-R8092
6 I/O 513-768 561-568 R8093-R8095
Figure 1. Example of Setting Rack Number 7 I/O 769-1000 569-576 R8096-R8098
8 AI/AO 1-256 577-584 R8099-R8101
Reserved I/O References 9 AI/AO 257-512 585-592 R8102-R8104
10 AI/AO 513-768 593-600 R8105-R8107
Each IC697 rack uses a reserved I/O reference address 11 AI/AO 769-1000 601-608 R8108-R8110
(shown in table 2) as part of the communications 12 AI/AO 1-256 609-616 R8111-R8113
scheme with the IC600 CPU. This reserved I/O refer- 13 AI/AO 257-512 617-624 R8114-R8116
ence address may not be used to address IC600 I/O or 14 AI/AO 513-768 625-632 R8117-R8119
IC660 I/O if the corresponding IC697 rack is in use. 15 AI/AO 769-1000 633-640 R8120-R8122
t
GFK-0600F
July 1995
I/O Cable Connections Termination Resistors

The I/O Interface Module provides two 37-pin con- The I/O Interface Module includes line termination
nectors for interfacing to the IC600 I/O bus. The low- resistors which must be set correctly in each I/O Inter-
er connector accepts the upstream cable from the face Module for proper operation. For I/O Interface
IC600 local I/O chain. The upper connector accepts Modules which are at the end of a chain, place the
the downstream cable which goes to additional racks. termination resistor packages in position A as shown
below. For I/O Interface Modules at any other loca-
The I/O cable is connected to the I/O Interface Mod- tion in the chain, set the termination resistor packages
ule as shown below. to position B.
Note
Some IC600 I/O cables are constructed so
Î Î
a42224
that the cable enters the connector from

Î ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
the top rather than the bottom as required
Î
by the I/O Interface Module. These cables
can easily be modified by removing the B
connector shell, reversing the position of
ÎÎ Î
Î Î
the D-connector housing, and reassem-
Î Î
bling the shell.
Î Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
a42824
Î
ÎÎ
A
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î Î
Î Î
Î DOWNSTREAM RACKS
ÎÎ
UPSTREAM RACKS
Figure 2. Cable Connections to I/O Interface Module Figure 3. Location of Termination Resistors
67-4 t
GFK-0600F

July 1995
LED Indicators The normal condition is for all LEDs to be on.

If any LED is off or if the system is not operating nor-
There are three LEDs on the front of the I/O Interface mally, refer to Table 3 for troubleshooting information.
module: If all three LEDs are off, look for a common fault, such
D RACK: Indicates faults within the rack as lack of AC input power or a faulty power supply.
If both the RACK and MODULE LEDs are off, the
D MODULE: Indicates faults in the I/O Interface fault is probably located in the I/O Interface Module.
Module
If only the RACK LED is off, the fault is probably in
D I/O CHAIN: Indicates a downstream rack fault or another module in the same rack, not the I/O Inter-
I/O bus failure face Module.
Table 3. Troubleshooting Using LEDs
LED Indicators
I/O
Module Rack Chain Failure Type Possible Causes Recommended Action
OFF OFF OFF Common fault No AC power Check AC power source
Power supply failure Check +5 VDC Bus LED on power supply
ON OFF ON Rack fault Output module fuse Check fuse LEDs on output boards
blown in the rack
ON OFF OFF I/O module failure Remove each I/O module in turn
in the rack
Always Remove Power Before Removing
or Inserting A Module
OFF OFF ON I/O Interface Internal I/O Interface Check I/O Interface Module seating
Module fault Module fault Replace faulty module
ON ON OFF Downstream I/O Loss of communications to Check cabling to downstream racks
fault downstream racks
ON OFF OFF Failure of downstream Check operation of downstream racks
racks
t
GFK-0600F
July 1995
Complementary Addressing
TO a42821
For applications requiring more than 2000 points, a CPU
complementary addressing technique may be used.
RACK
Complementary addressing can extend the system 0 PS I * * * I O U U U
capacity to a maximum of 2000 inputs and 2000 out- / N U N N N
puts. O P T U U U
I U P S S S
The I/O references for each slot (2-9) are fixed for a N T U E E E
given rack. Table 1 defines an address range of 32 T T D D D
points for each slot of 16 total racks. Note that for

both the main and auxiliary I/O tables, a given I/O
point is referenced twice. For example, point 1 is ref- 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
erenced in both rack 0 and rack 4.
RACK
If racks 0 and 4 are both used (as shown in the exam- 1, 2, 3 * * * * * * * *
PS I
ple) the I/O modules for a given slot must be comple- /
mentary; that is, if an input module is installed in a O
I
slot then only an output module may be installed in N
the corresponding slot in its complementary rack. T
In the following example of complementary addres-

sing, slot 5 in rack 0 is occupied by an input module,
so slot 5 in rack 4 (complementary to rack 0), must 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
either be used for an output module or left vacant.
RACK
The example also shows slot 6 in racks 0 and 4 using 4 PS I U U U O I * * *
complementary modules (output module in rack 0 / N N N U N
and input module in rack 4). O U U U T P
I S S S P U
Additional racks (such as 1 and 5, 2 and 6) have similar N E E E U T
complementary addressing. T D D D T
Removing a Module 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
The instructions below should be followed when re- * EITHER INPUT OR OUTPUT
moving a module from its slot in a rack. MODULE MAY BE USED
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of * Either input or output module may be used.
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on Figure 4. Example of Complementary Addressing
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the Note
from the backplane connector. Slot 9 in racks 3, 7, 11, and 15 not used. See
Table 1 for details.
from the rack.
67-6 t
GFK-0600F

July 1995
Operational: ]
Number of Racks: 8 maximum
16 with complementary addressing
I/O Points per Rack: 256maximum
I/O Points per System: 2000maximum
4000 with complementary addressing
Current Req. from 5V Bus: 1.3 amps

] Excludes IC600 I/O and IC660 I/O; refer to the applicable users manual for specifications.

I/O Interface to IC600 PLC Module IC697BEM761
I/O Cables: 2 feet IC600WD002
5 feet IC600WD005
10 feet IC600WD010
25 feet IC600WD025
50 feet IC600WD050
100 feet IC600WD100
200 feet IC600WD200
300 feet IC600WD300
400 feet IC600WD400
500 feet IC600WD500
t
GFK-0600F
1
68
Communications Modules
IC697CMM741
GFK-0532K Ethernet Controller
August 1997
Ethernet Controller (IC697CMM741)
datasheet GFK-0532K
D Direct PLC attachment to IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
LAN D Software is retained through power outages for a
D Standard 15-pin AUI port connection allows choice of minimum of six months
10Base5, 10Base2, 10BaseT, 10BaseF, or 10Broad36 D Alternative software packages provide:
medium with user-supplied 802.3-compatible
- TCP/IPcommunications
transceiver
- MMS/OSIcommunications
D For IC697 programmable controllers
- Full MS-DOSr or WIndowsr programming
D Occupies a single slot in PLC rack and configuration services
D Software (separately licensed) is easily loaded or - Comprehensive station management and
upgraded via RAM load diagnostic tools
CABLE PLANT a44662
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
*
ETHERNET ETHERNET
MS-DOS LOCAL GSM NETWORK GSM
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
or WINDOWS SYSTEM
IC697 IC697 SYSTEM
PROGRAMMING MANAGER
PLC PLC MANAGER
SOFTWARE
* TRANSCEIVER CABLE
Figure 1. Ethernet Controller Connects the IC697 PLC to a 802.3 LAN
The Ethernet Controller is a member of the family of Ethernet data link layer are implemented in software.
IC651 Factory LAN hardware and software products. This permits the user to choose between two* alternative
The Factory LAN family of products provides high communication protocols by downloading the Ethernet
performance solutions for interconnecting automation Controller with the applicable Communications Software:
controllers and for integrating them into multi-vendor D TCP/IP-Ethernet Communications Software - Com-
networks.
municate with host computers and/or MS-DOS or
The Ethernet Controller plugs into a single slot in an WIndows Programmer using proprietary SRTP over
IC697 PLC rack and provides an 802.3-standard 15-pin a 4-layer TCP/IP (Internet) protocol stack; requires
D-connector for attachment of a user-supplied AUI either a Local or Network Factory LAN System Man-
(Attachment Unit Interface) or transceiver cable. The ager (GSM) for configuration and downloading of
AUI cable connects to a user-supplied transceiver that is Ethernet Controller software.
directly connected to the 10Μbps Ethernet network
cable. The transceiver must be 802.3-compatible and
D MMS-Ethernet Communications Software - Com-
municate with host computers and/or MS-DOS or
must have the SQE option enabled.
Windows Programmer using MMS (Manufacturing
Transceivers are commercially available to operate on a Message Specification - ISO 9506) on a 7-layer OSI
variety of 10Μbps media including thickwire coaxial protocol stack; requires GSM for configuration and
cable (10Base5), ThinWiret coaxial cable (10Base2), downloading of Ethernet Controller software.
twisted pair (10BaseT), fiber optic (10BaseF), and
broadband cable (10Broad36). Figure 1 shows the general relationship between the
Ethernet Controller, the local and network GSMs, and
The Ethernet Controller is designed so the the MS-DOS or Windows Programming Software on
communications protocols which operate above the Ethernet station.
* A third option, SRTP communications software (IC641SWP711) supports only communications with MS-DOS or WIndows Programmers using
SRTP over a 4-layer OSI protocol stack; this Ethernet Controller software does not require configuration and can be downloaded directly from
the MS-DOS or Windows Programer.
t ThinWire is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation; r IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95 , and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Communications Modules
August 1997
Features of the Ethernet Controller IEEE 802.3 Media

The Ethernet Controller can operate on any of the
The Ethernet Controller is a single-slot module that is
following media with the appropriate user-supplied
inserted directly into the IC697 CPU rack.
transceiver cable and transceiver. IEEE 802.3 specifies
the definitive requirements of each medium.
Connection to the Ethernet LAN is made via a
10Base5 Coax: 10Base5 uses a 0.4 inch diameter 50-ohm
transceiver cable to an external transceiver. The
coaxial cable. The maximum length of a cable segment
transceiver and cable are provided by the user. The
(single span of cable) is 500 meters. The distance
transceiver is attached directly to the IEEE 802.3
between any two stations must be a multiple of 2.5
network cable. The Ethernet Interface operates at 10
meters. A maximum of 100 stations is allowed on a
Mbps on the Ethernet LAN.
thickwire Ethernet segment.
10Base2 Coax: 10Base2 uses a 0.2 inch diameter 50-ohm
The Ethernet Controller uses three LEDs for indicating
coaxial cable. The maximum length of a thinwire cable
the status of the interface. A battery is provided to
segment is 185 meters. A maximum of 30 stations is
maintain the contents of Random Access Memory
allowed on a thinwire Ethernet segment.
(RAM) over power outages.
10BaseT: 10BaseT uses a twisted pair cable of up to 100
meters in length between each node and a hub or
The Ethernet Controller provides basic functions in
repeater. Typical hubs or repeaters support 6 to 12
firmware or Read Only Memory (ROM). This firmware
nodes connected in a star wiring topology.
includes self-test diagnostics and special software that
allows you to configure and test your interface in the 10BaseF: 10BaseF has two variations that both use the
PLC and on the Ethernet LAN. It also allows you to load same type of fiber optic cable: 10BaseFP can support up
the communications software into RAM either from the to 33 nodes at distances of up to 500 meters from a
GSM (serially or over the network), or from an MS-DOS passive star; 10BaseFL supports up to 2000 meters
or Windows OSI-Ethernet Programmer station. between a node and a repeater (a multi-port repeater
would thus constitute a star). Additionally, 10BaseFB
The communications software is stored in RAM so you provides a means of interconnecting (only) repeaters by
can upgrade communications software without replacing up to 2000 meters of (the same) fiber optic cable.
ROM chips. The battery maintains the contents of RAM
Note
over power outages.
Various Ethernet baseband media can be
interconnected by appropriate repeaters.
“Soft Switches” are used to tailor the Ethernet Controller
Capabilities and limitations are defined in
to your application. The MS-DOS or Windows
IEEE 802.3 Chapter 13, “System Consider-
Configuration Software package is used to configure the
ations for Multi-Segment Networks”.
Ethernet Controller in the IC697 PLC, and to set the soft
switches for the Ethernet Controller. 10Broad36: 10Broad36 uses 75-ohm coaxial cable and
CATV-like media components (taps, amplifiers,
headend translators, etc.) to support hundreds of nodes
More detailed information about the Ethernet
at distances of up to 2800 meters. Broadband cannot be
Controller, hardware installation, attachment to the
connected to baseband via repeaters. Broadband cable
Ethernet LAN, and Ethernet software follows this
plant design and installation must be in accordance
overview. For a complete description, refer to the
with IEEE 802.7 and requires special expertise. GE
User’s Manual that applies to the software you choose
Fanuc recommends you contract professional
to run on it. These related publications are listed on
specialists for these services. Consult your GE Fanuc
page 8. sales representative or field service office for help in
identifying local specialists.
68-2 t
GFK-0600F
Communications Modules 3
Ethernet Controller GFK-0532K

August 1997
Module Physical Description User Maintenance Items

Figure 2 shows the maintenance controls and indicators The Ethernet Controller has the following user-
of the Ethernet Controller. accessible elements:
D Three LEDs: located at the top front of the Ethernet

Controller and are visible through a window in the
a44719
front door.
D Default Station (MAC) Address Label: affixed on

the outside of the plastic housing. This MAC station
LEDS
address is used for network communications,
unless overridden by the user.
B
A
RESTART
PUSHBUTTON
T
T
E MODEL 70
D Restart Button: located immediately below the
R
Y
CMM 741 LEDs.
MODULE OK
OPEN
D Battery and Battery Holder: located to the right of
ONLINE
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY STATUS OK
CONNECTOR ON OR BLINK= OK
PUSH TO RESTART
LEDs (between Restart button and serial port).
CURRENTLY LAN INTERFACE.
INSTALLED PUSH AND HOLD
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
TO REQUEST
LAN INTERFACE D Local Serial Port: 9-pin female connector for RS-232
DOWNLOAD. (INOP
9–PIN WHEN RUNNING Interface.
SERIAL DIAGNOSTICS)
PORT
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
D AUI Port: 15-pin female connector with slide-lock
for transceiver cable. Located beneath the local
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE serial port.
15–PIN UNPLUGGING OLD
ETHERNET BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
CONNECTOR
SERIAL
PORT
RS–232
DTE
2 TX (OUT)
Module Indicators
3 RX (IN)
7 GND
DEFAULT
STATION
The Ethernet Controller board indicators consist of
ADDRESS
LABEL PUSH
three Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs):
SLIDE FROM
FRONT TO
LOCK: FROM
BACK TO
RELEASE
D MODULE OK
D ONLINE
TRANSCEIVER
MODULE
CABLE
D STATUS OK
IC697CCM741
LABEL
44A726758–117R01
See Figure 2 for LED location, and Table 1 for a
GROUND
WIRE
description of these indicators.
WARNING
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
Figure 2. Ethernet Controller Board
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 1. Ethernet Controller Indicators
Indicator Status Description

MODULE OK ON This LED is ON if the Ethernet Controller has passed diagnostics and its hardware is
operating properly.
OFF It is OFF if the module fails a diagnostic test or if a fatal failure is detected while the board is
running.
BLINKING This LED is blinking if the module is running diagnostics or is in Soft Switch entry state.
ONLINE ON This LED is ON when the Ethernet Controller is connected to and ready to communicate on the
network.
OFF This LED is OFF when:
- the station is not communicating in the network due to disconnection or a disruption of
the cable.
- the local station has malfunctioned.
- the Ethernet Controller has been commanded not to enter the network or is in a
state where network operation is inappropriate, such as Soft Switch Entry state or local
loading.
BLINKING It is BLINKING when the module is transferring data on the network or loading over the
network.
STATUS OK ON This LED is ON if the module is running without exception conditions.
OFF This LED is OFF if the module is running and detects an event that calls for supervisory
attention. In this case you should connect the GSM and follow the instructions in Chapter
8 of the User’s Manual to obtain further information.
BLINKING This LED is BLINKING if the module is loading or looking for a load source for the LAN
Interface software.
Restart Button Note

Any data being transferred by the
The Restart button serves two functions: Restart, and Ethernet Controller at the time of the
Restart and Reload. The Restart button is inaccessible Restart, or Restart and Reload, will be lost.
when the door to the Ethernet Controller is closed.
Restart: Pressing the Restart button (for less than 5 The Restart Button is not operable during
seconds) forces a restart of the Ethernet Controller. The the Ethernet Controller diagnostic phase.
power-up diagnostics run and the software on the The Ethernet Controller is in diagnostic
module is restarted. phase when the BOARD OK LED is
BLINKING and the ONLINE and STATUS
Restart and Reload: Pressing and holding the Restart OK LEDs are OFF.
button for 5 seconds or more requests a restart and
reload of the Ethernet Controller. When the Restart Battery
button is pressed, all LEDs go out. After 5 seconds have
The battery and battery holder are located to the right
elapsed, the STATUS OK LED will come ON to indicate
of the LEDs. The battery connectors are located on the
that the Ethernet Controller will request a reload. Upon
board between the Restart button and the 9-pin serial
release of the button, the power-up diagnostics run and
port connector.
the Ethernet Controller requests a reload. See
“Configuring and Loading the Ethernet Controller” for When connected, the battery preserves the contents of
more information. RAM when there is no power to the board. The battery
will maintain the RAM contents for a minimum of six
months.
68-4 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Local Serial Port Table 3. Transceiver Port Pin Assignment
The 9-pin serial port (RS-232 interface) is used to Pin Signal Description
connect locally to the Factory LAN System Manager
(GSM) terminal. The communication software may be 1 GND Signal Ground
loaded through this port. The Ethernet Controller 2 CP+ Collision Presence +
module is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device. 3 TX+ Transmit +
The pinouts of the port are shown in Table 2.
4 GND Signal Ground
5 RX+ Receive +
Table 2. RS-232 Port Pin Assignment
6 GND Signal Ground
7 NC Not Connected
Pin Signal Description Number
8 GND Signal Ground
2 TX Transmit data (out)
9 CP– Collision Presence –
3 RX Receive data (in)
10 TX– Transmit –
7 GND Signal Ground
11 GND Signal Ground
12 RX– Receive –
A cable is needed to connect the GSM to the Ethernet 13 +12 +12 Volts
Controller. Figure 3 illustrates one type of GSM cable
connection.
15 NC Not Connected
Shell PG Protective Ground
AUI Port
The 15-pin AUI port is located on the front bottom edge
of the Ethernet controller board. This port connects the Station Address Label
transceiver cable to the Ethernet Controller. The
The Default Station (MAC) Address label lists the station
external 802.3 transceiver connects to the Ethernet
address to be used by this module, unless a locally
network. Connector pinouts are shown in Table 3.
assigned address is set by the user via “Soft Switches”.
It is found on the right-hand outside of the plastic
Caution housing.
PLC power must be OFF when

connecting or disconnecting the
transceiver.
Note
Transceiversmust be 802.3-compatible and
must have the SQE option Enabled.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Î PIN PIN
Î a45182
Î Î
RS-232 CABLE
9-PIN RXD *2 2 TXD ETHERNET
Î Î
SERIAL PORT TXD *3 3 RXD INTERFACE
ON MODULE
Î Î
PERSONAL SERIAL
COMPUTER GND *5 7 GND PORT
9-PIN 9-PIN 9-PIN 9-PIN

* THE PINS AND CONNECTOR MAY BE DIFFERENT FOR SOME COMPUTERS OR TERMINALS, BUT
THE SIGNAL NAMES WILL BE THE SAME. CONSULT THE MANUAL FOR YOUR COMPUTER OR ASCII
TERMINAL FOR THE CORRECT SIZE AND PIN NUMBERS.
Figure 3. Cable to Connect the GSM to the Ethernet Interface
Installation Note
This section describes the physical installation of the The Ethernet Controller will not
Ethernet Controller into the IC697 PLC rack. operate properly if there are empty
slots to its left.
1. Read and record the 12-digit Default Station Ad-
dress from the printed label on the Ethernet Control-
a45349
ler.
P C E B
A Station Configuration Data Form is provided in S P T T
U H M
the User’s Manual, for your convenience in E
recording the Station Configuration Information. R
N
E
2. Be sure the IC697 PLC rack power is OFF. T
3. Connect the Ethernet Controller battery:

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO
Hold the module so the front cover is facing you GROUND
802.3
WIRE
with the hinge to the right. The tab on the battery TRANSCEIVER
cable should face to the right, away from the board
surface.
Open the front cover of the Ethernet Controller Figure 4. IC697 PLC Rack Layout
module. The battery is mounted in the holder, but 5. Connect the free end of the ground wire (18 inch
is not connected to the board. (See Figure 2.) long green wire attached to the Ethernet module) to
the ground lug at the side of the IC697 PLC rack.
Connect the battery to either of the battery (See Figure 4.)
connectors on the card. Press down firmly to lock
the battery connector in place. Caution
4. Slide the Ethernet Controller into the slot for which
it was configured in the system - normally the first
The ground wire must be securely
available slot to the right of the CPU or Bus Transmit-
fastened to the chassis of the IC697
ter Module (BTM). (See Figure 4. for the IC697 PLC
rack layout) PLC rack and the rack must be
properly grounded. Failure to do so
Press firmly to lock the board in place, but do not may cause improper operation of the
force the board. LAN.
68-6 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
6. Connect the transceiver cable to the 15-pin AUI Port D If MODULE OK remains OFF, examine the PLC
of the Ethernet Controller. Fault Table for diagnostic information and take
The other end of the transceiver cable should be appropriate action. See the IC697 Programmable
connected to an external transceiver which is Controller Installation and Operation Manual for
attached to the IEEE 802.3 network. information on the PLC Fault Table.
For detailed troubleshooting information, refer to the
applicable User’s Manual.
Warning
Configuring and Loading the
PLC power must be OFF when Ethernet Controller
connecting or disconnecting the
transceiver. As described earlier, the Ethernet Controller can be
loaded with one of the alternative communications pro-
Note tocols. See Figure 5.
Transceivers must be 802.3-compatible and 1. TCP/IP-Ethernet Communication Software. If the

must have the SQE option Enabled. Ethernet Controller must support TCP/IP commu-
nications to MS-DOS or WindowsTCP/IP-Ethernet
7. Set the CPU Run/Stop switch to STOP. Programming software to other IC69* PLCs, CIM-
8. Power up the PLC rack. PLICITY products, or Host Communications Driv-
ers applications, you must create a configuration file
Correct Results of Installation on the Factory LAN System Manager (GSM) and
download that file together with the TCP/IP com-
During Power-Up: The MODULE OK LED on the front munications software. The GSM software runs on a
of the Ethernet Controller will BLINK during power-up separate computer .
diagnostics, and continue to BLINK while waiting for
configuration data from the CPU. 2. MMS-Ethernet Communications Software. If the
Ethernet Controller must support MMS commu-
After Power-Up: Once the Ethernet Controller has nications, you must create a configuration file on the
completed power-up diagnostics (about 15 seconds): Factory LAN System Manager (GSM) and download
it together with the MMS communications software.
The MODULE OK LED will stop blinking, and should The GSM is a separate computer running GSM soft-
remain ON. ware.
The ONLINE LED may be ON, OFF or BLINKING.
See the applicable user’s manual for instructions on
The STATUS OK LED will normally be BLINKING (un- configuring and loading the Ethernet Controller. These
less software was previously loaded), indicating that operations are necessary before the LAN Interface can
the Ethernet Interface needs to be loaded. be used by your application.
If you get these indications, physical installation and
power-up are complete. You may continue with
Procedure 3 (or the next appropriate procedure) in Station Management Software
Chapter 2 of the appropriate controller User’s Manual.
Operating a local area network entails certain LAN
management activities. For the Factory LAN, this
Corrective Actions includes network performance measurement, fault
diagnosis, configuration management, and
MODULE OK OFF indicates a hardware fault, either in
the Ethernet Controller or in the PLC, that prevents the downloading the appropriate configuration file and
communication software to network nodes.
Ethernet Controller from operating.
D Cycle power on the PLC to determine whether the Many features to support these activities are built
fault is intermittent or a “hard” failure. directly into the Ethernet Controller.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Nonetheless, certain occasional maintenance activities download the communications software to the LAN
require that the user provide an external computer, Interface directly from the COM1 port on the GSM
such as a properly equipped IBMr-compatible personal computer to the Ethernet Controller 9-pin serial port.
computer.
The System Manager (GSM) also supports node
The Ethernet Controller software includes the Factory configuration and downloading across the LAN from a
LAN System Manager (GSM) to run on this external centralized location. A network GSM computer must
computer. The GSM is used to store on disk and to include an appropriate Ethernet Interface.
ALTERNATIVE ETHERNET PROTOCOL STACKS a45381c
TCP/IP MMS/OSI
Host Computer Software Host Computer Software
Host Communications Drivers – CIMPLICITY MMS
Applications (may require – 3rd–party MMS
3rd–party software)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Host
Applications
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC641 Programming Software IC641 Programming Software
IC641 TCP/IP–Ethernet Prog. Software IC641 OSI–Ethernet Prog. Software
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC641SWP713 (Includes IC641SWP711
IC651ENS042 software below) GFK–0780
GFK–1029
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TCP/IP–Ethernet MMS–Ethernet
IC651ENS042 IC651ENS040
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697 PLC GFK–1004 GFK–0868
Ethernet (Loaded from the GSM) (Loaded from the GSM)
Controller
Software
Load ONLY ONE Ethernet Controller Software
IC697 PLC
Ethernet Ethernet
Controller Controller
Hardware IC697CMM741
Figure 5. Alternative Ethernet Protocol Stacks for the IC697CMM741 Ethernet Controller
Related Publications (Factory LAN)

The following documents are related user documentation for the Factory LAN family of communication products.
D TCP/IP-Ethernet Communications User’s Manual D Programmable Controller Installation Manual
D MMS-Ethernet Communications User’s Manual D Host Communications Toolkit C/C++ and Visual Basic
User’s Manual
D PLC Programmer TCP/IP-Ethernet User’s Manual
D Host Communications Drivers for Microsoft Windows
D PLC Programmer-Ethernet User’s Manual
User’s Manual
D PLC Programming Software User’s Manual D TCP/IP Windows 95/Windows NT User’s Manual Sup-
D Programmable Controller Reference Manual plement
68-8 t
GFK-0600F

August 1997
Table 4. Module Specifications [
Power Consumption Power consumption for the Ethernet Controller includes external RS-232 loads and the external
(Typical): transceiver. The module is powered by the rack. The power supply must provide +12 Vdc.
+5 Vdc +12 Vdc
1.00 A 0.5 A
Memory Retention: An on-board battery provides backup power (at least 6 months) when power is removed from the CPU
rack containing the Ethernet Controller.
Physical Dimensions:
Circuit Board: 6.3 x 9.19 inches (160 x 233 mm). Occupies a single slot in an IC697 PLC rack.
Mounting: The module plugs into the IC697 CPU rack in the first available slot to the right of the CPU or BTM.
(Bus Receiver Module if remote rack)
- LED Indicators: MODULE OK, ONLINE, STATUS OK
- Restart pushbutton and Battery connectors - front edge of board behind the hinged door
Connectors: Serial and Transceiver Ports
- Serial Port: 9-pin female, D-connector (to Local GSM)
- Transceiver Port: 15-pin female, D-connector (to Ethernet transceiver cable and network)
InterfaceSpecifications: LAN (to Network GSM and/or IC641-Ethernet Programmer)
IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access Control 10Mbps
Serial Port: RS-232 DTE, 9600 bps
Transceiver Port: Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD, Transceiver SQE must be Enabled.
Standards.
Table 5. Ordering Instructions

Ethernet Controller Ethernet Controller Module IC697CMM741
TCP/IP
Ethernet Controller Software TCP/IP Software and Documentation for the PLC Ethernet IC651ENS042
Controller (Includes GSM).
TCP/IP-Ethernet Programming Software and Documentation for the IC641-TCP/IP

-Ethernet IC641SWP713
Software and LAN Interface Programmer and Software and Documentation for the IC697 PLC
Software (MS-DOS version) (IncludesIC651ENS042).
(Windowsversion)
TCP/IPWindowsr95/Windows NTr MS-DOSr Box version of above. IC641SWC716
MMS/OSI
Ethernet Controller Software MMS Software and Documentation for the PLC Ethernet IC651ENS040
Controller (Includes GSM).
OSI-Ethernet Programming Software and Documentation for the IC641 OSI-Ethernet Program- IC641SWP711
Software mer which includes SRTP-Ethernet software and documentation.
Replacement Parts
PLC Power Supply 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input, 100 watt Power Supply IC697PWR711
24 VDC Input, 90 watt Power Supply IC697PWR724
48 VDC Input, 90 watt Power Supply IC697PWR748
(One of these Power Supplies is a prerequisite, since +5 Vdc and +12 Vdc are
required by the Ethernet Controller Module)
Battery Lithium Battery, 3V, to protect LAN Controller memory from power loss IC697ACC701
t
GFK-0600F
1
69
IC697CMM742
GFK-1309E Ethernet Interface (Type 2)
September 1998
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) (IC697CMM742)
datasheet GFK-1309EGFK-1309E
Features a45632
D Connects IC697 PLC to an IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD

10Mbps Ethernet LAN via one of three network
ports: 10BaseT, 10Base2, or AUI
D 10BaseT and 10Base2 network ports provide direct ETHERNET
INTERFACE
connection to 10BaseT or 10Base2 network with-
MODULE OK
out an external transceiver LAN ONLINE
D Standard 15-pin AUI network port allows choice SERIAL ACTIVE
STATUS
of 10Base5, 10Base2, 10BaseT, 10BaseF, or
10Broad36 medium with user-supplied 802.3-com- RESTART
patible transceiver STATION
D Firmware is pre-loaded for easy installation and is MGR

RS
S
maintained indefinitely; firmware is easily upgraded 232 E
R
in-system from PC attached to RS-485 serial port SERVICE I
D
OPTION A
The Ethernet Interface provides: L
h Data exchange using configuration-based and C

O
N
logic-based Ethernet Global Data N
h TCP/IP communication services using SRTP S/W

E
C
h Full PLC programming and configuration ser-

LOAD T
RS I
485 O
vices N
S
h Comprehensive station management and

diagnostic tools
Functions 10
BASE
T
The IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface (Type 2) E
provides high performance TCP/IPcommunicationsfor OR

T
H
E
the IC697 PLC. R
N
The Ethernet Interface (Type 2) plugs into a single slot E
T
in an IC697 PLC rack and is configured with the IC641 AUI C
PLC programming software. Up to four Ethernet O

N
Interface (Type 2) modules can be installed in an IC697 N

E
C
PLC CPU rack. OR T
I
The Ethernet Interface (Type 2) contains three network O

N
ports: 10BaseT (RJ-45 connector), 10Base2 (BNC 10
connector), and AUI (15-pin D-connector). The BASE

2
Ethernet Interface automatically selects the network

port in use. One network port may be used at a time.
The 10BaseT network port permits direct connection to
a 10BaseT (twisted pair) network hub or repeater
without an external transceiver.
The 10Base2 network port permits direct connection to
a 10Base2 (ThinWiret) network without an external
transceiver. The AUI cable connects the Ethernet Interface to a
The AUI network port permits attachment of a user- user-supplied transceiver that is directly connected to the
supplied AUI (Attachment Unit Interface, or transceiver) 10Mbps Ethernet network. The transceiver must be 802.3
cable. compatible and must have the SQE option enabled.
t ThinWire is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
September 1998
Transceivers are commercially available to operate on a R

CIMPLICITY software, and computers running the
variety of 10Μbps media including 0.4 inch diameter TCP/IP version of the MS-DOS or Windows based
coaxial cable (10Base5), ThinWire coaxial cable programming software. These communications use the
(10Base2), twisted pair (10BaseT), fiber optic (10BaseF), proprietary SRTP and Ethernet Global Data protocols
and broadband cable (10Broad36). over a 4-layer TCP/IP (Internet) stack.
The Ethernet Interface (Type 2) provides TCP/IP Figure 1 shows the IC697 PLC in a basic Ethernet
communications with other IC697 and IC693 PLCs, host communication system.
computers running the Host Communications Toolkit or
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

a45633
Ethernet Cable
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver
Network Network
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Connection Connection
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC693 PLC
Ethernet
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC697 PLC IC697 PLC
Interface Ethernet
Ethernet
Interface Interface
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Host Computer or Control Device
running a Host Communications
Toolkit Application
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ IC641 Programming Software - TCP/IP Ethernet
running on a PC
Figure 1. Ethernet Interface Connects the IC697 PLC to an 802.3 LAN
IEEE 802.3 Media to 33 nodes at distances of up to 500 meters from a

passive star; 10BaseFL supports up to 2000 meters
The Ethernet Interface (Type 2) can operate directly on between a node and a repeater (a multi-port repeater
10BaseT or 10Base2 media via its 10baseT and 10Base2 would thus constitute a star). Additionally, 10BaseFB
network ports. These media are described below. provides a means of interconnecting (only) repeaters by
Additionally, the Ethernet Interface (Type 2) can up to 2000 meters of (the same) fiber optic cable.
operate on any of the media listed below with the
appropriate user-supplied transceiver and transceiver Note
cable via its AUI network port.
Various Ethernet baseband media listed above
10Base5 Coax: 10Base5 uses a 0.4 inch diameter 50-ohm can be interconnected by appropriate repeat-
coaxial cable. The maximum length of a cable segment ers. Capabilities and limitations are defined in
(single span of cable) is 500 meters. The distance IEEE 802.3 Chapter 13, System Considerations for
between any two stations must be a multiple of 2.5 Multi-Segment Networks.
meters. A maximum of 100 stations is allowed on a
thickwire Ethernet segment. 10Broad36: 10Broad36 uses 75-ohm coaxial cable and
CATV-like media components (taps, amplifiers, headend
10Base2 Coax: 10Base2 uses a 0.2 inch diameter 50-ohm translators, etc.) to support hundreds of nodes at
coaxial cable. The maximum length of a ThinWire cable distances of up to 2800 meters. Broadband cannot be
segment is 185 meters. A maximum of 30 stations is connected to baseband via repeaters. Broadband cable
allowed on a ThinWire Ethernet segment. plant design and installation must be in accordance with
10BaseT: 10BaseT uses a twisted pair cable of up to 100 IEEE 802.7 and requires special expertise. GE Fanuc
meters in length between each node and a hub or recommends you contract professional specialists for
repeater. Typical hubs or repeaters support 6 to 12 these services. Consult your local authorized GE Fanuc
nodes connected in a star wiring topology. PLC distributor, or your GE Fanuc sales representative
or field service office for help in identifying local
10BaseF: 10BaseF has two variations that both use the specialists.
same type of fiber optic cable: 10BaseFP can support up
69-2 t
GFK-0600F
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) GFK-1309E

September 1998
Physical Description
Figure 2 shows the maintenance items and indicators of the Ethernet Interface (Type 2).
a45634
DISABLE ONBOARD
11 10Base2 PORT JUMPER
10 REPLACEABLE FUSE
ETHERNET
INTERFACE
MODULE OK
FU3
1 LEDS
LAN ONLINE
SERIAL ACTIVE JP7
STATUS
2 RESTART
PUSHBUTTON RESTART
3 STATION MGR (RS–232)

STATION
MGR
SERIAL PORT
RS S
232 E
4 SERVICE OPTION R
SERVICE I
CONNECTOR
OPTION A
L
C
O
N
N
E
5 SOFTWARE LOAD (RS–485)
S/W C
LOAD T
SERIAL PORT
RS I
485 O
N
S
6 10BaseT NETWORK 10
PORT
BASE
T
E
T
OR H
E
R
N
E
T
7 AUI NETWORK PORT AUI C
O
N
N
E
C
OR T
I
O
N
8 10Base2 NETWORK 10
PORT BASE
2
9
DEFAULT STATION ADDRESS
LABEL
Figure 2. Ethernet Controller Board

User Maintenance Items 5. Software Load (RS-485) Serial Port
6. 10BaseT Network Port
The Ethernet Interface has the following user-
accessible elements: 7. AUI Network Port
8. 10Base2 network Port
1. Four LEDs
9. Default Station (MAC) Address Label (located on
2. Restart Pushbutton the inside edge of the module faceplate)
3. Station Mgr (RS-232) Serial Port 10. Replaceable +12 VDC Fuse (FU3)
4. Service Option Connector 11. Onboard 10base2 Transceiver Power Disable
Jumper (JP7 - normally not installed)
t
GFK-0600F
September 1998
Module Indicators
The Ethernet Interface board indicators consist of four Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs):
D MODULE OK Refer to Figure 2 for the location of the LED indicators,
D LAN ONLINE and Table 1 for a description of the indicators.
D SERIAL ACTIVE
D STATUS
Table 1. Ethernet Interface (Type 2) LED Indicators
Indicator Status Description

MODULE OK ON This LED is ON if the Ethernet Interface has passed diagnostics and is operating properly.
OFF This LED is OFF if the module fails a diagnostic test, or if a fatal failure is detected during
operation.
BLINKING This LED is BLINKINGduring diagnostics, or to indicate special operating conditions. *
LANONLINE ON This LED is ON when the Ethernet Interface is connected to the Ethernet network and is
ready to communicate.
OFF This LED is OFF when:
- the Ethernet Interface is not communicating in the network due to disconnection or
disruption of the cable.
- the Ethernet Interface has malfunctioned.
- the Ethernet Interface has been commanded not to enter the network.
BLINKING This LED is BLINKING when the Ethernet Interface is transferring data on the network
or, to indicate special operating conditions. *
SERIALACTIVE OFF This LED is OFF during inactivity at the RS-485 serial port.
BLINKING This LED is BLINKINGduring data transfer at the RS-485 serial port, or to indicate special
operation conditions. *
STATUS OK ON This LED is ON when the module is operating without exceptionconditions.
OFF This LED is OFF if the Ethernet Interface detects an event (exception condition) during
operation that requires supervisory attention. In this case, refer to the PLC Fault Table for
further information, as described in the Troubleshootingchapter of the User ’s manual.
BLINKING This LED is BLINKINGduring special operating conditions. *
* Special operating conditions are indicated by multiple LEDs blinking in unison:

- During the Software Load state, all LEDs blink in unison.
- During the Waiting for IP Address state, the MODULE OK and STATUS LEDs blink in unison.
- During the Maintenancestate, the MODULE OK and SERIAL ACTIVE LEDs blink in unison.
Restart Pushbutton Load state. Use a pointed tool to press the Restart
pushbutton.
The Restart button serves four functions: LED test,
LED Test: Any time the Restart pushbutton is releaed
restart, restart and enter Software Load state, and
all the LEDs flash ON. You should visually verify that all
restart and enter Maintenance state. These four
the LEDs go OFF and ON at this time. Then the Inter-
functions behave similarly in all states except for the
face performs either a restart, a restart and enter Soft-
Software Load state. While in this state, pressing the
ware Load state, or a restart and enter Maintenance
pushbutton will cause an immediate restart into the
state, depending on the duration that you press the
Operational state (without performing the LED test)
pushbutton.
if the software in the Ethernet Interface has not been
corrupted or erased. If the software has been Restart: Pressing the Restart pushbutton
corrupted or erased, pressing the pushbutton will momentarily (less than 5 seconds) requests a restart of
cause an immediate restart back into the Software the Ethernet Interface. When the Restart pushbutton
69-4 t
GFK-0600F

September 1998
is pressed, all LEDs go out. When it is released, all Station Mgr (RS-232) Serial Port
LEDs flash ON, then power-up diagnostics run, and
The 6-pin RJ-11 phone jack RS-232 serial port is used to
the software on the Interface is restarted into the
connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the
Operational state.
Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface.
Restart and Enter Software Load State: Pressing and The pin assignments for this connector are shown in
holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom LED Table 2.
(STATUS) turns ON (between 5 and 10 seconds) forces a Table 2. Station Mgr (RS-232) Port Pin Assignment
restart and requests entrance to the Software Load state. Pin Number Signal Description
A reload is used to install a software update into the
module and is not part of normal operaiton. When the 1 CTS Clear to Send (input)
Restart pushbutton is pressed, all LEDs go out. After 2 TD Transmit Data (output)
approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, the STATUS LED 3 SG Signal Ground
(bottom LED) comes ON, to indicate that the Ethernet 4 SG Signal Ground
Interface will request a reload. After the Restart 5 RD Receive Data (input)
pushbutton is released, all LEDs flash ON, then
6 RTS Request to Send (output)
power-up diagnostics run, and the Ethernet Interface
waits for the software load with all LED’s blinking in Use the available serial cable (IC693CBL316) to
unison. connect a terminal or PC to the Station Mgr (RS-232)
serial port. Refer to Appendix B of the User’s manual
Restart and Enter Maintenance State: Pressing and
for more information.
holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom two
LEDs turn ON (approximately 10 seconds) forces a Software Load (RS-485) Serial Port
restart and requests entrance to the Manitenance state. The 15-pin D-type RS-485 serial port is used to con-
After approximately 5 seconds, the STATUS LED comes nect a PC running the PC Software Loader software
ON, then after approximately a total of 10 seconds have to the Ethernet Interface in order to update the firm-
elapsed, the SERIAL ACTIVE LED also comes ON, to ware in the Ethernet Interface. The pin assignments
indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request entry to for this connector are shown in Table 3.
the Maintenance state. After the Restart pushbutton is
released, all LEDs flash ON, power-up diagnostics run Table 3. Software Load (RS-485) Port Pin Assignment
and the Ethernet Interface enters the Maintenance state. Pin
Number Signal Description
Note
1 Shield
Any data being transferred by the Ethernet
2 NC No Connection
Interface at the time of the Restart will be
3 NC No Connection
lost.
4 NC No Connection
The Restart pushbutton is not operable dur- 5 +5V * +5V power for RS-232/RS-485
ing the diagnostic phase of power-up. The converter
Ethernet Interface is in the diagnostic phase 6 RTS (A) Request to Send (output)
when the MODULE OK LED is BLINKING
7 Signal Ground Signal Ground, 0V
and the other LEDs are OFF.
8 CTS (B’) Clear to Send (input)
Service Option Connector 9 RT * Terminating Resistor for RD **

10 RD (A’) Receive Data (input)
If a problem occurs with the Ethernet Interface that 11 RD (B’) Receive Data (input)
requires removal from the PLC rack, the onboard 12 SD (A) Send Data (output)
exception log will be preserved for 2 to 3 days. The 13 SD (B) Send Data (output)
Service Option connector allows you to attach a 3 volt
14 RTS (B) Request to Send (output)
Lithium battery (IC697ACC701) to save the exception
log contents for longer periods. 15 CTS (A’) Clear to Send (input)
t
GFK-0600F
September 1998
Use and RS-232/RS-485 adapter to connect systems Table 5. AUI Port Pin Assignment
taht provide an RS-232 interface to the Software Load
(RS-232) serial port on the Ethernet Interface.
Pin Signal Description
Catalog number IC690ACC900 is an RS-232/RS-485
converter; Miniconverter Kit IC690ACC901 also con- 1 GND Signal Ground
tains an RS-232/RS-485 converter. Refer to Appendix 2 CP+ Collision Presence +
B of the User’s Manual for more information. 3 TX+ Transmit +
4 GND Signal Ground
10BaseT Network Port
5 RX+ Receive +
The 8-pin RJ-45 phone jack 10BaseT network port is
6 GND Signal Ground
used to connect a twisted-pair cable from a 10BaseT
hub or repeater directly to the Ethernet Interface 7 NC No Connection
without an external transceiver. The pin assignments 8 GND Signal Ground
for this connector are shown in Table 4. 9 CP– Collision Presence –
10 TX– Transmit –
Table 4. 10BaseT Network Port Pin Assignment
Pin Number Signal Description 12 RX– Receive –
1 TD+ Transmit Data+ (output) 13 +12 +12 Volts
2 TD– Transmit Data – (output) 14 GND Signal Ground
3 RD+ Receive Data+ (input) 15 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection Shell PG Protective Ground
5 NC No Connection
6 RD– Receive Data– (input)
7 NC No Connection
8 NC No Connection 10Base2 Network Port
The BNC 10Base2 network port is used to connect a
AUI Port 10Base2 (ThinWire) network directly to the Ethernet
The 15-pin AUI network port connects the transceiver Interface without an external transceiver. The 10Base2
cable to the Ethernet Interface. The external 802.3 network cables are attached to the Ethernet Interface
transceiver connects to the Ethernet network. with a T or F BNC connector.
Connector pin assignments are shown in Table 5.
Onboard 10Base2 Port Transceiver
Caution Power Disable Jumper
This jumper must be in place to ensure proper net-
PLC power must be OFF when work operation when using an external transceiver
connecting or disconnecting the connected to the AUI port that is externally powered.
transceiver.
Note Default Stations Address Label
Transceiversmust be 802.3-compatible and
must have the SQE option Enabled. The Default Station (MAC) Address label lists the station
address to be used by this module, unless a locally
assigned address is set by the user via the Station
Replaceable +12 VDC Fuse Manager. It is found on the inside edge of the
A replaceable fuse is available on the +12 VDC power protruding flange of the module faceplate. The Default
that is supplied by this module to the AUI port to Station Address label is visible when the Ethernet
power external transceivers. Interface module is inserted in the PLC rack.
69-6 t
GFK-0600F

September 1998
Installation Note
This section describes the physical installation of the When using an external transceiver that is
Ethernet Interface into the IC697 PLC rack. The externally powered (that is, it does not re-
quire +12 VDC current from the AUI
installation process is completely described in the
port), the Disable Onboard 10Base2 Port
Installation chapter of the User’s Manual.
jumper must be in place to ensure proper
1. Read and record the 12-digit Default Station Address network operation.
from the printed label on the Ethernet Interface.
A Station Configuration Data Form is provided in 5. Set the CPU Run/Stop switch to STOP.
the User’s Manual, for your convenience in 6. Power up the PLC rack.
recording the Station Configuration Information.
2. Be sure the IC697 PLC rack power is OFF. Configuring the Ethernet Interface
3. Slide the Ethernet Interface into the slot for which it Essential network addresses for each Ethernet Inter-
was configured in the system - normally the first face are setup by the MS-DOSr or Windowsr PLC
available slot to the right of the CPU or Bus Transmit- Configuration Software and stored to the PLC. These
ter Module (BTM) addresses must be properly configured before the Ether-
Press the board firmly in place, but do not force the net Interface can be used by your application. The
board. Tighten the screws on the top and bottom tabs. configuration process is completely described in Pro-
cedure 2 in the Installation chapter of the User’s
Manual.
Note
The Ethernet Controller will not Powering-Up the Ethernet Interface
operate properly if there are empty
slots to its left. After the Ethernet Interface has been properly config-
ured, turn power OFF to the PLC rack for 3 to 5 se-
4. Connect one of the network ports on the Ethernet In- conds, then turn power back ON.
terface to the Ethernet network. If you are using an
external transceiver, connect the transceiver cable to During Power-Up:
the AUI port on the Ethernet Interface. The other
end of the transceiver cable should be connected to The MODULE OK LED on the Ethernet Interface will
an external IEEE 802.3 compatible transceiver that is BLINK while the Interface performs power-up diag-
connected to the Ethernet network. nostic tests, and continue to blink while waiting for
configuration data from the PLC CPU.
Warning After Power-Up:

The MODULE OK LED should stop blinking, and
PLC power must be OFF when should remain ON.
connecting or disconnecting the The LAN LED may be ON, OFF, or BLINKING - de-
transceiver. pending upon network activity.
The STATUS LED should be ON, indicating no excep-
Note tion conditions.
Transceivers must be 802.3-compatible and The LED indications described above indicate that the
must have the SQE option Enabled. Ethernet Interface is ready for use.
t
GFK-0600F
September 1998
Corrective Actions: Station Management

If the MODULE OK LED is OFF, a hardware fault has Operating a local area network entails certain LAN
occurred, either in the Ethernet Interface or in the management activities such as network performance
PLC, that prevents the Ethernet Interface from oper- measurement, status information, and fault diagnosis.
ating. Refer to the Installation and Troubleshooting
chapters of the User’s Manual for detailed trouble- The Ethernet Interface contains many features to
shooting information. support these activities. Some of these features are
accessed via the Station Manager, a portion of the
If the MODULE OK LED is ON, but the STATUS LED is Ethernet Interface operating firmware that responds
OFF, an operational problem has occurred. Refer to the to user commands. The Station Manager operates
Troubleshooting chapter of the User’s Manual for detailed locally via an ASCII terminal or terminal emulator
troubleshooting information. connected to the Station Mgr (RS-232) serial port, or
remotely over the Ethernet LAN. Refer to the TCP/IP
Ethernet Communications Station Manager Manual for
complete information on the Station Manager.
Related Publications (Factory LAN)

The following documents are related user documentation for the Factory LAN family of communication products.
D TCP/IP Ethernet (Type 2) Communications User’s Manual D Programmable Controller Reference Manual
D TCP/IP Ethernet Communications Station Manager D Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Manual D Host Communications Toolkit C/C++ and Visual Basic
D PLC Programming Software User’s Manual User’s Manual
D PLC Programmer TCP/IP Ethernet User’s Manual Sup- D Host Communications Drivers for Microsoft Windows
plement User’s Manual
D PLC Programmer TCP/IPWindowsR 95/Windows NTR
User’s Manual Supplement
69-8 t
GFK-0600F

September 1998
Table 6. Specifications for IC697CMM742 [
GeneralSpecifications:
Module Operating Voltage +5 VDC, +12 VDC (from PLC power supply)
ModuleCurrent Drain 2.0 Amps (+5 VDC), typical
0.5 Amps (+12 VDC), maximum when powering an external AUI transceiver
Module Operating Temperature 0_ C to +55_C (32_F to 131_F), ambient
LEDIndicators MODULE OK
LANONLINE
SERIALACTIVE
STATUS
Connectors – Station Manager (RS-232) Port: 6-pin female RJ-11
– Software Load (RS-485) Port: 15-pin female D-connector
– 10BaseT Port: 8-pin female RJ-45
– AUI Port: 15-pin female D-connector with slide-lock
– 10Base2 port: female BNC connector
Fuse, Replaceable 5 x 20mm, 250V, 1.0A, slow acting
InterfaceSpecifications:
LAN IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CDMediumAccess Control 10Mbps
Serial Ports Station Mgr Port: RS-232 DTE 300 - 19200 bps
Software Load Port: RS-485 DTE 300 - 19200 bps
Network Ports 10BaseT Port: Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
10Base2 Port: Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
AUI Port: Ethernet, IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD
(transceiver SQE must be enabled)
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to
more stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation requirements for Conformance to Standards.
Table 7. Ordering Instructions

Ethernet Interface (Type 2) for IC697 PLC (includes User ’s Manual) IC697CMM742
[Optional]: Station Manager cable for Ethernet Interface (includes Station Manager Manual) IC693CBL316
[Optional]: PLC ProgrammerTCP/IPEthernet (MS-DOS Version) IC641SWC713 or
IC641SWM713
PLC ProgrammerTCP/IPEthernet (Windows Version) IC641SWC716 or
IC641SWM716
Table 8. Required PLC Power Supplies (with +12 VDC Output)

IC697 PLC Power Supply: 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input, 55 watt (only if AUI port not in use) IC697PWR710
IC697 PLC Power Supply: 120/240VAC or 125 VDC Input, 100 watt IC697PWR711
IC697 PLC Power Supply: 24 VDC Input, 90 watt IC697PWR724
IC697 PLC Power Supply: 48 VDC Input, 90 watt IC697PWR748
t
GFK-0600F
1
70
IC697CMM712
GFK-1039B Serial Communications Module for State Logic CPU
August 1997
Serial Communications Module for State Logic CPU (IC697CMM712)
datasheet GFK-1039B
Features a47025
• Single slot Serial Communications for
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
State Logic CPU
• No programming required
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
OK
• CCM2 Protocol (slave only)
• ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor
•
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Two RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 serial ports
•
ÎÎ
Î
Reset pushbutton
ÎÎ
Î Î
COMMUNICATIONS CMM 712
• One Status LED
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
MODULE OK
COPROCESSOR
• Soft Configuration (No dip switches or jumpers)
using IC641 (MS-DOS) programming software
ÎÎ
Î
ON = OK
ÎÎ
Î
configuration function
• Simultaneous communications on both ports at up
ÎÎ
Î
PUSH TO RESTART
to 19.2 Kbaud
• Provides Serial Communications for State Logic
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
Control System CONNECTIONS
ÎÎ
Î
• All necessary memory supplied with module
INSTALL NEW
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
Functions UNPLUGGING OLD
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ÎÎ
Î
The Serial Communications Module (SCM) provides
PORT 1
I/O ports for serial communications to the State Logic
ÎÎ
Î
RS-232 OR
Control System. The State Logic CPU control system RS-422/485
ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
program uses the SCM to receive input from a serial
ÎÎ
Î
device and to transmit information to a serial device. MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL
Each module provides two ports that may each be COMMUNICA TIONS
FOR STATE LOGIC
ÎÎ
Î
configured to be RS-232 or RS-422/RS-485 ports. The CONTROL SYSTEM
ÎÎ
Î
State Logic Control System supports up to four Serial
Communications Modules providing a capacity of a
ÎÎ
Î
PORT 2
total of eight serial ports. The Serial Communications RS-232 OR
ÎÎ
Î
RS-422/485
Modules are inserted in slots 2 through 5 of rack 0.
Î
COMPATIBLE
One of the eight ports may be a CCM2 port. An ex-
Î ÎÎ
Î MODULE
ÎÎ
Î
IC697CMM712
panded form of the CCM2 protocol is supported pro- LABEL
viding read/write capability for analog input and output 44A726758-145R01
values, %M internal flags, and current States of Tasks, in

addition to the normal discrete inputs and outputs, and
variable values. Additional functionality is provided for
custom CCM communication programs.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Installation Memor y
The Serial Communications Module does not require
• Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller a memory expansion daughter board. All necessary
Installation Manual (see reference 3) and State Logic memory is provided with the module.
Control System User’s Manual (see reference 1).
• Make sure rack power is off.
a47026
• Connect the battery to either of the battery con-

nectors on the module. (See Figure 2)
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
• Install in slots 2 through 5 of rack 0 (see Figure 1).
MODULE OK
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
STATUS
INDICATOR
• Turn on power.
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
OPEN
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the REPLACEMENT
CMM 712
BATTERY
top LED stays on.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
CONNECTOR MODULE OK
ÎÎ
Î
CURRENTLY
ON = OK
INSTALLED
BATTERY
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR
PUSH TO RESTART.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
RACK 0 a47022
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
P C S S S S
S P C C C C INSTALL NEW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY BEFORE
U M M M M UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
IC697ACC701
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PORT 1
RS-232 OR
ÎÎ
Î
RS-422/485
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ
Î MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
FOR STATE LOGIC
ÎÎ
Î
CONTROL SYSTEM
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
PORT 2
RS-232 OR
RS-422/485
ÎÎ
Î
COMPATIBLE
Î
SERIAL
Î Î ÎÎ
OR MODULE
IC697CMM712
CCM2 LABEL
44A726758-145R01
DEVICES
CMM712
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration Figure 2. Serial Communications Module

User Details
70-2 t
GFK-0600F
Serial Communications Module for State Logic CPU GFK-1039B

August 1997
Table 2. Port 1 or 2 RS-422/RS-485 Signals
Î
Î
PC-AT a47023 SIGNAL
SCM PIN FUNCTION NAME I/O
Î
IC690CBL702
3PL 9 Send Data (A) SD (A) Output
RS-232
10 Request to Send (A) RTS (A) Output
(DEFAULT PORT)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
11 Clear to Send (A) CTS (A) Input
4PL 12 Termination for pin 13 - -
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
22 Request to Send (B) RST (B) Output
23 Clear to Send (B) CTS (B) Input
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ a42832
PIN PIN
Configuration
ÎÎ
DCD 1 1 SHLD
RD 2 2 TD
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
TD 3 3 RD There are no DIP switches or jumpers on this module
PC-AT DTR 4 8 DCD SCM
for configuration. Use the IC641 (MS-DOS) program-
ÎÎÎÎ
RTS 7 5 CTS
CTS 8 20 DTR ming software configuration function to configure the
GND 5 7 GND
State Logic CPU for this module. Configure this mod-
9-PIN 9-PIN 25-PIN 25-PIN ule as catalog number IC697PCM711 with Configura-
tion Mode set to PCM CFG.
The SCM is installed in slots 2 through 5 of rack 0.
The following table explains the correlation between
Figure 3. Connection to PC Serial Port the slot number and the port number used in the
State Logic program.
Serial Ports Table 3. Slot to Port Number Correlation
Both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 compatible. SLOTNUMBER PORT NUMBER
Both ports acting simultaneously can each support up 2 1 and 2
to 19.2 Kbaud full duplex data communications. 3 3 and 4
4 5 and 6
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL) 5 7 and 8
Connectors 3PL and 4PL contain signals for both RS-232 Status Indication
and RS-422/RS-485 types of communication circuits. The One Status LED is available as shown in Figure 2. This
pin-out for the RS-232 signals are per the RS-232 specifi- LED indicates the condition of the module.
cation with an exception that pins not normally used for
RS-232 are used for RS-422/RS-485 signals. Details are Controls
shown in tables 1 and 2. One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold for less
Table 1. Port 1 or 2 RS-232 Signals than 5 seconds to reset the module. Push and hold for
more than 5 seconds and the module factory default
SIGNAL configuration will be installed which may require the
PIN FUNCTION NAME I/O State Logic program to be reloaded.
1 Shield - - Batteries
3 Received Data RD Input A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
4 Request To Send RTS Output in figure 2. This battery maintains serial port configura-
5 Clear To Send CTS Input tion information when power is removed. Be sure to
7 Signal Ground 0V - install the new battery before removing the old battery.
8 Data Carrier Detect DCD Input If during power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected
20 Data Terminal Ready DTR Output the Module OK LED (top) will not stay on.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 4. References
Reference Title
1 State Logic Control System User ’s Manual
Table 5. Specifications for IC697CMM712 [
Battery:
Shelf life 10 years at 20°C (68°F)
Current Required from +5 VDC Backplane Bus 0.7 amps
stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation requirements for Conformance to Standards.

Serial Communications Module for State Logic, 12 Mhz, 20 Kbyte IC697CMM712
70-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
71
IC697CMM711
GFK-0370F Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM)
August 1997
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) (IC697CMM711)
datasheet GFK-0370F
Features a44823
D Single-Slot Module
ÎÎ Î
D SNP/SNP-X Protocol (master, slave)
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D CCM Protocol (master, slave, peer) OK
PORT 1
D
ÎÎÎ
RTU Modbus Protocol (slave only) PORT 2
D Supports connection to MS-DOSr or Windowsr

programming and configuration software package
Î
(monitor only)
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D 12 Mhz, 80C186 Microprocessor COMMUNICATIONS
COPROCESSOR
CMM 711
MODULE OK
Î
D
ÎÎ
Two RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 Serial Ports PORT 1
PORT 2
D
Î
CCM, RTU and SNP/SNP-X Available on Either or ON = OK, ACTIVE
BLINK =
Both Ports COMMUNICATING
D
Î
PUSH TO RESTART
Simultaneous Communications on Both Ports APPLICATION
(up to 9.6 Kbps, or 19.2 Kbps individually)

Î
Î
PORT 1
D High Performance Access to PLC Memory RS–232 OR

RS–422
Î
D
COMPATIBLE
Three Status LEDs

D
Î
Reset pushbutton
D
PORT 2
Î
Soft Switch Configuration (no switches or jumpers) RS–232 OR
RS–422
D COMPATIBLE
Î
No Battery Required
Î
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions
Î
COMMUNICA TIONS
COPROCESSOR
PORT 1 & 2 RS–232
Î
PIN SIGNAL
The Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) is a 1 SHIELD
2 TD
member of a family of communication modules, and
Î
3 RD
4 RTS
provides both communications control (CCM), remote 5 CTS
Î
7 GROUND
DCD *
terminal (RTU), and general IC69* communications
8
*
20 DTR
Î
PORT 1 & 2 RS–422
(SNP) functionality. CCM, RTU and SNP are available PIN SIGNAL
Î
7 GROUND
on either or both serial ports in any of nine possible 9
10
SD (A)
RTS (A) *
configurations: CCM/CCM, CCM/RTU, RTU/CCM,
Î
11 CTS (A) *
12 TERM PIN 11 *
RTU/RTU,SNP/SNP,SNP/CCM,CCM/SNP,SNP/RTU, 13 RD (A)
Î
21 SD (B)
Î
22 RTS (B) *
and RTU/SNP . 23 CTS (B)

*
Î
24 TERM PIN 25 *
Î
25 RD (B)
The CMM provides both the RS-232 and RS-485 * CONFIGURA TION
Î
DEPENDENT
Interfaces and communicates with the PLC CPU over MODULE IC697CMM711
LABEL 44A726758–124R01
the backplane. Many CMMs can be placed in a single
IC697 PLC system as illustrated by Figure 2.
Figure 1. Communications Coprocessor Module

t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
CCM: SNP/SNP-X:
Functions provided by the CMM module in the CCM SNP is the native protocol of all IC69* PLCs. SNP is a
mode of operation are: read/write of register, input and master-slave protocol, where the slave device responds
output tables (PLC memory types %R, %I and %Q); bit to requests from the master. An SNP slave device is built
set/clear of inputs and outputs (%I and %Q); read of into every IC69* PLC. Each serial port on the CMM can
scratch pad; Q sequence commands for fast reads; and be configured to provide SNP master or slave capability.
the ability to modify the diagnostic status word.
The SNP protocol on the CMM module provides read
In the master and peer CCM configurations, the CMM and write access to PLC memory (types %R, %I, %Q,
module initiates communications with remote devices %AI, %AQ, %T, %M, %P, %L, and %G), full Series 90
through application ladder program communications Datagram support, and many status and control
requests (COMREQs). functions. An Autodial feature is also provided to
control a modem attached to an SNP master port.
The SNP-X extensions to SNP provide easy-to-use, high
RTU: performance read and write access to PLC memory
(types %R, %I, %Q, %AI, %AQ, %T, %M, and %G).
The RTU mode of operation is a query/response SNP-X is especially useful for simple, high-speed data
protocol used for communicating between the CMM acquisition and control in multidrop configurations.
and a host computer. The host computer is the master
As an SNP master, the CMM module initiates
device and transmits the query to the RTU slave which
communications with remote devices through
responds to the master. In RTU mode, only slave
application ladder programs communication requests
configuration is available.
(COMREQS). An SNP master port on a CMM module
In the RTU slave protocol, the following functions are can communicate with the SNP slave port built into any
provided: read input and output tables (%I and %Q), IC69* PLC, or with other SNP slave devices.
read analog input (%AI), read register table (%R), read As an SNP slave, the CMM module provides additional
scratchpad, read exception status, force a single or communications port(s) for connection to remote
multiple output(s) (%Q), preset a single or multiple operator interface units or other SNP communications
register(s) (%R), report the device type, and perform
devices. The MS-DOS or Windows based software
loopback maintenance. package may be connected to an SNP slave port on a
CMM module for data monitoring only. Programming
and configuration of IC69* PLCs are not possible
through the CMM SNP ports.
71-2 t
GFK-0600F
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) GFK-0370F

August 1997
Systems Configuration
Figure 2 illustrates typical CMM interface installations in a IC69* PLC system.
PARALLEL a45299
ÎÎÎÎ
IC697 PLC (RACK 0) PROGRAMMER
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
P C B C C G
S P T M M B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U M M M C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ONE
METER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697 PLC (RACK 1) (GENERIC) PC (GENERIC) PC
B C
Î Î
R M MASTER PEER
M M CCM CCM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DEVICE DEVICE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ (GENERIC) PC
IC697 PLC (RACK 6)
NOTE
Î Î
B C ALL RACKS MUST
R M MASTER
M M BE AT SAME RTU
GROUND POTENTIAL DEVICE
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SNP SLAVE DEVICES
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC697 PLC
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ONE C C
P M P C B C
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î
METER U M S P T M
U M M
IC693 PLC
IC697 PLC (RACK 7) IC692 PLC
Î Î
P B
S R
M LEGEND
CPU – SELECTED CPU MODEL

BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
GBC – GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731
CMM – COMMUNICATIONS COPROCESSOR MODULE
I/O TERMINATOR (LAST RACK) PS – POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 2. Typical PLC System Configuration
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Module Physical Description User Maintenance Items
The CMM module is a single-slot module that plugs into The CMM module has the following user-accessible
either the IC697 PLC or I/O rack. elements:
Figure 3 shows the maintenance controls and indicators D Three LEDs located at the top of the module.
located on the CMM module. D Restart Pushbutton: located immediately beneath
the LEDs.
D Two Serial Ports: two 25-pin female connectors pro-
a44825
vide RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 communication.
Installation
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
to the Installation Manual. (See Related Publications
listed on page 6.)
D Make sure rack power is OFF before attempting to
Î Î install module.
Î Î
CMM 711
MODULE OK
PORT 1 D Install module in the rack (see Figure 2).
PORT 2
ON = OK, ACTIVE
BLINK =
D Turn ON power.
COMMUNICATING
PUSH TO RESTART The CMM is configurable only using the MS-DOS or

APPLICATION
Windows programming software package.
PORT 1
RS–232 OR
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
Status Indication
PORT 2 Three Status LEDs are available as shown in Figure 3.
RS–232 OR
RS–422 The top LED indicates the condition of the module. The
COMPATIBLE
bottom two LEDs indicate activity at the serial ports:
MODULE FUNCTION Port 1 LED indicates activity on port 1; Port 2 LED
COMMUNICA TIONS
COPROCESSOR
indicates activity on port 2.
PORT 1 & 2 RS–232
PIN
1
SIGNAL
SHIELD
2
3
TD
RD
4
5
RTS
CTS top LED stays on.
7 GROUND
8 *
DCD
20 *
DTR
PORT 1 & 2 RS–422
PIN SIGNAL
7 GROUND
Pushbutton Control
9 SD (A)
10 RTS*(A)
11
12
CTS*(A)
TERM*PIN 11 One pushbutton is provided. Push to reinitialize
13 RD (A)
21 SD (B) communications at both serial ports.
22 RTS*(B)
23 CTS* (B)
24 TERM *PIN 25
25 RD (B)
* CONFIGURA TION
DEPENDENT Serial Ports
MODULE IC697CMM711
LABEL 44A726758–124R01
Both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 compatible.

CMM 711
Both ports acting simultaneously can each provide up
to 9.6 Kbps of full duplex data communications, or up to
19.2 Kbps individually.
Figure 3. CMM Module - User Details
71-4 t
GFK-0600F
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) GFK-0370F

August 1997
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL): Table 2. Port 1 or 2: RS-422/RS-485
Signal
Connectors 3PL and 4PL contain signals for both RS-232
Pin Function Name I/O
and RS-422/RS-485 types of communication circuits.
The pin assignment for the RS-232 signals are per the 9 Send Data (A) SD (A) Output
RS-232 specification with an exception that pins not 10 Request To Send (A) RTS (A) Output
normally used for RS-232 are used for RS-422/RS-485
signals. Refer to Tables 1 and 2. 11 Clear To Send (A) CTS (A) Input
Table 1. Port 1 or 2: RS-232 21 Send Data (B) SD (B) Output
22 Request To Send (B) RTS (B) Output
Signal
23 Clear To Send (B) CTS (B) Input
Pin Function Name I/O
1 Shield - -
3 Received Data RD Input

4 Request To Send RTS Output Configuration
5 Clear To Send CTS Input There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this board
7 Signal Ground 0V - for configuration. However, the board must be
configured before operation using the MS-DOS or
8 Data Carrier Detect DCD Input
Windows software package. Refer to the Related
20 Data Terminal Ready DTR Output Publications listed on page 6.
t
GFK-0600F
August 1997
Table 3. Related Publications
Reference Title
4 PLC Serial Communications User ’s Manual
5 Using the Windows Programmer (GFK-1295)
Table 4. Module Specifications [
Serial Ports RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 compatible

Current Required from +5V backplane bus 0.7 amps
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. Forinstallations
requiring compliance to more stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation
requirements for Conformance to Standards.
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) IC697CMM711
71-6 t
GFK-0600F
1
72
IC697RCM711
GFK-0834D Redundancy Communications Module
November 1999
Redundancy Communications Module (IC697RCM711)
datasheet GFK-0834D
Features a47004
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D High Speed Parallel Bus Expansion Interface
ÎÎÎÎÎ
D Supports Hot Standby and Enhanced Hot Standby
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CPU Redundancy system configurations
OK
D Provides path for shared I/O and synchronizing
LOCAL READY
LOCAL ACTIVE
message between Primary and Secondary PLCs
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
REMOTE READY
D Five LED indicators for board and system status REMOTE ACTIVE
D Pushbutton switch for manual switch from active

Î RCM 711
Î
to backup unit REDUNDANCY
BOARD OK
D Software configuration using MS-DOSr
Î
LOCAL SYSTEM
COMMUNICATIONS READY
MODULE LOCAL SYSTEM
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ACTIVE
programming software configuration function
Î
REMOTE SYSTEM
READY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
REMOTE SYSTEM
Functions ACTIVE
ON = TRUE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
DEPRESS 1 SEC.
TO SWITCH ACTIVE
This Redundancy Communications Module (RCM) CPU (MIN 10 SECS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
BETWEEN SWITCHES)
provides a path for a synchronizing message from the MODULE FUNCTION
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
active to the backup unit which is used to synchronize the REDUNDANCY
COMMUNICA TIONS
two CPUs in a Hot Standby or Enhanced Hot Standby
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
MODULE.
HIGH SPEED INTERFACE
BETWEEN HOT
CPU Redundancy system. It also provides the path for the STANDBY REDUNDANCY
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
SUPPORTED CPUs.
transfer of shared I/O data between the two units. The CONNECT TO END
OF EXPANSION BUS
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
physical connection between units in a redundancy
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
system can have up to 25 feet (7.5 meters) total of EXPANSION
PORT IN
(TOWARDS CPU)
interconnecting cable. The CPUs for Hot Standby CPU
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
TO BEM711
OR BEM713
Redundancy systems can be either IC697CPU780, (USE TERMINATED
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
CABLE CBL811
IC697CGR935, or IC697CGR772. OR CBL826)
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
The module occupies a single slot and has two 50 FT. MAXIMUM
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
connectors, the top connector is for attachment to the CABLE LENGTH FROM
BEM 713 TO TO RCM711
upstream BTM or BRM and the bottom connector is

unused. The RCM can be installed in slots 2 through 9
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
of rack 0 (CPU rack).
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ UNUSED PORT
Î ÎÎ
DO NOT INSTALL
Five green LEDs provide status indication of the health of CABLE OR
TERMINATOR
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
the RCM module and monitor the control status of the
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system. These LEDS are
labeled BOARD OK, LOCAL READY, LOCAL ACTIVE,
REMOTE READY, and REMOTE ACTIVE. Local refers to
the system that the RCM is in; remote is the other system
connected through the expansion bus and is
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MODULE
IC697RCM711
LABEL:
44A726758-136R02
automatically configured by the system to be in slot 1 of

rack 7. Rack 7, however, is not available for physical I/O.
A pushbutton on the module allows you to manually
switch control from the active to the backup unit (if the
backup unit is ready) which allows maintenance of the
previously active unit while the system is on-line.
t
GFK-0600F
November 1999
Installation removed with minimal disruption of the expansion

bus, especially when one or more expansion racks are
D Installation should not be attempted without included in the system.
referring to the either the Hot Standby CPU
Redundancy User’s Guide or Enhanced Hot Standby
CPU Redundancy User’s Guide and the applicable Expansion Rack Attachment
Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Using cable IC600WDXXX (where XXX is length in
D Make sure rack power is off. feet as shown in Table 3) a Bus Transmitter Module
(BTM) in the CPU rack connects to a BRM in an
D Install in any slot of rack 0 (except slot 1).
expansion rack. Additional expansion racks are added
D Connect applicable cable to module (either by daisy-chaining cabling between BRMs with the
IC697CBL811 or IC697CBL826). RCM always connected last.
D Turn on power.
An example of a Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Removing a Module
configuration with two CPU racks is shown in Figure 1.
This configuration assumes that no local I/O requiring
expansion racks is included in the system.
I/O Bus Termination D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
To allow for easy replacement of a faulty RCM, it
should be located at the end of the expansion bus and
connected using a special terminated cable - catalog
numbers IC697CBL811 (10 feet (3 meters)) or D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
IC697CBL826 (25 feet (7.5 meters)). This cable can be it from the rack.
a47010
P C B R G P C B R G
S P T C B S P T C B
U M M C U M M C
31 30
*
*
other Genius devices

REMOTE DROP
L L L
O S C O O O O O O O O
O O A
C C C N
K K K N
E
CPU = IC697CPU780 R
IC697CGR935
IC697CGR772
RCM = IC697RCM711
* = IC697CBL811/CBL826
Figure 1. Location of Redundancy Communications Modules in a Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System
72-2 t
GFK-0600F
Redundancy Communications Module GFK-0834D

November 1999
Status Indications a47011
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
The five green LEDs at the top of the module provide
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
status information as shown in figure 3. The top LED
(BOARD OK) is ON when power is applied, the board
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
STATUS
is configured, there were no diagnostic failures in the
ÎÎÎ
Î
LEDS
RCM, no diagnostic failures when establishing
ÎÎ
Î
communications (the link) with the other RCM, and
no failures in communications on the link.
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
UNIT
RCM 711
SELECTION
ÎÎ
Î
BOARD OK
ÎÎ Î
PUSHBUTTON
The other LEDs (LOCAL READY, LOCAL ACTIVE, LOCAL SYSTEM
READY
ÎÎ
REMOTE READY, and REMOTE ACTIVE) indicate the
Î
LOCAL SYSTEM
ACTIVE
control status of the Primary and Secondary units in a REMOTE SYSTEM
ÎÎ
Î
READY
REMOTE SYSTEM
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system. For detailed ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
ON = TRUE
descriptions of each of these LEDs, refer to the Hot DEPRESS 1 SEC.
TO SWITCH ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide, or the Enhanced EXPANSION CPU (MIN 10 SECS
BETWEEN SWITCHES)
PORT IN
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide.
ÎÎ
Î
(TOWARDS CPU) MODULE FUNCTION
REDUNDANCY
ÎÎ
Î
COMMUNICA TIONS
MODULE.
HIGH SPEED INTERFACE
Unit Selection Pushbutton BETWEEN HOT.
ÎÎ
Î
STANDBY REDUNDANCY
SUPPORTED CPUs.
CONNECT TO END
ÎÎ
Î
OF EXPANSION BUS
A pushbutton on the module, which when depressed
for at least 1 second then released, allows you to
ÎÎ
Î
EXPANSION
manually switch control from the active unit to the PORT IN
ÎÎ
Î
(TOWARDS CPU)
TO BEM711
backup unit if both units are ready. After switching OR BEM713
ÎÎ
Î
(USE TERMINATED
roles, another switch is not allowed by the system for CABLE CBL811
OR CBL826)
ÎÎ
Î
at least 10 seconds.
ÎÎ
Î
50 FT. MAXIMUM
CABLE LENGTH FROM
UNUSED BEM 713 TO TO RCM711
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
UNUSED PORT
DO NOT INSTALL
CABLE OR
TERMINATOR
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
MODULE
IC697RCM711
LABEL:
44A726758-136R02
Figure 2. Redundancy Communications Module

User Details
t
GFK-0600F
November 1999
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide
5 Enhanced Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide
Table 2. Specifications for IC697RCM711 [

Expansion Interface Specification
Effective Data Rate 500 Kbytes/sec
Electrical Isolation Non-isolated differential communication.
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. Forinstallations
requiring compliance to more stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation
Requirements for Conformance to Standards.

RedundancyCommunications Module IC697RCM711
CPU modules for Hot Standby CPU Redundancy IC697CPU780
IC697CGR772
IC697CGR935
Terminator Plug IC697ACC702
I/O Cable: 5 feet (1.5m), 10 feet (3m), 25 feet (7.5m), 50 feet (15m) IC600WD005/010/025/050
I/O Cable with Built-In Termination - 10 feet (3 meters) IC697CBL811
I/O Cable with Built-In Termination - 25 feet (7.5 meters) IC697CBL826
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for
price and availability.
72-4 t
GFK-0600F
1
Programmer Interface Modules
73
IC640WMI910/310
GFK-0166F Work Station Interface (XT, AT)
July 1995
Programmer Interface Modules
Work Station Interface (XT, AT) (IC640WMI910/310)
datasheet GFK-0166F
D Features in an IC640 computer or an IBMr -compatible XT or
D High Performance Programmer Interface AT. It requires one full AT or XT slot.
D Parallel and Serial Interface to IC69* PLCs

D Resides in IC640 computer (or IBM PC, XT, AT) Installation
D Uses PLC address space normally used by COM2 D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
* IC697 or IC693 PLC ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installa-
tion Manual.
D Make sure programmer power is off.
Functions D Install in an IC640 computer as shown in figures 1
The Work Station Interface provides a parallel or seri- and 2.
al interface to the IC69* family of PLCs. It is installed D Turn on power.
Î
a42713
ÎÎ BTM
ÎÎÎ
WSI
PARALLEL
Î
PARALLEL
CABLE
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ PROGRAMMER
Figure 1. Interconnection of IC640 Computer, Parallel Work Station Interface and Bus Transmitter Module
R IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Programmer Interface Modules
GFK-0166F Work Station Interface (XT, AT)
July 1995
Cable Description
a44735
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î MOTHER
The parallel attachment (IC697 PLC only) is to the top
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BOARD connector on the Bus Transmitter Module through
cable IC600WD005 or equivalent as shown in figures 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î and 3.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î Î
Warning
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
DAUGHTER
BOARD The IC697 PLC rack and programmer ground
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
connections must be at the same ground
PARALLEL OR SERIAL OPERATION
IC640WMI910
potential. Incorrect wiring will result in
damage to the WSI.
The serial attachment is to the serial port connector on
a44736
the IC697 PLC CPU or to the serial port on the IC693
MOTHER power supply.
BOARD
Î
Î
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
PARALLEL a42709
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
P C B G P
S P T B C
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
U M C M
SERIAL OPERATION ONLY
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC640WMI310
ONE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
a42747 METER IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
WSI RACK 1
BOARD MOUNTING
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
SCREW
ÎÎÎ Î
B
MOUNTING R
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
PLATE M
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
IC66*
REAR OF BLOCK
COMPUTER
ÎÎÎ
BRM – BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BTM – BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
GBC /NBC – IC66* BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PCM – PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
RECEPTACLE
* – IC660 or IC661 PRODUCTS
ON MOTHERBOARD
Figure 2. WSI Installation in IC640 Computer Figure 3. Typical IC697 PLC System Configuration
73-2 t
GFK-0600F
Programmer Interface Modules 3
Work Station Interface (XT, AT) GFK-0166F

July 1995
Table 1. References
Reference Title
4 MegaBasic Programming Language Reference Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC640WMI910/IC640WMI310 [
Parallel InterfaceSpecification
Effective Data Rate 500 Kbytes/sec ond (parallel)
Time to store 8k word program 1 - 2 seconds
Serial InterfaceSpecification
Maximum Data Rate 19.2Kbytes/second
RS485 Maximum Cable Length 4000 feet (1200 meters)

Work Station Interface, Parallel IC640WMI910
Cable, Parallel, 5 feet (1.5 meters) IC600WD005A (5 ft. cable)
Work Station Interface Board, Serial Only (IC693) IC640WMI310
Cable, Serial (XT) IC690CBL701, 10 feet (3 meters)
Cable, Serial (AT) IC697CBL702, 10 feet (3 meters)
t
GFK-0600F
1
Interface Modules
74
ICIC640WMI920/320
GFK-0281D Work Station Interface (PC/2)
July 1995
Work Station Interface (PC/2) (ICIC640WMI920/320)
datasheet GFK-0281D
Features
D High performance programmer interface
D Combination parallel and serial interface to IC69*
a44733
family of PLCs
D Resides in an IC647 computer or an IBMr Personal
System/2r(PS/2r) computer ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MOTHER
D Standard Micro-Channel R bus interface

BOARD
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Configured to use PS/2 COM2 assignments
D Includes option diskette for use with standard PS/2
computers
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Functions
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
This Work Station Interface provides a parallel or seri-
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
al interface from the IC647 or PS/2 computer to the
Î
DAUGHTER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
BOARD
IC69* family of PLCs.
Location in System
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL OR SERIAL OPERATION
ÎÎ
IC647WMI920
This Work Station Interface when used as a parallel

interface is connected to the Bus Transmitter Module
in an IC697 PLC system as shown in figure 1.
a43562
Î BTM
ÎÎ
WSI
Î
PARALLEL
a44734
PARALLEL
CABLE
MOTHER
ÎÎÎÎÎ BOARD
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ PROGRAMMER Î
Î
Figure 1. IC647 Computer, Parallel Work Station SERIAL OPERATION ONLY
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC647WMI320
Interface and Bus Transmitter Module
R IBM, Personal System/2, PS/2 and Micro-Channel are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Interface Modules
July 1995
When used as a serial interface to an IC697 PLC sys- Installation - IC647 Computer
tem or to an IC693 PLC system, the Work Station In-
terface is connected as shown in figures 2 and 3. 1. Turn power OFF. (Power OFF IC647 computer
and attached devices).
Î
a43590
2. Unplug all computer power cords from the electri-
CPU cal outlets. Make a note of all cables connected to
WSI
ÎÎ the rear of the system unit before disconnecting
ÎÎÎ
SERIAL them.
Î
3. Lay the system unit on its keyboard side.
SERIAL 4. Loosen the bottom rear cover screws with a coin or
CABLE flat blade screwdriver.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ a43353
ÎÎÎÎÎPROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ WORKMASTER
Figure 2. IC647 Computer, Serial Work Station

Interface and IC697 PLC
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ a43060
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
5. Open the connector housing door 1 by moving
WSI
the side of the door in the direction indicated by 2 .
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SERIAL
IC693 PLC
SERIAL a43354
ÎÎÎÎÎ
CABLE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IC647 Computer
Figure 3. IC647 Computer, Serial Work Station

Interface and IC693 PLC
74-2 t
GFK-0600F
Interface Modules 3
Work Station Interface (PC/2) GFK-0281D

July 1995
6. Loosen the rear cover screw with a coin. 8. Before installing the Work Station Interface board
into the upper expansion slot, you must remove
the expansion slot cover. To do this, 1 loosen the
thumbscrew (a coin may be used). Slide the ex-
pansion slot cover 2 outward, and push it to the
a43355 left. You may discard the expansion slot cover.
a43360
7. Move the handle to the carry position. Hold the

rear cover as shown in the next figure, and lift the
cover while firmly pushing the bottom at position 9. Align the Work Station Interface board 1 with the
3 to release the first latch. Then lift the cover upper slot as shown in the next figure. Position
while strongly pushing the bottom at positions 4 , the adapter support bracket into the holding
5 , 6 , 7 to release the other latches. bracket 3 before pressing the Work Station Inter-
face into the expansion slot connector. 2 Secure
the Work Station Interface in place by using the
thumbscrew.
a43362
a43356
t
GFK-0600F
4 Interface Modules
July 1995
10. Replace the cover by putting its left side on the 12. Tighten the bottom rear cover screws with a coin.
system unit and pushing its right side down until it Again, do not overtighten the screws.
clicks in place.
. a43359
a43357
13. After installing the Work Station Interface, you

must run the option diskette provided with the
IC647 computer. Detailed information on using
the option diskette can be found in Chapter 2 of
11. Lock the rear cover onto the system unit by turn- the PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation.
ing the rear cover screw with a coin. Do not over-
tighten the screw. a43034
Î
WSI
BOARDS
Î
RETAINING
BRACKET
Î ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
a43358
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
MICRO–CHANNEL SOCKET
FOR WSI BOARD
BOARD RETAINING THUMB–SCREW

MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
Figure 4. Detail of Work Station Interface Installation

in IC647 Computer
74-4 t
GFK-0600F
Interface Modules 5

July 1995
PARALLEL a43563 the CPU module behind the hinged door, through an
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 0
ÎÎÎ PROGRAMMER available 10 foot (3 meters) serial interface cable -
ÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
IC647CBL704, or equivalent
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
P C B P G
Î
S P T C B
U M M C
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
or
N
B
Warning
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
C
ONE
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
RACK 1 The IC697 PLC and IC693 PLC rack and
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
programmer ground connections must be
B
at the same ground potential. Incorrect
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
R
M
wiring will result in damage to the Work
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ IC66*
I/O BLOCK
Station Interface module.
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
SERIAL a43591
RACK 7
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0 PROGRAMMER
NOTE
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
B CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET P C B P G
R (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST S P T C B
M
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
U M M C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM). or
N
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ONE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
RACK 1
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Figure 5. Typical IC697 PLC System Configuration
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
B
(Parallel Interface) R
M
Installation - Personal System/2 Computer

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
1. The Work Station Interface requires one full Micro-
Channel slot.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
RACK 7
NOTE
2. The Work Station Interface requires one full Micro-
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
Channel slot. B
R
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
M GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
3. After installing the Work Station Interface in your
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
PS/2, you must run the option diskette as de-
scribed in the reference guide for your computer.
Cable Description Figure 6. Typical IC697 PLC System Configuration (Se-

The parallel connection to the IC697 PLC is to the top rial Interface)
connector on the Bus Transmitter Module through an
Serial connection to the IC693 PLC is to the serial port
available 10 foot (3 meters) cable, IC647CBL703 - or
connector located behind the hinged door on the right
equivalent, as shown in figure 5.
front of the power supply, also through a 10 foot (3
The serial connection to the IC697 PLC (see figure 6) meters) serial interface cable, IC647CBL704 - or equiv-
is to the serial port connector, located at the bottom of alent, as shown in figure 7.
t
GFK-0600F
6 Interface Modules
July 1995
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
IC647 Computer CPU BASEPLATE a43083
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î SERIAL C
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î
P
U NOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
TOTAL MAXIMUM
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
DISTANCE FROM
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION MAIN BASEPLATE
TO LAST EXPANSION
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
BASEPLATE IS
Î
ÎÎ 50 FEET (15 METERS)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ I/O EXPANSION CABLES
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION IC693CBL300 3 FEET (.9 METERS)
ÎÎ
IC693CBL301 6 FEET (I.8 METERS)
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
Î ÎÎ
Î
IC693CBL302 50 FEET (15 METERS)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
I/O BUS
Î ÎÎ
Î
TERMINATOR
PLUG
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
1C693ACC307
Figure 7. Typical IC693 PLC System Configuration (Serial Interface)
Table 1. References
Reference Title
1 PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation
2 Programming Software User ’s Manual (for IC697 PLC)
3 Programmable Controller Reference Manual (for IC697 PLC)
4 Programming Software User ’s Manual (for IC693 PLC)
5 Programming Software Reference Manual (for IC693 PLC)
7 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User ’s Manual
8 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (for IC697 PLC)
9 Programmable Controller Installation Manual (for IC693 PLC)
74-6 t
GFK-0600F
Interface Modules 7

July 1995
Table 2. Specifications for IC647WMI920/320 [
Parallel InterfaceSpecification
Effective Data Rate 500Kbytes/second
Serial InterfaceSpecification
Maximum Data Rate 19.2KBytes/second
RS485 Maximum cable length 4000 feet (1200)

Work Station Interface Board, Parallel/Serial IC647WMI920
Work Station Interface Board, Serial (IC693 PLC only) IC647WMI320
Parallel Interface Cable Assembly, 10 feet (3 meters) IC647CBL703
Serial Interface Cable Assembly, 10 feet (3 meters) IC647CBL704
t
GFK-0600F
1
75 Accessories
GEK-83517E Cables - I/O

November 1993
Accessories
Cables - I/O
datasheet GEK-83517E
Features system. The cable is shielded and the individual

twisted-pair wires are color-coded as shown in Table 1.
D Convenient factory-assembled cables The cable is available in lengths ranging from 2 feet
D Available in lengths from 2 to 500 feet (0.6 to 150 (0.6 meters) to 500 feet (150 meters); however, only
meters) for IC600 Programmable Controllers the 5, 10, 25, and 50 foot (1.5, 3.0, 7.5, and 15 meter)
lengths can be used in an IC697 PLC system.
D Available in lengths from 5 to 50 feet (1.5 to 15
meters) for IC697 Programmable Controllers In an IC600 PLC system, the I/O cable extends the
parallel I/O bus from rack to rack within a Local Central
D Selection of lengths provide flexibility in IC600 Processor Unit (CPU) station or Remote I/O station. It
PLC and IC697 PLC installations can also connect a Local I/O station to another Local I/O
station or to a CPU station, or it can connect racks within
D Color-coded twisted pairs simplify troubleshooting
a Remote I/O station.
In an IC697 PLC system, the I/O cable extends the
Functions parallel I/O bus from rack to rack in a system requiring
expansion racks.
The I/O (Input/Output) cable, consisting of 16
twisted-pair wires and two connectors provides
electrical continuity for the parallel I/O bus in either an
IC600 or an IC697 Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) system. The same cable can be used in either
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ a44789
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎ Î Î
Figure 1. I/O Cable for IC600 and IC697 PLCs
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GEK-83517E Cables - I/O
November 1993
Installation connector on the Bus Receiver Module is connected

through an I/O cable to the top connector on the Bus
Installation should not be attempted without referring Receiver Module in the next downstream expansion
to the applicable installation manual for your PLC, rack. This process is continued until the desired number
either the IC697 Programmable Controller Installation of expansion racks are installed in the system
Manual, IC600 Installation and Maintenance User’s (maximum of 7 expansion racks).
Manual, or IC600+ User’s Manual).
The following constraints should be observed when
IC600 PLC Installation using this cable to interconnect the modules in an IC697
I/Oexpansion system.
Note that the cable has one male connector and one
1. The total length of all interconnecting I/O cables
female connector. As a general rule, the male connector
from the Bus Transmitter Module to the last Bus
on the cable connects to the upstream module and the
Receiver Module can be no more than 50 feet (15
female connector to the downstream module.
meters) maximum.
Upstream is defined as being toward the CPU,
downstream is away from the CPU. 2. For proper operation all racks must be at the same
ground potential (8 racks maximum, CPU rack
The specific IC600 modules which use this cable are: I/O
plus seven expansion racks).
Control, Auxiliary I/O Control, I/O Receiver, Advanced
I/O Receiver, I/O Transmitter, and the downstream
Twisted-Pair Color Codes
(bottom connector) port of a Remote I/O Receiver
module. After being attached to their respective mating The following table lists the pin configuration, with wire
connectors all connectors should be secured using the color codes, for the I/O cable.
furnished screws.
Table 1. I/O Cable Twisted-Pair Color Codes
The following constraints should be observed when
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
using this cable to interconnect the modules in an IC600
or IC600+ I/O system. 1 no connection 20 gray-red
2 blue-white 21 red-gray
1. The total cable length connecting the racks 3 white-blue 22 blue-black
within an I/O station should be no more than 50 4 orange-white 23 black-blue
feet (15 meters) without I/O transmitters. 5 white-orange 24 orange-black
2. The cable length between a Local I/O station and 6 green-white 25 black-orange
the CPU station, or another Local I/O station 7 white-green 26 green-black
should be no more than 500 feet (150 meters) with 8 brown-white 27 black-green
I/Otransmitters. 9 white-brown 28 brown-black
10 gray-white 29 black-brown
3. The parallel I/O bus between any Local I/O station 11 white-gray 30 gray-black
and the CPU rack should interface through no 12 blue-red 31 black-gray
more than four I/O Transmitter modules (up to 13 red-blue 32 blue-yellow
four I/O transmitters between the CPU and the 14 orange-red 33 yellow-blue
most distant I/O rack). 15 red-orange 34 no connection
16 green-red 35 no connection
IC697 PLC Installation 17 red-green 36 no connection
The male connector on the cable connects to the female 18 brown-red 37 shield
(bottom) connector on the Bus Transmitter Module 19 red-brown
(BTM) and the female connector on the opposite end of
the cable connects to the male (top) connector on the
Bus Receiver Module (BRM) in the first expansion rack.
Note
Each additional expansion rack is connected by Pin connections are the same at both ends of
attaching an I/O cable from the top connector on the the connector.
Bus Receiver Module in the expansion rack to the
bottom connector in an (upstream) rack. The bottom
75-2 t
GFK-0600F
Accessories 3
Cables - I/O GEK-83517E

November 1993
Ordering Information

I/O Cable, 2 feet (0.6 meters) IC600WD002A
I/O Cable, 5 feet (1.5 meters) IC600WD005A [
I/O Cable, 50 feet (15 meters) IC600WD050A [
I/O Cable, 100 feet (30 meters) IC600WD100A
I/O Cable, 500 feet (150 meters IC600WD500A
[ These cables may be used in both IC600 and IC697 PLC installations; all
others are for use in an IC600 system only.
Catalog Number Revision Suffix

The equipment listed above having the catalog numbers shown and the same equipment having a higher alpha suffix
is designed for listing by UL for use as auxiliary control devices. The equipment is a direct replacement for equipment
having the same catalog number but a lower, or no, alpha suffix.
This symbol on the nameplate means the product is listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
R (UL Standard No 508, Industrial Control Equipment, part XVII Programmable Controller).
t
GFK-0600F
1
76
Accessories
IC697CBL700/713
GFK-0153G Cable - Power Supply Extension
January 1997
Cable - Power Supply Extension (IC697CBL700/713)
datasheet GFK-0153G
Features A single power supply can provide power for two

racks under the following conditions:
D Allows two racks to operate from a single power 1. Only +5 volt power is required in the second rack,
supply (this feature available with 55 and 100 and the total power required by both racks is with-
watt AC/DC power supplies and the 90 watt 24 in the capability of the supply.
and 48 VDC power supplies). 2. The current drawn by the second rack is less than
D Cable includes both +5 volt power and control 5.2 amperes.
signals. 3. Any IC697 module can be used in second rack slots
2 through 9 except those that require +12 volts.
D Uses a 9 pin D-type connector.
4. The two racks must be mounted in close proximity,
D The cable kit includes cover plate for unused as limited by the 3-foot (1 meter) length of the
power supply slot in second rack. cable.
Functions Note
The Power Supply Extension Cable allows operation This cable carries power and power
of two IC697CHS racks from a single power supply. sequencing signals only. Inter-rack
The cable carries the ACFAIL and SYSRESET signals, communication and bus interface
as well as the +5 volt power bus to the second rack. modules must be provided separately.
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Î ÎÎ
a42134
INSTALL CABLE SO
Î ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
THAT THE INDICATED
END IS SUPPLYING
THE POWER POWER
SUPPLY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ FIRST
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
RACK
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
Î ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
FACE
PLATE
ÎÎÎ Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î SECOND
Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î Î
RACK
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-0153G Cable - Power Supply Extension
January 1997
Operation of the Power Supply Cable Connection

The 55 and 100 Watt AC/DCPower Supply Modules The power supply cable terminates in two 9-pin D-type
can operate from either 120 VAC or 240 VAC nominal connectors. The mating connector on each rack back-
inputs or from a nominal 125 VDC source. The AC plane is accessed through an opening in the left side
input voltage range can be from 90 to 264 volts AC, 50 panel of the rack. Approximately 6 inches (152.4mm) of
to 60 Hz; the 125 VDC input can be from +100 to clearance on the left side of the rack must be allowed
+150 VDC. The 90 Watt 24 VDC Power Supply Mod- for access to the connector.
ule can operate from a DC input of +21 to +32 VDC.
The 90 Watt 48 VDC Power Supply Module can oper-
ate from a DC input of +35 to +60 VDC. Both over- a44730
voltage and overcurrent protection (as described be-
low) apply to both the base rack and the auxiliary
Î
rack.
Overvoltage Protection Î
An electronic shutdown circuit protects against volt-
ages exceeding 6.2 volts. A back-up voltage clamp is
Î
provided to protect against sustained overvoltage
conditions due to either external influences or internal
faults. Overvoltage due to internal faults may cause
the fuse to open. For short term overvoltage condi-
tions, normal operation will resume when the cause is
removed.
Overcurrent Protection
An electronic current limit is provided on each of the
Î
ÎÎ
DC outputs. An overload on any output will cause
the voltage to collapse and may cause the other out-
put voltages to collapse.
Normal operation will resume after removal of the
overload. Some component cooling time may be re-
quired before normal operation resumes.
Warning
Power Supply Cover Plate
Always turn power off before connecting
A cover plate is included with the cable kit for the or disconnecting the cable. Connecting or
power supply slot in the second rack. It mounts to the disconnecting the cable with power
rack using four M2.5 screws (included). applied may cause unsafe operation.

Power Supply Extension Cable IC697CBL700/713
76-2 t
GFK-0600F
1
77
Accessories
IC690CBL701/702/705
GFK-0359F Cables - PCM to Programmer
July 1995
Cables - PCM to Programmer (IC690CBL701/702/705)
datasheet GFK-0359F
Features
IC640 COMPUTER OR PC-XT
Î
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
a42829
D Cable* - Catalog number IC690CBL701 provides PCM
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î Î
required signal connections between a Program- IC690CBL701
mable Coprocessor Module (PCM) and an IC640 3PL
industrial computer or an IBMr PC-XT Personal
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î Î
RS–232
(DEFAULT PORT)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Computer (PC).
4PL
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Cable*- Catalog number IC690CBL702 provides
required signal connections between a PCM and
an IBM PC-AT PC.
D Cable*- Catalog number IC690CBL705 provides
required signal connections between a PCM and Figure 1. PCM to IC640 Computer or PC-XT
an IC647 computer or an IBM PS/2r PC. Personal Computer
D Prewired cables allow easy connection between
Î
the module and the programmer.
* The above cables can also be used with the PC–AT a42830
IC697ADC701 and IC697GDC701 modules.
Functions
IC690CBL702
RS–232
PCM
3PL Î
(DEFAULT PORT)
These cables provide the required signal connections

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4PL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
between the RS-232 serial port on a PCM and a serial
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
port on the programmer. The programmer can be an
IC647 computer or PS/2 PC, an IC640 computer, or
PC-XT PC (or compatible), or a PC-AT PC (or compat-
ible).
Figure 2. PCM to PC-AT Personal Computer
Installation
ring to the Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and the manual for the module to be con-
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC647 COMPUTER OR PS/2
ÎÎÎÎÎ
PCM Î
a43744
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
IC690CBL705
nected to the programmer. 3PL
RS–232
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
D Have the proper cable for your programmer. (DEFAULT PORT)
D
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
Connect the cable’s 25-pin male connector to the 4PL
top serial port female connector on the front of the
D
PCM module.
Connect the cable’s 9-pin female connector to the
male RS-232 connector (serial port) on the selected
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
programming device. Figure 3. PCM to IC647 or PS/2 Computer
rIBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-0359F Cables - PCM to Programmer
July 1995
Cable Description Caution

Each of the cables physically appear the same, the dif-
ference being the internal pin connections. Cables are The IC697 PLC rack or IC693 PLC base-
10 feet (3 meters) in length. Specifications for the plate that contains the PCM, and the pro-
cables are provided in Table 2. Wiring information is grammer ground connections must be at
provided in Figures 4, 5, and 6. the same ground potential. Incorrect wir-
ing will result in damage to the program-
mer or the PCM.
ÎÎ PIN PIN
Î
a42831
ÎÎÎ TD 2 3 RD
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ RD 3 2 TD
Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
RTS 4 5 CTS
IC640 OR PC-XT PCM
ÎÎÎ Î
COMPUTER
CTS 5 20 DTR
DCD 8 8 DCD
ÎÎÎ DTR
GND
9
7
1
7
SHLD
GND ÎÎ
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
Figure 4. Wiring for PCM to IC640 or PC-XT Cable (IC690CBL701)
Î ÎÎ
PIN PIN a42832
Î DCD 1 1 SHLD
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
RD 2 2 TD
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
TD 3 3 RD
PC-AT DTR 4 8 DCD PCM
Î RTS 7 5 CTS
ÎÎ
Î
Î CTS
GND
8
5
20
7
DTR
GND ÎÎ
Î
Figure 5. Wiring for PCM to PC-AT Cable (IC690CBL702)
Î PIN PIN
Î a44033
Î TD 2 3 RD
Î
Î RD 3 2 TD
Î
Î Î
IC647 OR PS/2 RTS 4 5 CTS
COMPUTER CTS 5 20 DTR PCM
Î DCD 8 8 DCD
Î
Î Î
DTR 20 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND

Figure 6. Wiring for PCM to IC647 Computer or PS/2 Cable (IC690CBL705)

77-2 t
GFK-0600F
Accessories 3
Cables - PCM to Programmer GFK-0359F

July 1995
Table 1. Other Documents to be Consulted
Title
Programming Software User’s Manual for IC641 Software Products
Programmable Controller Reference Manual for IC697 Products
Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual
Programmable Controller Installation Manual for IC697 Products
Programmable Controller Installation Manual for IC693 Products
Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
Graphics Display System User’s Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IB690CBL701/702/705 [
CableLength 10 feet (3 meters)

Connectors
PCM Side 25-pin D-subminiature type: AMP 205208-1 or equivalent
ProgrammerSide 9-pin D-subniniature type: AMP 205203-1 or equivalent
CabaleClamps
25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
9-pin AMP 207908-1 or equivalent
Cable Type 6 conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (0.22 mm2)
type - Belden 9536 or equivalent

Cable, PCM to IC640 or PC-XT Computer- 10 feet (3 meters) IC690CBL701
Cable, PCM to PC-AT Computer - 10 feet (3 meters) IC690CBL702
Cable, PCM to IC647 or PS/2 Computer- 10 feet (3 meters) IC690CBL705
t
GFK-0600F
1
Accessories
78
IC697ACC903
GFK-1663A RS-485 Port Isolator
April 1999
Accessories
RS-485 Port Isolator (IC697ACC903)
datasheet GFK-1663A
The IC690ACC903 RS-485 Port Isolator replaces the IC655CMM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter (also referred to
as the “Brick”). The device features 500 volts of isolation in a compact package servicing all IC693, IC697, and
IC200 PLC product lines. The product connects directly to an RS-485 serial port or though a short extender cable
provided with the device. The extension cable is intended for use in applications where direct connection to the
port is obstructed by surrounding equipment or when it is not acceptable for the device to protrude from a PLC
module. The Port Isolator can operate in either single- or multi-drop mode, which is selected by a slide switch on
the top of the module.
The Port Isolator provides the following features:
D Four opto-isolated signal channels: SD, RD, RTS, and CTS
D Electrical compatibility with RS-485
D Single- or multi-drop operation
D Input termination consistent with standard for serial channels
D A 5V DC/DC converter for power isolation
D Hot insertion is supported
FRONT VIEW
Multidrop
Switch
1.7 in TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
2.6 in 0.7 in
Figure 1. RS-485 Port Isolator
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
April 1999
Connectors
The Isolator provides two connectors, one 15 pin male D-type (PL1) and one 15 pin female D-type (PL2). The pin
assignments are identical, except that pin 4 on PL2 is connected to the module ID resistor.
RS-485 Connectors
Connector Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description

PL1 1 SHLD – Chassis Ground
2 NC –
3 NC –
4 NC –
5 5V – +5V power
6 CTS (A’) In Clear to send –
7 0V – Signal Ground
8 RTS (B) Out Request to send +
9 NC –
10 SD (A) Out Send data –
11 SD (B) Out Send data +
12 RD (A’) In Read data –
13 RD (B’) In Read data +
14 CTS (B’) In Clear to send +
15 RTS (A) Out Request to send –
Connector Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description

PL2 1 NC –
2 NC –
3 NC –
4 NC –
5 5V – +5V power
6 RTS (A) Out Request to send –
7 0V – Signal Ground
8 CTS (B’) In Clear to send +
9 RT – Terminating Resistor*
10 RD (A’) In Read data –
11 RD (B’) In Read data +
12 SD (A) Out Send data –
13 SD (B) Out Send data +
14 RTS (B) Out Request to send +
15 CTS (A’) In Clear to send –
* Use the terminating resistor if the Port Isolator is used in port-to-port mode or at the end of a
multi-drop configuration. To terminate the RD balanced line, place a jumper wire from pin 9 to pin 10.
* A denotes – and B denotes +. A and B denote outputs and A’ and B’ denote inputs.
78-2 t
GFK-0600F
Accessories 3
RS-485 Port Isolator GFK-1663A

April 1999
Logic Diagram
Optical Isolation
15–pin male D–connector 15–pin female D–connector

PL1 PL2
11 11
SD(B) RD(B’)
10 10 RD(A’)
SD(A)
9
RT
121 ohms
RD(B’) 13 13 SD(B)
RD(A’) 12 12 SD(A)
Output Enable
Always on
(single port mode)
+5V
Multidrop
Switch
RTS Driven
(multidrop mode)
Output Enable
CTS(B’) 14 14 RTS(B)
CTS(A’) 6 6 RTS(A)
RTS(B) 8 8 CTS(B’)
RTS(A) 15 15 CTS(A’)
5 5
+5Vdc DC/DC +5Vdc
Converter
7 7
GND GND
Ground 1 Ground 2
Figure 2. IC690ACC903 Block Diagram

t
GFK-0600F
4 Accessories
April 1999
Installation
The Isolator is packaged in a contoured plastic enclosure designed for either direct attachment to a serial port or
through a 12” extender cable for panel mounted applications. Two M3 thumbscrews secure the device to its
mating connector. The device can be easily inserted into an existing communication channel with no additional
hardware. In Figure 3, the Isolator is shown connected directly to a CPU module. Alternatively, the Isolator can be
mounted separately from the PLC system using the extender cable provided. For mounting separately to a panel,
you will need to provide two #6–32 (4 mm)mounting screws (Figure 4).
When installing the Isolator, tighten the connector screws and panel mounting screws (if used) to the following
torque values:
Screws Type Torque
Connector Thumbscrews (supplied with M3 8 in./lbs. (0.9 Newton–meter)
Isolator)
Panel Mounting Screws (user–supplied) #6/32 (4 mm) 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton–meters)
PLC 1 PS CPU
RS–485 Port
Isolator
4000 ft
SNP
Cable
PLC 2 PS CPU
Figure 3. RS-485 Port Isolator in PLC Network
#6–32 (4 mm) screw
Multidrop Switch
TOP
VIEW
#6–32 (4 mm) screw
Figure 4. Mounting Port Isolator to Panel
78-4 t
GFK-0600F
Accessories 5

April 1999
The RS485 Port Isolator supports both port-to-port and multi-drop configurations (Figure 5). For installation infor-
mation, refer to section 3 of the Serial Communications User’s Manual (GFK-0582). One configuration not cov-
ered in the User’s Manual is the case where the Isolator is powered by a source other than the host port. This con-
figuration is used to prevent an interrupt in communications if the host system requires a power cycle. It also
prevents power loss to equipment using the port for power. For this, you will need to build a custom cable as
shown in Figure 6.
Terminate at first
and last drop only Slave Device
Master PLC
ÎÎ
Make connectons 15 pin port
Twisted Pairs
ÎÎÎ
15 pin Female D–connector
RT 9 inside D connectors 9 RT
15 pin Male D–connector
SD(B) 13 11 RD(B’)
ÎÎ
SD(A) 12 10 RD(A’)
RD(B’) 11 13 SD(B)
ÎÎ
Î
Isolator
RD(A’) 10 12 SD(A)
ÎÎÎ
RTS(B) 14 8 CTS(B’)
RTS(A) 6 15 CTS(A’)
CTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
8
15
Î 14 RTS(B)
6 RTS(A)
1 SHLD
Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
Î
GND 7 7 GND
Slave Device
Î
15 pin port
9 RT
Î
11 RD(B’)
ÎÎ
10 RD(A’)
13 SD(B)
Î
ÎÎ
12 SD(A)
8 CTS(B’)
Î 15 CTS(A’)
Î
14 RTS(B)
6 RTS(A)
1 SHLD
Î
5 +5V
7 GND
Slave Device
25 pin port
ÎÎ
24 RT
Î
25 RD(B’)
13 RD(A’)
Î
21 SD(B)
Î
ÎÎÎ
9 SD(A)
23 CTS(B’)
Î
11 CTS(A’)
22 RTS(B)
Î 10 RTS(A)
Î 7
1
GND
SHLD
To Other Slave Devices

(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)
Figure 5. Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15-Pin Ports and 25-Pin Ports
t
GFK-0600F
GFK-1663A
April 1999
6
78-6
Terminate at first Terminate at first

and last drops only and last ports only
Master PLC Make connections Make connections

Slave Device
inside D–connector inside D–connector
15 pin Female D–connector

RT 9 RT 9 9 RT
15 pin Male D–connector

Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
13 RD(B’)
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
SD(B) 13 SD(B) 13 11 RD(B’)
SD(A) 12 12 RD(A’) SD(A) 12 10 RD(A’)
ÎÎÎ
RD(B’) 11 11 SD(B) RD(B’) 11 13 SD(B)
Figure 6. Cable for Supplying External Power Through the Port Isolator
Isolator
SD(A)
Î
ÎÎ
RD(A’) 10 10 RD(A’) 10 12 SD(A)
RTS(B) 14 14 CTS(B’) RTS(B) 14 8 CTS(B’)
ÎÎÎ
RTS(A) 6 6 CTS(A’) RTS(A) 6 15 CTS(A’)
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
CTS(B’) 8 8 RTS(B) CTS(B’) 8 14 RTS(B)
CTS(A’) 15 15 RTS(A) CTS(A’) 15 6 RTS(A)
+5V 5 5 +5V +5V 5 5 +5V
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
GND 7 7 GND GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1 1 SHLD 1 SHLD
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
+5VDC To device
requiring
Ground external
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RT 9 power 9 RT
RD(B’) 11 11 RD(B’)
Î
Î
RD(A’) 10 Note: Do not daisy chain +5VDC pins. 10 RD(A’)

Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
SD(B) 13 13 SD(B)
t
SD(A) 12 12 SD(A)
Î
CTS(B’) 8 8 CTS(B’)
ÎÎ
CTS(A’) 15 15 CTS(A’)
RTS(B) 14 14 RTS(B)
Î
Î
RTS(A) 6 6 RTS(A)
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
Slave Device Slave Device
RS-485 Port Isolator

To Other Slave Devices To Other Slave Devices
(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop) (Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)
Accessories
GFK-0600F
Accessories 7

April 1999
Specifications
Mechanical
RS-485 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the programmable
controller
15-pin D shell female for communication cable
Installation Hardware Two M3 thread connector thumbscrews. Recommended torque: 8 in./lbs.
(0.9 Newton-meter). These are supplied with Isolator.
Two user supplied #6/32 (4mm) thread panel mounting screws. Recommended
torque: 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton-meter)
Electrical
Voltage Supply +5VDC (supplied by port)
Typical Current 25 mA
100 mA available for external equipment
Ground Isolation 500 Volts
Conformance EIA-422/485 Balanced Line
Operating Temperature 0_ – 60_C (32_ – 140_ F)
Baud Rate Those supported by PLC
t
GFK-0600F
1
79
Accessories
IC690ACC901
GFK-0682C Miniconverter Kit
May 1996
Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901)
datasheet GFK-0682C
The Miniconverter Kit consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to with kit)) to the IBM PC-AT. Most IBM compatible
RS-232 Miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter) serial exten- computers equipped with an RS-232 port will provide
sion cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin Converter Plug as- a pinout compatible with the one shown above.
sembly. The 15-pin SNP port connector on the Mini-
converter plugs directly into the serial port connector a44985
on the programmable controller. The 9-pin RS-232
port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an
RS-232 compatible device.
When used with an IBMr PC-AT, or compatible com- RS-422 RS-232
PORT PORT
puter, one end of the extension cable plugs into the
Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, the other
end plugs into the 9-pin serial port of the computer.
The Converter plug (supplied with kit) is required to
convert the 9-pin serial port connector on the Mini-
converter to the 25-pin serial port connector on the
IC647 computer, or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2r Personal SNP Port to RS-232 Adapater
Computer. Table 2 is the pinout for the Miniconverter’s RS-422
serial port. The direction of signal flow is also with
The IC640 industrial computer requires an additional adapter
respect to the Miniconverter.
(not supplied - please contact your local PLC distributor) for
use with the Miniconverter. Table 2. Miniconverter RS-422 Port
The pinout of the Miniconverter is shown in the fol-
lowing two tables. Table 1 is the pinout for the RS-232 Pin Signal Name Direction
port. The direction of signal flow is with respect to
1 SHLD - Shield n/a
the Miniconverter.
5 +5 VDC - Power Input
Table 1. Miniconverter RS-232 Port 6 CTS(Ai) - Clear To Send Input
7 GND - Ground n/a
Pin Signal Name Direction
8 RTS(B) - Request To Send Output
2 SD - Send Data Output
9 RT - Receive Termination Output
3 RD - Receive Data Input
10 SD(A) - Send Data Output
5 GND - Ground n/a
11 SD(B) - Send Data Output
7 CTS - Clear To Send Input
12 RD(Ai) - Receive Data Input
8 RTS - Request To Send Output
13 RD(Bi) - Receive Data Input
14 CTS(Bi) Clear To Send Input
The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection
(using a straight through, or 1 to 1 cable (as provided 15 RTS(A) - Request To Send Output
rIBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-0682C Miniconverter Kit
May 1996
System Configurations PIN PIN a44982
TXD 2 2 RXD
The Miniconverter can be used in a point-to-point con- RXD 3 3 TXD
figuration as described above, or in a multidrop configu- CTS 7 7 RTS
ration with the host device configured as the master RTS 8 8 CTS
GND 5 5 GND
and one or more programmable controllers configured 1 DCD
as slaves. 6 DSR
4 DTR
The multidrop configuration requires a straight through
(1 to 1) cable from the Miniconverter’s RS-422 port to MINICONVERTER IBM PC-AT
the first slave PLC’s SNP port. Other slaves will require RS-232 PORT 9-PIN
9-PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
a daisy chain connection between slaves. A maximum
of eight devices can be connected in an RS-422 multi- Figure 1. Miniconverter to PC-AT
drop configuration.
All of the devices must have a common ground. If PIN PIN a44983
ground isolation is required, you can use the Isolated TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) in place of the CTS 7 4 RTS
Miniconverter. RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
When using the Miniconverter with a modem connec- 8 DCD
6 DSR
tion, it may be necessary to jumper RTS to CTS (consult 20 DTR
the user’s manual for your modem). MINICONVERTER IBM PC-XT, PS/2
RS-232 PORT 25-PIN CONNECTOR
Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point) 9-PIN CONNECTOR
When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and Figure 2. Miniconverter to IC647 computer, PC-XT, PS/2
compatible computers with hardware handshaking, the
PIN PIN a44984
following cable connections should be used.
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
CTS 7 4 RTS
RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
MINICONVERTER IC640 Computer
RS-232 PORT 9-PIN CONNECTOR
9-PIN CONNECTOR
Figure 3. Miniconverter to 9-Pin IC640 Computer or

PC-XT Computer (Additional Adapter Required)
Table 3. Miniconverter Specifications
Mechanical:
RS-422 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the
programmable controller
RS-232 9-pin D shell male for connection to RS-232 serial port of an
IC647 industrial computer or Personal Computer.
Electrical and General:
Voltage Supply +5 VDC (supplied by PLC power supply)
Typical Current Version A (IC690ACC901A) - 150 mA
Version B (IC690ACC901B) - 100 mA
Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C (32° to 158° F)
Baud Rate 38.4K Baud maximum
Conformance EIA-422 (Balanced Line) or EIA-423 (Unbalanced Line)
Ground Isolation Not provided
79-2 t
GFK-0600F
1
Accessories
80
IC697ACC722
GFK-0589A Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper
December 1993
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper (IC697ACC722)
datasheet GFK-0589A
Features Note
D Allows slot to be reserved for future expansion The Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, when
D Provides for continuation of interrupt signal installed, must be added to the system
through empty slot on an IC697 PLC rack back- configuration using the IC641 Programming
plane Software configuration function (see
D Single connector mounted on board reference 2).
D Easy connection to mating backplane connector
Functions a44699
The Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, IC697ACC722, for

the IC697 PLC is an accessory which has been de- 1
signed to allow you to reserve a slot in the IC697 stan-
dard rack for future expansion. This jumper, when
installed in a blank slot, allows for continuation of the
interrupt signal through the backplane. Use of this
board is required when there are modules installed to
its right which may interrupt the CPU.
Installation
Be sure that power to the rack is turned off before
attempting any hardware installation. The Blank Slot
Interrupt Jumper can be installed in an IC697 CPU
rack or expansion rack in slots 2 through 8 of a nine-
slot rack or slots 2 through 4 of a five-slot rack. It is
not necessary to reserve the last slot (slot 9 in a nine-
32
slot rack or slot 5 in a five-slot rack) in a rack. Also, a
rack will not operate properly if this jumper is
installed in slot 1. For additional information on
installation refer to the applicable Programmer Control-
ler Installation manual.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-0589A Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper
December 1993
a44700
4 6
32
Figure 1. Installation of Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper
Configuration Considerations (IC697BEM713), although any module may be used to

reserve the slot. When the Blank Slot Interrupt Jump-
If version 2.05 or earlier of the IC641 Programming er is configured as a BTM (or any other module) and
Software configuration function is being used it is rec- is stored to the PLC, the following message will ap-
ommended that the Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper be pear on the programmer’s screen:
configured as a Bus Transmitter Module
WARNING: Configuration mismatch exists - see fault tables
In addition, a ”Loss of .......” fault will be logged into screen accessed by the F8 - other function key. When
the appropriate fault table. the Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper is configured in this
A future version of the IC641 Programming Software future version and later versions there will not be a
configuration function will include a selection for the mismatch when the configuration is stored to the
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, IC697ACC722 on the PLC.
Table 1. References
Reference Title
1 ProgrammableController Installation Manual

Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper Assembly (qty 6) IC697ACC722
80-2 t
GFK-0600F
1
Accessories
81
IC697ACC736
GFK-1187A Cable Shield Clamping Assembly
July 1995
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly (IC697ACC736)
datasheet GFK-1187A
Features EMC immunity for shielded cables in PLC installations

in severe industrial environments.
H Provides for higher EMC (Electromagnetic Com- The Cable Shield Clamping Assembly must be used in
patibility) immunity for shielded cables severe industrial environments to provide higher EMC
H Use for installations in severe industrial environ- immunity for shielded cables. Shield grounding is ac-
ments complished using the ground plate and cable clamps
H Use with all IC69* PLC products provided in the kit.
H Easy to assemble The Cable Shield Clamping Assembly package includes:
H Mounts on panel, rack enclosure, or directly onto
H One Ground Plate
an IC697 rack
H Six Cable Clamps
H Four #6 self-tapping screws.
Functions
Figure 1 is an outline drawing of the mounting plate
The Cable Shield Clamping Assembly, IC697ACC736, con- showing dimensions required for mounting. The fig-
tains the parts necessary in order to provide higher ure also shows a cable clamp.
a45520
2.95” 19.00”
(75 mm) (483 mm)
18.31”
.250 ”(6.35 mm) DIA. (QTY.2) (465 mm)
4.25”
(108 mm)
MOUNTING
SURFACE
SIDE VIEW WITH FRONT VIEW WITH MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

SPACING REQUIREMENTS
a45521
CABLE CLAMP
(SIX CABLE CLAMPS INCLUDED WITH ASSEMBLY)
* Additional cable clamps available (12 per package), Catalog Number IC697ACC737.
Figure 1. Ground Plate Outline, Mounting Dimensions, and Cable Clamp
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-1187A Cable Shield Clamping Assembly
July 1995
Installing the Assembly the cable clamp by turning the thumbscrew clockwise.
Do not overtighten the thumbscrew - handtighten or tight-
The ground plate should be mounted near the PLC rack en lightly with a tool.
for both IC697 and IC693 PLC installations. The cable
clamp provides mechanical relief as well as electrical
grounding. A typical installation is shown in Figure 2
below. Figure 5 on the next page shows the Cable
Note
Clamp Assembly installed on an IC697 PLC rack. If you are installing the ground plate on a
The cable clamp attaches to the ground plate by slid- painted surface, the paint must be re-
ing it into two adjacent slots at the selected location moved where the ground plate is to be
for the cable. The cable is inserted between the mounted to ensure a good ground con-
ground plate and the cable clamp after removing the nection between the plate and mounting
required section of the cable’s outer cover. Tighten surface.
a45519
+
24VDC
OUTPUT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
Figure 2. Example of Cable Shield Clamping Assembly Installation
81-2 t
GFK-0600F
Accessories 3
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly GFK-1187A

July 1995
The maximum diameter cable that can be used with The insulating cover on the shielded cable must be
the cable clamp is 0.51 inches (13mm) as shown below removed to allow maximum contact between the
in Figure 3. cable shield and the cable clamp as shown in Figure 4.
.51” a45522
a45523
GROUND 13mm
PLATE
.67”
CABLE
17mm
CLAMP
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇÇ
FOOT
ÇÇ
1.58”
40mm
ÇÇ
CABLE
MAXIMUM
DIAMETER
.51” (13mm) SHIELD
MINIMUM
DIAMETER
.24” (6mm) CABLE
CLAMP
Figure 3. Cross Section of Cable Secured by Clamp Figure 4. Clamped Cable with Exposed Shield
In addition to mounting to a flat surface near the PLC H IC697CHS790E, or later version
system, the Cable Shield Clamping Assembly can be H IC697CHS791E, or later version
optionally attached directly to an IC697 rack as shown
below. For compatibility, the following versions of racks H IC697CHS782C, or later version
are required for the Cable Shield Clamping Assembly: H IC697CHS783C, or later version
a45518
TWO SCREWS EACH END

USE EXISTING MOUNTING
HOLES IN RACK
Figure 5. Cable Shield Clamping Assembly Mounted on an IC697 Rack

t
GFK-0600F
1
Accessories
82
IC697ACC715
GFK-0552C VME Option Kit
August 1995
VME Option Kit (IC697ACC715)
datasheet GFK-0552C
This instruction sheet provides the information for Follow these steps
installation of the VME Option Kit, catalog number
IC697ACC715, which allows you to add a J2 VME 1. Unpack and check all of the items in the kit. Verify
backplane (which has P2 connectors) to an IC697 PLC with the parts list that each item is present.
rack.
2. Place the selected rack on its side supported in
such a way that it is straight and level.
Contents of VME Option Kit 3. Locate the slot in the rear bottom rail of the rack.
Locate one of the threaded metal strips included in
the kit. The strips are made to fit the nine-slot
Description Qty racks (IC697CHS790, IC697CHS791) but can be
Connector jumper 6 modified to fit the five-slot rack (IC697CHS750).
M2.5 threaded strip 2 Slide the threaded strip into the slot in the bottom
Aluminumspacer 4 rail of the rack; it should slide easily. If you have a
VME slot filler 4 five-slot rack, slide the threaded strip in until it cov-
Phillips screws, M2.5 x 8 24 ers the entire length of the rail and snap the excess
Spring lock washers 24
off at the last threaded hole at the top of the rail.
Hex nuts, M2.5 12
Power cable 1
Ribbon cable connector mounting bracket 6
Manual, User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party 1 Note
VMEModules
If your rack has no side access to the lower
and middle rail, the side plate must be re-
moved. This is done by removing the
Note screws in the side plate.
This kit does not contain a J2 backplane.

This must be purchased from a 3rd party. In order to mount the J2 backplane, you
must remove the rear cover. To do this, re-
move the 12 screws (6 top and 6 bottom)
holding the cover on. After removing the
You will need these items cover, be sure to reinstall 6 of these screws
backinto the J1 backplane. You can discard
1. Phillips head screwdriver
the rear cover.
2. A five-slot or nine-slot IC697 rack with one of the
following catalog numbers:
4. Locate the slot in the center rail of the rack. Install
IC697CHS750, five-slot rear (panel) mount the threaded strip in the center rail using the same
procedure described in step 3. If you removed the
IC697CHS790, nine-slot rear (panel) mount
rack side plate, you must reinstall it at this time.
IC697CHS791, nine-slot front (rack) mount 5. Plug the standard VME module into the rack in a
3. A J2 backplane (has P2 connectors) slot that you will want the J2 backplane to span.
4. Any VME module that has both a P1 and P2 con- 6. In this step you are using the standard VME mod-
nector ule to align the J2 backplane. Gently plug the
middle connector of your VME J2 backplane into
5. User supplied rack mounting hardware (Qty. 4 - 1 the P2 connector of the VME module - be sure that
1/4 inch x #10-32 or #12-28 screws). the alignment is correct.
t
GFK-0600F
2 Accessories
GFK-0552C VME Option Kit
August 1995
7. Secure the J2 backplane to the threaded strips us- J2 Installation Alternative

ing the pan-head screws and lock washers pro-
vided in the kit. D Six J2 connector ribbon cable mounting brackets are
included in this kit for use as an alternative to
8. Plug the power cable provided with the kit into
mounting the J2 backplane. A J2 connector attached
the nine-pin connector on the side of the rack.
to a ribbon cable can be mounted on this bracket.
Connect the ends of the cable to the saddle clamps
This cable provides the external I/O connections to
on the back of the J2 backplane. Make sure that
a VME module in an IC697 rack.
you connect the +5V lead to the saddle clamp
marked +5V and the GND lead to the saddle D Mount the J2 connector attached to the ribbon cable
clamp marked GND. on the ribbon cable mounting bracket and secure
9. If your rack is a panel mount rack (IC697CHS790 with screws, lock washers and hex nuts provided in
or IC697CHS750), you must use the spacers pro- the kit.
vided in the kit to be sure that the wire-wrap pins D Install the ribbon cable mounting bracket loosely at
used in some J2 backplanes do not come in contact the selected slot location.
with the mounting panel. The use of spacers will
D With the VME module plugged into the J2 connec-
require you to use longer mounting hardware.
tor, align the bracket and tighten the mounting
10. Jumpers are provided so that, if required, you can screws.
configure any slot (except slot 1) of the rack to
function as a normal VME slot. Place four of the
jumpers on the pins in the backplane for the slot
you wish to configure.
11. Blank Slot Fillers (catalog number IC697ACC720)
are available that will cover any openings left be-
tween standard VME modules and other modules
in the rack.
82-2 t
GFK-0600F
Index
CPUs
A 12 MHz 32 Kbyte IC697CPU731, 12-1
Accessories 12 MHz Expandable Fl Pt IC697CPU772, 14-1
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper IC697ACC722, 80-1 12 MHz Expandable IC697CPU771, 13-1
Cable Shield Clamp Assem IC697ACC736, 81-1 16 MHz 32 Bit Expan. Fl Pt IC697CPU782, 16-1
Cable, PCM IC697CBL701/702/705, 77-1 16 MHz 32 Bit Expandable IC697CPU781, 15-1
Cables, I/O, 75-1 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt Hot Stby IC697CPU780, 28-1
Miniconverter Kit IC690ACC901, 79-1 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc IC697CSE784, 29-1
RS-485 Port Isolator IC690ACC903, 78-1 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR IC697CPU788, 25-1
VME Option Kit IC697ACC715, 82-1 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR IC697CPU789, 26-1
AD697SPL711, State Logic Processor, 60-1 32 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb IC697CPM915, 17-1
64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb IC697CPM925, 18-1
Analog Input System, 57-1
64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb State Logic IC697CSE925,
Analog Output System, 58-1 31-1
Approvals, 2-1 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, TMR IC697CPM790, 27-1
64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc IC697CSE924, 30-1
96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb Fast, IC697CPX935, 22-1
B 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb Hot Stby IC697CGR935,
24-1
Base Converter Module, 57-1 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb memory, IC697CPX782, 20-1
Battery Safety, 3-1 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 512 Kb Hot Stby IC697CGR772,
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, 80-1 23-1
96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 512 Kb memory, IC697CPX772,
Bus Controller Module, 61-1 19-1
Bus Expansion Modules 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 6 Mb Medium, IC697CPX928,
Bus Controller IC697BEM731/734, 61-1 21-1
Bus Receiver IC697BEM711, 64-1 Current Expander Module, 57-1
Bus Transmitter IC697BEM713, 63-1
FIP Bus Controller IC697BEM742, 62-1
FIP Bus Controller IC697BEM744, 62-1
I/O Link Interface IC697BEM721, 66-1
D
Interface for IC600 PLC IC697BEM761, 67-1 Discrete Input Modules
Remote I/O Scanner IC697BEM733/735, 65-1 12 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL252, 36-1
Bus Receiver Module, 64-1 12 VDC Pos/Neg IC697MDL652, 43-1
Bus Transmitter Module, 63-1 120 VAC 16 Pt IC697MDL251, 41-1
120 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL250, 39-1
120 VAC Isol 16 Pt IC697MDL240, 40-1
125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic IC697MDL640, 46-1
C 24 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL253, 37-1
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly, 81-1 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic IC697MDL653, 44-1
Cables, Power Supply Expansion, 76-1 240 VAC Isol IC697MDL241, 42-1
48 VAC 32 Pt IC697DL254, 38-1
Cables,I/O, 75-1
Cables, PCM to Programmer, 77-1 Interrupt IC697MDL671, 48-1
Communications Coprocessor Module, 71-1 TTL Neg Logic 32 Pt IC697MDL651, 47-1
Communications Modules Discrete Output Modules
Communications Coprocs IC697CMM711, 71-1 12 VDC 0.5A IC697MDL752, 53-1
Ethernet Controller IC697CMM741, 68-1 120 VAC 0.5A IC697MDL350, 49-1
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) IC697CMM742, 69-1 120 Volt AC 2A IC697MDL340, 50-1
Redundancy Comms IC697RCM711, 72-1 120/240 VAC 2A Isol IC697MDL341, 51-1
Serial Comms, State Logic IC697CMM712, 70-1 24/48 VDC, 0.5A IC697MDL750, 54-1
Coprocessor Modules 24/48 VDC, 2A IC697MDL740, 55-1
Alphanumeric Display IC697ADC701, 35-1 5/48 VDC 0.5A Neg IC697MDL753, 52-1
PCM IC697PCM711, 34-1 Relay 16 Pt IC697MDL940, 56-1
GFK-0600F Index-1
Index
GFK–0539, Remote I/O Scanner, 65-1

E GFK–0552, VME Option Kit, 82-1
Ethernet Controller Module, 68-1 GFK–0588, CPU 12 MHz Expan. Fl Pt, 14-1
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) Module, 69-1 GFK–0589, Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, 80-1
Expansion Memory GFK–0626, Power Supply Adapter, 11-1
32 Bit CMOS IC697MEM731/32/33/35, 33-1 GFK–0637, Rack Fan Assembly, 6-1
CMOS IC697MEM713/15/17/19, 32-1
GFK–0645, I/O Link Interface, 66-1
GFK–0682, Miniconverter Kit, 79-1
F GFK–0684, VME Racks, 5-1
GFK–0718, Input Module 120 VAC, 41-1
FIP Bus Controller Module, 62-1 GFK–0719, Input Mdl 125 VDC Pos/Neg,46-1
GFK–0734, State Logic Processor, 60-1
G GFK–0756, Input Module 12 VAC, 36-1
GFK–0757, Input Module 24 VAC, 37-1
GEK–83517, I/O Cables, 75-1 GFK–0766, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Expan., 15-1
GFK–0079, Standard Racks, 4-1 GFK–0767, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Exp. Fl Pt, 16-1
GFK–0081, Output Module 120 VAC 0.5A, 49-1 GFK–0784, Input Module 48 VAC, 38-1
GFK–0082, Output Module 120 VAC 2A, 50-1 GFK–0806, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR, 25-1
GFK–0084, Input Module 120 VAC 32 Pt, 39-1 GFK–0807, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR, 26-1
GFK–0085, Output Mdl 24/48 VDC 0.5A, 54-1 GFK–0834, Redundancy Comms, 72-1
GFK–0086, Output Mdl 24/48 VDC 2A, 55-1 GFK–0837, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt Hot Stby, 28-1
GFK–0096, Interface for IC600 PLC, 67-1 GFK–0867, Approvals and Specifications, 2-1
GFK–0153, Power Supply Expansion Cable, 76-1 GFK–0880, Input Module 14 Pt Intrpt, 48-1
GFK–0159, CPU 12 MHz 32Kbyte, 12-1 GFK–1002, FIP Bus Controller, 62-1
GFK–0160, CMOS Expansion Memory, 32-1 GFK–1035, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc, 29-1
GFK–0161, Bus Transmitter Module, 63-1 GFK–1036, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc, 30-1
GFK–0162, Bus Receiver Module, 64-1 GFK–1039, Serial Comms, State Logic, 70-1
GFK–0164, PCM, 34-1 GFK–1047, Pwr Sply 24VDC 90W, 7-1
GFK–0165, Bus Controller, 61-1 GFK–1057, High Speed Counter, 59-1
GFK–0166, Workstation Int XT/AT, 73-1 GFK–1061, Pwr Sply 48VDC 90W, 8-1
GFK–0281, Workstation Int PS/2, 74-1 GFK–1119, CPU 32 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, 17-1
GFK–0349, CPU 12 MHz Expandable, 13-1 GFK–1120, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, 18-1
GFK–0359, Cable, PCM, 77-1 GFK–1167, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb State Logic,
GFK–0370, Comms Coprocessor, 71-1 31-1
GFK–0375, Input Module 120 VAC Isol, 40-1 GFK–1187, Cable Shield Clamp Assem., 81-1
GFK–0376, Input Module 240 VAC Isol, 42-1 GFK–1215, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, TMR, 27-1
GFK–0377, Input Module Neg Logic TTL, 47-1 GFK–1309, Ethernet Interface (Type 2), 69-1
GFK–0378, Input Mdl 12 VDC Pos/Neg,43-1 GFK–1388, Pwr Sply 55W 120/240VAC, 125 VDC, Ver-
GFK–0379, Input Mdl 24 VDC Pos/Neg,44-1 sion H (or later), 9-1
GFK–0380, Input Mdl 48 VDC Pos/Neg,45-1 GFK–1437, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit, 512 Kb Fast , Fl Pt
GFK–0381, Output Module 12 VDC 0.5A, 53-1 CPU Redun, 23-1
GFK–0382, Out. 120/240 VAC 2A Isol, 51-1 GFK–1439, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit, 1 Mb Fast , Fl Pt CPU
Redun, 24-1
GFK–0383, Out. Mdl 5/48 VDC 0.5A Neg, 52-1
GFK–1448, Pwr Sply 100W 120/240VAC, 125 VDC,
GFK–0384, Output Mdl 16 Pt Relay, 56-1 Version H (or later), 10-1
GFK–0385, Analog Input System, 57-1 GFK–1663A, RS-485 Port Isolator, 78-1
GFK–0388, Analog Output Module, 58-1 GFK-1429F, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 512 Kb memory,
GFK–0521, Alphanumeric Display Copr., 35-1 19-1
GFK–0531, CMOS Exp Mem 32 bit, 33-1 GFK-1431E, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb memory,
GFK–0532, Ethernet Controller, 68-1 20-1
Index-2 GFK-0600F
Index
GFK-1433, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 6 Mb Medium, IC697CMM741, Ethernet Controller, 68-1

21-1 IC697CMM742, Ethernet Interface (Type 2), 69-1
GFK-1435, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb Fast, 22-1 IC697CPM790, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, TMR,
GFT-102, ISO 9000 Registration, 1-1 27-1
IC697CPM915, CPU 32 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, 17-1
IC697CPM925, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb, 18-1
H IC697CPU731, CPU 12 MHz 32 Kbyte, 12-1
High Speed Counter, 59-1 IC697CPU771, CPU 12 MHz Expandable, 13-1
IC697CPU772, CPU 12 MHz Expand. Fl Pt, 14-1
IC697CPU780, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt Hot Stby, 28-1
I IC697CPU781, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Expan., 15-1
I/O Cables, 75-1 IC697CPU782, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Exp. Fl Pt, 16-1
I/O Link Interface Module, 66-1 IC697CPU788, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR, 25-1
IC/CE697PWR724, Pwr Sply 24 VDC 90W, 7-1 IC697CPU789, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit, TMR, 26-1
IC/CE697PWR748, Pwr Sply 48 VDC 90W, 8-1 IC697CPX772, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 512 Kb
memory, 19-1
IC640WMI910/310,Workstation Int XT/AT, 73-1
IC697CPX782, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb memory,
IC640WMI920/320,Workstation Int PS/2, 74-1
20-1
IC687MDL940, Output Mdl 16 Pt Relay, 56-1
IC697CPX928, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 6 Mb Me-
IC690ACC901, Miniconverter Kit, 79-1 dium, 21-1
IC690ACC903, RS-485 Port Isolator, 78-1 IC697CPX935, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb Fast,
IC690CBL701/702/705,Cable,PCM,77-1 22-1
IC697ACC715, VME Option Kit, 82-1 IC697CSE784, CPU 16 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc, 29-1
IC697ACC721/724/744,RackFan Assembly, 6-1 IC697CSE924, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt State Lgc, 30-1
IC697ACC722, Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper, 80-1 IC697CSE925, CPU 64 MHz 32 Bit Fl Pt 1 Mb State
IC697ACC736, Cable Shield Clamp Assem, 81-1 Logic, 31-1
IC697ADC701, Alpha. Disp. Coprocessor, 35-1 IC697HSC700, High Speed Counter, 59-1
IC697ALG230, Base Converter Module, 57-1 IC697MDL240, Input Mdl 120 VAC Isol, 40-1
IC697ALG320, Analog Output Module, 58-1 IC697MDL241, Input Mdl 240 VAC Isol, 42-1
IC697ALG440, Current Expander Module, 57-1 IC697MDL250, Input Module 120 VAC, 39-1
IC697ALG441, Voltage Expander Module, 57-1 IC697MDL251, Input Module 120 VAC, 41-1
IC697BEM711, Bus Receiver, 64-1 IC697MDL252, Input Mdl 12 VAC, 36-1
IC697BEM713, Bus Transmitter, 63-1 IC697MDL253, Input Module 24 VAC, 37-1
IC697BEM721, I/O Link Interface, 66-1 IC697MDL254, Input Module 48 VAC, 38-1
IC697BEM731/734, Bus Controller, 61-1 IC697MDL340, Output Mdl 120 VAC 2A, 50-1
IC697BEM733/735, Remote I/O Scanner, 65-1 IC697MDL341, Out. 120/240 VAC 2A Isol, 51-1
IC697BEM742, FIP Bus Controller, 62-1 IC697MDL350, Output Mdl 120 VAC 0.5A, 49-1
IC697BEM744, FIP Bus Controller, 62-1 IC697MDL640, Input 125 VDC Pos/Neg,46-1
IC697BEM761, Interface for IC600 PLC, 67-1 IC697MDL651, Input Mdl Neg Logic TTL, 47-1
IC697CBL700/713,Power Supply Ext. Cable, 76-1 IC697MDL652, Input 12 VDC Pos/Neg,43-1
IC697CGR772, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit, 512 Kb, Fl Pt , IC697MDL653, Input 24 VDC Pos/Neg,44-1
CPU Redun, 23-1 IC697MDL654, Input 48 VDC Pos/Neg,45-1
IC697CGR935, CPU 96 MHz 32 Bit, 1 Mb Fast, Fl Pt , IC697MDL671, Input Module 14 Pt Intrpt, 48-1
CPU Redun, 24-1 IC697MDL740, Output Mdl 24/48 VDC 2A, 55-1
IC697CHS750, Rack Five Slot Rear Mnt, 4-1 IC697MDL750, Output 24/48 VDC 0.5A, 54-1
IC697CHS782/783, VME Racks, 5-1 IC697MDL752, Output Mdl 12 VDC 0.5A, 53-1
IC697CHS790, Rack Nine Slot Rear Mnt, 4-1 IC697MDL753, Out. 5/48 VDC 0.5A Neg, 52-1
IC697CHS791, Rack Nine Slot, Front Mnt, 4-1 IC697MEM713/15/17/19,CMOSExpMem,32-1
IC697CMM711, Communications Coprocs, 71-1 IC697MEM731/32/33/35,CMOS32Bit,33-1
IC697CMM712, Serial Comms, State Logic, 70-1 IC697PCM711, PCM, 34-1
GFK-0600F Index-3
Index
IC697PWR710/712,PwrSply120/240VAC 125 VDC

55W, Version H (or later), 9-1
O
Output Modules
IC697PWR711/713,PwrSply120/240VAC 125 VDC
100W, Version H (or later), 10-1 12 VDC 0.5A IC697MDL752, 53-1
120 VAC 0.5A IC697MDL350, 49-1
IC697PWR720, Power Supply Adapter, 11-1 120 Volt AC 2A IC697MDL340, 50-1
IC697RCM711, Redundancy Comms, 72-1 120/240 VAC 2A Isol IC697MDL341, 51-1
24/48 VDC, 0.5A IC697MDL750, 54-1
Input Modules
24/48 VDC, 2A IC697MDL740, 55-1
12 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL252, 36-1 5/48 VDC 0.5A Neg IC697MDL753, 52-1
12 VDC Pos/Neg IC697MDL652, 43-1 Analog Output, 58-1
120 VAC 16 Pt IC697MDL251, 41-1 Relay 16 Pt IC697MDL940, 56-1
120 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL250, 39-1
120 VAC Isol 16 Pt IC697MDL240, 40-1
P
24 VAC 32 Pt IC697MDL253, 37-1 Port isolator, 78-1
24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic IC697MDL653, 44-1 Power Supplies
240 VAC Isol16 Pt IC697MDL241, 42-1 120/240 VAC, 125 VDC, 100W IC697PWR711/713,
Version H (or later), 10-1
48 VAC 32 Pt IC697DL254, 38-1
120/240 VAC, 125 VDC, 55W IC697PWR710/712, Ver-
48 VDC Pos/Neg Logic IC697MDL654, 45-1 sion H (or later), 9-1
Analog Input System, 57-1 24VDC 90W, IC/CE697PWR724, 7-1
Interrupt IC697MDL671, 48-1 48 VDC 90W, IC/CE697PWR748, 8-1
TTL Neg Logic 32 Pt IC697MDL651, 47-1 Power Supply Adapter Module IC697PWR720, 11-1
Interface Module for IC600 PLC, 67-1 Power Supply Expansion Cable, 76-1
Interface Modules
Workstation Int PS/2 IC640WMI920/320, 74-1 Q
Workstation Int XT/AT IC640WMI910/310, 73-1 Quality System – ISO 9000, 1-1
ISO 9000 Registration, 1-1
R
Rack Fan Assembly IC697ACC721/724/744,6-1
Racks
J Standard, 4-1
VME Integrator Racks IC697CHS782/783, 5-1
Jumper, Blank Slot Interrupt, 80-1 Redundancy Communications Module, 72-1
Registration, ISO 9000, 1-1
Remote I/O Scanner, 65-1
RS-485 Port Isolator, 78-1
M S
Miniconverter kit, 79-1 Serial Comms Module, State Logic, 70-1
Slot, Blank, Interrupt Jumper, 80-1
Model 351 CPU Special Applications Modules
Port 1 Pin Assignments, RS-232 Signals, 19-4, 20-4, High Speed Counter IC697HSC700, 59-1
21-4, 22-4, 23-5, 24-5 State Logic Processor AD697SLP700, 60-1
Port 2 Pin Assignments, RS-485 Signals, 19-4, 20-4, Specifications, 2-1
21-4, 22-4, 23-5, 24-5
Standards, 2-1
Model 352 CPU State Logic Processor, 60-1
Port 1 Pin Assignments, RS-232 Signals, 19-4, 20-4,
21-4, 22-4, 23-5, 24-5
Port 2 Pin Assignments, RS-485 Signals, 19-4, 20-4,
V
21-4, 22-4, 23-5, 24-5 VME Integrator Racks, 5-1
Index-4 GFK-0600F
Index
VME Option Kit, 82-1

Voltage Expander Module, 57-1
W
Workstation Interface Modules PS/2, 74-1
Workstation InterfaceModulesXT/AT, 73-1
GFK-0600F Index-5
Looking for more information?
Visit us on the web at http://www.artisan-scientific.com for more information:
• Price Quotations • Drivers· Technical Specifications. Manuals and Documentation
Artisan Scientific is You~ Source for: Quality New and Certified-Used/Pre:-awned ECJuiflment
• Tens of Thousands of In-Stock Items • Fast Shipping and DelIve1y • Equipment Demos
• Hundreds of Manufacturers Supported • Leasing / Monthly Rentals • Consignment
Service Center Repairs InstraView Remote Inspection

Experienced Engineers and Technicians on staff in our Remotely inspect equipment before purchasing with our
State-of-the-art Full-Service In-House Service Center Facility Innovative InstraView-website at http://www.instraview.com
We bUy used equipment! We also offer credit for Buy-Backs and Trade-Ins
Sell your excess. underutilized. and idle used equipment. Contact one of our Customer Service Representatives todayl
Talk to a live person: 88EM38-S0URCE fB88-887-68721 I Contact us by email: sales@artisan-scientific.com I Visit our website: http://www.artisan-scientific.com

Ge Fanuc 90 70 PLC Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ge Fanuc 90 70 PLC Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Looking for more information?

Visit us on the web at http://www.artisan-scientific.com for more information:

Service Center Repairs InstraView Remote Inspection

Programmable Control Products

Data Sheet Manual

GFK-0600F November 1999

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three

The Canadian Department of Communications requires the following note to be published.

1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D,

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT

4. ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES SHOULD BE POPULATED WITH A

How to Find a Data Sheet in This Manual

To find the location of a data sheet in this manual:

(A). If you know the product name look for it in the

(B). Use the Index to search for a data sheet by either

For more information on finding data sheets in this

➪ How Data Sheets are Arranged in this Manual

➪ Look in the Table of Contents

Product Type ➪ PLC CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

➪ Look in the Index

Content of Data Sheets

Revisions to This Document

New and Revised Data Sheets

GFT-102H ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System) . . . . . . . . . . Allproducts . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Removed Data Sheets

GFK-0802C 32 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM914

We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

PLC Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

PLC CPUs ............................................................. 12-1

GFK-0600F Table of Contents ix

96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory

Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1

Coprocessor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1

Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) (IC697ADC701)

Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1

GFK-0600F Table of Contents xi

Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1

Special Applications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-1

Bus Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-1

Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-1

Programmer Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73-1

Accessories ............................................................ 75-1

GFK-0600F Table of Contents xiii

Or write to either of the above at:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ C-UL5 , CSA22.2, or Certificationby Underwriters Laboratories [C-UL5]

Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual 2-1

Lithium Metal = < 0.5 Grams Lithium

Section III – Physical/Chemical Characteristics

Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.) N/A Melting Point 180 _C

Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards

Section V – Reactivity Data

Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)

Section VI – Health Hazard Data

Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)